Rxi Support-Rev40 PDF

Notes
Index
Support
Tool Help
Precision RXi Support Tool Contents
Precision RXi Introduction

ABS/AEC/Fluoro Principles
Alignment Steps
Application Mode
Block Diagrams/Schematics
Calibrations & Adjustments
Tour Component Replacement Guide SAFETY
Customer Checks
Trouble- Backup
shooting Tips
Digital System Cal/Config
Generator LED Status
GenWare Service Software P1 Trouble-
LEDs shooting Guide
Image Quality
Error Code Installation Software Flash
Search Procedures
Network/DICOM Devices Configure
Positioner Codes (Config & Cal) Generator
Passwords
Power On/Off System Service
Dose Unit Receptor Setup Positioner
Converter System Interface (including GIM) Service
Table-top & Cassette Tray Removal Digital
Manuals Service
TeleService Positioner Service Software
Specialty
e-mail the
Tools Instructor
Created by Edward Singleton
Rev.40 :05 May 2010 | (c) GE Healthcare Support Tool by Edward Singleton
GE Healthcare
This information is rated
Class C
WARNING
The information in this course is FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. The information may not be current or appropriate for all systems. Before working on any equipment consult appropriate current service
documentation. Failure to follow procedures in current service documentation or misuse of the course information may result in equipment damage, personal injury or death.
MANUFACTURING MATERIAL
PROPERTY OF GE
FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY
NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT USE OR COPY
DISCLOSURE TO THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED
IMPORTANT: Please carefully review the terms of this End User License Agreement (EULA) prior to using any of the Materials included
on this CD-ROM. If you agree to the terms, please click on the box next to I Accept button below. If you do not agree to the terms, click on
the box next to the I Do Not Accept button below, in which case you will not be permitted to proceed and this Support Tool will close.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
General Electric Company
THE MATERIALS PROVIDED ON THIS CD-ROM ("THE MATERIALS") ARE PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT LAWS AND INTERNATIONAL TREATIES. BY INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING
THE MATERIALS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE MATERIALS.
1. Definitions
1.1. "Materials" means the copyrightable expression included on this CD-ROM.
2. Limited Copyright License
2.1. GE grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the Materials under GE's copyrights. You may not resell, sub-license, transfer or otherwise distribute the Materials to any other
party.
2.2. GE retains all other rights in the Materials, including without limitation, the right to reproduce the Materials, prepare derivative works based upon the Materials, publicly perform the Materials, and
publicly display the Materials, and to transfer, assign or grant license of any such rights.
3. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THE MATERIALS IS PROVIDED WITH ALL FAULTS, AND THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. GE MAKES NO
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED FROM ANY SOURCE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, ACCURACY OF INFORMATIONAL CONTENT OR THAT THE MATERIALS WILL FULFILL ANY OF YOUR PARTICULAR PURPOSES OR NEEDS.
4. Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT SHALL GE BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES,
COSTS OR CLAIMS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS EULA OR THE SUBJECT MATTER
HEREOF REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY OR
OTHERWISE. EVEN IF GE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ADDITION, THE AMOUNT OF GE'S LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY UNDER
CLAIMS BASED UPON, ARISING OUT OF, RESULTING FROM, OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THIS EULA OR ITS SUBJECT MATTER SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF
THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY RECEIVED BY GE FOR THE MATERIALS OR $500 U.S.D.
5. Governing Law
This EULA and performance hereunder shall be governed by, subject to, and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of New York, without regard to conflicts of laws principles.
THIS IS FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
I Accept I Do Not Accept
Notes
R e v is io n H is to r y
Revision Date Changes
Draft 1st July 2004 TTT Draft Version
0 27th October 2004 Official Release
1 30th March 2005 Added: Table-top Removal (p52-54): GIM LEDs (p134): Exposure Signals (p136): Laptop-CPU (p144): Tools (p236): Ion
Chamber Balance (p260): CR Cal (p263): Laptop as Dicom device (p301-303): CR Overview (p304-307):Downloads (p308):
Ghost (p309): TDI Bd (p350-352) Interconnect Schematics (p374-388): Updated: Digital PT (p5): GIM (p28):Fil Bd (p23): PT-
Coll (p29): PT-Group 23 (p32): PT-Interface Bd (p34): PT-Positioner (p41): Interface Signals (p77): DICOM (p87): Doc
Preferences (p88-91): GIM Bd (p132): Interface (p135): Prog seq (p138): Introduction (p140-141): Manuals (p143): Service
connect (p150 and p189): C-Echo (p210):Apps screen (p211): Dig Rad AEC (p221-222): AEC Cal (p266): Gen Sch added
Fuse/LEDs Menu (p314-352): Lat Sch (p361)
2 20th April 2005 Added: Gen Screens (p148-152): Touch-screen SW (p315): Updated: Passwords (p55): Gen Screens (p145-147):
3 2nd June 2005 Deleted: Schedule (p302-303): Added: mA Cal (p314): Updated: CPU Bd (p15): GIM LEDs (p134): CR Overview (p309)
4 8th July 2005 Updated: Contents (p1): Digital AEC Cal (p226-227): Digital AEC Principle (p264)
5 8th September 2005 Added: Photo Tour- Auto Coll Bd (p49): Installation Movies (p316): Updated: Contents (p1): Photo Tour OTS (p44-46):
Manuals (p144): Positioner Codes (p253-263): X-ray Centering on Cassette (p297)
6 7th October 2005 Deleted: Laptop IP Address (p306, 307): Added: Tomo Height Cal (p299): OTS Cal (p316-324): Auto Collimation (p325):
FM457 Sch (p405-406): Updated: II Cal (p225): Tools (p242): Simple DICOM (p306): Wall-stand Interface (p403-404)
7 7th November 2005 Added: Ghost (p313-314): Collimator Cal (p327-329): Sparkling Pixel (p331): Site Key (p332): Wall Bucky-OTS Sch (p414):
Updated: PT-AEC Bd (p19): PT-Gen IF Bd (p20): PT-OTS (p45): GenWare Screens (p157, 164-169): II Size (p226): AEC
Theory (p264,265): AEC Cal (p269-275): Ghost (p312): OTS Cal (p323, 325, 326): Wallstand (p330)
8 16th November Updated: CPU Bd (p15): Pos Cabinet (p32-34): Pos Console (p36): Pos Codes (p253-264): Cassette Tray Cal (p293): Iris Cal
2005 (p294): Motor Controller (p301): Ghost Restore (p314): OTS Cal (p319-326)
9 6th January 2006 Added: Infimed Logs (p83): Positioner LEDs (p334-335): Tab List (p336): Image send (p337): Status (p338-339): Updated:
Contents (p1): PT-Gen (p25): PT-Pos Cab (p31-32): PT-SFD (p43): Logs (p79): Networking (p84, p116-118): Port No.
(p89):Dig App (p140): TeleService screens(p197-204): Dose Calibrations (p230)
10 20th February 2006 Added: PT Positioner (p40):Touch-screen SW (p318): DVD Recorder (p342): Updated: PT CPU Bd (p15): PT Pos cab (p31):
PT Positioner (p37 & p43): DICOM (p90): Touch-screen Settings (p151): Touch-screen LFC (p317): Status SW (p341): Pos
Sch (p396-401)
11 1st March 2006 Added: PT OTS (p48):II Levelling (p348): Updated: PT-Gen (p13, 20, 25): PT-Pos (p36): PT OTS (p45,47): Cassette Tray
(p52): Config-Restore (p117): Pos Codes (p262-263): II Cal (p329): Tube Rotation (p326): Coll Cal (p331): ASSI LEDs (p338)
12 23rd March 2006 Updated: Updated (p83): Positioner LEDs (p337-338):
13 5th June 2006 Added: Receptor Time-out (p345): Wall Bucky schematic (p428): Updated: CPU Bd (p15): DSS Bd (p24): Control Bd (p25):
Pos Console (p36): Doc Pref (p94): Media Config (p107): Archive Config (p120): Auto Coll (p334)
14 14th June 2006 Updated: PT Pos (p40,44): PT OTS (p47): Code data (p208): AEC Cal (p276): Auto Coll (p334): II Levelling (p344): Sch
(p422)
15 19th July 2006 Added: PT-Pos Console (p37): P1 Log On (p347): Options (p353): Updated: Auto Coll Buttons (p36): Options (p348-352):
16 6th November Deleted: Install Movies (p322): Added: Subtract Button (p347): Restore Problem (p348): Updated: CPU (p15): Pos Console
2006 (p36): Gen Laptop (p149): Worklist CR (p225)
17 1st December 2006 Deleted: Schematics (p357 & 388): Added: Table-top Cal (p296-297): Receptor Settings (p351): Generator Schematics
(p359-360): Updated: Manuals (p148): AEC Schematics (p388-391)
Document Created by Edward Singleton: All changes made by Edward Singleton
Next
Notes
18 19th Dec 2006 Updated: Calibration link (p1): Circle mask cal (p238)
19 9th Feb 2007 Added: MAC Address (p353)
20 30th April 2007 Added: Safety (p126,128): Pos CPU Replace (p356): Generator Board Schematics (p396-398, 404-423)
21 9th July 2007 Deleted: Iris PF (p71): Added: Air Kerma (p196): Digital AEC cal (p237-244): Air Kerma Cal (p296-297): OTS Schematics
(p475-485): Updated: PT Gen (p23): PT-Pos (p40,43): PT-OTS (p49,50,52): Cassette Tray remove (p55,56): Iris-Spot
(p71,101): DAP (p194)
22 17th August 2007 Deleted: Digital AEC Cal (p234-235): Updated: PT-Pos (p45): Software Versions (system)- in bookmarks
23 10th October Added: Motor Controller Adj (p319): Updated: PT-Infimed (p6-7): Motor Controller Adj (p317-318): Options (p366-371):
2007
24 29th October 2007 Added: PT-Palpator (p46): Gen Board Replacement (p367): Updated: Photo Tour Positioner (p33,37,38,39,45)
25 15th September Deleted: Survey (p322): Updated: PT-Gen Console (p15): PT-Pos Cab (p32): Added: PT-OTS (p50): Network to Laptop
2008 (p326): Ghost 10 (p335-338): Injector (p373-374)
26 25th September Added: SW Flash 1S2 Bd (p372): Updated: PT-Gen Console (p15): Ghost 10 (p335-338): SW Flash 25S1 (p371)
2008
27 8th December Added: WS Left/Right Config (p351): Off-Line Knowledge (p377): Updated: Gen CPU Bd (p16):Positioner Console (p38): WS
2008 Config (p349): 25S3 Schematic (p463)
28 2nd February 2009 Deleted: Gen/Pos Sch (p475): Added: Power Input Bd (p27): Gen/Pos Interface (p146): DAP Cal (p296): Coll X-ray/Light
(p381): Alignment Steps (p382): Updated: Photo Tour (p31, 35, 38, 50, 56): X-ray Tube Align (p251): DAP cal (p294-295): Air
Kerma (p298): Ghost restore (p341): 23S3 LEDs (p361): Receptors (p373): Pos SW Update (p376):
29 11th February Added: PT-Monitors (p8): PT-Cross Division (p50): Customer Checks (p385): MyLearning (p386): Updated: PT-Home (p5):
2009 PT-Image Hd (p9): PT Pos (p39, 42, 49): PT-WS (p56): II Cal (p238): X-ray Coverage (p319): OTS Config (p355): Software
Flash (p378): Gen Replacement (p379): Sch OTS (p492)
30 17th February Deleted: IQ Data Sheet (p270-271): Added: Positioner Codes for TS (p270-271): Updated: Pos PT (p42, 47, 49): ASSI LEDs
2009 (p364)
31 22nd April 2009 Added: New Gen Apps Screens (p164,165): Remote Service (p389-393): Updated: Gen Apps Screens (p157-163, 166-167)
32 7th May 2009 Added: Patient Database (p394): Backup Management (p395): GDS Monitor (p396): Updated: PT Monitors (p8): Cassette
Tray Removal (p59): ABS Cal (p253): Pot Adj (p306, 308, 310, 312): ISD (p389-393)
33 8th October 2009 Deleted: Print Device (p115): Added: Dig Cal Restore (p84): Dig Cal Backup (p85): Query (p118): MPPS (p120): Component
Replacement (p385): Backup Management (p400): Software Versions (p402): Updated: Contents (p1): Disclaimer (p2): Room
I/F Bd (p29): Cassette Tray Removal (p59-61): Digital Service (p66-128): GIM Interface (p146): Genware Receptor
Inputs/Outputs (p178-179): II Adjustment (p243): Coll Blades Cal (p323): DC Motor Controllers (p334): Rad mA Cal (p351):
Customer Checks (p391): My Learning Credit (p392): Backup Management (p399)
34 21st October 2009 Added: RXi-e (p158): Updated: Interface (p91 & 147): Fluoro Iris (p256): OTS Config (p360-361): Safety Sch (p472):
35 5th November Updated: Room I/F Bd (p29): GIM LEDs (p31): Sending Images (p235, 237)
2009
36 18th November Added: PT-PDU (p17): Stepper Controllers (p60): Cassette Tray Wire (p67): Backup Overview (p403): Updated: PT-Positioner
2009 (p50): II Adjustment (p247): Camera Focus (p258):Troubleshooting Codes (p280)
37 6th January 2010 Added: PT Positioner (p41): PT OTS (p58): IAPDB LEDs (p410): DVD Drive (p411): IAPDB-MF (p412): P1 New (p413):
Updated: Pos Codes (p283-293): OTS Sch (p519):
Back Next
Notes
38 7th February 2010 Updated: PT-Positioner (p45): Pos TS Codes (p283): SFD Cal (p323): X-ray Centre on Cassette (p333): Comp Replacement
(p392):
39 1st April 2010 Added: PT-Pos cab (p38): PT-Positioner (p51, 54): Exposure Sw path (p418): Image Artifact (p419): Parallel/Serial Com
(p420): P1 TS Guide (p421, 422): Updated: PT-Generator (p31): PT-Pos Cab (p37): PT-Positioner (p42, 43, 50, 52): PT-
Console (p44, 45): PT-Palpator (p53): Pos Codes (p296): Pos Schematics (p496, 497)
40 5th May 2010 Added: PT-Speakers (p43): Cassette Tray Removal (p68): Updated: Cassette Tray Removal (p69-71): Safety (p146)
Back
Notes Ph Tour Menu
X-ray Tube,
Collimator &
DAP
OTS
Positioner
Cabinet
Positioner Image Head Generator
Generator Monitors
Control and SVGA
Console Splitter
Speaker/
Microphone
Power
Distribution
Unit (PDU)
Positioner
Click on Yellow Control Console
Boxes for more Infimed
Wall Stand Information Digital
Notes Ph Tour Menu
120Vac Input
Power Click HERE to view
older version of
Keyboard & Platinum One PC
Mouse
To Modem
Network
Connection to
Hospital
SVGA Video cable Isolation

to Reference Transformer
Monitor
Cable to CCD Graphics
Camera (Matrox) AGP
Serial IF to Board
Positioner (COM
5) & Generator Modem Board
(COM 4) for
LVPS Board
service
5 4 Serial Board
Ethernet to GIM
BNC Video to IAPDB (Image
VCR/DVD Acquisition Platinum One PC Tower
Recorder Processing
Display Board)
SVGA Video to
Primary Monitor Video Interface NEXT
Rear of Infimed Platinum One PC Board
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Click HERE to view

older version of
Platinum One PC
Matrox CPU Motherboard

AGP Board
Hard Drive
Modem Card
Low Voltage
Differential
Supply
(LVDS) Board
Serial Board
IAPDB
Click for
LED Information
Inside of Platinum One PC (shown

BACK Video Interface with left panel removed)
Board (VIB)
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Infimed Digital
PC
SVGA Splitter In-room Monitor Ceiling

(used to drive the Suspension for a single
control room and in- Flat Panel Monitor
room digital primary
monitors)
Image Quality
Issues SVGA Video SVGA Video In-room Monitor Cart
1. Check the SVGA Source for Source for for Flat Panel Monitor
Splitter connections. Primary Monitors Reference Monitor
2. Bypass the Splitter System can have either a
by plugging one of The Totoku monitor has been Monitor Cart or Ceiling
the monitor inputs replaced by a GDS monitor. Suspension for the exam
directly into the Double click on the ‘paper clip’ room monitors
Infimed Digital PC. for more details
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Iris Motor & CCD

CCD Sensor Interface
Encoder Focus Correction
Board Board
Adjustment Board
CCD
Camera
Photo-Diode CCD Camera

Board NDF Solenoid (cover removed
(blue coloured) (1.5mm Allen))
II Adjustment
Pots
II Power
Supply
Earth Magnetic Field

Correction Module Click for more
(ADCM) (S-Distortion) information on
II Power Supply the ADCM
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Photo Tour: Nical TV Chain

Nical Image System
There are two versions of the Nical Nical Low Resolution
Image Chain (Hi and Low resolution) 512 x 512 Image Chain
High Resolution
y 1024 x 1024 Pixel Resolution
y 64 Image temporary RAM Focus
Storage Adjustment
Ring
Low Resolution
y 512 x 512 LIH only NICAL 512 CCD Camera
Select Version Low-Resolution
The Control box

is located in the
bottom of the Interface Bd
Positioner
Cabinet
NICAL CCD
Camera Analog Bd
Control Box (N23_ANBI)
NICAL CCD Camera

Positioner Cabinet Control Box
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Photo Tour: Indico Generator

Upper
Assembly
Area
Inverter Control,
Filament & Rotor
Board Area
Power Input and Click on Yellow HV Tank &

Resonant Boxes for more Inverter Area
Inverter Area Information
Notes GEN Ph Tour Menu
Top Cover Room Interface

Fan (located down here) is Board
on for 20 mins at power on Hinges for
and for 20 minutes after a Board Access
rad or fluoro exposure
Dose Area
Product
(DAP) Board
Generator
CPU Board
TDI II Board
T2
Generator
Auxiliary
Transformer AEC Interface Generator
AEC Interface Board
Board
Board
Click on Yellow
Boxes for more
Information Top of Indico Generator Cabinet
Photo Tour: Indico Generator- HV

Power Mode
Inverters Tank & Inverter
Select Board
(used to de- 3 2 1 Inverters
select third (up to 3 depending on Generator
inverter below Power)
16kW 100kW & 80kW: 3 Inverters
exposure 65kW & 50kW: 2 Inverters Power Mode Select
power) 30kW: 1 Inverter Board (used to de-select
third inverter below 16kW
exposure power)
Stator Connection
Terminal Block
mA/mAs Jumper
(Measurement R Type Stator
Jacks) Main to Com
15 Ohms
Com to Shift (AUX) 30

to 40 Ohms
HV Transformer
Left Side of
Generator
Cabinet Inside of Inverter Module
Photo Tour: Indico Generator

kV & mA Feedback Inverter Gate Drive Signals
from HV Tank (to Inverter Blocks 1, 2 and 3)
Cables to
CPU Board Inverter Current Feedback Signals
(from Inverter Blocks 1, 2 and 3)
Control Board
Inverter Fault LEDs

Click on Yellow
Boxes for more
Information +35V Filament Drive
Supply (measure on fuse)
Small Filament
Auxiliary Board
Board (not
(generates Filament
interchangeable
Drive ±35V and
with Large)
±12V)
Large Filament Output
Board (not to Fil TX
interchangeable
with Small)
DIP Switches to select
Rotor Drive Parameters
Dual Speed Top: Tube 1
Starter Board Bottom: Tube 2
(DSS) (Rotor
Board) DS1:
Inverter Fault
DC Bus Normal: OFF
Fuses
Phase Shift Caps Two Right Caps
(Matched for Front of
for High Speed :
Varian R-Stator) All three caps for Generator
Low Speed Cabinet
Fluoro Inductor (used during

fluoro mode to change the
Resonant Frequency of the Resonant
Inverter thereby reducing kV Board
ripple)
Modulated Input from the 3
Resonant Inverter Assemblies
Assembly Resonant Inverter
Current (Ir) Sensor
Fluoro Contactor
(energized during Inverter Output to HV
Rad to bypass the Transformer Primary
Fluoro Inductor)
Resonant Capacitor
DC Bus 3Ø
Click on Yellow Rectifer DC Bus-
DC Bus Capacitors (DC Bus
Boxes for more Bridge measurement points are above
Information and below these caps)
Main
Contactor DC Bus+
Power Input
Input 3Ø Power Fuses Board
Line Connects into Fuses
(400Vac or
480Vac ±10% ONLY!)
Fan (mounted to the cabinet

Main Ground Point here...not shown in this
photo) is on for 20 mins at
T1 power on and for 20
Right Side of Auxiliary minutes after a rad or fluoro
Generator Cabinet Transformer exposure.
CD Drive
(used for
software load)
Serial Cable in COM4 goes

Generator On/
to GIM.
Off rocker
Used to send exposure
switch
information (kV, mA, mAs,
fluoro time) to the digital for
display on the image.
Generator Touch-screen J3: To Exposure

Control Console switch on
Positioner Console
J2: Communications with

generator (to J4 Generator
Interface Board)
Rear of Control Console
Click HERE to Click HERE for Click HERE for Generator On

see new touch- information about information on upgrading indicator LED
screen console new console to the new console
Notes Ph Tour Menu
ON Switch
OTS, Digital &

Emergency
Table Breakers
OFF Switch
Generator
Breaker
PDU Panel Inside of PDU Panel
PDU Panel
The PDU Panel is wall mounted and is installed by the hospital
electrician and is used to distribute three phase power to the
Generator and single phase power to the Table, Digital and OTS.
There are two versions of the PDU Panel, one for the Americas
(480Vac three phase input and 120Vac/230Vac outputs) and one
for Europe/Asia (400Vac three phase input and 230Vac output).
LED Status LED Status Battery: 3V (replace if <2.8V)

Rollover 1 Rollover 2 Measure between top of battery
Do not plug your
& TP21. R34 Rad mA Test Points:
Backs up Cal & Config Data Click for LED
laptop into J11. It Adjustment Click Here for
Click for replacement information
will damage your Pot more details
serial port. procedure
Transmit/receive
LEDs from
console
DS16: Flashing
(1Hz) CPU OK
Option
Proms
Generator
S/W
Transmit/receive
LED
LEDs from DAP Roll
DS 33: +5V
DS 36: +15V
DS40: SYNCH - Pulsed Fluoro DS 37: -15V
SW 1 Click to timing signal from Infimed. R88 Fluoro mA TP21
GND DS 38: +12V
see settings DS41: Exposure Switch not active. Adjustment Pot
DS42: Exposure Switch active. DS 39: -12V
TP1 Large TP3 Small

Fil Ref Fil Ref
1V=1A 1V=1A
TP2 kV Ref TP4 AEC

1V=15kV Ref Out
KV 1V=20kV
TP6 KV- TP8 KV+ (TP8-6)
TP7 mA Rad+ mA Rad 1V=100mA

TP10 mA Rad- (TP7-10)
TP9 AEC Ramp- TP12 AEC Ramp+
TP11 I Fluoro- TP14 I Fluoro+ I Fluoro 1V=2.5mA

(TP14-11)
TP15 ABC IN-
TP13 ABC IN+
TP24 SF F/B SF F/B 1V=1A
(TP24-25)
TP25 SF F/B
TP22 LF F/B LF F/B 1V=1A
TP23 LF F/B (TP22-23)
TP21 GND (not shown but

located at bottom right of
board)
J1
J2
J3
J4
AEC Reference
Adjustment Pots (on
the AEC Board
Underneath)
Click Here to
see Edge View
The AEC Short Time

Compensation Pots:
Channel 1 Channel 1: R91
Channel 2: R92
Channel 3: R93
Channel 4: R94
Channel 2
R94
R4
Channel 3
Channel 4
Overall Adjustment
R93
Channel 4 R3
Channel 3
Overall Adjustment
R92
R2
Channel 2
Overall Adjustment
R91
R1
Channel 1
Overall Adjustment
AEC Interface
Board
AEC Board
The AEC Short Time

Compensation Pots:
Channel 1: R91
Channel 2: R92
Channel 3: R93
Channel 4: R94
R4
R94 Channel 4
Overall
Adjustment
R93
R3
Channel 3
Overall
R92 Adjustment
R2
Channel 2
R91
Overall
Adjustment
R1
Channel 1
Overall
Adjustment
Click Here for

Click Here to
Jumper
see Edge View
settings
LED Status
Rollover
TP10 Phototimer Stop

Standby= HI (~5
Vdc)(NO PTSTOP)-
TP8-9 ABS from AEC Bd.
Low (0 Vdc) = Stop PT
DS1: ON= Mains exposure
Power On
J4: Communications Fuse F6

to Generator Touch-
screen Console
Lock Out
Service Switch
Service On/Off
Switches
Fuses F1 to F5
are under these 123
black covers. Jumper
Click HERE to Position (2-3)
see schematic
+5V,±12V, ±15V,±24V Power Supply Test Points

LED Status
Rollover
JW1 (for DAP Chamber 1)
Jumper Pins 1-2 for Scanditronix-
Wellhöfer DAP chambers.
Jumper Pins 2-3 for all other DAP

chambers.
Use JW2 for DAP Chamber 2 Input from DAP

Chamber 2
Input from DAP DS3 JW1 JW2
Chamber 1 DS2
Chan 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
Chan 2
To CPU
Board
+24V from Room

Interface Board
DS1
LED Status
Rollover
Note:
If one of the
Filament Boards
fails exposures can
D1: ±12V/SS Fault
be made using the
other filament. D2: CNT CTR CLSD D29: +12V
Even fluoro will D3: SS OK D30: -12V
switch over to the D31: ±35V
Large Filament if
the Small fails.
F2, F1
+35V and -35V
Filament Inverter
Supply
D39: Tube 2 Selected
The Filament D42: Thermal Cut Off Open
boards are not D36: Rad Mode
interchangeable D37: Fan On
Jumper indicates
which board is
Small and Large
Auxiliary
J5 Plugs: Output to Filament Roll Over for Board
Transformers in HV Tank: Troubleshooting Tip
Small Filament Board Large Filament Board

LED Status
Rollover
DIP Switches for
EPROM (one Tube 1 and Tube 2
version for 400Vac Used to set:
line voltage and High & low speed
another for 480Vac) start & run voltages
Brake time & brake
Part No 400V 480V voltages for high
MPi 733159 735896 speed
RXi 739311 739313 Boost Time
increments (0 to
The 480V EPROM provides 700ms)
slightly narrower pulses from
the DSS inverter so that the Click for more
stator current will be the same details on the DIP
with the higher bus voltage Switch settings
derived from the 480Vac line.
DS1: Inverter
K5, K6 Current
Fault LED
Sensing Relays
Current
Sensing Device Capacitors values are
set for Varian R Stator
F1, F2 DC Bus Two 12.5uF caps in
Fuses series to make a total of
6uF for high speed.
Dual Speed The 6uF is in parallel with
Starter Board the 25uF cap to make a
(DSS) (Rotor 25uF 12.5uF 12.5uF total of 31uF for the low
Board) speed.
LED Status
Inverter Current
Rollover
Feedback Signals
R215: KV Adjust J13 HV primary Inverter Gate Drive Signals (from Inverter
Roll Over Current Sense (to Inverter Blocks 1, 2 and 3) Blocks 1, 2 and 3)
1 2 3
1
R216 Rad mA
Adjustment
2
R212 Fluoro mA
Adjustment
D69: KV: kV across the

Anode & Cathode >160kV
D80: Inv3
D70: Ir: Primary Current to D81: Inv2
HV Transformer Overcurrent
D82: Inv1
D71: CI: Cathode Overcurrent
Inverter
Over
current
D72: AI: Anode Over current
Fault Leds
LED Status
Rollover
Measurement Point
DC Bus-
K5 Main
Contactor
Measurement Point
DC Bus+
D2: ON=DC BUS OK
D9: ON=+12V OK
Input 3Ø Power Fuses
Line Connects into K1: Soft Start Relay
Fuses
(400Vac or K2: Switches power to
480Vac ±10% ONLY!) T1 Transformer
Main Ground
Neutral Connection
Point
(neutral not required)
F1: fuse
T1 Power Supply
for T1
Auxiliary Transformer
LED Status
Rollover
Measurement Point
DC Bus-
K5 Main
Contactor
Measurement Point
DC Bus+
DS1: ON=DC BUS OK
Input 3Ø Power
DS3: ON=Tube 2 select
Fuses (behind
DS4: ON= K5 Contactor ON
cover)
DS6: ON=K2 relay OK
Line Connects into
DS7: ON=K1 relay Soft Start OK
Fuses
DS2: ON=+12V OK
(400Vac or
F1 F2
480Vac ±10%
DS5: ON=Fan ON (on for 20
ONLY!)
minutes after power on &
stays on for 20 minutes
F4: fuse after exposure)
for T2
K3 K1: Soft Start Relay:
K4 Switches 2 phases for
DC Bus generation
K2: Switches power to

F1: fuse T1 Transformer
for T1
Neutral Connection
(neutral not required)
LED Status
Rollover
TB7: 0V TB8 DS1: TB9 TB10 TB7 to TB10
Return 24Vdc TB11 Power ON 110Vac 220Vac Voltage Source
Terminal Blocks-
can be used as a
voltage source
for dry relay
contacts
Terminal block
signals are used
to drive external
devices such as
Room Lights or
Wall Bucky
(Outputs)
and to receive
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 (includes inputs from
x-ray warning devices such as
light & room Room Door
door interlock) Switch (Inputs).
Signals are
enabled per
receptor using
Receptor Setup in
Genware
TB6: MPi: Connection for in-room Click HERE
TB5: Output to II Power exposure foot-switch. for details
Supply (pins 2-10) to change RXi: In-room exposure foot-switch is
magnification modes (RXi) connected to AMP5 on 25S3 - not here.
LED Status
Rollover
J7: signals from Digital via GIM
1-2 ABS (from P20 GIM)
3-4 PF Synch (from P18 GIM) J6 to Positioner
J7
DS2 DS1
DS3
1
J1,2,3 from GIM
(signals from
2 Digital)
E- nearest board
F F- top
C- nearest board
J4 D D- top
J4 (A-F) to GIM
B (signals to Digital)
A- nearest board
B- top
Notes Menu POS CAB Ph Tour Menu
RXi
Interface LEDs LEDs 1 (left) to 4 (right)

Click for more Information Click
Ethernet from back
of Infimed PC
P1 has 8
Ports
Serial Cable to COM4
P15
Inputs
Inputs fromfrom Generator Console.
Generator
Generator P1 Used to send exposure
Click for more P16
information (kV, mA,
Information
mAs, fluoro time) to the
J1 digital for display on the
P17 image.
CAN 1
J2 Pulsed Fluoro & Cine Signals

CAN 2 To Generator
P18 Roll Over
Roll Over
Outputs to Generator
Click for more
Information P2 ABS Signals
P20
P19 To Generator
P2 has Roll Over
2 Ports Roll Over
P3
P3 has
2 Ports
P21
P4 P4
Top: Camera
Power (Not
Used)
Bottom: P9
Remote Power
(Not used)
GIM Board
Power Supply
GIM Assembly From Power Supply
White:-12V Black: 0V Black: 0V Red:+5V Red:+5V Yellow:+12V
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Access to Lamp
X-ray Tube:
is by removing
Varian A292
the rear cover
Collimator
Ralco R302A (no
iris) or
Ralco R503A (iris)
Rear of Collimator
Dose Area
Product (DAP)
Chamber (option)
Tube, Collimator and DAP Lamp is behind

this cover
Collimator Lamp For Light Field to X-ray
Fuses are in the Field adjustment click on Lamp is a 24V
Positioner Cabinet- Calibrations then select 150W FCS halogen
22 Rack (22TR2 Light to X-ray Field
F15 and F16) Adjustment in bookmarks Collimator with rear cover removed
Notes Ph Tour Menu
CPU and ASSI

Boards (behind the
Interface Board) Interface Board
Group 25 Group 25
Stepper Motor Rack

Group 24
Click on the Yellow

Boxes to go to the DC Motor Control Rack
Group 23
next Level
Speaker/Microphone
Power Supply
Power Input Rack

Group 22
Optional 277Vac to
Generator Interface 230Vac Input Voltage
Module (GIM) Transformer (22TR3)
Digital Isolation
Positioner Cabinet Transformer
Notes POS CAB Ph Tour Menu
ROLL for
Overview
24S7 SID & II
24S1 Power 24S2 Lateral 24S5 Power Supply Elevate Drive 24S8 Longitudinal
24S3 Fixed (uses relay to
Supply Shutters Supply for 24S6, S7 Cassette Tray
Mask Drive select drive
Supply for Drive and S8 Drive
24S2, S3 and movement- these
S4 movements cannot
be driven together)
24S9
Backplane
Group 24:
Bd
Stepper
Motor Rack
Relay to select between SID
24S4 Grid 24S6 Cassette
or II Elevate Drive from 24S7
Drive Tray In/Out Drive
Green LED: ON=OK Troubleshooting Tip
Yellow LED (TER): normally OFF The modules S2, S3 & S4 are fully interchangeable so are
Red LED (FAULT): ON=FAIL S6, S7 & S8- no switches or jumpers need to be changed.
Click for Do not move modules from left Click for
details to right across 24S5 central divide. details
23S9 Backplane Bd
contains fuses which 23S9OPZ Relay Bd to 23S6 Table-top
Click for newer version 23S8
supply power to select between Lateral & Palpator
showing electrical brake Collimator
each of the 4 Motor Longitudinal Table-top Drives
connectors (AMP 3 & 4) Drives (Lat ,
Controllers (S1-S4) or Tube Stand Drive (top pot used to limit
for SFD & Tube Stand Long & Iris)
Roll Over from 23S3 palpator drive current)
LEDs
OK: ON
i.n.: OFF
o.c.: OFF
s.t.: OFF
m.d.: OFF
Yellow:
ON when
OK
max collimator
i.n.
o.c P.A. blades not
s.t. OK driving
m.d.
Green: ON
during
motor drive
23S1 Table 23S2 Table 23S3 Longitudinal 23S4 23S5 Back EMF Red:
Tilt Drive Elevate Drive Table-top & Tube SFD Brake for S1-S4 ON=Fault
Stand Drive Drive Movements
Troubleshooting Tip (uses relay to select LEDs
Rollover for more information drive movement- these max: dimly lit
about interchangeability of movements cannot be Group 23: DC Motor P.A.: OFF
Motor Controllers driven together) Control Rack O.K.: ON
AMP 3 to coil AMP 4 to coil of

of relay 3K3 relay 3K4
(connects (connects brake
brake resistor resistor 3R4
3R3 across across SFD
Tube Stand Motor 3MT4
Motor 3MT3 winding)
winding) Click
Click
Relay is used to make sure Tube Stand

Group 23: DC motor brake resistor is not disabled
Motor Control when Longitudinal table-top movement
Rack is enabled (TS & Long Table-top share
the same motor driver)
Click for Fuse

Listing Move Cable to match
incoming Voltage level,
Table 220, 230 or 240Vac
Collimator
22TR1 22FILTRO AC Lamp Fuses
22K1 Contactor Filter F15, F16
Transformer
22TR1
Fuses
F5-10
22TR1
Fuses
F11-14
22TR2
Fuses
Positioner Input Power F1-8
Group 22: Power Input 220-240Vac. 22TR2
22TR2
Note: If 277Vac is used, Transformer
Fuses
Optional Transformer
F15-28
(22TR3)is required to step
down to 230Vac
Click for LED

information
SW2: Click to see
switch functions
SW1: Switch Function

1- ON for Setup Mode, which allows
cal and config from Console Output
2- ON for Open Loop Mode (allows LEDs
movement drive without Pot
feedback)
Click for more info on Open
Loop Mode
3- ON disables all ASSI Bd
movements (Group 24 rack drives)
4- OFF if optional ceiling collision
photo-sensor is installed.
ON if no sensor is installed
ON
OFF Input
1 2 3 4 LEDs
OTS Park Switch can
be connected here
SC2 8-9
Safety Switch
Override Switch
25S3 Interface Board
25S1 CPU Board
25S2 ASSI
Board
ASSI Board
This board controls all
the Stepper Motor drives
in the Group 24 rack
Input
LEDs
Click for ASSI
Calibration &
board LED
Configuration Data is
information
Output stored on this device
LEDs
Fibre Optic
Serial Port (behind communication to
ribbon cable) Control Console
used for Service Laptop
connection and Serial Port (behind
Positioner Cal/Config ribbon cable)
Backup used to Load Positioner
Software
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Click on Yellow
Boxes for next
level Speaker/
Tube Angle Microphone
Display
Switch 3FC13
Tube Stand behind tube arm
Table Frame
Control Console
SFD (rear)
SFD Console SFD (top)
Buttons (including
optional Joystick)
Cassette Tray
In Room
Speaker
Palpator
SFD Foot Step

(underside)
Foot
Switch
Table Base Safety Switches

3FC4SX
Precision RXi Positioner & 3FC4DX
Notes POS CAB POS Ph Tour Menu
In Room Speaker Control Room

Microphone
Control Room
Speaker
Control Console
Speakers and
In Room Speaker and Microphone Power
Control Room Supply
Console Speaker
Volume Controls
Support Stand at back of Table
Fuses (pull
out holder)
Positioner Cabinet
Notes POS Ph Tour Menu
AMP 5 on Interface
Board 25S3 in
Positioner Cabinet
Base view of SFD
showing Camera/II
Collision Safety
Switches 3FC4SX
and 3FC4DX
Connector box Positioner Cabinet

for Foot-switch
Record and Fluoro

X-ray Foot-switch
Base view of SFD
Record and Fluoro
X-ray Foot-switch
Menu
Click on a
selection box
below to see
button functions
Movements
Display
Collimator &
II
Exposure &
Technique
selection
Tomo
Click HERE to see
inside the console Positioner Console Nical
1S1 Console Second Prep/Expose

Keyboard switch cable to J3 on
back on Generator
Touch-screen console
(used for Tube warm-up &
Filament Ht Cal)
Prep/Expose
Switch
CP3: Prep/
Expose Switch
Connector
Parallel port CP2: Em Off

connection Sw Connector
used to flash
software to the
Console CPU CP1: Fluoro
Board Foot-switch
Connector
1S2
Console AMP1: Prep,
CPU Board Expose, Fluoro &
Em Off signals to
Fibre Optic Cable to CN6: Power from 22TR2 AMP4 25S3 Board
CPU Board 25S1 in Fuses 27 & 28.
Positioner Cabinet Positioner Console Boards 21Vac between wires.
II Elevate Limit Switches

LEDs on ASSI Bd (25S2) indicate 3MT16
3MT16 3MT13 3MT14 II Elevate
when switches are made. II Elevate Undertable
3FC19 (Upper) L33 OFF SW made 3TB13 Fixed Mask Motor Motor
Motor Lateral
3FC20 (Lower) L36 ON SW made (travel 3TB14 Shutters Motor
6cm)
3TB16
3MT12
3TB11 Longitudinal
Cassette
Carriage
Motor
Underside of
Longitudinal
Cassette
Carriage
CCD Camera
Photo-Diode Image 3MT11 3TB15 3MT15 3TB12

Board Intensifier (II) Cassette Tray Grid Motor
In/Out Motor
Underside of SFD Device Underside of Table
3MT1
Table Tilt
3FC2 Table
Elevate
Limit
Switch
3FC1 Table
Tilt Limit
Switch
3MT2 Table
Elevate Table Base:
Side View
3P2 Table Table base for

Elevate Pot
3P1 Table Tilt Elevating Positioner
Pot 3TB2
Table Base: Roll Over for view of Non
Elevating Table base
Rear View
Photo Tour: Positioner

3FC21
Cassette Carriage
Longitudinal
3S3 Board behind centred Switch
3S3 Board
this cover (remove (easiest place to
(attached to
with 4 Allens access this
rear of SFD)
(2.5mm)) switch)
Click HERE for

more information
on 3S3 Board
Rear of Table/SFD shown

Rear of Table/SFD with cover removed
shown with cover on
3PT11 Click for

Longitudinal Pot close-
Photo Tour: Positioner
Cassette Size Pot up
Underside of
Cassette Tray
Longitudinal
Cassette
Holders
3PT10
Lateral
Cassette
Size Pot Underside of SFD Device
Click for Pot without II/CCD Camera
close-up Installed showing base of
Cassette Tray Lateral Cassette
Holders
Cassette Tray
SFD Scan Motor 3MT4

behind this cover
SFD Scan Pot 3PT4
Click
behind this cover
Click
Longitudinal Table-
top Motor 3MT17
and Long Table-top
Pot 3PT17
Click
Lateral Table-top Motor

3MT10 Note: Longitudinal table-top
and Limit Switches movement makes a slight groaning
3FC11 and 3FC12 are noise for a few seconds when the
located here movement stops. This is normal for
Click this movement.
Newer systems have an

electrical brake on motor 3MT4.
The brake consists of Resistor
3P4: SFD 3R4 connected across the
Scan Pot motor winding using Relay 3K4.
Resistor & Relay are located
inside this box.
Brake Resistor
3R4 and Brake
relay 3K4
3MT4: SFD inside box.
Scan Motor Relay is
energized during
SFD movement
to remove brake
resistor from
across motor
winding.
Table-top 3MT4: SFD Scan Motor
Click on Yellow
Boxes for next 3P3 Tube Stand
level 3TB6
Pot
3MT5 SID
Motor
and 3TB5
Tube Stand
Top of Tube Arm (view from foot
3FC5 SID Switch side)
LED L35 on ASSI Bd 3MT6 Palpator 3FC6 behind
(25S2) is OFF when Motor cover on rear of
switch is actuated (SID
display module
in lowest position)
3TB3 TS Motor 3FC8 behind

Terminal Strip this cover
3MT3 Tube Stand Motor
Newer systems have an

electrical brake (resistor
3R3 connected across
the motor winding using
relay 3K3) on 3MT3.
Click to see
Rear View of Tube Stand Palpator Palpator
Display Panel 3FC8: Palpator Interlock

Switch- when made
blocks the following
movements:
Tube Stand Angle
Tube Stand Scan
Table-top
Longitudinal
Table-top Lateral
Does not block the
downward travel of the
palpator itself.
Palpator Palpator Arm
Palpator being
Manual Palpator Release Bolt: moved using a
used to move Palpator off patient 17mm Wrench
during a power failure
Palpator : Back View

Palpator : Back View
3FC6: Palpator Upper Readout

Limit- no tomo if not in adjustment
upper limit board
Tube Stand Angle
Readout Cone
Compressor
Table Tilt Angle

Readout
Display Panel Note there is no switch

Click for board
3FC7 on the version of
adjustment procedure
the palaptor used on the
RXi.
3FC7 was the cone in/out
Rear View of Display Panel
of arm detector switch.
3FC21
Cassette Carriage Click for
Longitudinal centred Switch Access 3FC21 switch from more
-this switch has to be made for behind -near 3S3 board information
tray to drive fully out if cross Click to see on Cross
division option is enabled. Roll for close Division
up view
3FC15
Cassette Carriage Longitudinal
Sensor -used to position carriage
for cross division exposure.
Roll for close

up view 3FC16
Undertable
3FC18 Lateral Shutter
3FC17 3FC14 Grid Sensor Sensor
Fixed Mask Cassette Tray Back of SFD
Sensor In/Out Sensor
Photo Sensors Fixed (U-shaped)

LEDs on ASSI Bd (25S2) indicate if Shutter (Option)
the sensors are functioning correctly:
LEDs are OFF if the sensor beam is Undertable
Grid
interrupted and ON otherwise. Lateral Shutters
Sensor LED Ion Chamber

3FC14 L32 (under grid).
3FC15 L34 Roll for view
3FC16 L29
COMET ion chamber that have a metallic
3FC17 L30 NEXT
outer shell need to be isolated from
3FC18 L31 ground to avoid erratic AEC exposures. SFD
3FC21 L37 ON = Switch made
Cross Division (option)
Up to 6cm travel Cassette Carriage Cross Division

in this direction (the cassette tray When a cross division button is pressed
from center drives in and out on
rails inside the Cross Division
carriage) Buttons on
Positioner Console
the Fixed Mask drives into the field and

centers the 9cm or 12cm opening in the x-
ray field (depending on cassette size).
During Prep the Cassette Carriage moves
in the longitudinal foot direction and the
cassette tray drives into the field.
Front of SFD Fixed Mask
Cassette Carriage drives 6cm (when 24cm

cassette inserted) from center to the foot end
then to head end (total travel is 12cm) during a 9cm opening
cross division exposure sequence.
When a 18cm cassette is inserted the cassette
12cm opening
carriage drives 4.5cm in the foot and head
directions.
Fixed Mask
12cm opening is in the field when the Cross Division available
longitudinal dimension of the cassette is 24cm. on 18x24, 24x18, 24x24,
9cm opening is in the field when the 24x30 (Long x Lateral) SFD
longitudinal dimension of the cassette is 18cm. cassettes
Notes Ph Tour Menu
Click on Yellow
Boxes for next
level
Carriage
Assembly
Longitudinal
Rails
Collimator
and Control
Console
Tube Angulation
Assembly
OTS (shows Tube Angulation
and Tube Rotation Pots)
Notes OTS Ph Tour Menu
Tube Angle and

SID Readouts
Lock
Controls
Field Size
readouts
Collimator with Front Cover
Collimator removed showing Collimator
Controls Board FM457-1
Automatic
Collimator LEDs
Click for more info.
and Control
Panel
Collimator Lamp Inside of Control

Fuse is on the Auto Panel
Collimation Board
FM457-2
Control Panel
Board (FM 562)
Tube Angle and

SID Readouts
Lock
Controls
Manual Collimator
and Control Panel
Inside of Control
Panel
Control Panel
Board (FM 511)
Lateral OTS Park

Switch behind cover Click on Yellow
Click to see Roll Over Cable Boxes for next
Automatic Collimation
to see Reel level
Bd (FM 457-2)
in a metal housing behind
this cover
Only on Systems with an
Automatic Collimator
OTS Transformer
Spring
(behind Brakes
Assembly..may
Driver Board)
need to replace
all 8 on a new
install
Brakes Driver
Board (PCB 453B) SID Pot
behind this cover
Under side of
OTS Carriage
Brakes
Driver Board
(FM 453B or
PCB528-GE)
Roll Over for
View of Top of
Carriage
Roll Over for

OTS Carriage View of Safety
Front of OTS Carriage Lock Bolt
Check the wiring on the input

of the OTS transformer
OTS matches the supply
Transformer F1: 3.15A 0
F1
115
0 0
115Vac 115
Wiring for 115Vac Input
F1: 1.6A 0 0
F2 F3
115
0
Brakes Driver 230Vac 115
Board FM453B
Wiring for 230Vac Input
Front of OTS Carriage showing OTS Transformer

F1: OTS Power Fuse (Locks and
Shown with Brakes Driver Board Collimator)
FM453B. Click HERE to see F2: Power for Locks
newer layout with Brakes Driver F3: Power to Collimator including Auto
PCB 528-GE Collimator Board (FM457-2)
Longitudinal 180cm SID 100cm SID OTS Long

Four Switches: Actuator
Brake Actuator Park Actuator
Function (from ceiling to floor):
OTS Park Switch (one of two Long
itudi
in series- the other is the nal R
a il
Lateral SW on OTS carriage)
180cm SID Switch
100cm SID Switch
Zone Rail Switch
Lateral Bridge Rail

Lateral Bridge Rail
Zone Rail, located on
CEILING OTS Rails longitudinal rail:
Runs from
l R a il
Actuator Plate approximately 80cm to

200cm SID
u d in a
L o n g it
OTS Rail Switches Actuator Plate

Notes Ph Tour Menu
Grid Oscillating
Motor
Bucky Tray
TB1 accessible
under here
Click to see
If Wall Bucky grid
oscillates all the time
cut the jumper JW11
Wall Bucky (because WS is usually
configured to Bucky 2
outputs) on the
Generator Room Close up View of Bucky Grid
Interface board. Oscillating Mechanism
Photo Tour: OTS- Brakes Driver Board

Brakes Driver Board
Two versions of this board. Controls the
LD1 Vertical, Longitudinal Carriage, Lateral
ON = Power OK Carriage, Tube Angulation and Tube/
Collimator swing brakes.
Brakes Driver Board FM453B

Brakes Driver Board PCB 528-GE
OTS Collimator
Lamp Fuse
LED
ON = Power OK
JP2
Jumper for
Automatic
Collimation
Service Mode
Automatic Collimation Board FM457-2
Notes
Modules 24S2, S3 and S4 Fuse

are fully interchangeable so
are 24S6, S7 and S8 but do
not exchange S2, S3 or S4
with S6, S7 or S8.
No switches or jumpers
need to be changed when
swapping modules.
Check DIP Switch settings,

they can be accidentally
changed when grabbing the
module during removal.
DIP Switches
DIP 24S2, 24S3, DIP 24S6, 24S7, SW3 if set to OFF

SW 24S4 SW 24S8 will cause noisy
motor operation.
1 OFF 1 ON
6A 6.7A
2 OFF 2 ON
3 ON 3 ON Equalisation
Damping
4 ON 4 OFF
3200 Steps/
5 ON 2000 Steps/ 5 ON
Revolution
6 OFF Revolution 6 ON
Notes
Procedure Cassette Tray SFD Top Cover

1. Before starting do the following: Out
Drive the lateral table-top all the way

back
Drive the table elevate all the way up (if
elevating table)
Remove the top cover of the SFD
Drive the SFD to the right of the table
base (makes it easier to access the
cassette tray cable clamp later) Slide out
Drive II down (select SFD receptor) cover
and drive out cassette tray
Fig. 1 Setup
Note: If the Cassette Carriage is not
centered longitudinally so the cassette Cassette Remove three
tray will not drive out use TeleService, Carriage Frame screws along each
enter Setup Mode and select Code 066, side then slide
Value 002 to center the cassette carriage. cover forward
Use the SFD Scanning buttons on the

SFD console to drive the cassette
carriage frame in the longitudinal
direction. Drive it until it is centered, so
that the cassette tray can be removed
without hitting the front cover of the SFD SFD Front
(see Fig. 2). Do not exit service mode. Cover
Fig. 2 Centering Cassette Tray Frame

Notes
Procedure
2. Power off table using table breaker on PDU.

End Stop
3. Power off the rest of the system then
perform LOTO.
4. Remove the Cassette Tray end-stop (3mm

Allen- top bolt) (Fig. 3).
5. Mark the position of the Angle bar located on

the deck of the SFD (Fig. 4).
Fig. 3 Removing the End Stop
Angle Bar
Fig. 4 Marking the Angle Bar Location

Notes
Procedure
6. Remove the Angle Bar using a 7mm Nut Driver or Cable Clamp
socket (2 bolts).
7. Pull out the cassette tray by hand and remove the
countersunk bolt located on the rear left side of the tray
(4mm Allen) (see Fig. 5). This bolt connects the cassette
tray to the drive chain.
8. Remove the covers covering the Image Intensifier in
order to access the cassette tray cable clamp bolts.
9. On the underside of the SFD (rear right side with the
table horizontal) (see Fig. 6) unscrew the two bolts
holding the cable clamp (2.5mm Allen) (see Fig. 7).
Fig. 6 Underside of SFD

showing location of Cassette
Chain Tray cable clamp
Connection
Bolt
Two Bolts
holding the
Cassette Tray Cable Clamp
Fig. 5 Removing the Fig. 7 Location of Cassette

Chain connection bolt Tray cable clamp
Notes
Procedure
10. Slowly remove the cassette tray and flip upside
down onto the table-top. The cable is still
connected but the tray can come out far enough to
allow access to the potentiometers (see Fig. 8).
To re-install follow these steps:
1. Slide Cassette Tray back in. Cable still

2. Reattach the cassette tray to the connected
chain assembly
3. Connect cable clamp at back of SFD
Click HERE to see which
way the clamp goes
4. Put back angle bar

5. Put back end stop
6. Push cassette tray in and out by
hand and look to see if the cable rolls
nicely as the tray moves in and out.
7. Put cover on top of II (otherwise the
under-table shutters can hit into the
mylar cover hanging down).
Fig. 8 Cassette Tray on the table-top but

still electrically connected
Notes
WARNING: The table-top

Remove this flexible
is heavy, two people are
cover- include the end
needed to remove it!
bracket. Remove the
two bolts that attach it
Removing the Table Top
to the table frame
1. If the Positioner has Longitudinal Table-top drive then turn
off this feature in the Positioner Configuration.
Using either Teleservice or Console Service Mode select
Code 20 and set value to 005 (make a note of original value).
Exit Service mode.
Fig. 1 Cover Removal 2. Tilt the table to the horizontal position. Drive the table top
lateral movement to the outer stop.
3. Power off the system and perform LOTO.
Disconnect Remove cover If the Positioner has Longitudinal Table-top drive then
plastic chain (2.5mm Allens) perform steps 4 to 6. If no Longitudinal drive go to step 7.
4. Remove the flexible plastic cover (remove it so that the end

bracket is included) at the Longitudinal Motor drive end of the
table (see Fig.1). Careful it is spring loaded and will fly back.
Tape it back so it doesn't get damaged.
5. Remove cover over motor connection assembly and

disconnect the last link in the black plastic chain so it is not
connected to the main positioner assembly (see Fig.2)
NEXT
Fig. 2 Cover Removal
Notes

6. Disconnect the Longitudinal motor wires (see
Fig.3).
Teflon Strip
7. Remove Teflon strip from the head and foot ends
(see Figs.3 and 4) (2mm Allen).
8. At the Lateral motor drive end of the table

disconnect the ground strap and remove the vertical
end stop plate connected to the end of the table top
rail (5mm Allen) (see Fig.4).
Ground Strap
and End-stop
Plate
Fig. 3 Longitudinal
Motor Connections
Teflon Strip
covers this area
Fig. 4 Cover Removal
BACK NEXT
Notes

9. Remove the cover over the Lateral table-top motor
Lateral Table- assembly
top motor wires
10. Disconnect the Lateral Table-top motor wires (see
Fig.5) Black-1; Red-2.
11. Disconnect the motor assembly (three 4mm Allens (see

Fig.5).
Lateral Table-top 12. Gently slide the table-top out laterally and place on the
Motor Assembly floor (see Fig.6).
WARNING: The table-top

Fig. 5 Lateral Table-top Motor is heavy, two people are
needed to remove it!
Lateral Table-
Installing the Table Top top switches
1. When installing the table-top be very careful
not to damage the Lateral Switches (see Fig.7). Slide off the table-
top
2. Reverse the removal procedure and don't
forget to set the Longitudinal Table-top
Configuration in service mode back to the
original setting.
Fig. 7 Lateral Switches
BACK
Fig. 6 Slide off Table-top
Notes
Click for Cable Part

replacement Number:
1L. Left cable starts 1R. Right cable starts 511866
procedure
here attached to a here attached to a
spring spring
4R. Cable
wraps around
3L. Cable goes this pulley.
around pulley.
4L. Cable
ends here.
2R. Cable goes

through bottom
‘notch’ on pulley
5R. Cable
then wraps fully
ends here with
once around the
a loop.
pulley before
2L. Cable goes exiting at
through top bottom left.
‘notch’ on pulley
Click for
then wraps fully
photo
once around the
pulley before
exiting at top
right.
Click for 3R. Cable goes
photo around pulley.
Notes
Precision RXi System Passwords
Digital System Generator
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
How to Log in as another User
CLEAR
1. Log off by pressing the WINDOWS key then ****
select START > SHUTDOWN. 1 2 3 OK
2. The 'Shut down Windows' dialog box
appears select 'Log off xxxx" from the drop- 4 5 6 CANCEL
down menu (xxxx represents the current user
name). 7 8 9
3. Click on OK and immediately press and hold
the LEFT SHIFT key (this will override the 0
Applications mode automatic login).
4. When the Login box appears enter one of Default Factory Password 1973
the following: (note: this can be changed)
To log in as an Administrator
User name: administrator Positioner
Password: PlatinumOne
How to Enter Service Mode
To log in as Service- Service Mode
User name: serviceapp 1. Enter GMM TeleService
Password: orion 2. Select Serial line to connect
3. Select Setup
To log in as an Operator- Applications Mode 4. Enter:
(no password required) Password: 123 (to allow system cal/config
User name: operator without ability to drive movements from PC)
Password: Password: 456 (to allow drive of movements
from PC).
Notes Menu
How to enter the

Service Mode
Click
Click or Roll Over

the Boxes for more
Information
Interface Signals
Click for more
Information
Interface Signals
LEDs on the GIM Board also
indicate the signal status
Click for more Information
Roll Over the Boxes

for more Information
Notes Digital Menu
The IAPDB and

GIM module
both have
diagnostic tests
available.
Interface Signals EXIT DIAGNOSTICS

Click HERE Click HERE
Displays current input status
of Generator I/O lines.
Notes Digital Menu
Click on LOGS for more

information on the error logs
available, including DICOM Logs
Utilities functions allow access to

the Windows 2000 Functions,
Manuals, and Error Logs
Roll Over each Icon

for more Information
(including TABS)
Click for more

Information
Notes Digital Menu
You must log in at boot up as

the Administrator to access
the Network configuration
settings.
Click HERE for Procedure
1. Right click on Local

Area Connection and
select Properties
2. Select Internet protocol

(TCP/IP).
Note: The TCP/IP protocol
is used for DICOM image
exchange.
Click HERE to 3. Click on Properties

return
4. Select
'Use the following IP Address'
Now Enter
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway (if the
customer has a Gateway,
if not leave blank)
5 Click on OK
Notes Menu
The error log files are located in the C:\DIAG folder and can be viewed using Notepad.
Usually the DICOM error logs are turned on. If the not, follow this procedure to turn them on:
1. Go to C:\Program Files\GE\Dicom App\Merge Open the merge.ini file with Notepad.

2. Scroll down to the bottom until T1-T9 appears. Delete the # sign to the far left side
of the page next to T2 and T3.
Roll to see
DicomErr.log – The errors logged in this file are directly generated by the Merge DICOM library
toolbox. This file can be sent to Infimed for analysis. Roll to see
DicomApp.log file which provides similar DICOM failure information in a more readable format.
Roll to see
ImdError.log (Patient Database) - Logs operation messages, error messages, items of interest
from database. Useful for engineering.
Default.log – Logs operation messages, error messages, items of interest to engineering/service.
Crash.log - In the event of an application crash, a Crash log will be generated containing the
address of the crash, register values, and call stack.
Audit.log – Tracks actions performed during application session, includes such things as logins,
actions by the user, etc. Roll to see
Notes Digital Menu
Update
Update is used when software
or hardware upgrades are
made to the system. Used in
conjunction with software CD
supplied with update.
IAPDB FPGA0 is greyed

out if the system has the
newer IAPDB-MF board
(MF version only has 3
FPGAs)
IMPORTANT NOTE
Install DDM
GIM
On a software update, after Select between two files:
installing the software from the
CD, make sure to power off IapbDdmFlashableND.ddm :
and on the Digital PC before This file drives the ND Filter in
updating GIM. for both Spot and DSA record
modes.
Hardware Update Screen IapbDdmFlashable.ddm :

This file drives the ND Filter in
for DSA record mode only.
Notes Digital Menu
LUT
This feature allows the user to select the
amount of contrast in the image display.
The graph shape can be changed using the

cursor to get the desired response
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
System Display
allows you to Step by step
view the Measuring instructions
Fields
calibration
screens but not
perorm the
vcalibration..
System Manual
allows you to
pick any
calibration then
perform it.
System Auto
steps you
through the Click for
calibrations in a Backup
sequence Click for
Restore
NEXT button is
active in Auto
Manual Adjustment is also
Calibration
available for each calibration.
mode to move
Check the Manual Setting box
you on to the
then use the slider to adjust,
next calibration
when complete click on Exit.
procedure
You will then be prompted to
save your settings. Calibration Screen Overview
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Image
Measuring
Measuring Image AGC/ABS
Sets the Window Fields
Fields
used primarily for
Auto Black
sample window
in the video
frame to the
appropriate size.
Both Spot and

Fluoro set to
around 96%
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore
Set to around
96% for both
Spot & Fluoro
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
AGC/ABS
Sets the sample
window in the
video frame to the Measuring
Measuring Image AGC/ABS
Fields
Fields
appropriate size
for Fluoro AGC/
ABS and for Spot
mode Iris
calibration.
Both Spot and

Fluoro set to
around 50%
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore
Set to around
50% for both
Spot & Fluoro
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Gain
For each type of
image supported Measuring Gain Auto Black Acq LUT
on the system, Fields
the default Video
Video Level
Gain Value is
selected and
loaded.
Fluoro = AGC
On
Spot = AGC
Off
Fluoro = ON
Spot = OFF
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Auto Black
For each type of
image supported
on the system, Measuring Gain Auto Black Acq LUT
the default Video Fields
Auto-Black goal Video Level

value is loaded,
and the pedestal
calibrated.
Fluoro = Auto- Fluoro = ON

Black On Spot = OFF
Spot = Auto
Black Off
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Acq LUT
Measuring Gain Auto Black Acq LUT
Select the LUT Fields
table for Fluoro
and Spot Video Level
Spot: Normal
Contrast
Fluoro/PF:
Gamma 4
Spot Selection
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore
Fluoro/Pulsed
Fluoro Selection
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Circle Mask
This sets the black
Measuring Circle Mask
software mask so Fields
that it surrounds
the phosphor
output window
Overlay
image displayed
on the monitor. Select Outline
The Circle mask Circle Mask for
has a range in size best viewing
from 900 to 1070
pixels in diameter.
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore
Step 2:
Step 1: Circle Mask Camera Mechanical
Adjustment Alignment Adjustment
Roll Over Roll Over
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Fluoro
This calibration is
performed in
Measuring
manual fluoro at Fluoro Spot
Fields
the desired dose
rate.
This step requires
a homogenous
density phantom Iris
in field of view
when it is run.
During this
procedure, the
system adjusts
the mechanical
iris size to achieve CAL LEVEL
Click for
a final CAL Cal Level is the
Backup
LEVEL value of digital gain of
Click for
300 the camera in
Restore 300
fluoro. A higher
level will make
the image more
noisier and is
indicative of
Iris position low light into
encoder value the camera.
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Spot
This calibration is
run with record
exposures being Measuring
Fluoro Spot
Fields
acquired at the
correct dose level.
This procedure
requires a
homogenous
density phantom Iris
in field of view.
During this
procedure, the
system adjusts the
mechanical iris
size to achieve a
final Measuring Click for Dose
Field Level value Backup A,B,C
of: Click for selection
Restore 680
RXi: 500 (40cm
II) or 680 (32cm II)
MPi: 680 (both

32cm & 40cm II)
Iris position
encoder value
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
ABS Level
This step is
Measuring ABS Level ABS Response
performed to set Fields
up the control
levels.
ABS Range = 0-
6V must be
selected.
ABS
This step must 300
be run with the
Fluoro ABS set to
AUTO on the x-
ray generator,
and Fluoro ON.
Click for
Backup
The procedure
adjusts the ABS Click for
Restore
Control Level to
obtain a CAL
LEVEL = 300
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
ABS Response
This step runs
when Camera Measuring ABS Level ABS Response
Fields
ABS is enabled .
Utilizes PID
(Proportional
Integral
Differential)
response network
to control the
ABS
response of the
ABS loop.
This step is run
with fluoro off.
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Backup
Select YES then Measuring
Fields
browse to the
System Backup
folder (possibly
located on the
desktop) and
save the
CalSettings.cal
file.
Click for
Backup
Backup
Click for
Restore
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons & tabs
Restore
Select YES then
browse to the Measuring
Fields
System Backup
folder (possibly
located on the
desktop) and open
the CalSettings.cal
file.
Click for
Backup
Click for
Restore Restore
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these tabs
The line pair resolution test

Line Pair Resolution
is used to measure the %
MTF (Mean Transfer
Frequency) of a specific lp/
mm (line pair per
millimeter).
The test is used in the field
to insure proper focus of
the image intensifier and
camera.
The test requires a line
pair phantom on order to
achieve accurate reading
(GE Part Number: 46-
197871P2)
Since the MTF will vary
depending of the size of
the FOV (Field of View),
the test also displays the
FOV size in inches and
millimeters.
MTF comparisons are

normally made across the
1 lp/mm section. Line Pair Phantom
The phantom must be
vertically oriented in the
image.
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these tabs
The line pair resolution test

MTF
is used to measure the %
MTF (Mean Transfer
Frequency) of a specific lp/
mm (line pair per millimeter)
groups in the four corners of
the camera field of view,
then at the center.
The test is used in the

factory only to insure
frequency specification
camera.
The test requires a specific

test phantom and projection
device.
Proper centering, focus, and
illumination levels are critical
to the accuracy of the test.
The test calculates the %

MTF of the four 500 lp
groups in the corners of the
test pattern, and the 250,
375, 500, and 750 lp groups
at the center of the image.
Roll Over for
more information
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these tabs
The ROI Density tool

ROI Density
can be used both as a
factory test and as a
field test.
The size of the ROI

(Region Of Interest) can be
selected to 64 x 64, 32 x
32, 16 x 16, or 8 x 8 pixels.
The tool is can be used to

measure video noise levels Update Continuously
(RMS) and brightness
levels (densities) in the
ROI sample box. 437.9
14.56
A live update of the Density and RMS

values is possible if the Update
Continuously box is checked.
RMS live update is useful for focusing the
II and optics.
Roll Over for

more information
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these tabs
1. The Uniform Density tool

can be used both as a Uniform Density
factory test and as a field

test.
The size and position of the
ROI’s (Regions Of Interest) Roll Over for
are fixed. more
The tool is used to measure information
the center to edge
brightness variation
(Flatness) of the image.
c k
12:00
n c lo
10:30 1:30 o
s ed
a
nb
a ti o
L oc
9:00 3:00
Centre
7:30
4:30
6:00
Monitor Image showing location

of ROI sampling boxes
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these tabs
The Waveform tool is

Wave Form
used by Engineering
design and development
only, it has no factory or
field test uses.
The tool can graphically
display a Time chart,
Frequency chart, or
Histogram of a selectable
line of video data.
Notes Digital Menu
These signals can also be

seen on LEDs in the GIM Click on Relay Use the drop down box below
Click HERE to see to see signals to select operating mode:
Look at the Interface signals
Select Mode High Level Fluoro
Scrub CCD
Tbl Ready
BC Run in Proc
Input Line 20
Input Line 22
Subtraction On
Dose High Indicates Signal On
Reverse H Indicates Signal

Toggling On/Off
Reverse V
FOV Mag 3 Note:
One of the indicators
PFluoro Select
showing II Mag Mode
will also be On- unless
Mag 0 is selected
Rad Exp On
Dose Low
Store Image
Digital Service Mode
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these Roll Over the red boxes for

buttons & tabs more information
Site Info
System
Configuration
Model Name shows the version

of the Digital either
DSADigitalSystem
RFDigitalSystem
This box is not changeable by
the user
Site name – facility name

Site address – address of the facility
Technical support number – number to call for
assistance (can be tailored for OEMs)
Manufacturer name – name of the manufacturer
(can be tailored for OEMs)
Manufacturer ID – UPC number
Model name – shows option level of the product
System serial number – serial number of the
system. Should also be on top of PC tower.
Notes Digital Menu

Interfaces
System
Configuration
0 to 6V Single-ended
* Base System Frequency

Set to 30/60Hz even in
50Hz countries
Notes Digital Menu

System Options
System
Configuration
Used to set criteria

for deleting patient
MPPS- enable to image folders
Opacification Delay allow Precision to
send patient status
info to Worklist Broker
Notes Digital Menu

Image Processing
System
Configuration
Default levels for brightness, contrast, and
edge level for each image type.
Fluoro also has default integration level

Spot has default polarity
H & V Reverse selects the power on default

mode.
These settings are used as the initial settings

when adding a new Dr. to the Doctor
Preferences.
On/Off selection available if

On
Generator Lines, Two State
Inputs, Reverse-H and
On
Reverse-V are set to disabled.
Notes Digital Menu

Monitor LUTs
System
Configuration
Select the LUTs for
the Primary and
Reference Monitors
Notes Digital Menu

DICOM
Note: No more
System than 16 characters
Configuration PR_RM1309
in the AE Title
PR_Store_SCU
Configuration of the System Network
Station name, DICOM AE titles, and
PR_Store_SCP
network timeout variables.
PR_Print_SCU
The Port Number for Precision is
104
PR_Worklist_SCU
Note: You do not have to enter this.
PR_Worklist_SCU
Multiple AE Titles are used to allow
greater flexibility in DICOM
PR_QR_SCU
implementation.
The AE titles can be the same
except for the Receive AE, it must
be different.
The Receive AE must be different
because the Merge services that
provide the DICOM capability cannot
function as an SCU and an SCP with
the same AE title. All of the SCU
services (send, print, worklist, Q/R)
can have the same AE title.
Do not leave any of these fields blank.
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
General Acquisition
Doctor
Preferences
On
On Doctor Default settings are used

when no doctor preference is
selected
Other Doctors are added and

configured in Application Mode.
Click HERE to see how
GUI Shutter..click
These screens are used to
for details
configure the settings for Doctor
Default only.
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Fluoro
Doctor
Preferences
Fluoro does not use AIO but Use the Up/Down

instead uses the Gamma Arrow keys, on the
Select LUT. This is the fixed keyboard, for fine
display LUT used for Fluoro adjustment
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Spot
Doctor
Preferences
Normal
If AIO is set to Off, the

'Gamma Select' LUT is used
DSA
Off: A new patient is
opened in digital spot
technique
Selected: opened in DSA
technique
Subtracted images use the

'Subt Gamma LUT'
Use the Up/Down Arrow

keys, on the keyboard, for
fine adjustment
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Sub Fluoro
Doctor
Preferences
Use the Up/Down Use the Up/Down

Arrow keys, on the Arrow keys, on the
keyboard, for fine keyboard, for fine
adjustment adjustment
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Review
Doctor
Preferences
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Reference Display
Doctor
Preferences
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Printing
Doctor
Preferences
Notes Digital Menu

System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Archive / Transfer
Doctor
Preferences
Use Archive/Transfer to
check system settings for a
specific doctor or to change
settings as required
Notes Digital Menu

Two State Inputs
System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Generator
Lines Enable Dose A iris position
Enable Dose C iris position
Select Disable for Reverse-

Select Disable for Store
H and Reverse-V because
Image because image
horizontal & vertical image
storage is done locally on
reversal are done locally on
the Infimed.
the Infimed.
Notes Digital Menu

Analog Inputs
System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Generator
Lines
Notes Digital Menu

Analog Outputs
System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Generator
Lines
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs section allows the configuration of

the analog output lines. At present, there is support
for these lines in the hardware, but no software
support has been developed. There are three analog
inputs that could be used. The one defined line, ABS
control is calibrated in the system calibration functions.
Notes Digital Menu

Digital Outputs
System
System
Configuration
Configuration
Generator
Lines
Roll Over to Digital Outputs
View Timing
Diagram Allows the configuration of the digital output lines.
There are two digital output lines that have been
defined:
Pulsed Fluoro Reference and Cine reference (used
on cardiac systems).
These signals can be enabled/disabled.
Pulse width, Output Polarity and Phase Delay can also
be configured.
Notes Digital Menu

Relay Outputs
System
System
Configuration
Configuration Spot Enable
Enable means that when the
request for exposure comes
Generator
from the generator, the digital
Lines will respond if it is ready for
exposure (i.e. in application
mode with a patient open or
in service mode).
Subtract Enable
Enable means that when the
‘MASK’ icon on the Digital
Relay Outputs
Application screen is pressed
the generator switches to
The relay outputs are the controls that the Digital
DSA receptor.
system can exert on the generator to allow operations
to execute.
These controls can be enabled or disabled.
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
System
Configuration List of all
Installed Archive
Devices
PACS-101
Archive
Devices
Click on ADD
DEVICE to add a
new device
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
System
Configuration
Archive
Devices
PING Selected
Device
Click to see
Click on SAVE to
save the device
configuration
Save
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
System
Configuration
Drive letter
Archive
Devices
Click on SAVE to
save the device
configuration
Save
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
System List of all Installed Print Devices

Configuration Eds Printer
Click on a Print Devices to view
its configuration parameters
Printer
Devices
Click on ADD
PRINTER to add
a new device
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
Select Printer from

Drop-down box
System
Configuration Eds Printer
Printer
Devices
Roll Over to
view Default PING Selected
settings Device
Click on SAVE
to save
Save
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
System
Configuration
Printer
Devices
Click on Save
to save
settings
Save
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
System
Configuration
Printer
Devices
Click on Save to
save settings
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
System
Enter Name or Alias in this
Configuration The Query/Retrieve menu will box for the Query/Retrieve
allow configuration of DICOM Device. This is the name that
Query/Retrieve information will appear for the customer
MAIN PACS
3 231 50 099
Query/Retrieve PACS_66
Devices
104
Precision's
Query/Retrieve
AE Title
PR_QR_SCU
1. Enter the Name or Alias in the

Name box
2. Enter the IP Address, AE Title and
Port Number
3. Click on NEXT or CANCEL
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons

box for the Worklist. This is
The Worklist Devices menu the name that will appear for
System
Configuration will allow configuration of the customer
DICOM Worklist information
Service Class Providers
MAIN_WORKLIST
Enter the following
information for the worklist 3.231.66.129
broker:
IP Address
AE Title
HIS_RIS_1
Port Number
Worklist Get this information from 104
Devices
the Hospital
PR_Worklist_SCU
Precision's
Worklist AE Title
Name box
Port Number
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons

box for the Worklist. This is
The MPPS Devices menu
the name that will appear for
System configures the device where
Configuration the customer
the patient status information
will be sent to, this is usually
the Worklist Broker
MAIN_WORKLIST
Enter the following
information for the worklist 3.231.66.129
broker:
IP Address
AE Title
HIS_RIS_1
Port Number
Get this information from 104
the Hospital
MPPS
Devices
PR_Worklist_SCU
Precision's
MPPS AE Title
Name box
Port Number
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
Patient Data
System
Configuration
Patient Data
Configuration
Patient Data Configuration

Specify required and non-required fields for entry of patient
data. Patient data cannot be processed if a field marked
"required" is left blank. Information cannot be entered if field
is marked not used; the box is "greyed" out. If a field is
marked used, information can be entered but is not required
for processing patient data entry.
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
Study Data
System
Configuration
Patient Data
Configuration
Study Data
Specify required and non-required fields for entry of study
data. Study data cannot be processed if a field marked
is marked not used; the box is "greyed" out. If a field is
for processing study data entry.
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
Series Data
System
Configuration
Patient Data
Configuration
Series Data
Specify required and non-required fields for entry of series
data. Series data cannot be processed if a field marked
is marked not used; the box is "grayed" out. If a field is
for processing series data entry.
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
Select YES then browse to

System the System Backup folder
Configuration
(possibly located on the
desktop) and save the
SysConfig-Backup file. Note
you must browse to the
System Backup folder for the
other two files, otherwise it
will save them in the Infimed
default backup folder. Note: There are three
Configuration Files to backup:
SysConfig-Backup.xml
This file contains all the System
Configuration data such as:
Site Information
Interface Settings
System Options
UserConfig-Backup.xml
Backup This file contains all the System
Configuration data such as:
Doctors Preferences
DICOM Settings
LUTs-Backup.xml
This file contains the Display and
Monitor look-up tables
Notes Digital Menu
Click on these
buttons
Select YES then browse to the System

Backup folder (possibly located on the
desktop) and open the SysConfig-
System
Configuration
Backup file. Note you may have to
browse to the System Backup folder for
the other two files, otherwise it will look
for them in the Infimed default backup
folder.
Note:
There are three Configuration Files
to restore:
SysConfig-Backup.xml
UserConfig-Backup.xml
LUTs-Backup.xml
Note:
The Restore process will have you After Restoring the Configuration
first restore the SysConfig-
Backup.xml file then the Data you must click on SAVE to send
Restore UserConfig-Backup.xml file and the information to the GIM Module.
finally the LUTs-Backup.xml file. If the SAVE button is greyed out, click on
Make sure the file you restore is Generator Lines tab and toggle a value to enable
the correct one! the SAVE button
Roll to see
SAVE
Notes Digital Menu
This is the name the

customer will use to
select this printer PRINTER
Eds PrinterRM8
Enter the following information for

the printer:
3.231.66.109
IP Address
AE Title PRINTER_KODAK_1
Port Number
Get this information from the
Hospital 104
Precision's Print
PR_Print_SCU
AE Title
Enter Network/DICOM
information
Click on NEXT
Notes Digital Menu
Name or Alias of Device

Select:
DICOM Network if the device is
on the network
PACS-101 DICOM Media if the device is a
local storage device such as
CD-RW Drive
This is the name that

will appear in the
Device Selection box
in Applications mode
1. Enter Configuration name

2. Select Device Type
3. Click on CREATE Workstation
PACS-101
xr-aw-38
If the DICOM device supports

Storage Commit (i.e. sends
back a message saying the
Images received). If not known
do not enable this box
PR_Store_SCU
4. Enter Network/DICOM
information Precision's Send
5. Click on NEXT AE Title
Notes Digital Menu
Enter Local Name or

Alias in this box
Print-101
1. Enter the Local Name or Alias in the

Configuration box
2. Select printer Type (DICOM is a DICOM
network printer)
3. Click on CREATE or CANCEL
Notes
Dangerous Voltages,
particularly in these
areas
Generator Cabinet
Notes
Measurement
Point
DC Bus Voltage DC Bus-
The DC Bus Voltage (up to 700Vdc) is present
inside the Generator Cabinet .
An LED on the Power Input Board indicates the

presence of the DC Bus.
Power Off system, LOTO, wait

two minutes then measure the
DC Bus Voltage with a Multi-
meter between the two terminal
points
Measurement
Point
DC Bus+
DS1: ON=DC BUS

Voltage Present.
D2 was the LED
on older boards
WARNING: Even if the LED on the
Generator Cabinet Power Input Board is out there could
still be DC BUS voltage present. Wait at
least two minutes and check DC BUS
Voltage with a DVM before going into
Power Input Board
the generator.
Notes
Dangerous Voltages,
particularly in these
areas
Positioner Cabinet
Notes
Pinch
Hazards Mechanical Safety
o
The Positioner can tilt to ±90 and the SFD
Cassette Tray can drive out unexpectedly.
These movements present potential collision
and pinch hazards.
Keep all bodily parts clear of the table when
movements are initiated.
DANGER
ZONE
DANGER
ZONE
Precision RXi
Positioner
Notes
Mechanical Safety
The table base has moving gears
and wheels. Do not work in this area
when the system can be operated.
These movements present potential
pinch hazards.
Pinch
Hazards
Table Base
Notes
Radiation Safety
When working with the Precision System
always adhere to radiation safety procedures.
1. Wear your radiation Badge at all times, in the

appropriate place (on the collar if wearing a lead
apron).
2. Always wear a lead apron when in the room
with x-ray on.
3. Minimize the amount of time spent in the
room with x-ray on.
4. Keep as much distance as possible from the
x-ray source.
5. Collimate the x-ray field to be as small as
possible.
Precision RXi
Positioner
Notes
Personal Protective Equipment
Safety Shoes Safety Glasses

When working in the Safety Glasses must
Labs you must always be worn when
wear Safety Shoes. If performing certain
you did not bring your tasks in the lab,
own with you, then such as turning on/
borrow a pair of these off the main circuit Safety Glasses
stylish slip on safety breaker.
Slip On Safety Shoes
shoes.
Lead Aprons Arc Flash Suit

Lead Aprons must be Arc Flash Suit must
worn when in the be worn when
room with x-ray on. performing certain
tasks in the lab,
such as measuring
Lead Screens high voltages. See
Lead Screens can also NFPA70E
be used to protect you regulations for
from radiation compliance
exposure. Stand guidelines.
behind a screen when
in the room with x-ray
on.
Lead Apron Lead Screen Arc Flash Suit
Notes
OTS Mechanical Safety

Lock the Telescopic Arm before removing the
Collimator or X-ray Tube from the OTS (refer to the
OTS manual for full details)
OTS
Carriage
OTS
Telescopic
Arm
OTS
Lock the OTS Carriage

Telescopic Arm
using this Bolt
Notes
Nical Image System Block Diagram

X-ray Tube
Generator X-ray On
Foot-switch
Transfer Image
to Reference
Monitor switch
ABS Control Signal

(Range 0-12V: 6V
nominal)
VCR (option) Start Signal
LCD Monitors
(resolution 1280 x 1024)
NTSC
Output Only Live
Image&
LIH
Image 1024 x
1024
BNC to
Intensifier SVGA
Output
Converter Converter
Reference
Nical Camera Image
Analog Video (Option)
CCD Camera from CCD Control Board
(512 x 512 or Camera
1024 x 1024)
Notes DIG
Digital System
Digital System Overview

The Digital System is a PC based Fluoroscopic Imaging
System and comprises of:
y PC running Windows 2000 Professional
y CCD Camera (1K x 1K x 12 bit pixel matrix)
y Graphical User Interface (GUI)
y Generator Interface Module (GIM)
There are two versions of Digital System available:

Infimed Digital System y RF (Radiographic/Fluoroscopic)
y DSA (Digital Subtraction Angiography)
Isolation Transformer
The Digital System must be powered through the Isolation
Transformer supplied by GE. Do not plug the Digital system
into a wall socket!
The Isolation Transformer is available in two versions:
Isolation Transformer y 230Vac input for Europe
y 120Vac input for the Americas
The Output voltage is always 120Vac irrespective of the

transformer version
Generator Interface Module (GIM)

The Generator Interface Module is responsible for interfacing with
the X-ray system. It is located in the Positioner Cabinet.
Generator Interface
Module All connections to / from the x-ray generator are through the GIM.
Notes DIG
Digital System Interconnect Diagram

VCR
Reference Primary
(Option)
Image Monitor Image
Digital PC (Option) Monitor 1
Matrox AGP
Board
Primary
Image
SVGA Monitor 2
Video Interface Board Splitter
DVI Loopback All Outputs

Keyboard Cable: GUI 120Vac
PS/2 display added Isolation
Keyboard Transformer
Mouse Port
CCD Camera 120 or
LVDS Board LVDS
230Vac Input
PS/2 Cable
PS/2
Mouse Input Cables
Splitter P1
Pointing Port
Relay Cables
Device 2 IAPDB Board P2
P15 Relay Cables
P3
CD-RW
Analog In Cables X-ray
Printer
(Option) GIM P21
Hard Clock Drive Cables Generator
Disk P18
Digital Host Analog Out Cables
Control Hard P19 ABS
Copy Bd ABS Cables
(Option) 10/100 P20
Power
Network Port
Hospital Roll Over underlined Roll Over to see
Network Board names for Digital PC plug
more information connections
Notes DIG
Digital System: Inside of PC

Low Voltage Roll Over Board name
Differential
Supply (LVDS) boxes for more
Board information
CPU
Motherboard
Matrox AGP
Board
Modem Card
Digital
Hardcopy
Board (DHC)
IAPDB
Video Interface
Board (VIB)
Notes DIG
Digital System: CCD Camera

Roll Over for
Large Format Camera
Information on
The Large Format Camera cons ists of:
CCD Cameras
y 1K X 1K imaging Matrix
y Philips FT1010 Frame Transfer Large Format CCD
y 50mm Optical Lens
y Integrated Iris Control
y 33 msec to read 1 frame of data
y 12.5cm x 12.5cm iris mechanism
y Right Angled Direct Coupled Lens
Photo-Diode Large Format Camera is physically 10cm in diameter and

Bd approximately 16.5cm long
Large Format Camera is standard on this system.
Its high well capacity and greater MTF than the small format
makes it ideal for high demand applications such as DSA.
900 Lens NDF CCD Camera

Assembly Solenoid
Large Format
Image Head Camera
Notes DIG
CCD Camera Block Diagram
NDF Pot
±16V Direct
CCD
Couple
Power ±6V Defect
Iris NDF Iris
Solenoid Regulator Maps
Motor Control
+3.3V
Iris
Pot
12
Video 75 Ohm
Bit FPGA D/A Driver
Buffer
A/D
Analog
Output
Camera Lens
not used
Iris CCD Sensor
±16V ±6V +3.3V
LVDS
Digital
CCD I/O Power
Timing
Supplies
Generator
CCD Correction
CCD Sensor Board Board Interface Board
Control and Power Digital 1024 x 1024 x

to/from LVDS 12 bit Video to LVPS
Board in Digital PC Board in Digital PC
Roll Over for more Roll Over underlined
Photo of CCD component names
Camera for more Information
Notes DIG
Image Processing Roll over Blue

Text for more
Information
Fluoro Noise
CCD Image Pedestal Detail Enhance,
Reduction ACQ LUT
Camera Statistics & Gain White Compress
(FNR)
Hard Disk
Storage
ABS Signal ABS Unprocessed
to Generator Calculations images to Network
Fluoro does not use AIO

but uses a Fluoro Gamma
Select LUT, this is a Fixed AIO Parameters
Display LUT
AIO
Subtraction Selected AIO
Edge WW, Monitor
Min/max Display Invert
Enhancement WL LUT
Opacification LUT
AIO Off Monitor

Subtracted images do
not use AIO but use a Fixed Display
Subt Gamma LUT, this is LUT
a Fixed Display LUT Processed images
to Network
Notes Menu
Digital System: Generator Interface Module (GIM)

Generator Interface Module (GIM)
The GIM is an external, independently operating device that
manages all communications between the digital system and
the x-ray generator.
Communications between the Digital PC and the GIM are

through a 100 MHz serial link between the GIM and FPGA0 on
the IAPDB.
Power for the GIM is 120VAC. GIM Box
The GIM self boots when powered. The initialization program in

in the EPROM accessible by the onboard embedded
processor, and the program within the FPGA.
The GIM contains the following I/O circuits:

y 32 Two State Inputs
y 12 Relay Outputs
y 1 Analog ABS Output
y 4 RS-232 Serial Ports
y 2 CAN bus ports
y 4 Open Collector drive outputs
y 8 Analog Voltage Inputs
y 2 Analog Voltage Outputs
The Two State Inputs, Relay Outputs, Open Collector Drives,

and Analog ABS signals are used in this system.
There are LEDS on the GIM Board which can

GIM Box with cover removed
help troubleshoot interface issues.
showing Power Supply & Board
Click HERE to find out more information
Notes Menu
RXi
Port 1 to TDI II J4A

1. Fluoro On: Input 1
2. Prep Rad Exp Input 2 2
3. Req Rad Exp Input 3
4. Rad Ready Input 4 1 4 P1
3 6
Port 2 to TDI II J4B LEDs
5. FOV Mag 1 Input 1 5 8 P1
6. FOV Mag 2 Input 2
7. Single Photospot Input 3 Port/Cable Numbers. 7
8. Rad Type Spot Select Input 4 CAT 5 cables with RJ-
45 plugs go into
Port 3 to TDI II J4C these ports
9. Reverse-H Input 1
10. Reverse-V Input 2 Column 1 Column 4
11. FOV Mag 3 Input 3 Input 1 Input 4
12. PFluoro Select Input 4
Roll Over Signal
Port 4 to TDI II J4D name boxes (on
1 2 3 4
13. PFluoro On Input 1 left) for more GIM Board
14. Rad Ex On Input 2 Information
15. Dose Low Input 3 5 6 7 8
16. Store Image Input 4 LEDs on the GIM Board indicate the
status of signals from the Generator.
9 10 11 12 The LEDs are referenced to cable signals.
Port 5 to TDI II J4E
17. Not used Input 1
Example: LED 10 refers to Reverse-V
18. Not used Input 2 13 14 15 16 signal which comes in on Cable 3 Input
LEDs 2, this can be traced to Pins 3 & 4 of the
17 18 19 20
RJ-45 plug
Port 6 to TDI II J4F
21. Not used Input 1 Click to see LED
21 22 23 24
22. Not used Input 2 Status during Roll Over for more
Exposures Information
24. Dose High Input 4 Cables 7 & 8 are not used
Notes Menu
TP1 TP4
Signal Connector Pins Relay Test
Point P2-Port 1
TP5
Spot P2-Port 1 1/2 T1 TP1
Expose
Injector P2- Port 1 3/4 T6 TP4
Synch
Fluoro P2- Port 2 5/6 T7 TP5 TP8
Enable
Subtracted P3- Port 1 1/2 T10 TP8 TP11
P2-Port 2
EnableP2- Port 2 to TDI II Board J2
Rotational P3- Port 1 3/4 T13 TP11
Angio
Bolus P3- Port 1 5/6 T3 TP3
Chase
Test Points P3- Port 1

Test points are located between the relays
+5V on the test point means there is a TP3
signal to the relay coil, it does not Relays
necessarily mean the relay is operating (14)
correctly.
Roll Over for more

information on the
signals
GIM Board
Notes Menu
GIM LED Status

Select Operating Mode
to view LED Status
High Level Fluoro
Roll Over to see

signal names LEDs
GIM Board
These signals are also displayed on

the Digital service home screen.
GIM Board LEDs Click HERE to see
Notes Menu
II Mag Signal Sends exposure

Path technique info to
Click for more digital, to be
details displayed on image to Connectors AMP
11, 12, 13 on 25S3
Generator
P1 Cables P2/P3 Cables Interface Board
Touch-
Click for more Click for more screen
details details Positioner
Interface
Serial Signals
Click for
Digital PC
more details
Positioner Cabinet
P1: Ports J15
1 to 6
J18
PF
6 cables
ABS
J20 J6
3 cables J7
J1-3
TDI II Bd
roll for more J4
details
P2: Ports
1 to 3
P3: Port 1 GIM Generator
Notes Menu
TDI II Board (in

Indicator 25S3 Interface
Generator Cabinet) Field Size is small so only Central AMP 12 LEDs
J6 Ion Chamber Field can be selected Board (in
5 1 OUT 25 LV73
Angio Selection
Positioner
24 16 OUT 47 LV95 Cabinet)
Angio/Flebo Selection
6 13 OUT 44 LV92 13 12
Tomo Time 0
25 9 OUT 40 LV88 AMP 12
Tomo Time 1 Pin-out
7 10 OUT 41 LV89
Tomo Time 2 24 1
26 11 OUT 42 LV90
AMP 11
DFR Receptor Selection on Positioner Console
8 15 OUT 35 LV83
SFD Receptor Selection on Positioner Console
9 14 OUT 34 LV82
DFR or Wall Bucky Receptors Selected on Generator Console 9 8
3 10 IN 27 LV27
DFR or SFD Receptors Selected on Generator Console AMP 11
22 11 IN 28 LV28 Pin-out
X-ray Request
32 4 OUT 7 LV55 16 1
Prep Request
33 3 OUT 6 LV54
Fluoro Request
30 2 OUT 5 LV53
Tomo Selection All signals are HI
27 13 OUT 45 LV93
(+24Vdc) when
+24Vg ACC
16/17 1 active
X-ray On
20 8 IN 2 LV2
Rad Ready
2 9 IN 26 LV26
Tube 1 Selected
21 7 LV97
36/37 0V 6
18/19 +24Vdc II (active when DFR or SFD Receptors are selected) 16
AMP 13 4
II Mag 1 K5
29 2 OUT 31 LV79 AMP 13
K6 Pin-out
31 II Mag 2 3 OUT 32 LV80
II Mag 3 K7 1
28 4 OUT 33 LV81
Notes Menu
Exposure Signal Timing

Select Mode Pulsed Fluoro Exposures
Pulsed Fluoroscopic
Radiographic Exposures
Exposures
The The
generator
generatorallows pulsed
allows both fluoroscopic
single exposures.exposures
and rapid radiographic The as
commanded
sequence by the Digital
of operation for thesystem.
DigitalThe
I/Osequence
signals of
is operation for the Digital
as follows:
I/O signals is as follows:
Signal Location
Rad Type Spot Select Signal Location
P1 Port 2 GIM Bd
P1Port
P1 Port2 GIM
1 GIM
BdBd
Fluoro OnType Spot Select
Rad
1
P1 Port 3 GIM Bd
Pfluoro Select 7 P1 Port 1 GIM Bd
Prep Rad Exp 1
RadPower
Ready(sync) 2 P18-2 GIM Board
P1 Port 1 GIM Bd
Pfluoro 2
3 3 6
ReqOn
Pfluoro Rad Exp P18-1
P1 Port GIM
1 GIMBoard
Bd
45
4 7
PhotoSpot P2 Port 1 GIM Bd
5 30 PPS
6 15 PPS
RAD Exposure On P1 Port 4 GIM Bd
1. Fluoro exposure switch activates.

1. Prep button is pressed, requesting a radiographic exposure.
2. 2.Sync signal atis30Hz
Generator ready supplied
to take an to generator from Digital.
exposure.
3. 3.Generator
X-Ray starts
button exposure
is pressed,pulse.
and Generator is ready to take a
4. radiographic
Generator exposure.
terminates exposure pulse.
5. 4.Generator
Digital system
starts requests a radiographic
next exposure for 30 exposure.
PPS rate.
5. Generator starts a radiographic exposure.
6. Generator exposure rate changed to 15 PPS.
6. Generator ends radiographic exposure.
7. 7.
Pulsed fluoro select active as PPS < 30.
Digital system terminates exposure request.
Notes Menu
RETURN
Fluoro exposures can be made

from this screen, but rad exposures
Click for more cannot be performed until a patient
information on this has been selected or a new patient
part of the GUI toolbar created.
Used to toggle between

image thumbnails and
image manipulation
tools on the lower part of
the GUI.
CLICK
Click for more

information on this
part of the GUI toolbar
Notes Menu
RETURN
Display GUI Shutter

Status- used to view network
CLICK
transfer status, software and
Link to Patient List hardware versions CLICK
Acquire button must be Close Application/Patient

indented to allow
Fluoro Loop- fluoro movie mode,
radiographic exposures
acquires up to 165 frames. Store
Rate: Selection of radiographic Loop button, used to save the
Click to see movie, appears when this is
exposure rate (frames/second),
Programmable Sequences, Bolus selected.
Click to show (if not visible)
Chase and Rotational Angio
Store Image- Fluoro store
Mask- used to select DSA button
receptor on generator touch-
screen. Enables high dose CLICK Injector control button CLICK
subtraction mode (option) Click to show (if not visible)
Click to show (if not visible) Send image on live monitor to
reference monitor
Fluoro Roadmapping- part
of DSA mode DICOM- send current study or
Shotsave folder to PACS or
Shotsave Folder- clicking on this Workstation
copies the image displayed or
selected into the shotsave folder. Image Processing Tools:
This is like tagging images. Window/Level
Digital Shutters
Printer- send current study to Measurement
printer Image Stacking
Annotations
Notes Menu
RETURN
Display format 1:1, 4:1 or 16:1
Step through images (Next)

Step through images (Last)
Image replay speed
Image replay buttons
Image Invert
Reset Image
Edge Enhancement Filter

Magnify Image
Mask- select current image to
be the mask (part of DSA option)
Landmarking Percentage Pixel Shift Movement

This allows structures that appear in the Increments
same location on both the mask and Size of increments when
subtracted images to be partially visible so pressing pixels shift arrows.
they can be used as reference markers. Choice of 1 pixel, 0.5 pixel,
The level of Land marking can be set from 0.25 pixel or 0.1 pixel.
0%, no land marking- fully subtracted to
100% full intensity land marking- no
subtraction, with steps of 25% and 50% in- Delete Frame- Mark
between. current image for deletion
Notes Menu
RETURN
GUI Shutter is a darker

GUI which helps during
viewing of patient images
Image reversal, changes

are seen on live image and
Fluoro Edge
future acquired images.
Enhancement
Filter If greyed out check Config/
Generator Lines/ Two
State Inputs, that
Fluoro Noise Reverse-H and Reverse-V
Reduction are disabled.
(FNR) Filter
Notes Menu
Precision RXi: Introduction
Precision RXi
The Precision RXi is a remote R&F system consisting of a
tilting table with integrated spot film device and x-ray tube,
50 or 65 or 80 kW pulsing generator and high heat capa city
X-Ray tube. The system can be configured to meet a wide
variety of digital record and fluoroscopy for various clinical
applications with either a 22 cm, 32cm or 40cm image
intensifier. The RXi also comes in analog (with digital frame
grabber) or 10242x12-bit digital imaging. All versions have a
CCD TV camera.
Features Overview
y Integrated table with 90/90o tilt
y 100kHz High Frequency Generator supp orting
continuous and pulsed fluoro, and digital radiographic
serial acquisitions up to 15 fps.
y 10242 x 12 bit digital imaging
y Pulsed fluoro for dose reduction to the patient and
staff.
Roll Over to view y PlatinumOne Digital Imaging System: 10242 x 12 bit
Power digital imaging with 17,000 or 34,000 image storage
Requirements y High Resolution CCD Camera
y 22, 32 or 40cm Image Intensifier
Click HERE to y Varian A292 X-ray Tube
view Product
Brochure
Notes Menu
Patient Positioner
The following are features of the Precision RXi patient

positioner:
Variable speed scanning movement, which is

controlled from identical tableside and control
room console panels.
Quiet drive with soft start and stop feature.
The 90/90 degree tilt table can tilt from full vertical
(+90o) to full Trendelenburg (-90o) with a
selectable automatic stop at horizontal.
Table tilt is displayed at the tableside.
Tomo (8,20 & 40o with two speeds per angle)
Motorized II Elevation OTS
SFD with full cross film division: Cassette sizes
18x24cm, 24x24cm and 24x30cm (long x lat) work The following are features of the
with cross division Precision RXi OTS:
Table elevation (option)
Retractable Grid SID and Tube Angulation
Carbon Fibre table-top (curved or flat) Readouts
Table-top weight limit 182kg (400lb) without Fully Manual Operation
restrictions
Compression Cone (Palpator)
Notes Menu
Generator
Generator
The following are features of the Precision RXi Indico 100

Generator:
y 50, 65 or 80 kW power, 100kHz High Frequency

Generator
y Touch-screen User Interface
y Three Inverter Modules utilizing FET Power
Transistors for high speed switching
y Pulsed fluoroscopy at 15, 7.5, 3.75 and 1 pulse(s) per
second. Uses 10mA, 8ms radiation pu lses.
y High level continuous fluoro up to 20 mA
y Fluoroscopic dose curves: kVp/mA c urves for
conventional, high level and Pulsed Fluoro operation
y Selection of kVp transfer curves to allow pre-setting
Radiographic and Cine kVp from last Fluoro kVp (may
also be selected by the APR)
y APR – allows all generator parameters and X-Ray
techniques to be pre-set for a selected procedure
y Microprocessor Controlled Generator utilizing
'GenWare' software for servicing
y Nominal Line Voltages for the Generator are 3-phase
400Vac (European Version) or 480Vac ( American
Version) +/-10% X-ray Tube
Varian A292
Generator Cabinet
Notes
Precision RXie
The Precision RXie is a remote analog
R&F system consisting of a tilting
table with integrated spot film device,
and 50 kW pulsing generator. The
system is configured with a 23 cm
image intensifier and a 512x512
Image Chain.
High Level Features
Image Chain: A512e Analog TV

CCD camera with a CCD sensor of
752x582 pixels
Precision RXie
Image Intensifier: 23cm
Generator: 50kW
Table:
Same functionality as standard RXi
table with the following possible
differences:
900/300 tilt
No Cross Film
No Longitudinal Table-top drive
No Table Elevate
Integrated Console for Positioner,
X-ray Tube: RTM 90HS Image Chain and Generator
Notes
Precision RXi Operators Documentation

Manual 5121725 Web Site
Roll Over
System Tasks & for overview of
Procedures Bk 1 5121726
Manuals
System Tasks & Click on grey
Procedures Bk 2 5121726 boxes to open
System Tasks & Manual
Procedures Bk 3 5121726
Digital Service Manual
5121727
Other Manuals
Generator Service Manual
5121728 Precision RXi
Installation Manual Clinical Features
Links to Manuals 5123446 Brochure
This information may not be current and is
provided for training purposes only. Use the Pre-Installation Manual
documentation that is with the equipment or Sony DVD Recorder
5123449 Manual
check engineering documentation for the most
current revision applicable to the specific Service Introduction
product being serviced. Planner 5123705
Schematics 5142538
Planned Maintenance
5146132
Installation Steering Guide
Notes
Generator Service Laptop Connection- directly to CPU Board
1. Install the GENWARE Service 2. Connect the Laptop, using a standard

Software onto the Laptop from the null mode cable (GE Part Number
Genware32 Utilities CD. 2128821), to any of the Serial Ports on
the Generator CPU Board except J11.
Do not plug your laptop
into J11. It will damage
your serial port. 3. Double click on the
Genware Service
Software CD GenWare icon, which
CPU Board should be on the desktop of
Laptop can be the laptop.
connected to any of the
unused Serial Ports,
except J11, on the
Generator CPU Board
except
Do not plug into J11
5 Serial Ports
Note: J11 is not
a 'normal' serial
port it has +12V
on pin 1
Click HERE for an

overview of the
generator Service
Top of Generator Software
Notes
Select Touch-screen Console
New Old
Click
Click Touch-screen
Software Version is
Old Console shown here on the
Click
Main Menu screen.
System Shutdown
3.x.x New Console
2.x.x Old Console
Generator Touch-screen Console

showing Main Menu
Notes
Tube Warm-up
1. Manually close collimator
blades
2. Place a lead apron (or lead
blocker) on the table-top
3. Select receptor
4. Make exposures
Please close collimator blades before

warming the tube. Next select a receptor to
warm-up and take the first exposure...
Click on MAIN
MENU to
RETURN
MAIN MENU
Place a lead
Tube Warm-up Screen apron on the
If Tube Warm-up table-top
doesn't work click RXi shown ready
HERE for Tube warm-up
Notes Menu
X-ray Prep and

Exposure
Indicators
DAP or Air Kerma X-ray Tube Heat

Display Unit Display
(depending on 0% = Cold
configuration)
APR (Protocol)
Selection
Select Receptor
Fluoro Timer
to see buttons
Reset
DFR SFD
Locks in technique
Film Speed (SFD/ after x number of
3, 2 or 1 point
Wall Bucky only) AEC exposures Rad kV to
mode select Pulsed Fluoro
Digital Rad dose Fluoro kV
(DFR/DSA only) Auto/Manual select tracking select
Fluoro
Large/Small
Filament High Dose
Fluoro select
Ion Chamber
selection (SFD/ Fluoro Dose/
Wall Bucky only) Contrast Curves F/R
DFR SFD 1 LOW
2 DSA Receptors
2 AEC LOCK MAIN MENU
Generator Applications Screen
Notes
Click on Accept
to continue
Click on
CANCEL to go
back
Using the Numerical Keyboard

Enter Password
Default Factory Password is
1973
showing Password Screen
(note: this can be changed under
the Touchscreen setup link)
Notes
Apr 27, 2009
Click on MAIN
MENU to return
Click
Click
Click
Roll Over or
Click on Menu
Items for more
showing System Utilities details
Notes
Backup is more like a ‘Save

As’ button. It allows changes
made to the open APR file to
be saved with another name
Highlighted file is
the selected APR
file
Click on CLOSE
to RETURN to
System Utilities
Menu
Restore is more like an ‘Open’

button. It allows the selected
APR file to be opened and
used by the generator and
Use this (these) automatically closes the
button(s) to backup current open APR file.
and restore an APR file Only one APR file can be open
at a time.
APR Backup & Restore Screen
Notes
Use this screen to: Licence Key Number Make

System Code Click on Passwords a note of this in case of
Turn on/off the voice
to set Service and Software loads.
message
Operator Passwords Click on to enter
Fluoro Beeping Tone
Set Sound Volume License key
Screen saver time
Application Screen
Language
Generator ready Set to COM
indication SETTINGS FEATURES PASSWORDS ERROR LOGS 4 on RXi
Port setup
Voice Messaging Digital Port
Continuous Fluoro Tone DAP Port
Features Indicate Generator Ready Transfer Port

Click for more details
Auto Power Off Languages
Generator Type
Screen Saver Interval
Sound Volume
Click on OK to OK
RETURN to System
Utilities Menu Settings Screen
Notes
Use this screen to:

Fluoro Beeping
Tone
Set General and
Exposure
Volume
LCD Brightness
Screen saver
time
Application
Screen
Language
Generator ready Click on Passwords
indication to set Service and
Port setup Operator Passwords
Features
Click for more
details
Click on OK to
RETURN to System
Utilities Menu
Settings Screen- New Console
Notes
Infimed Digital Interface

If your system has the
Infimed PC then select
this box.
Click on OK to
RETURN to System
Utilities Menu
Features Screen
Notes
Recommended action for Passwords

1. Enter an easy to remember
Operator Password and give it to the
customer so they can edit APRs
2. Leave the service password at
1973, so access is not blocked to
other GE service personnel.
To change password click on the ...
button and enter new password.

Do the same on the next box.
Repeat procedure to change
Service Password
The Operator Password

only allows access to:
APR Editor
APR Backup &
Restore
in the System Utilities
Menu
The Service Password allows full access

to all the System Utilities Menu options.
Click on OK to The default factory password is 1973. Do

RETURN to Settings not change it, as it could restrict access
Screen to other GE Service personnel.
Passwords Screen
Notes
To change Receptor Symbol

1. Touch one of the six receptor
buttons (note: not all receptors are
enabled on MPi & RXi, so select a
receptor that is)
2. Touch the desired receptor symbol
Receptor Symbols 3. Touch the transfer arrow
Transfer
Arrow
Six Receptor
Buttons
Click on OK to
RETURN to System
Utilities Menu
New symbols (.bmp

format) can be
imported and saved
Receptor Symbols Screen
Notes
Generator Service Laptop Connection
1. Install the GENWARE Service

Software onto the Laptop from the
Genware32 Utilities CD.
Genware Service 2. Connect the Laptop, using a standard

Software CD null mode cable (GE Part Number
2128821), to the Serial Port marked
'Genware' on the rear of the Generator
Laptop Cable Touch-screen console.
connects here
3. Double click on the GenWare icon,

which should be on the desktop of the
laptop.
4. The Generator Touch-screen

Console must be enabled to
communicate with the laptop.
Click HERE to see how to

Laptop Connection to Generator
Touch-screen Console enable the communication
Notes
Generator Service
Laptop Displaying the

Service Software Main
screen
Click HERE for

an overview of
the Generator
Service Software
Notes
GenWare from Digital PC

If the System has the Digital Option,
GenWare can be run through the Digital
PC
Click on Start
Digital Monitor showing

Windows Desktop Screen
Procedure
1. Bring up the Windows Desktop on the Digital
monitor.
2. Click on the START icon, select Programs.
Console with Digital System 3. From the pop-up box select GenWare
Option Utilities then select GenWare Generator Click HERE for
Utilities. an Overview of
Click on START Icon above to try it out the Software
Notes
Generator Service Software

Utility Setup
Reset Test
The Icons on this Toolbar have

Click on Utility to take a the same function as the menu
tour of the Utility Menu. options in the Utility and Setup
drop down boxes
Click on Setup to take a
tour of the Setup Menu GenWare Service Software
The GenWare Service Software is used to:
y Configure the Workstations
y Perform Calibrations
y Set up the Generator
y View Error Log
Rollover Red boxes y Backup and Restore Cal and Config
for more details data.
The software can be run offline in a Demo

Mode.
7.5
Notes
Menu
Receptor Setup > Receptor Properties Interface Options

0: this option allows exposures without
any interlocks from the rest of the system
blocking the exposure. For this to work the
Prep and Exposure switch must be wired
directly into the Room Interface board on
top of the generator cabinet.
Prep wired to TB6 7 – 8
Exposure wired to TB6 9 – 10
On MPi the footswitch is wired this way.
1: use for Precision MPi on Receptors 3

and 6 (receptors using Infimed Digital) if
the system does not have either Bolus
Chase or Rotational Angio options.
13: use on Precision RXi on Receptors 2,

3, 4 and 5 (receptors not using Infimed
Digital) or on all receptors if the system
has a Nical Image System (Analog
Precision RXi).
19: use on Precision RXi on Receptors 1

and 6 (receptors using Infimed Digital).
22: use for Precision MPi on Receptors 3

Roll Over for more Click HERE for and 6 (receptors using Infimed Digital) if
details about this default Receptor the system has either Bolus Chase or
screen Setup Rotational Angio options.
Notes
Menu Generator Service Software

Receptor Setup > AEC
AEC
AEC Back-up mAs: This quantity will appear as the mAs

value on the rad display window when AEC is selected as a
technique and the AEC mode is selected as mAs.
AEC Back-up ms: This quantity will appear as the ms value

on the rad display window when AEC is selected as a
technique and the AEC mode is selected as ms.
AEC Channel: defines the AEC channel used by the receptor AEC Locks Exp. 3
when AEC technique is selected.
AEC Mode: defines the AEC back-up mode to be used

fixed -> set to defined defaults (back-up mAs
and ms)
mAs -> set to defined defaults, with mAs
displayed and adjustable by the user
ms -> set to defined defaults, with ms displayed
and adjustable by the user .
AEC Lock Exps: Sets the mAs to the AEC Lock Exps:
selected for the rest of the procedures. (available only when
the Receptor is programmed for serial exposures and the
advance option key is enabled)
For AEC modes mAs and ms, post values of mAs and ms,
respectively, will be shown following an AEC exposure.
Notes

Receptor Setup > Receptor Defaults
Receptor Defaults
These parameters are the rad default values for

the given receptor. When this receptor is then
chosen on the rad window, the parameters will
default to these values, provided the memory
option is set to default. The default selections are
as follows:
Technique (cm mAs and cm AEC available only

for CMP 200 Power Unit)
Focus
Fields (technique must be selected to AEC)
Film Screen (technique must be selected to AEC)
Voltage (kV)
Current (mA)
Time (ms)
Density (technique must be selected to AEC)
Note:
This screen is only available if
Memory option is set to Default on
the Receptor Properties tab
Notes
Menu
Checked- means fluoro

Receptor Setup > Inputs exposure allowed on this
receptor using the remote fluoro
footswitch wired into TB6 5-6 on
All the terminal block notations below the Room Interface Board
are on the Room Interface Board.
The active input is shown in red.
The voltage source is shown in blue
The Exposure Footswitches

on an MPi are wired into the TB6 9-10
Remote Exp, Prep and TB6 7-8
Fluoro locations (Receptors 3 TB6 5-6
& 6)
TB3 6-7
Thermal switch SW1 is an TB3 4-5
input from a thermal switch TB6 3-4
on the x-ray tube TB2 6-7
Bucky Contacts signal from TB2 4-5
the Wallstand on an RXi is TB4 8-9
used to allow exposures TB4 6-7
(Receptor 4) TB4 4-5
Door Interlock is an input TB5 11-12
from a door switch- No X
Click HERE for An X in the box means this input
means the door interlock is
Room Interface is active.
ignored (override)
Board picture No X means this input is ignored.
Notes
Menu
Receptor Setup > Outputs
All the terminal block An X in the box means this

notations below are on the output is active.
Room Interface Board.
The active output is shown
in red.
The voltage source is
shown in blue
TB2 12-11
TB2 1-2
TB1 12-11
TB1 1-2
TB6 12-11
TB3 12-11
TB6 2-1
Dry TB3 1-2
Contacts TB4 11-12
Click HERE for Room Light can be used to

Room Interface drive an x-ray on warning Bucky 2 is used to drive the
Board picture light. Wallstand Grid on an RXi
Put an X in the boxes when (Receptor 4)
you wish the light to come on.
Notes

Auto Tube Calibration
Tube Calibration (Filament)

Either tube one or tube two can be calibrated for both
focal sizes. Upon launching, the generator is placed into
calibration state. The existing calibration data is now
wiped out. At this time, no changes can be made to the
rad or fluoro settings which is why the controls become
disabled.
To start the tube calibration process, press and

continuously hold the x-ray exposure button. The current
measurements are updated on the window. The process
will stop when the last measurements are made, thus the
generator will return to normal mode, the tube calibration
window will remain static and the close button will be TIP
enabled. Another calibration can be started at this point. This calibration will not work unless the Room
Door and X-ray Tube Thermal Switch 1
Press ‘Close’ to exit tube calibration. This button is not Interlocks are shorted on the Room Interface
enabled during the tube calibration process. Board.
TB4: 4-5 Room Door
The tube calibration may be prematurely terminated by TB 4: 8-9 Thermal Switch 1
releasing the x-ray switch. In this case, an error is Roll Over to
reported, however, the process may then be restarted view Jumper
again or the utility closed down. Location
Notes
Menu
Channel Number
AEC Setup & Calibration > AEC Setup Select one of the
four AEC
Four Channels Channels that can
Three Film Screen be connected to
Combinations this generator.
These refer to four
The Film/Screens channel
contain the same connectors on the
response curve for all AEC Interface
Channels. Board.
The Gain Pot on the Roll Over X

Fields
AEC Board affects all the Enable which
Film/Screen Calibrations Chambers are
on that Channel only. selectable by the
customer in
Graph
Application Mode.
Points on the graph can
be edited to change the
Green means cell
kV response.
is active (looks
grey on Infimed
screen).
AEC Channel Setup
Field Comp. Black means cell is
Used to balance disabled.
The defaults for each AEC channel are
the ion chambers
set here. Each setting is specific to the
selected channel number, which can
be changed via the option buttons on
the tab.
Notes

AEC Setup & Calibration > Film Screen
Options RLF Compensation
Film Screen Active Used to compensate for
Enable which Film/Screen the effect of non
buttons are available to the reciprocity experienced
customer in applications mode during long exposures.
When the Exposure

passes the time
indicated (50, 500,
1000ms) the AEC
reference value is slowly
increased by the
percentage shown.
Multiple Spot
Compensation
Used to compensate for
smaller film formats
Film/Screen Gain when film division is
Used as an overall gain tweak for each of selected.
the film/screens.
Currently, not implemented- pots R1-R4 on
the AEC Bd are used for gain adjustment.
Notes

AEC Setup & Calibration > Film Screen
Cal
Film Screen Cal

The film screen cal is represented by the thick, FS Reference
solid black line on the AEC calibration plot. The Used to compensate for
cal points may be changed by either clicking on for the effect different
the graph or adjusting the value in the kVs have on the
corresponding text box. When this occurs, the darkening of the film.
voltage of the generator will be set to the kV of
the film screen reference that is being adjusted.
Notes

AEC Setup & Calibration > Density
Density
Each of the sixteen densities are
also plotted as ratios of the film
screen reference. Normally, the
densities appear as thin grey lines.
When selected, the current density
is shown as a solid red line. The
density may be adjusted only by
using the spin controls or entering
text directly into the text box. Density
Used to set the change in density.
For both film screen reference and Density change with respect to the
density, the current film screen can Density 0 setting is:
be adjusted by using the option 1+ (Density Value/10)
buttons located above the plot.
Notes

AEC Setup & Calibration > Digital
Options
Digital Rad Curve: Select one of three

digital rad stations
Digital Gain: Set the AEC Gain-not
used.
II Spot Compensation: Compensate
for different II FOV.
II DSA Compensation: Compensate
for different II FOV in DSA mode.
II Cine Compensation: Compensate
for different II FOV in Cine mode.
Notes

AEC Setup & Calibration > Digital Rad
Cal
Digital RAD Cal

Set the kV Compensation factors for
different kV values.
Notes

Tube Selection > kW Ratings at 100ms Tube Selection
The defaults for the current tube can be modified as well as changing
either tube one or two by downloading a new tube from the tube data
library. The tube library displays the list of tubes as found in the current
directory. A different directory can be selected by pressing the “Change
Library Path” button. The tube selection utility is made up of six parts.
kW Ratings at 100 ms
For both focus sizes
and speeds, the
maximum allowable kW
(power delivered to the
tube) can be set in
increments of 100 W.
Notes

Tube Selection > Filament Parameters
Filament Parameters
This includes standby and maximum
filament currents for up to three focal
spot sizes plus filament boost and
preheat times.
Notes

Tube Selection > Anode Heating
Anode Heating
The anode warning and
limit levels are set here.
Notes

Tube Selection > Tube Settings
Tube Settings
Includes maximum tube
voltage and small filament
current settings and the
permissible tube speed.
Notes

Tube Selection > Tube Library
Tube Library
The library contains a database of X-ray tube types.
Each tube file has information on the tube operating
parameters.
If you wish to change the tube model for the current
tube number, highlight the desired tube by clicking
the name with the mouse (you may need to scroll
through the list) and then press the ‘Download’
button. You can also change the path that contains
the tube data files by pressing ‘Change Library
Path’, which will bring up a dialog box containing a
drive and directory list box. Note only files with the
extension ‘bin’ and of the proper format are listed.
Notes

Generator Limits
Generator Limits
Set up the maximum and minimum power and
current levels permitted. Included is the maximum
generator power (kW), the maximum g enerator
current (mA), the minimum generator current (mA)
and the maximum generator current-time (mAs).
Notes
Menu
Fluoro Setup > Fluoro Setup
Enable Auto
Fluoro
50
550
Fluoro ABS Enable: Check to turn on Auto

Fluoro
Min & Max Fluoro Voltage: Sets the range
of kV Voltage
Fluoro ABS Default: Sets the default for
Auto Fluoro. None means stays at previous
setting. I/I Modes: Select number of II FOV
Fluoro/Rad kV Def: Selects: Curve 1- Fluoro Timer Mode: Select Fluoro warning time.
3: fluoro kV to rad kV transfer curve SID Compensation: Used to allow a greater range of
Off: No transfer characteristic exposure technique before blocking at the '10R/min'
None: Use previous setting limit in auto fluoro. Without SID Comp the dose limit
HLF and PF Select: Chose if the feature system would always assume minimum SID, thus
can be selected from the console or blocking lower dose-rate exposures at larger SIDs.
remotely. Enter max and min SID (cm) in boxes.
Notes

Fluoro Setup > Fluoro ABS
ABS
Level 0 to 3: Defines the ABS servo voltage
for each of the fluoro dose curves (High,
Medium and Low). The value in the box is
the actual ABS regulation voltage and can
be measured with a DVM between TP8 and
TP9 on the Generator Interface Bd.
Increasing this voltage will increase the
dose-rate.
ABS Gain: gain factor in determining ABS
stabilization (hunting for value) too high -
fast ABS response causes hunting to o low -
too slow
ABS Initial kV: Starting kV for auto fluoro
ABS Deadband: Defines servo dead band
as a percent of the Level voltage
ABS Delay: Time (ms) before ABS kicks in
(continuous fluoro only)
ABS Curve Def: Selects Default ABS curve
or none (stays at previous setting)
Signal Gain: Sets the value of a digital 'pot'
on an Op-amp which is processing the ABS
Signal. Range 0 to 100
Mag mA Multiplier: Multiplies the mA by
this factor as II FOV is changed. Referenced
off Mag 0.
Notes

Fluoro Setup > Fluoro ABS Curves
ABS Curves 1 to 3: Enable the curves and define

the kV to mA relationship.
Notes

Fluoro Setup > Fluoro Dose Limits
Dose Limits
Sets the maximum mA for different kV
values at both maximum and minimum
SID for both Manual and Auto (ABS)
Fluoro.
This is used to keep the maximum fluoro

dose-rate below the legal limit (usually
around 10R/min ).
Roll Over to the

Measurement Setup for
Dose Limits
Notes

Fluoro Setup > PF Setup
Pulsed Fluoro Enable: Click to turn on Pulsed

Fluoro
Pulsed Fluoro Setup

PF Default: Power on default. Select between On,
Off or None (use last setting).
PPS Default: Pulse rate default
PF Sync Freq: Set to 60Hz.
PF ms: Set Pulse time
PF mA: Set Pulse current
MAG ms Multiplier: Multiplies the ms by this factor

to change the pulse width as II FOV is changed.
Referenced off Mag 0.
PPS Setup: Enable which pulse rates are available

Notes

Fluoro Setup > PF ABS
PF Integration: Integrates the ABS signal from the

image chain. Not Checked as the Infimed system
PF ABS Initial kV: Starting kV for Pulsed fluoro
integrates the signal.
PF ABS Deadband: Defines servo dead band as a
PF ABS Curve Def: Selects Default ABS curve or
percent of the Level voltage.
none (stays at previous setting).
PF Signal Gain: Sets the value of a digital 'pot' on
PF ABS Levels
an Op-amp which is processing the ABS Signal.
Level 0 to 3: Defines ABS servo voltage for each
Range 0 to 100.
kV/mA curve.
PF ABS Gain: Gain factor in determining ABS
PF/HLF ABS Compensation: Specifies the
stabilization (hunting for value) too high - fast ABS
percentage adjustment to PF ABS lev el for the
response causes hunting too low - too slow.
different pulse rates. Applies to Pulsed Fluoro and
PF ABS Delay: Time (ms) before ABS kicks in
High Level Pulsed Fluoro.
(continuous fluoro only).
Notes

Fluoro Setup > PF ABS Curves
PF mA Curves 1 to 3: Enable the curves and define

the kV to mA/ms relationship.
Notes

Fluoro Setup > PF Dose Limits
mA Dose Limits
values at both maximum and minimum SID
.
ms Dose Limits
Sets the maximum ms for different kV
SID.

dose-rate below the legal limit (usually
around 10R/min ).
Roll Over to the

Dose Limits
Notes

Fluoro Setup > High Level Fluoro
1.5
High Level Fluoro Mode: Enable High Dose fluoro

mA Factor: Multiplies normal (non High Level)
fluoro mA by this value
ABS Levels: Levels 0 to 3- Defines ABS servo
voltage for each kV/mA curve.
Mag mA Multiplier: Multiplies the mA by this factor
as II FOV is changed. Referenced off Mag 0.
Dose Limits: Sets the maximum mA for different kV
values in High Level Fluoro.
This is used to keep the maximum fluoro dose-rate

below the legal limit (usually around 20R/min ).
Notes

Fluoro Setup > High Level PF
High Level PF: Enable High Dose Pulsed Fluoro
Mag ms Multiplier: Multiplies the pulse time by this

factor as II FOV is changed. Referenced off Mag 0.
ABS Levels: Levels 0 to 3- Defines High Pulsed
Fluoro ABS servo voltage for each kV/mA curve.
HPF Factor: Set Pulse width and mA levels for Mag
0.
HPF PPS Select: Enable which pulse rates are
available.
Notes

Fluoro Setup > HPF Dose Limits
mA Dose Limits
values at both maximum and minimum SID
.
ms Dose Limits
Sets the maximum ms for different kV
SID.

dose-rate below the legal limit.
Roll Over to the

Dose Limits
Notes

Fluoro Setup > F/R kV Curves
FL/ Rad kV Curves 1 to 3: Enable the

curves and define the Fluoro kV to Rad
kV relationship.
Notes

DAP Setup
DAP
Enable or disable the DAP function
device. This setting applies to both DAP
devices if two DAP devices are used.
DAP Mode
IND: The generator makes and displays
individual DAP measurements for each
tube.
SUM: The generator sums the DAP
measurement from both tu bes, and DAP Printer
displays the single summed
measurement when either tube is
selected.
DAP Printer
Device Type 1 and 2
Allows selection of the DAP printer type, or disabling of
Selects the DAP device.
the DAP printer function. This is only available with the
0 = PTW PX-T11020
DAP printer option.
1 = Gammex RMI 841S
OFF: Disables the DAP printer function.
2 = VacuTec VacuDAP 2004
DPU414: Selects the Seiko Instruments DPU-414
3 = Scanditronix-Wellhöfer 120-131
printer.
SLP200: Selects the Seiko Instruments SLP-200 printer.
For Option 3 set jumper JW1 (for DA P 1)
Roll Over for more between 1-2, for all others in position 2-3. Same
details about this for DAP 2 but use jumper JW2.
screen
Notes

Air Kerma Setup
Air Kerma
This is a way of calculating the dose
received by the patient based on the
exposure technique and filter used
without the need for an actual dose
chamber.
When Air Kerma is enabled the DAP

function will be disabled.
On RXi systems in North America, Air

Kerma must be enabled on tube 1.
The right side of the setup box is used

during calibration.
Exposure dose values me asured at
different kVs for each of the filter
selections. mAs is set at the mAs
reference value.
Roll Over for more

details about this
screen
Notes

Date and Time
Date and Time Utility Help

This utility allows the user to view and modify the
generator’s date and time.
Upon launching, the program will retrieve both

the date and time of the generator and of the
user’s system (computer). Only the computer
date and time is periodically updated; both are
displayed in the appropriate boxes above. The
date and time of the generator can be modified.
The user may lock in the date and time of the

generator with that of the computer by checking
the auto button near the bottom left corner of the
window. During this time, the generator and
computer displays will be equivalent. Unchecking
the auto button will halt the generator from
following the computer date and time. Pressing
‘Refresh’ causes the program to reque st the
generator date and time once again and update
the display.
Notes

Error Log
Error Log
The user can view all the errors that have
occurred during the operation of the generator.
The generator error log can contain up to 200
instances. No facility exists for modifying the
error log in any way. Only errors which occur
during exposures are shown.
Initially the latest error is displayed. This would

be indicated as error one (1). Clicking the right
arrow key will display earlier occurring errors.
Included within the display is the date and time
of the occurrence, the error code and message Use the Arrows to Click HERE to see
and the generator parameters that were set at step through the error an Error Log File
the time the error occurred. log. Maximum of 200
error entries Note: The Error
The generator parameter display area of the Log File can be
error log is divided into rad and fluoro sections. viewed using
Only one of the sections is relevant for each Notepad
error, depending on the exposure taken.
A feature of the error log utility is the ability to

upload the entire error log to a .txt data file.
This can be invoked by pressing ‘Save File'’.
Notes

Generator Statistics
This utility will display the number of
radiographic exposures taken by tubes one and
two, the amount of time that fluoro was on in
hours and the total number of radiographic
exposures (a sum of the first two quantities).
Each measurement, with the exception of the
total number of rad exposures taken, can be
reset to zero immediately by pressing the
appropriate reset button.
The data can be saved to a text file by pressing

‘Save File’ and entering the desired filename.
The default file extension given is “gst”. Click on Save to File to
save a Generator
Statistics File
Roll Over to see How

to Backup the
Notes

Generate Installation Report
Installation Report
Click HERE to see a The Installation Report

Generator Installation File can be saved to
Report File your Laptop
Notes
Service Mode using the Control Console
Procedure
1. On the Interface Bd 25S3, in
the Positioner Cabinet, enable
the service mode by putting put
Switch SW1-1 to the ON Position
Display Display
Roll Over
Code Value
2. Select the Code and Value

using the buttons shown in Fig.1
Increase/
Decrease
3. Press ENTER button to save a
Code
new setting or RESET to return
to initial value
Reset
Enter Reset
Increase/
Decrease
Value
Fig. 1 Positioner Console
Notes
Swing Out Panel Interface Board

25S3
CPU Board 25S1
Procedure for Connecting Laptop

1. Power off system
2. Enter the Positioner Cabinet and swing
out the panel with the Interface Board
mounted on it. This will provide access to
the CPU Board.
3. At the bottom of the CPU Board look for
Connector CN3 (center connector of three
serial connectors behind ribbon cable). If a
cable is already plugged into the connector
Top of Positioner Cabinet
unplug it and plug in Laptop Service cable
(standard null mode cable- GE Part
No Serial Number 2128821)
Port on Click HERE for
4. Power on system and open up
Laptop? an Overview of
TeleService service software on laptop
Click HERE the Software
Notes
TeleService from Digital PC

If the System has the Digital Option,
TeleService can be run through the
Digital PC
Click on Start

Windows Desktop Screen
Procedure
1. Bring up the Windows Desktop on the Digital
monitor.
Console with Digital System 2. Click on the START icon, select Programs.
Option Click HERE for
3. From the pop-up box select
an Overview of
OperaTeleService then select GmmTerminal.
the Software
Click on START Icon above to try it out
Notes
Close all
Version 2.1 Positioner Service Software- TeleService Windows
Error Log
Click on Informations
Utility
then Message Display
Click on Utility
Click on pc to
establish
communications EEprom Files FCEeprom Files
with the Positioner
Click on Click on Allarm Click on Setup Click on FC Click on Click on Click on

EEprom Files Files to open a to configure/ Eeprom Files Informations Interface to Table
to open a backed up file calibrate the to open a file to view Error view input/ feedback to
backed up file showing the Positioner showing pot log and other output data view
showing all the Error Log Click on Setup limit info. movement
Code settings to Backup & voltages readouts
restore
configure/
calibrate data
TeleService
Teleservice service software can be used to:
y Configure Positioner
y Calibrate Positioner
y Backup and Restore Positioner Data
y View Error Log
y View Potentiometer Voltages
y View Stepper Motor step positions
y View Movement end-stop limits
Notes
TeleService: Setup (Calibration & Configuration)
Code and Value

Click HERE for a readout
complete listing of
Codes and Values
Use these buttons to
increase/decrease
Use these buttons to the value of the Code
go to the desired
Code
Press Enter to save.
For calibrations drive
the positioner to
desired location
then press enter.
These buttons
highlight to allow
drive of movement if
Password 456 was
entered and if the
code selected
Click on Backup to save the Click on Restore to retrieve the authorizes
Calibration and Configuration Calibration and Configuration movement
Data Data
Note: The Backup icon is only Note: The Retrieve icon is only
active when the Code is 0. active when the Code is 0.
Click to see procedure Click to see procedure
RETURN
Notes
TeleService: Interface
Console's Button Visualization

Console's Joystick Visualization
Shows the buttons

which are active on
the Console
Shows the status of

the Joysticks
RETURN
Notes
TeleService: Interface
Host's Digital Output
Host's Digital Input
Out4 Out1
Out8 Out5
Note: Out 1 refers to LED Lv49.

Add 48 to the Out number to
get the LV number
Shows the active
LEDs on the 25S3
Interface Board
Click on
Click on
for a full listing the
for a full listing the
LEDs, also look
LEDs, also look in in Bookmarks
Bookmarks
under
under LEDs/Positioner/Interface
LEDs/Positioner/Interface
Bd Bd
Out48 Out45
RETURN
Notes
Table Elevation Information

Table Tilting Information
Graph shows
Graph shows
feedback
feedback
from joystick
from joystick
Button
Button
Status
Status
Displays information on:

Pot Feedback
Pot Pot
Feedback
Limit Voltages
Pot Button
Limit Voltages
Activation Status
Button Activation Status RETURN
Notes
TeleService: Table Feedback
Collimator
Collimator Perpendicular
Parallel (Lateral) Blades
(Longitudinal) Blades Information
Information

y Pot Feedback
Displays information
y Pot Limit Voltages
on: y Button Activation Status
y Pot Feedback
y Button Activation
Status
Button Status
Button Status
RETURN
Notes
TeleService: Table Feedback

Compressor and Transveral (Lateral)
Table-top
Cassette Dimensions

y Pot Feedback
Displays informationy on:
Cassette Size
y Compressor Drivey Cassette
Buttons Status
y Compressor Position
y Compressor Status
y Lateral table-top Drive Buttons
RETURN
Notes
Cassette Carriage Longitudinal (head

Cassette Tray In/Out
to foot) Drive (Crossed)
Current position

Drive Buttons
Displays information
Stepper Motoron:
Counts
Current Position
Drive Buttons
Stepper Motor Counts
Current Position
RETURN
Notes
EEProm Data
Shows a list of the values for all of the codes.

This list can be saved to the Digital PC or your laptop
The saved file can be viewed with

y Notepad
y Wordpad
y Click on EEPROM FILE on the main
Click on Save to TeleService screen to open the file for
save this information viewing. This can also be viewed offline.
Click to see.
RETURN
Notes
Code Data
Factory Default value Actual value

(set with Code 300) on this RXi
File shows all the

settings for each of the
codes
Example of Data File

RETURN
Notes
Backup Positioner Calibration/Configuration Data
Backup is complete
RETURN
Notes
Error Log
Shows the Error Log.

This list can be saved to the Digital PC or your laptop

y Notepad
y Wordpad
y Click on ALLARM FILE on the main
Click on File to save TeleService screen to open the file for
this information viewing. This can also be viewed offline.
Click to see.
RETURN
Notes
Error Log File
Op36664874.txt
File shows the Error Log

Op36664874.txt
Search for the file, select

then click on Open
Example of Error Log File RETURN

Notes
Potentiometer Limits Data
Shows the potentiometer voltages for the movement limits.

This table can be saved to the Digital PC or your laptop

Save y Notepad
y Wordpad
y Click on FCEeprom File on the main
TeleService screen to open the file for
Click on Save to viewing. This can also be viewed offline.
save this table.
Click to see.
RETURN
Notes
Potentiometer Limits Data File
File shows the Pot

voltage limits for each
movement
Example of Potentiometer Limits Data File RETURN

Notes
Power On
Wall Breaker
Control Area
Generator ON
Switch
Digital PC
Generator ON
ON Switch
Switch
1. Turn on the Wall Breaker (wear safety 2. Turn on the Generator, 3. Turn on the Digital
glasses when turning on the breaker) using the ON Switch System, using the ON
located on the left side of Switch on the front of the
the touch-screen console PC tower.
The digital system will
Precision RXi
automatically boot into the
2:59PM July 27, 2004
application mode.
MAIN MENU
ACQUISITION MODE 4. When the generator
SYSTEM UTILITIES boots up, select
TUBE WAR MUP Acquistion Mode
SYSTEM SHUTDOW N to go to the Applications
Screen.
Generator Console
Notes
Power Off
Closing Down the Digital System
1. Right Click the mouse in the
Image Area
2. Select Exit the Application

3. When Close the Current Patient
Session? appears select OK
4. When the Are you sure you want Wall Breaker
to exit the application? dialog box
appears select YES
5. When the WINDOWS desktop

appears, click on the START icon in
the lower left corner of the screen
6. Select Shutdown
Digital Monitor 7. The Shutdown Windows dialog
box will appear, select Shutdown in
the drop down box then click on OK.
8. Wait for the Digital System to
completely power down.
12. Turn off the Wall
Breaker (wear safety
glasses when turning off
the breaker)
Turning Off the Generator

9. Roll Over for Procedure
Notes Menu
Making an Exposure: Getting Started
Digital System: Entering

Patient Data
Before Exposures can be
1. Click on the Patient performed Patient Information
Directory Icon must be entered.
(the ACQUIRE icon will
be greyed out blocking
exposures until Patient
Follow the links on this page
information is entered) to see how to enter the data.
Digital Monitor
Notes Menu
Making an Exposure: Getting Started
Cringeworthy, Cuthbert
DR: Who
Acquire ID: 3459904

DOB: 7/27/1985
3:45:32PM
The Acquire button

is indented, which
means exposures
are permitted
Now you are ready to make

exposures.
Program the Generator
Console for the required
technique.
Digital Monitor
Notes
Click on Status button to see

Previous studies can network transfer status
be sent on the Images in the current
network by going to Status
Cringeworthy, Cuthbert study can be send on the
DR: Who network by clicking on the
the Patient Directory ID: 3459904
Click on the Patient DOB: 7/27/1985 DICOM or Printer Icons
Directory Icon 3:45:32PM
Shotsave folder-
3
showing number of 1. Click on the
images stored DICOM box
Notes
1. Highlight Cringeworthy, Cuthbert 1234567 7/27/1985 1 0 0

a Patient
2. Click on this icon

to send the complete
patient folder
Or click on this To check on the
icon to send a status of the sent
selected study only images go back
to the Acquisition
screen and click
on the STATUS
button
Click HERE to see
Patient Directory
Notes
Worklist, Query/Retrieve and Media Import/Export
Click on the Patient

List Icon
Digital Monitor
Notes
Patient List
Patient list Worklist Media Import Media Export Query/Retrieve
Click on these TABS

to go to the selected
screen
Patient List Screen
Notes
Media Import RETURN to

Patient List
Media Import
This features allows the
importation of archived
images from another Import
device, such as a central Buttons
storage network or CD.
Archived images on a
CD cannot be reviewed
directly from the CD and
must be imported into
the local database for 1
review.
Roll Over for

more information 2
Media Import Screen
Notes
Query/Retrieve RETURN to
Patient List
Query/Retrieve
This feature allows the Digital
to search DICOM databases
for patient information and
images that can be imported
into the system via the
Verify
DICOM Retrieve function.
C-Echo test
The system acts as a DICOM
Query/Retrieve Service Class
User to perform this function. Query
Button
Roll Over for

more information
Status
Button
Import
Button
Query/Retrieve Screen
Notes
Worklist RETURN to
Patient List
Worklist
Use the Worklist feature to
search a database =
(usually a centralized
database connected via a
DICOM network) for The patient schedule for the day will be displayed in this screen. If no
patients based on specific patient information appears in this screen, Execute Query, Auto Query or
criteria. Search for groups Manual Search will need to be activated
of patients, or a specific
patient file. This feature is Add CR to Modalities
used to search by Patient selection box
Data only - not images Click HERE
Verify
C-Echo test to
Worklist Provider
Manual Search
Roll for details
Execute Query
Used to run the Auto
Query search settings
Import
Auto Query
Highlight Patients in the retrieved
Click for details
Patient List and then use this
Worklist Screen button to import the patients into
the local Precision Patient List
Notes
Auto Query RETURN
Auto Query is used to search for Patient files from either

the local system or any system that is linked to a DICOM
network. The Worklist retrieved will contain all patients
scheduled for the time period specified in the search.
New search criteria can be configured and saved.
Use these Search features to

search for patients.
Enable Auto Query and set the
parameters for the auto search
Select:
y Worklist database to
search (Worklist Provider)
y Local (this Precision) or
Any System
y Modality (RF or XA)
y Time
y Number of Patients
(replies)
Click on SAVE to save the
search criteria
Auto Query Screen
Notes
Media Export RETURN to

Patient List
Media Export
The Digital can send
patient data and images to
a remote device using the
DICOM standard. Typically,
data is sent to a DICOM
compliant network device
such as a remote PC, a
storage server, or media
device (CD-RW).
Roll Over for

more information
Media Export Screen

Export entire Export selected
Patient File study
Notes
Printer Setup RETURN to

Patient List
Print setup
Use this screen to setup the print
format, number of copies and print
features for the selected printer
Procedure
1. Select Printer from Drop-down box
Basement-Printer 2. Select Print format from drop-down
box- this is printer specific
12 on 1 3. select number of copies.
As Reviewed
Click this button to print with features
applied when image was last reviewed.
As Acquired
Click this button to print with features
applied when image was acquired.
PACE
Click PACE button (Post-Acquisition Copy and
Enhance) to select Edge Enhanc ement and
Contrast for this printing. The PACE feature
automatically enhances images as they are
sent to the printer. Clicking on PACE button will
activate Edge and Contrast buttons. Only when
PACE is activated can changes be made to
Edge or Contrast within the Print function.
Notes
32cm II:
Roll Over to see
how to access
Note: Newer II Principle:
Power Supplies The II Power Supply contains an
do not have the EEPROM, which stores the Grid voltage
DIP Switches. settings for all the II Mag modes.
TP 1
TP 2
TP 3
TP 4
TP 5
TP 6
E
The pots become Switch 1 acts as the Write Enable

ON OFF active once they switch, in the OFF position it allows the
are turned more pot values to be saved to the EEPROM.
5
than half a turn
4
To measure the voltages, connect a
3
DVM to the appropriate test-point.
2
1
Remember the DVM reading will only
change if Switch 1 is in the OFF
G1 position.
G2
G3 To Calibrate: Select the Mag mode
using the Positioner Console then adjust
Adjustment Pots
the appropriate pot (G1 for Edge Focus:
G1 Edge Focus
G2 for Centre Focus and G3 for Size).
G2 Centre Focus
G3 Size Adjustment II Power Supply Mag Mode
Buttons
Switches
Switch 1 is normally in the
ON position, this blocks any Test Points
Pot adjustment. Hook a DVM between the
OFF position allows test point and ground to read
adjustment of pots the Grid Voltages.
TP1 (G1) divided by 100
TP2 (G2) divided by 1000
Click for II Size Click for II Focus TP3 (G3) divided by 10000
Adjustment Adjustment Positioner Console
Notes
II Size Adjustment
1. On the Positioner console select normal (largest) field of view and manual
fluoro. Set SID to minimum.
2. Set fluoro kV to 50kV then fluoro, adjust technique (raise or lower the fluoro
kV, mA) to get an image. Stop fluoro.
3. Select Digital Mode on the Positioner Console and insert the II Sizing Gauge
on top of the II through the SFD as shown in Fig. 1. Center it on the II.
4. Switch DIP Switch 1, on the II Power Supply, to the OFF position (to allow
adjustment).
Note: Newer II Power Supplies do not have the DIP Switches. The pots
become active once they are turned more than half a turn Fig.1
II Sizing Gauge on II
5. Connect an DVM to Test Point 3 and Ground of the II Power Supply. Note
Part No.(40cm) 46-302601P1
down the voltage.
(32cm) 46-286486P2
6. Open up the collimator blades.
7. Go into Digital Service Mode and select Calibration>Overlay>Clear Circle

Mask, this will remove the blanking circle mask. Minimize the dialog box.
8. Put on a lead apron and fluoro.
9. Look at the monitor and adjust G3 so that the correct size is measured
across the image (see Fig.2). Click on box below for specifications chart. If G3
is changed by 5% or more recheck focus.
10. When complete, stop fluoro. Fig. 2

11. Note down the final G3 voltage from the DVM. Monitor Image showing II Sizing Gauge
12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 for the other Mag modes. Click for II Size
Return
Chart
Notes
Digital Radiographic AEC Calibration
Perform this procedure before the DSA dose procedure Click HERE for
background
information on AEC
Procedure
Initial Setup
1) Setup the system as shown in Fig. 1
y Grid out.
y Center Dosimeter in FOV and place 21cm above table-top (this
is 30cm above II).
y SID to 115cm (minimum SID)
y 2mm Cu in Collimator rails
Dose Curve A
2) Open up GenWare and sele ct SETUP (from toolbar) then AEC SETUP
and CALIBRATION. Click on: 2mm Cu in
y AEC SETUP tab: click on channel number 3 and check that receptor Collimator Rails
1 is highlighted. Under Media check that Digital is selected.
ROLL 1
y DIGITAL OPTIONS tab: under 'Digital Rad Curve' select '1'.

ROLL 2
21cm
y DIGITAL RAD CAL tab: Check that the values for all kV boxes are set
to 30. Click on Apply.
ROLL 3
3) On the Positioner Console select the 32cm FOV (40cm II- Mag 1: 32cm I
I Mag 0) on the image intensifier.
Fig.1 Setup NEXT
(Grid in) as shown in Fig.1.
Notes 2. Put SID at minimum.
3. In Generator service mode go to Fluoro Setup>PF Dose Limits and
check/set ms dose limits for both maximum and minimum SID to 8ms.
Dose Curve A continued
Calculator 4. On the
4) On the GenWare home screen GenWare
select screen 1select
receptor Manual
(Digital) Fluoro
set the (ABS box
radiographic exposure factors to
unchecked), Pulsed Fluoro and a Pulsed Fluoro rate of 15pps (worst
75 KV, 50mA and AEC On, Density 0, Small Focal Spot and select I, for 'Film Screen' which
case). Set the kV to the value shown in the table (start with 125kV and
Dose Unit represents dose curve A (see ROLL
go down 4).
to 40kV).
Converter
5) Adjust potentiometer R93 5.onFluoro
AECand adjustfully
board the fluoro mA, so the
clockwise dose-rateshort
to disable is just below the
time compensation.
ROLL 4 legal limit (10R/min -aim for 9.5R/min).
Note: If the dose-rate is too low and the mA will not increase, go to the
6) Make a single exposure, adjust
Genware Potentiometer R3 (Gain)
PF Dose Limits screen on thetheAEC
and increase board
mA (40mA is until dose of No
ROLL 5 0.113mR/exposure is read on the dose
maximum) meter
for this (Note: CW decreases dose) (see ROLL 5).
kV setting. Exposure
Short Time Compensation 6. Go to the PF Dose Limits Tab and enter the mA value obtained
(step 5) in the mA Dose Limit box by the kV selected.
7) Set the technique to 85kV, 100mA,

7. Change kVAEC
on theOn,
GenWare screen andI,repeat
Film/Screen Small Focal
steps 5 andSpot.
6.
8) Make a single spot exposure.
8. Drivetime
9) The goal is to get an exposure the SID to maximum7and
of between repeat(this
to 9ms stepsis4 to 7 and enterto
equivalent the0.7 to 0.9 post mAs
results in the maximum SID column.
at 100mA), to do this increase/decrease mA or change kV until the correct exposure time is obtain ed.
10) Place dose-meter 21cm above table-top as ear lier.
11) Make a single exposure with technique from step 9, adjust pot R93 on the AEC board to obtain a
dose of 0.113mR.
Note: R93 affects R3 adjustment, so go back to step 4 and check dose and re -adjust R3 if
necessary.
Dose Curve B
1) On the GenWare home page under 'Film Screen' select II, which represents dose curve B.
2) In GenWare AEC Setup screens, click on DIGITAL OPTIONS tab and under 'Digital Rad
Curve' select '2'.
3) Make a single exposure, measure dose, if not correct click on 'DIGITAL RAD CAL' tab and
BACK adjust value of 75kV box until a dose of 0.185mR/exposure is read on the dose meter. When NEXT
complete copy the value from the 75kV box to all the other kV boxes. Click on App ly.
Notes

Dose Curve C
1) On the GenWare home page under 'Film Screen' select III, which represents dose curve C.
2) In GenWare AEC Setup screens, click on DIGITAL OPTIONS tab and under 'Digital Rad
Curve' select '3'.
3) Make a single exposure, measure dose, if not correct click on 'DIGITAL RAD CAL' tab and
adjust value of 75kV box until a dose of 0.221mR/exposure is read on the dose meter. When
complete copy the value from the 75kV box to all the other kV boxes. Click on App ly.
Setting the Camera Iris Position
Dose A (Low)
1) On the GenWare home screen set the radiographic exposure factors to 75 KV, 50mA and AEC On, D ensity 0,
Small Focal Spot and 'Film Screen' set to I, which represents dose curve A.
2) On the Digital, enter the Service Application, click on the CALIB button, select System Manual box then select Iris
and click on the Spot tab. In the Mode box select Spot and in the Dose box Low should be selected. ROLL 6
3) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen , click the RUN button then press and hold expose button o n the
Generator until the 'Calibration Step Successful' dialog box appears. Note that the value displayed value in the
Measuring Field Level window of the Spot Iris calibration screen should read 500 (± 25) for 40cm II or 680 for 32cm II.
ROLL 7
4) Click the button SAME FOR ALL FOV button on the Spot Iris calibration screen, the button will now read
CALIBRATE FOVs.
BACK NEXT
Notes

Dose B (Normal)
5) On the GenWare home screen set the radiographic exposure factors to 75 KV, 50mA and AEC On, Density 0, Small
Focal Spot and 'Film Screen' set to II, which represents dose curve B.
6) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen, click on the button CALIBRATE FOVs. In the Dose box Normal should be
selected.
7) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen , click the RUN button then press and hold expose button on the Generator
until the 'Calibration Step Successful' dialog box appears. Note that the value displayed value in the Measuring Field
Level window of the Spot Iris calibration screen should read 500 (± 25) for 40cm II or 680 for 32cm II.
CALIBRATE FOVs.
Dose C (High)
9) On the GenWare home screen set the radiographic exposure factors to 75 KV, 50mA a nd AEC On,
Density 0, Small Focal Spot and 'Film Screen' set to III, which represents dose curve C.
10) 6) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen, click on the button CALIBRATE FOVs. In the Dose box
High should be selected..
11) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen , click the RUN button then press and hold expose button on
the Generator until the 'Calibration Step Successful' dialog box appears (ROLL 3). Note that the value
displayed value in the Measuring Field Level window of the Spot Iris calibration screen should read 500 (±
25) for 40cm II or 680 for 32cm II.
12) Click on the SAME FOR ALL FOV button on the Spot Iris calibration screen.
Finishing Up
BACK 13) Click the EXIT button on the Digital calibration screen. When the "Do You Wish to save the
Calibrations?" question appears, click on the YES button. FINISHED
Notes
DSA AEC Calibration
Perform this procedure after the Normal Spot dose procedure Click HERE for
background
information on AEC
Procedure
Initial Setup
1) Setup the system as shown in Fig. 1
y Grid out.
y Center Dosimeter in FOV and place 21cm above table-top (this
is 30cm above II).
y SID to 115cm (minimum SID)
y 2mm Cu in Collimator rails
Dose Curve A
2) Open up GenWare and sele ct SETUP (from toolbar) then AEC SETUP
and CALIBRATION. Click on: 2mm Cu in
y AEC SETUP tab: click on channel number 4 and check that receptor Collimator Rails
6 is highlighted. Under Media check that Digital is selected.
ROLL 1
y DIGITAL OPTIONS tab: under 'Digital Rad Curve' select '1'.

ROLL 2
21cm
y DIGITAL RAD CAL tab: Check that the values for all kV boxes are set
to 30. Click on Apply.
ROLL 3
3) On the Positioner Console select the 32cm FOV (40cm II- Mag 1: 32cm I
I Mag 0) on the image intensifier.
Fig.1 Setup NEXT
1. Set up the system with the dosimeter placed 30cm above table-top
Notes
DSA AEC Calibration
2. Put SID at minimum.
Calculator 3. In Generator service mode go to Fluoro Setup>PF Dose Limits and

Dose Curve A continued check/set ms dose limits for both maximum and minimum SID to 8ms.
4) On the GenWare home screen select receptor 6 (DSA) (mask icon on digital applications scre en)
Dose Unit 4. On the GenWare screen select Manual Fluoro (ABS box
Converter
set the radiographic exposure factorsPulsed
unchecked), to 75 Fluoro
KV, 250mA and Fluoro
and a Pulsed AEC rateOn,ofDensity 0, Small Focal Spot
15pps (worst
and select I, for 'Film Screen' which
case). represents
Set the dose
kV to the value curve
shown A table
in the . (start with 125kV and
go down to 40kV).
ROLL 4
5. Fluoro and adjust the fluoro mA, so the dose-rate is just below the
5) Adjust potentiometer R94legal
on limit
AEC(10R/min
board -aim
fullyforclockwise
9.5R/min). to disable short time compensation.
6) Make a single exposure, Genware PF Dose Limits screen
adjust Potentiometer and increase
R4 (Gain) theAEC
on the mA (40mA
boardis until dose of No
maximum) for this kV setting. Exposure
0.543mR/exposure is read on the dose meter (Note: CW decreases dose).
6. Go to the PF Dose Limits Tab and enter the mA value obtained
ROLL 5
(step 5) in the mA Dose Limit box by the kV selected.
7. Change kV on the GenWare screen and repeat steps 5 and 6.

Short Time Compensation
8. Drive the SID to maximum and repeat steps 4 to 7 and enter the
results in the maximum SID column.
7) Set the technique to 85kV, 250mA, AEC On, Film/Screen I, Small Focal Spot.
8) Make a single spot exposure.
9) The goal is to get an exposure time of between 7 to 9ms (this is equivalent to 1.75 to 2.25 post
mAs at 250mA), to do this increase/decrease mA or change kV until the correct exposure ti me is
obtained.
10) Place dose-meter 21cm above table-top as ear lier.
11) Make a single exposure with technique from step 9, adjust pot R94 on the AEC board to obtain a
dose of 0.543mR.
Note: R94 affects R4 adjustment, so go back to step 4 and check dose and re -adjust R3 if
necessary.
BACK NEXT
Notes
DSA AEC Calibration

Setting the Camera Iris Position
Dose A (Low)
1) On the GenWare home screen set the radiographic exposure factors to 75 KV, 250mA and AEC O n, Density
0, Small Focal Spot and 'Film Screen' set to I, which represents dose curve A.
2) On the Digital, enter the Service Application, click on the CALIB button, select System Manual box then select
Iris and click on the Spot tab. In the Mode box select Subtracted and in the Dose box Low should be selected.
ROLL 6
Measuring Field Level window of the Spot Iris calibration screen should read 500 (± 25) for 40cm II or 680 for
32cm II.
ROLL 7
CALIBRATE FOVs.
BACK NEXT
Notes
DSA AEC Calibration

Dose B (Normal)
5) On the GenWare home screen set the radiographic exposure factors to 75 KV, 250mA and AEC On, Density 0,
Small Focal Spot and 'Film Screen' set to II, which represents dose curve B.
6) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen, click on the button CALIBRATE FOVs. In the Dose box Normal should
be selected.
7) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen , click the RUN button then press and hold expose button on the
CALIBRATE FOVs.
Dose C (High)
9) On the GenWare home screen set the radiographic exposure factors to 75 KV, 250mA and AEC On, Density 0,
Small Focal Spot and 'Film Screen' set to III, which represents dose curve C.
10) On the Digital spot iris calibration screen, in the Dose box select High.
12) Click on the SAME FOR ALL FOV button on the Spot Iris calibration screen.
Finishing Up
13) Click the EXIT button on the Digital calibration screen. When the "Do You
Wish to save the Calibrations?" question appears, click on the YES button.
BACK FINISHED
Notes
No
Exposure
Normal Fluoro Dose Limits Adjustment Procedure Select Dose Limit Procedure
Normal Fluoro
1. Set up the system with the dosimeter placed 30cm above table-top
2. Put SID at minimum.

3. In Generator service mode go to Fluoro Setup>Fluoro Dose Limits
4. On the GenWare screen select Manual Fluoro (ABS box unchecked)

and set the kV to the value shown in the table (start with 125kV and go
down to 40kV).
5. Fluoro and adjust the fluoro mA, so the dose-rate is just below the
Place Dose Place a Lead
legal limit (10R/min). Aim for 9.5R/min.
Chamber 30cm Apron on the
above table-top. table-top to
Genware Fluoro Dose Limits screen and increase the mA (10mA is
Keep Grid in. protect the II.
maximum) for this kV setting.
Set SID to
minimum.
6. On the Fluoro Dose Limits Tab enter the mA value obtained (step 5)
in the Manual Limits mA box by the kV selected.
Note: Once the mA value reaches 10mA (maximum value), stop,
and fill out all the lower kV station maximum mA values as 10mA.
7. Change kV on the GenWare screen and repeat steps 5 and 6.
8. Drive the SID to maximum and repeat steps 4 to 7 and enter the
results in the Max SID mA column.
9. Copy over result from the Manual Limits columns into the ABS Limits
columns. Fig. 1 Setup
Notes
Camera Focus Adjustment One of 3 Set Lens

Screws Assembly Slot
1. On the Positioner console select 32cm FOV (Mag 1 on
40cm II: Mag 0 on 32cm II) and on Generator console
select manual fluoro.
2. Set fluoro kV to 60kV then fluoro, adjust technique

(raise or lower the fluoro kV, mA) to get an image. Stop
fluoro.
3. Place a Line Pair Phantom on the II cover, in the center

of the x-ray field, at a 450 angle.
4. On Digital Service home screen, set FNR (Integration)

(Σ icon) to 3 and Edge Enhancement to OFF.
Fig. 1 CCD Camera
5. In Digital Service mode, click on the IQA button and
select ROI Density tab. Select 'ROI Size’ so the box fits 8. Put on a lead apron
inside the line pair area. Select 'Update Continuously'. and fluoro. On the
Move the ROI box on the line pair phantom until it is near digital monitor, drag
limit of resolution but still inside the line pair area (see the ROI box so it is
Fig.2). A live update of the RMS value can be seen in the over the resolution
IQ Results box on this screen (see ROLL 1). limit of the Line Pair
ROLL 1 Phantom. Adjust the
6. Loosen the three set-screws around the camera lens focus until the RMS
using a 2.5mm Allen (see Fig.1). number is as large as
ROI Box inside
possible.
Line Pair Area
7. Insert an Allen wrench into one of the small holes in the
Lens Assembly Slot and rotate the lens (Fig.1). 9. When complete,
stop fluoro. Fig. 2 Line Pair Phantom
Notes
luoro II Size
Dose Fluoro Mode
Limits Adjustment Procedure II FOV Dose Units Setup Procedure
40cm Continuous Mag 0 uG/s 1. Grid Out.
p the system with the dosimeter placed 30cm above table-top
as shown in Fig.1.
2. Center Dosimeter in
Procedure FOV and place 21cm
D at minimum.
1. Set upthe system as shown in Fig.1. above table-top (this is
30cm above II).
erator service mode go to Fluoro Setup>PF Dose Limits and
2. On
ms dose theforDigital
limits System
both maximum gominimum
and to service
SID tomode
8ms. and
select Calib> 3. SID 115cm (minimum)
System Manual> Iris. Click on the Fluoro Tab. Make sure AGC 4. 2mm Cu in Collimator
e GenWare screen select Manual Fluoro (ABS box Rails
is enabled.
ed), Pulsed Fluoro and a Pulsed Fluoro rate of 15pps (worst
t the kV to the value shown in the table (start with 125kV and
3. On the Generator Touch-screen select:
to 40kV).
Manual Fluoro Mode
and adjust the fluoro mA, so the dose-rate is just below the
Set Fluoro kV to 75kV (kV can be set between
(10R/min -aim for 9.5R/min).
70 to 80 if
he dose-rate necessary)
is too low and the mA will not increase, go to the
2mm Cu in
PF Dose LimitsContinuous
screen and Fluoro
increase the mA (40mA is No
m) for this On
kV setting. Exposure Collimator Rails
the Positioner Console select Mag 0
he PF Dose Limits Tab and enter the mA value obtained
n the 4.
mA Fluoro and
Dose Limit boxadjust theselected.
by the kV fluoro mA to get the correct dose-rate.
e kV on the GenWare screen and repeat steps 5 and 6. Dose-rate at
Dose rate required at the 21cm above table-top is: 0,75 uG/s
Dose-meter
he SID to maximum and repeat steps 4 to 7 and enter the
the maximum SID column. 0,75 uG/s
5. On the Digital service screen, click on RUN and fluoro at the
21cm
correct dose-rate.
Repeat this procedure for all II FOV sizes and Pulsed Fluoro
Rates. Use the selection boxes above.
Note: When selecting Pulsed Fluoro on the generator, tap the

fluoro footswitch to see the radio button on the Digital Iris Cal
screen activate. Fig.1 Setup
Notes
oro Dose Limits Adjustment Procedure
e system with the dosimeter placed 30cm above table-top

shown in Fig.1.
Procedure Setup Procedure
1. Set up the system as shown in Fig.1
t minimum. 1. Grid OUT.
2. Minimum SID
2. Onmode
tor service the go
Digital System
to Fluoro go into
Setup>PF DoseService Mode and select
Limits and CALIB> (115cm)
s dose limits for both maximum and minimum SID to
SYSTEM MANUAL> ABS. Click on the ABS Level tab. 8ms.
3. 2mm Cu in
enWare screen select Manual Fluoro (ABS box Collimator Rails
3. Fluoro
Pulsed On theandGenerator touch-screen:
a Pulsed Fluoro rate of 15pps (worst
e kV to the value shown inkV
Set Fluoro the to
table
75kV(start with 125kV and
40kV).
Continuous Fluoro
Auto-Fluoro:
d adjust the fluoro mA, so the ON
dose-rate is just below the
Onfor
0R/min -aim the Positioner Console select Mag 0 FOV
9.5R/min).
dose-rate is too low and the mA will not increase, go to the
Dose Limits screen and increase the mA (40mA is No
or this4.
kVOn the Digital Screen click on RUN then
setting. fluoro. Exposure
PF Dose Limits Tabto

5. Continue and enter the
fluoro mAthe
until value obtained
'Calibrationstep is successful' box appears.
e mA Dose Limit box by the kV selected. 2mm Cu in
If the calibration fails check that the Auto Black box is checked (look
Collimator Rails
under
V on the Video
GenWare Level,
screen andthen
repeatAuto
stepsBlack tab)
5 and 6.
SID to6.maximum
Ensureand repeat
that steps 4 tocovers
all optical 7 and enter
andthe
access
ports to the camera and
e maximum SID column.
image intensifier are in place and that no stray room light is visible to the
camera.
7. Click on the ABS Response Tab and then without fluoroing click on
RUN.
8. Click on the Pulsed Fluoro radio button (select pulse fluoro on the
generator and tap the fluoro foot-switch for radio button to change) on
the digital and then without fluoroing click on RUN.
9. Exit the CALIB screen and select YES to save. Fig.1 Setup
Notes
Circle Mask & Alignment Adjustment

Circle Mask
Procedure (red circle)
1. In the Digital Service Mode go to CALIB>
SYSTEM MANUAL> OVERLAY (see ROLL 1).
2. Click on Outline Circle Mask (this just outlines the

blanking circle) and then minimize the overlay Adjust Camera Image so that
window. (see ROLL 1) it is symmetrical with the
Circle mask (i.e. the two
3. On the Main service screen click on the Invert yellow arrows should be
Image icon, this makes it easier to view the image equal)
(see Fig.1).
4. Select Mag 0 and open the collimator blades and

iris.
5. Remove the cover over the Camera , loosen the

six optics bolts (4mm Allen) and move the Camera
and Optics Assembly until the II Image Circle is
symmetrical with the Mask Circle (see ROLL2). Output Phosphor Circle from II Invert Image for
(grey circle) easy viewing
If symmetrical alignment is not possible with these
bolts then loosen the four bolts holding the camera Fig.1 Main Service Screen
(3mm Allen) and adjust the camera posi tion. showing the Circle Mask Image
Adjust back and forth between these two sets of bo lts
until symmetry is achieved.
Note: The camera bolts can also be used to rotate 7. On the Digital Monitor, maximize the Overlay
screen, click on the Manual Setting box and
the camera for alignment. Roll 1
using the slider adjust the Circle Mask size so
that the Circle Mask diameter maximizes the
6. Tighten the bolts.
viewing area of the monitor (see ROLL 1).
Roll 2
Notes
Pre-requisite: Collimator Light to X-ray Field CAUTION: Use this procedure a guide only.
Alignment has been performed Always use the procedure from the most
current documentation.
Tube Rotation Adjustment
1. Remove table-top (click on Table-top Removal
Procedure in bookmarks).
2. Remove cover over SFD. Light Field

3. Lift up the rear flexible cover because during
power on the inner under-table shutter could drive
ble
Cove
into this cover as it flops down. Power on system.
Shut er-table
SFD
er-ta
Select SFD receptor. Fully open the lateral &
Late Shutter
Rails
ible
longitudinal collimator blades. Turn on the
nd
collimator light and check the light field is centered
t er
Flex
nd
r al U
on the mechanical notch marks on the side of the
r al U
Re a r
SFD. If not rotate the X-ray tube.
Late
Click for details
Drive SID up and down and make sure the centre
of the light field stays consistently aligned with the
SFD lateral centre notches.
Tube Longitudinal Centering Adjustment

(factory set, adjustment not usually required)
4. Check the light field is centered between the
SFD rails in the longitudinal (head to foot) direction.
If not slide the X-ray tube in the head/foot direction. This notch marks the mechanical
centre position of SFD carriage
Click for details in the lateral plane
SFD
s just below the
Notes
crease, go to the
A (40mA is No
TIP Exposure
alue obtained
Procedure
ps 5 1.
andEnter
6. GenWare service mode.
and enter the
2. From the Toolbar select SETUP then TUBE
SELECTION then FILAMENT PARAMETERS.
Check to see that Standby current for both Large
and Small Filament is set to 2.3A. Adjust if
necessary (see ROLL 1).
3. From the Toolbar select SETUP then AUTO

TUBE CALIBRATION (see Fig.1).
4. Select Tube 1 and Small Filament.
5. Close the collimator blades and place a Lead

Apron on the table-top to protect the II.
6. Press the Exposure switch on the positioner

Fig 1: GenWare Service Screen showing
console until calibration is finished (exposures stop
Auto Tube Calibration Dialog Box
and rotor brakes after first filament cal: message
appears after the final filament cal, this takes
approx 6 mins Small - 10mins Large).
Roll 1
If exposures are not possible, it could be because
jumpers on the Room Interface Bd are not installed
(see ROLL 2). Also check the exposure switch on Roll 2
7. Wait 10 minutes for tube cooling
the console, it has a second set of contacts used
then select Large Filament and
only for this calibration & tube warm-up (see ROLL
repeat step 6.
3). Roll 3
Notes
Angle Readout Adjustment
Tube Stand Angle

Readout
Table Tilt Angle

Readout
Precision RXi
Display Panel on
Palpator Shaft
Adjustment Board Rollover for Adjustment

Procedure
Rear View of Panel
Notes
Inverse Square Law Calculator
Inverse Square Law

Calculator
Enter SID
Enter Dosimeter to II
Distance
Enter Desired II Input

Dose (Dose/rate)
Dose meter reading

required NaN
Reset Return
Notes
NDF Filter Drive
How to adjust the Neutral Density Filter if it 'sticks' whilst NDF Pot
driving. NDF
Note: The NDF filter should be in for Normal Spot and DSA Solenoid
Record and out for Fluoro.
Motor Drive Adjustment Procedure
1. Remove the CCD Camera cover.

Fig. 1 CCD Camera with cover removed
2. With a finger on the NDF Filter Drive Arm (see Fig. 2)
adjust the NDF pot on the CCD camera Interface Bo ard (see
Fig. 1) until any vibration stops, then turn the pot half a turn
CW.
3. Drive the filter in and out (prep to drive in and fluoro to drive
out) and adjust the pot again if the filter sticks.
ND Filter
drive arm
NDF Solenoid
Fig. 2 Close up of NDF Solenoid
Notes
Image Bleeding: Adjusting the N-Substrate Voltage

Procedure
1. Place 1mm of Copper on collimator rails and collimate to 8cm x 8cm field.
Overview
2. Enter the Digital Service Mode and select IQA> ROI Density. Click on the
'64 x 64' ROI size and 'Update Continuously' boxes. Roll Over for View
Go to Calib >System Manual >Video Level >Acq LUT tab, and check the
Fluoro Camera Mode Acquire LUT is set to Gamma 2
Go to the Iris tab > Fluoro tab, and uncheck the AGC State
R18
3. On the Generator Touch-screen select Manual Fluoro and set Fluoro kV
to minimum and mA to 2.0.
4. Fluoro and place the ROI box in the field are of the image. Slowly TP2 TP1
increase the fluoro kV and note the maximum density achieved in this area.
Maximum Density:
If the bright area 'bleeds' into the collimator blades then perform the
following adjustment.
5. Power off the system. Remove the cam era cover.

Fig. 1 CCD Camera
6. Connect a volt-meter, set to DC Volts, to TP1 and 2 on the Camera
Sensor Board (see Fig.1). Power on the system.
Enter the voltage reading here: 24.0 (should be between 20 to 28Vdc).
24.0
7. Adjust R18 until the voltage increases by 0.5V.
Vdc
8. On the Generator Touch-screen set Fluoro kV to minimum. WARNING
Make sure DC
9. Fluoro and with the ROI box placed in the un-attenuated area of the Volts are selected
image. Slowly increase the fluoro parameters and look for 'bleeding'. on the meter
before connecting.
Does Image Bleeding Occur? YES NO
Notes DIG
Camera Boot-up Sequence & LEDs

CCD Camera
Camera Boot up Sequence
When power is applied to the camera system , the

controlling software downloads to the FPGA and
performs an initialization.
During the first minute of boot-up, the iris motor

drives to the full in position, pause, then drives to
the full out position as the camera calibrates.
Once the Iris calibration is complete, the ND Filter
drives to its full in and out positions.
LEDs
CCD Correction D4, D3, D2, D1
Board
D4: ON when an Iris jam is detected
D3: ON when camera is acquiring an
offset (flickers after power up)
D2: ON when camera is in Analog Mode
D1: OFF when the FPGA downloads the
program and starts to run
Notes
II Sizing Gauge
Part Numbers: Grid Uniformity Tool
(40cm) 46-302601P1 Part Number: 45560088
CV Phantom (32cm) 46-286486P2 Line Pair or
Part Number: (8 inch) Funk Tool Light Meter (Wellhöfer)
46-262707G1 Part Number: Part Number: 2319223
(12 inch) 46-156797G1 46-197871P2
Plexi-glas
25cm x 25cm x 25mm DASI Alignment Tool
block (10" x 10" x 1") Part Number : 46-193456G1
Leeds Test Phantom Part Number: 46-270117P1
TOR 18FG Phantom: Part
Number: 2109721 25cm x 25cm x 12mm
TOR CDR Phantom: Part block (10" x 10" x ½") NEXT
Number: 2109721-2 Part Number: 46-270117P2
Notes
Specialty Tools
A B C
332mm
467mm
471mm
Set of Copper Plates:

Includes two 1mm and one
Tomo Phantom
0.5mm plates
Part Number: 46-194427P213 Cassette Tray Calibration
Part Number: 45438065
Tools (no GE Part Numbers)
Tool A is 467mm long and is used to set the maximum

open position of the Longitudinal Cassette Tray jaws.
This tool is not required if the jaws are manually held
fully open when performing this part of the calibration.
43cm x 35cm
Cassette Tool B is 332mm long and is used to set the mid
potentiometer (5V) position for both the Longitudinal and
18cm x 13cm
Lateral Cassette Tray jaws.
Cassette
This tool is required to set the pots.
(or cut wood to
20.75cm by 15.75cm)
Tool C is 471mm long and is used to set the maximum
Automatic Collimator (Wall open position of the Lateral Cassette Tray jaws.
Bucky) Calibration Tools (no GE This tool is not required if the jaws are manually held
BACK
Part Numbers) fully open when performing this part of the calibration.
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
Monitor Luminance
Use a light meter and the SMPTE test
pattern to check the monitor Select Test
Patterns
5% Square 95% Square
Light Meter (Wellhöfer)

Black box Luminance

0.40-5.00 cd/m2
Target: 1.5
White box Luminance

350-450 cd/m2
Target: 400

the SMPTE Test Pattern
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
MTF
MTF is used to assess the image transfer efficiency of
the image chain and is a function of the frequency of ROI Box
the test sample.
A failure of the MTF is usually a reflection of a
focusing problem.
Roll Over for

MTF Principle
MTF result is
Line Pair display in this box
Resolution Tab

%MTF 73 Line Pair Phantom
Digital Service: IQA Menu

Line Pair Resolution Line Pair or Funk Tool
Dialog Box Part Number: 46-197871P2
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
Limiting Resolution (Fluoro)

This test uses your eyes to determine the limit of
resolution on a line pair phantom for the different II
FOV sizes.

Line Pair Phantom
Line Pair or Funk Tool

Part Number: 46-197871P2
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
Noise
Noise is a measurement of the standard deviation
within an ROI sample box on a flat field image. ROI Box
Ideally each pixel within the ROI box will be at the
same density any variant is defined as noise.
ROI Density Tab
Digital Monitor showing a

Flat Field Image
RMS result is
display in this box
Set of Copper Plates:
437.9 Includes two 1mm and one
0.5mm plates
14.56

ROI Density Dialog Box
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
Brightness and Resolution Uniformity

The Uniformity tests check the Brightness (Copper
Plate) and Resolution (Mesh Phantom) variation
across the image using 9 sampling ROI boxes. 12:00
The Left/Right Uniformity result is calculated by 10:30 1:30
plugging in the maximum and minimum value found in
the 9:00, Center & 3:00 ROI sample boxes into the
following formula: ROImax-ROImin
x 100% 9:00 3:00
ROImax
Centre
Uniform Density Tab
7:30
4:30
6:00
Digital Monitor showing a

Sampling ROI Box Locations
Uniform Density (called 20mm Aluminum

Global Uniformity in IQ Plate
22.3 datasheet) and Uniform Part Number:
14.5 Resolution results are 2281087
Results for the various displayed in these boxes
locations are
displayed in this table Grid Uniformity Tool
Part Number:
Uniform Density Dialog Box
45560088
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
Contrast Transfer & Dynamic Range Media Type with

This test checks the dynamic range (or gamma desired densities
response) of the image chain by looking at the image
density across a range of attenuation media. Media
The IQ procedure uses a light meter to measure the (500)
brightness of each media on the monitor instead of
the ROI Density values from the IQA tool. ROI Box Lead
(210)
ROI Density Tab Abdomen

Heart
(330)
(1300)
Lung
(2500)
Digital Monitor showing CV

Phantom (density values are
Density value of
shown as an example)
ROI is display in
this box
CV Phantom
Part Number: (8 inch)
1300
46-2627070G1
14.56 (12 inch) 46-156797G1

ROI Density Dialog Box
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
Contrast Detail (Fluoro)

This test checks the contrast of the image chain by
counting how many dots are visible.
Circles should
be visible inside
both squares
Count the number of

dots visible. Digital Monitor showing
Leeds TOR 18FG Phantom
Leeds Test Phantom

TOR 18FG Phantom:
Notes Menu
Troubleshoot
Count the number of

Contrast Detail (Spot) large dots visible.
This test checks the contrast of the
image chain by counting how many
dots are visible.
Count the number of

small dots visible.

Leeds TOR CDR Phantom
Leeds Test Phantom

TOR CDR Phantom: Part
Number: 2109721-2
Notes
Drive Stepper Movements Movement to Drive Code Value Drive buttons

on SFD
The codes in the table can be used to Console
drive a stepper movement, which can SID 64 1 = Sensor active Lateral Table-
prove if the motor functionality is (3FC5) top In/Out
working. 2 = Sensor override
II Elevate 65 1 = Sensor active Lateral Table-
If Value 2 is selected the sensor (3FC20) top In/Out
feedback for each motion is overridden, 2 = Sensor override
so be careful as the movement will Longitudinal 66 1 = Sensor active SFD Scanning
Cassette Carriage (3FC15) Left/Right
drive into its mechanical limit.
(make sure II is not 2 = Sensor override
in UP position)
Value 1 selected does not override
Lateral Undertable 67 1 = Sensor active Lateral Table-
the sensor feedback. Shutters (3FC16) top In/Out
2 = Sensor override
Movements are driven using certain Cassette Tray In/Out 68 1 = Sensor active Lateral Table-
buttons on the SFD console, but if (make sure II is not (3FC14) top In/Out
login of 456 is used when entering Setup in UP position) 2 = Sensor override
in TeleService the movements can also Grid 69 1 = Sensor active Lateral Table-
be driven using the arrow keys on the (3FC18) top In/Out
setup service screen. 2 = Sensor override
Fixed (U-Shaped) 70 1 = Sensor active Lateral Table-
Note: With Value 2 selected tap the Mask (3FC17) top In/Out
drive buttons gently for movement- 2 = Sensor override
do not press continuously as it will
drive into a mechanical limit before
you know it! Sensor Functionality can be checked
with input LEDs L29 to L37 on the
ASSI Bd. (25S2). Click HERE
Notes
Disable Movements
The codes in the table below can be used to disable a Collimator

movement using TeleService, which may allow the Code 19
positioner to full boot up and isolate the problem.
Do NOT allow the customer to use the system when SID
any movements are disabled! Code 76
Make a note of the original value before changing to
the override value.
Longitudinal
Be sure to put the table in a safe position (see table
Table-top
below) before disabling movement.
Code 20
Sometimes the change made does not save, so after
changing the value, click on ENTER. Toggle the code
Table Elevate
up then back to the code just changed and check if the II Elevate Code 290
new value has been saved, if not repeat this procedure. Code 57
Movement to Code Value Safe position
Disable before disabling
SFD (Code 17 value 3) disables:
Long Cassette 17 1 Center cassette
carriage II Elevate
Carriage
SFD 17 3 Do not drive the Grid
Collimator Iris 19 3 table elevate Lateral Undertable Shutters
Collimator 19 4 down- it will
crush the Cassette Carriage Longitudinal
Longitudinal 20 5 Table-top is Fixed (U-shape) Mask
centered camera!
Table-top
II Elevate 57 3 II Elevate is down
Collimator blades drive fully
SID 76 2 closed when SFD receptor is
Grid 79 4 selected
Table Elevate 290 6 Table Elevate is up
Notes Code
Positioner Setup & Calibration Code List

Code Value Description
001 001 Calibration of the Positioner Tilting Pot minimum limit
002 Calibration of the Positioner Tilting Pot maximum limit
002 001 Calibration of the Table Elevating Pot minimum limit
002 Calibration of the Table Elevating Pot maximum limit
003 001 Calibration of the Tube Stand Pot minimum limit
002 Calibration of the Tube Stand Pot maximum limit
004 001 Calibration of the SFD Pot minimum limit
002 Calibration of the SFD Pot maximum limit
005 001 Calibration of the Collimator Lateral Blades Pot closed limit
002 Calibration of the Collimator Lateral Blades Pot open limit
006 001 Calibration of the Collimator Longitudinal Blades Pot closed
limit
002 Calibration of the Collimator Longitudinal Blades Pot open limit
007 001 Calibration of the Collimator Iris Pot closed limit
002 Calibration of the Collimator Iris Pot open limit
008 001 Calibration of the Lateral Jaws in Cassette Tray minimum limit
002 Calibration of the Lateral Jaws in Cassette Tray maximum limit
009 001 Adjustment of the Longitudinal Jaws in Cassette Tray minimum
limit
002 Adjustment of the Longitudinal Jaws in Cassette Tray
maximum limit
Red Text indicates default values NEXT

Notes Code

010 230 Room height = 2300mm (only for T20c versions)
240 Room height = 2400mm (only for T20c and T90c versions)
250 Room height = 2500mm (only for T20c and T90c versions)
260 Room height = 2600mm
011 092 22cm (9”) Image Intensifier
122 32cm (12”) Image Intensifier
016 40cm (16”) Image Intensifier
Red Text indicates default values PREVIOUS NEXT

Notes Code

012 05 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -5°
10 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -10°
89 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation –89°
x 90 Counter-clockwise tilting limitation -90°
013 05 Clockwise tilting limitation 5°
10 Clockwise tilting limitation 10°
x 90 Clockwise tilting limitation 90°
014 115 Focal distance (SID) limitation at 115cm for left wall limitation
135 Focal distance limitation at 130cm for left wall limitation
150 Focal distance limitation at 150cm for left wall limitation
015 115 Focal distance (SID) limitation at 115cm for right wall limitation
135 Focal distance limitation at 135cm for right wall limitation
150 Focal distance limitation at 150cm for right wall limitation

Notes Code

016 001 Cassette dimension in cm
002 Cassette dimension in inches
017 001 SFD with vertical divisions only
002 SFD with vertical and cross divisions (fixed mask)
003 SFD not available
018 001 Defaults to SFD receptor at power on (has DFR available)
002 Defaults to Digital (DFR) receptor at power on
003 No Digital (DFR) receptor
019 001 GMM Collimator MCR2 type – with iris blades
002 GMM Collimator MCR1 Type- without iris blades
x 003 Ralco collimator R302A Type – without iris blades (RXi)
004 Collimator not present
x 005 Ralco collimator type R503A – with iris blades (RXi)
006 Ralco collimator with Spectral Filter but no iris
007 Ralco collimator with Spectral Filter and iris
020 001 Flat tabletop with longitudinal table-top drive
002 Flat tabletop without longitudinal table-top drive
003 Concave tabletop with longitudinal table-top drive
004 Concave tabletop without longitudinal table-top drive
005 Longitudinal table-top drive not installed
006 Flat tabletop with longitudinal table-top drive 150cm
007 Concave tabletop with longitudinal table-top drive 150cm
008 Flat tabletop with asymmetrical long tabletop drive 101cm
009 Concave tabletop with asymmetrical long tabletop drive 101cm
010 Flat tabletop with asymmetrical long table-top drive 95cm
011 Concave tabletop with asymmetrical long tabletop drive 95cm

Notes Code

021 150 Correction of Lateral Collimator blade over collimation on film
022 150 Correction of Long Collimator blade over collimation on film
023 150 Correction of Collimator Iris over collimation on film
024 500 Correction of Lateral Collimator blade under collimation on
largest (nominal) II FOV
025 500 Correction of Longitudinal Collimator blade under collimation
on largest (nominal) II FOV
026 500 Correction of Collimator Iris blade under collimation on largest
(nominal) II FOV
Mag 1
028 500 Correction of Long Collimator blade under collimation on Mag 1
029 500 Correction of Collimator Iris blade under collimation on Mag 1
Mag 2
on Mag 2
Mag 3
on Mag 3
036 001 Automatic increase value of tomographic layer height
037 060 Correction of tomographic angle on film 8°/0,4s

Notes Code

043 050 Correction of Digital tomographic angle 8°/0,4s
049 005 Correction of layer height in tomography on SFD
050 005 Correction of layer height in tomography on digital system
? 051 051 Correction of Lateral Undertable shutters spaces (used for
format border correction)
052 051 Correction of the longitudinal cassette carriage zero position
(home position at photo detector)
053 005 Correction of the crossed-diaphragms (fixed or U-shaped
mask) zero position (home position at photo detector)
054 051 Correction of the grid zero position (home position at photo
detector)
055 051 Correction of the cassette tray in/out (lateral) zero position
(home position at photo detector)
056 051 Correction of Longitudinal Undertable shutters spaces (used
? for format border correction)

Notes Code

057 x 001 II drives between fluoro (up) and rad (low) positions in SFD mode
002 II is fixed in low position in SFD mode and in up position in Digital
mode
003 Fixed II- no drive
058 001 Integrated generator Opera G50/80
002 Universal generator type 1 - not integrated
003 Universal generator type 2 - not integrated and without tomo angles
004 Integrated generator O-Gxxx (Indico 100)
005 Universal generator type 3- not integrated
x 006 GE Indico Generator (RXi)
007 GE Indico with GMM Touchscreen (used on RXi-e)
059 001 Pulsed fluoroscopy activated (P-fluoro button on Pos Console)
x 002 Pulsed fluoroscopy not activated
060 001 Tilting operation adjustment – offset
002 Tilting operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
061 001 Elevation operation adjustment – offset
002 Elevation operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
062 001 Stand operation adjustment – offset
002 Stand operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
063 001 SFD operation adjustment – offset
002 SFD operation adjustment – dynamic adjustments
064 001 Focal distance (SID) - photocell home limit active
002 Focal distance (SID) – photocell home limit not active
065 001 II step-by-step movement – photocell home limit active
002 II step-by-step movement – photocell home limit not active

Notes Code

066 001 Longitudinal cassette holder movement- photocell home limit
active.
002 Longitudinal cassette holder movement – photocell home limit
not active
067 001 Lateral diaphragms movement – photocell home limit active
002 Lateral diaphragms movement – photocell home limit not
active
068 001 Cassette tray in/out movement – photocell home limit active
002 Cassette tray in/out movement – photocell home limit not
active
069 001 Grid step-by-step movement – photocell home limit active
002 Grid step-by-step movement – photocell home limit not active
070 001 Fixed mask movement – photocell home limit active
002 Fixed mask movement – photocell home limit not active
071 001 Angiostep modality present
x 002 Angiostep modality not present
072 001 Analog System (Nical)
002 Digital System (Infimed)
073 001 Display adjustment on the display – minimum value
002 Display adjustment on the display – maximum value
Click for more Info about Code 073

Notes Code

074 001 Adjustment of longitudinal tabletop minimum end-of-stroke
002 Adjustment of longitudinal tabletop maximum end-of-stroke
075 001 SFD Scan speed and angle = max
002 SFD Scan speed and angle = max / 1.5
003 SFD Scan speed and angle = max / 1.5 in fluoroscopy
x 004 SFD Scan speed and angle = max / 3 in fluoroscopy
076 001 Step Movable focal distance
002 Fixed focal distance (no SID drive)
x 003 Variable SID- RXi selection
077 x 001 Power on default: Tilt button (centre of positioner console)
function = Tilting stop at horizontal position (LED off)
002 Tilt button function = Tilting continues through the horizontal
position
078 001 Lamp button function (right side of positioner console) = Room
lighting system
x 002 Lamp button function (positioner console) = SFD mode:
Exposure position advance button to step through exposure
positions on the film
079 001 Stationary grid (no oscillation), but will move into the park
position
x 002 Oscillating grid in SFD mode, stationary in Digital mode
003 Oscillating grid in all rad modes
004 Grid not present or cut out

Notes Code

BACK

080 001 Manual Collimation: fluoro collimation stays for radiography
? 002
exposure
In Rad mode Longitudinal blades open to film size but Lateral
blades stay to fluoro collimation setting.
003 In Rad mode Longitudinal blades open to film size only if not
collimated during fluoro but Lateral blades will stay at fluoro
collimation setting.
x 004 The iris collimation opens in rad to file format but the long &
lateral blades stay at fluoro collimation
081 001 Periscanning modality present
x 002 Periscanning modality not present: RXi selection
082 001 Wallstand and Table only
002 Wallstand & OTS
003 No Wallstand
90-300 Automatic wallstand (not used on RXi)
083 001 Adjustment of the Collimator Spectral Filter minimum limit
002 Adjustment of the Collimator Spectral Filter maximum limit
084 001 Step by step working modality: Longitudinal steps active
002 Longitudinal steps not active
003 Longitudinal steps limited
085 002 DFR (Digital) Tomo Disabled
086 2 or 3 Zoom available
283 001 Double Command Active
002 Double Command Not Active
003 Double Command Active only for Keyboard
284 000 Password

Notes Code

285 001 Intelligent Tilting Active
002 Intelligent Tilting Not Active
286 001 Column Limitation Active
002 Column Limitation Not Active
287 001 Operations S6-S7-S8 set to 400 steps/revolution
002 Operation S6 set to 3200 steps/revolution
004 Operation S6-S7 set to 3200 steps/revolution
x 008 Operation S6-S7-S8 set to 3200 steps/revolution
288 001 SW filter for ADC OFF
x 002 SW filter for ADC ON
289 001 Transmission longitudinal tabletop head-side
002 Transmission longitudinal tabletop foot-side
290 001 T90se-cex table
002 T90ss-csx table
003 T20s-sx table
004 T20c-cx table
x 005 Elevating Table (T90ce-cex): RXi Option
x 006 Non Elevating Table (T90cs-csx): RXi Option
300 007 Filing the default values in E2 Prom: Do not do this. It will reload
default basic configuration and calibration data
Red Text indicates default values PREVIOUS

Notes
AEC Principle
The Integrated dose signal
R1 is compared with the AEC
Integrator reference.
- When the reference level is
- time reached the exposure is
Channel 1 +
+ - terminated
time
Table SFD +
time
R2
Integrator
AEC Reference
- (Film/Screen 1 )
- Roll Over
Channel 2
+
+ -
Exposure
Wall Bucky + Terminate
R3
Integrator AEC Reference
- (Film/Screen 2 )
Channel 3 - Roll Over
+
Normal +
Photo Diode Spot -
+
R4
Integrator
- AEC Reference
- (Film/Screen 3 )
Channel 4
+ Roll Over
DSA +
AEC Board
Notes
Digital Record AEC Principle

Roll Over for
Photo-Diode RPhoto-diode
Overview
Board 1
-
+
Mask
CCD Dose
Camera Vout Voutα α mA
rate
Iris
Optics R3 Spot
Integrator
Assembly
Channel 3 -
- Comparator
+ -
3 Spot Select + Control
R4 DSA +
Image Circuitry
Intensifier Channel 4 - GenWare
2
+
Reference
DSA Select Voltage
3 Roll Over
Generator
X-ray Tube
Notes
Fluoro ABS Principle Roll Over for

Overview
X435 P15
CCD P20-1/2
Camera Digital
Video
ABS Signal
Iris Signal
Optics
Assembly Generator Interface
Digital PC Module (GIM)
Gain from Fluoro
Curve selection
Image (see roll-over)
Intensifier
Roll Over
Digital
GenWare Gain
Offset/Gain J8-20/21 J7-1/2
Data Bus
TP8 -
J11-3
Applied J13-20/21
J7-3 TP9 +
Table Digital
CPU Bd Interface Bd
Generator Interface Bd (TDI II)
X-ray Tube Control
Circuitry
kV, mA
Generator
Notes
ABS Fluoro Curves

Curve 1 Fluoro Curves
Curve 1 High kV, Low mA: Fluoro Curves define the relationship between kV and
Fluoro curve used mA during Auto Fluoro (ABS Mode). There are up to
for lower patient three Fluoro Curves available (see Fig.1).
dose such as for In the GenWare software the actual kV to mA
kV Curve 2 pediatrics. relationship can be adjusted for each of the curves
(see Fig. 2).
Curve 2 In Auto Fluoro (ABS) the kV and mA drive up and
Mid kV, Mid mA: down the selected curve depending upon the
Curve 3
Generally used thickness in the field.
fluoro curve.
In addition to the kV/mA relationship each curve can
Curve 3
drive to a different ABS servo voltage (as measured
Low kV High mA:
on Generator Interface Bd TP8-9) thus changing the
Used to produce
mA actual dose level.
higher contrast
Fig. 1 Fluoro Curves images. How does it work in Pulsed Fluoro? Roll Over
Value in boxes
represents ABS
servo voltage
measured on
Generator
Interface Bd
TP8-9
Enable Curves
Fig. 2 GenWare Fluoro ABS Curves Screen Fig. 3 GenWare Fluoro ABS Screen
Notes
Procedure 8. Deselect the left ion-chamber and select the right

chamber.
1. Enter the GenWare Service software, click on Setup
tab, select AEC Setup and Calibration, then click on the 9. Set up the technique as specified in step 3. Make
AEC Setup tab. Select Channel 1 for Table SFD Ion an exposure. Note the post mAs.
Chamber balance or Channel 2 if balancing the Wall
Bucky Ion Chambers (see Fig. 1). 10. If the post mAs is not within 10% of the center
chamber post mAs (recorded in step 4) adjust the R
2. Place a cassette in the selected bucky and 15cm of Field Compensation box on the AEC Setup Screen
Plexiglas on the bucky. (see Fig. 1)
3. On the Generator (in Applications mode or in the

GenWare Home page) setup the following technique:
75kV
AEC ON
mA/ms Mode: 200mA Select AEC
Select a film speed 1,2 or 3 Channel
1-SFD
4. Select only the centre ion chamber cell and make an 2- Wall Bucky
exposure. Note the post mAs. Click for cell selection
info. Balance
5. Deselect the centre ion-chamber and select the left chambers using
chamber. these boxes
6. Set up the technique as specified in step 3. Make an

exposure. Note the post mAs.
7. If the post mAs is not within 10% of the center chamber

post mAs (recorded in step 4) adjust the L Field
Compensation box on the AEC Setup Screen (see Fig. 1) Fig. 1 GenWare: AEC Setup Screen
Notes
Procedure
1. Enter the GenWare Service software. Click on Setup
tab and select AEC Setup and Calibration. Click on AEC
Setup tab and select Channel 1 for Table SFD Calibration
or Channel 2 if calibrating Wall Bucky (see Fig.1).
Select AEC
Channel
2. Go to AEC Calibration>Film Screen Cal and set all the
1-SFD
breakpoints to 5.0 (middle of range). Select a Film/Screen
2- Wall Bucky
(1,2 or 3) button to calibrate to (see Roll 1).
3. Place
ustment a CR
Procedure cassette in the selected bucky and 15cm of
Plexiglas on the table or bucky- make sure Plexiglas fully
simeter placed 30cm above table-top
covers the cassette size.

to Fluoro Setup>PF Dose Limits and Fig. 1 GenWare: AEC Setup Screen
maximum and75kV
minimum SID to 8ms.
AEC ON
ct Manual Fluoro
mA/ms(ABSMode:
box 200mA
a Pulsed Fluoro rate of 15pps (worst
Centre
own in the table (start Ion Chamber
with 125kV and cell
Selected Film/Screen Speed (1, 2 or 3)
A, so the dose-rate is just below the

5. Make an exposure then run the Cassette through the
/min).
CR
and the mAReader and note
will not increase, the
go to theDensity value (click on CR
Overview
and increase the mAfor(40mA
moreis Information). No
Exposure
6. If the Density value is not within range adjust Pot R1

b and enter the mA value obtained
(SFD)
x by the or R2 (Wall Bucky)
kV selected. (CW decreases dose) on the
AEC Board and repeat the exposure. Adjust the pot and CR
creenrepeat
and repeat steps 5 and
exposure 6. the correct density value is obtained.
until
Roll 1 Overview
d Rev.40
repeat :05steps
May 2010 | (c)
4 to 7 GE Healthcare
and enter the Support Tool by Edward Singleton
Notes
AEC Film Calibration Procedure

Procedure 6 (cont). If the film OD is not between 0.9 and 2.10
repeat the exposure using a different mAs value.
1. Enter the GenWare Service software and check the When the OD is within the range enter the mAs and
AEC Channels. Click on Setup tab and select AEC Setup OD in Box 2 and 3 respectively.
and Calibration click on AEC Setup tab. Channel 1 for
Table SFD Calibration or Channel 2 if calibrating Wall 7. Select another mAs value (change mA), still aiming
Bucky (see Roll 1). for an OD within the range. Make an exposure on the
same loaded cassette and if the OD is within range
2. Click on Film Screen Cal tab and set the 75kV point to enter the mAs and OD in boxes 4 and 5, of the AEC
5.0 (middle of range). Select a Film/Screen (1,2 or 3) Calculator respectively.
button to calibrate to (see Roll 2). The results box should now have an mAs v alue that
will give the desired OD.
3. Place a loaded mid size cassette (24 x 30cm) in the
selected bucky and 15cm of Plexiglas on the bucky. 8. Place an unloaded cassette in the bucky and on the
Generator set up the following:
4. On the Generator (in Applications mode or in the y 75kV
GenWare Home page) setup the following technique: y AEC On
above table-top
y 75kV y mA: 200
y AEC Off y Backup mAs: 100
y mA/ms Mode: 200mA, 50ms (10mAs) y Centre Ion Chamber cell
y Film/Screen Speed (1, 2 or 3)
Dose Limits and
y Same Film/Screen Speed as selected in step 4
um SID to 8ms.
5. Use the AEC Calculator and enter the desired Optical 9. Make an exposure and note the post mAs value. If
S boxDensity (OD) in Box 1. Use the Link to go to the AEC not the same as the mAs in the AEC Calculator Result
f 15pps (worst
Calculator.
with 125kV and
box, then adjust Pot R1 (SFD) or R2 (Wall Bucky) on
the AEC Board and repeat the exposure. Adjust the
6. Make an exposure and develop the film. Read the pot and repeat exposure until the correct post mAs is
just below the
Optical Density (OD) of the film, if it is between 0.9 and obtained.
2.10,
rease, go to use
the the AEC Calculator and enter 10 in Box 2 and
the
(40mA is OD in Box 3. No AEC NEXT
Exposure Roll 1 Roll 2 Calculator PAGE
Rev.40
lue :05 May 2010 | (c) GE Healthcare
obtained Support Tool by Edward Singleton
Notes
Procedure: Calibrating 55kV Breakpoint. 14. Place an unloaded cassette in the bucky and on
the Generator set up the following:
10. Place a loaded mid size cassette (24 x 30cm) in y 55kV, 200mA
the selected bucky and 5cm of Plexiglas on the bucky. y AEC On
y Backup mAs: 100
11. On the Generator (in Applications mode or in the y Centre Ion Chamber cell
GenWare Home page) setup the following technique: y Same Film/Screen Speed as selected in step 4
y 55kV
y AEC Off 15. Make an exposure and note the post mAs value. If
y mA/ms Mode: 200mA, 50ms (10mAs) not the same as the mAs in the AEC Calculator Result
y Same Film/Screen Speed as selected in step 4 box, click on the Film Screen Cal tab and adjust the
55kV point. Repeat the exposure and adju st the 55kV
12. Make an exposure and develop the film. Read the breakpoint until the correct post mAs is obtained (see
Optical Density (OD) of the film, if it is between 0.9 Roll 2).
and 2.10, use the AEC Calculator and enter 10 in Box
2 and the OD in Box 3.
If the film OD is not between 0.9 and 2.10 repeat the
exposure using a different mAs value. When the OD is
within the range enter the mAs and OD in Box 2 and 3
respectively.
13. Select another mAs value (change mA) , still

aiming for an OD within the range. Make an exposure
on the same loaded cassette and if the OD is within
range enter the mAs and OD in boxes 4 and 5, of the
AEC Calculator respectively.
The results box should now have an mAs v alue that
will give the desired OD.
AEC NEXT
Roll 2 Calculator PAGE
Notes

Procedure: Calibrating 110kV Breakpoint. 20. Place an unloaded cassette in the bucky and on
the Generator set up the following:
16. Place a loaded mid size cassette (24 x 30cm) in y 110kV, 200mA
the selected bucky and 20cm of Plexiglas on the y AEC On
bucky. y Backup mAs: 100
y Centre Ion Chamber cell
17. On the Generator (in Applications mode or in the y Same Film/Screen Speed as selected in step 4
y 110kV 21. Make an exposure and note the post mAs value. If
y AEC Off not the same as the mAs in the AEC Calculator Result
y mA/ms Mode: 200mA, 50ms box, click on the Film Screen Cal tab and adjust the
y Same Film/Screen Speed as selected in step 4 110kV point. Repeat the exposure and adjust the
110kV breakpoint until the correct post mAs is
18. Make an exposure and develop the film. Read the obtained (see Roll 2).
Optical Density (OD) of the film, if it is between 0.9
and 2.10, use the AEC Calculator and enter 10 in Box 22. Still in the Film Screen Cal tab screen, note down
2 and the OD in Box 3. the FS Reference values for 55, 75 and 1 10kV. Using
If the film OD is not between 0.9 and 2.10 repeat the your mouse, drag the points on the graph, making
exposure using a different mAs value. When the OD is sure not to move the 55, 75 and 110kV points, to
within the range enter the mAs and OD in Box 2 and 3 make a smooth curve (see Roll 2).
respectively.
Check Out AEC
19. Select another mAs value (change mA) , still Place a loaded cassette in the bucky and perform the
aiming for an OD within the range. Make an exposure following exposures, develop the film and check the
on the same loaded cassette and if the OD is within OD, it must be within +/-10% of the desired OD.
range enter the mAs and OD in boxes 4 and 5, of the kV Plexiglas
AEC Calculator respectively. 60 10cm
The results box should now have an mAs v alue that 80 15cm
NEXT
will give the desired OD. 100 20cm
PAGE-
AEC
Roll 2 Calculator Short Time
Comp
Notes

Short Time AEC Compensation
Procedure 7. Check the normal AEC Calibration. Place a dummy
size cassette (24 x 30cm) in the selected bucky and 15cm
1. Place a dummy mid size cassette (24 x 30cm) in the of Plexiglas on the bucky.
selected bucky and 15cm of Plexiglas on the bucky.
2. On the Generator (in Applications mode or in the GenWare Home page) setup the following technique:
GenWare Home page) setup the following technique: y 75kV, 200mA
y 75kV, 200mA y AEC On
y AEC On y Backup mAs: 100mAs
y Backup mAs: 100mAs y Centre Ion Chamber cell / Film/Screen Speed
y Centre Ion Chamber cell / Film/Screen Speed
9. Make an exposure and note the post mAs ______
3. Make an exposure and note the post mAs ______ It should be the same as in step 3. If not re-adjust the
AEC Pot (R1- SFD or R2- Wall Bucky).
4. Place a dummy cassette in the SFD or Wall Bucky.
Make an exposure and note the exposure time. If the 10. Place a good cassette in the bucky and make an
exposure time is 9ms (±3ms) then move to step 5. If not exposure, develop the film. The OD should be within
within range then adjust the mA or change Plexiglas 15% of the desired OD.
thickness and repeat the exposure.
5. Make an exposure and note the post mAs . Adjust the

Short Time Compensation Pot (R91-SFD or R92- Wall Note: If the film density is not acceptable at both short and
Bucky) on the AEC Board until the post mAs is the same normal AEC exposure times, it will be necessary to iterate
as in step 3. the adjustments of both the Shor t AEC Time
Compensation pot and the AEC Gain Pot by repeat ing this
6. Place a good loaded mid size cassette in the bucky procedure.
and make an exposure, develop the film. The OD should
be within 15% of the desired OD. If not adjust Short Time
Compensation Pot. NEXT PAGE-
RLF Comp
Notes

RLF AEC Compensation 7. In GenWare adjust the RLF Compensation 50ms box
Procedure value and make exposures until the post mAs is 10%
greater than the mAs recorded in step 6.
This calibration is only required if techniques are
used which result in AEC exposure times greater than 8. Place a good loaded mid size cassette in the bucky
100ms. and make an exposure, develop the film. The OD should
be within 15% of the Density recorded in step 5. If not
1. Place a dummy mid size cassette (24 x 30cm) in the adjust the RLF Compensation 50ms box until the
selected bucky and 15cm of Plexiglas on the bucky. desired OD is achieved.
2. On the Generator (in Applications mode or in the 9. In the GenWare Software home page se lect Setup>
GenWare Home page) setup the following technique: AEC Setup & Calibration> Film Screen Options tab. Set
y 75kV, 200mA the RLF Compensation 500ms box to 0.
y AEC On / Backup mAs: 100mAs
y Centre Ion Chamber cell / Film/Screen Speed 10. Place a dummy mid size cassette in the bucky and
make an exposure, adjust the mA to get an exposure time
3. In the GenWare Software home pag e select Setup> of approximately 1000ms. Note the final mAs ______
AEC Setup & Calibration> Film Screen Options tab.
Set the RLF Compensation 50ms box to 0. 11. In GenWare adjust the RLF Compensation 500ms
box value and make exposures until the post mAs is 20%
4. Make an exposure and adjust the mA to get an greater than the mAs recorded in step 10.
exposure time of approximately 50ms.
12. Place a good loaded mid size cassette in the bucky
5. Place a good loaded mid size cassette in the bucky and make an exposure, develop the film. The OD should
and make an exposure, develop the film. The OD should be within 15% of the Density recorded in step 5. If not
be within 15% of the desired OD. Note the mAs ______ adjust the RLF Compensation 500ms box until the
Note the OD ______ desired OD is achieved.
6. Place a dummy mid size cassette in the bucky and Perform the next part of the procedure only if
make an exposure, adjust the mA to get an exposure time techniques are used which result in AEC exposure
of approximately 500ms. Note the final mAs ______ times greater than 1500ms. Click HERE
Notes
13. In the GenWare Software home page s elect Setup>

AEC Calibration> FS Options tab. Set the RLF
Compensation 1000ms box to 0.
14. Place a dummy mid size cassette in the bucky and

make an exposure, adjust the mA to get an exposure time
of approximately 1500ms. Note the final mAs ______
15. In GenWare adjust the RLF Compensation 1000ms

box value and make exposures until the post mAs is 30%
greater than the mAs recorded in step 14.
16. Place a good loaded mid size cassette in the bucky

and make an exposure, develop the film. The OD should
be within 15% of the Density recorded in step 5. If not
adjust the RLF Compensation 1000ms bo x until the
desired OD is achieved.
Notes
AEC Calculator
Box 1 AEC Calculator

Enter desired This calculator can be used to calculate
Optical Density 1.30 the mAs required to obtain the desired
Optical Density on Film.
How to use
Enter mAs and Optical Enter the desired optical density in Box
Box 2 Box 3
Density for first exposure 1, then make an exposure noting the
(Note OD must be between mAs and Optical Density of the
0.9 and 2.10) developed film (Note: the Optical Density
mAs 1 OD 1 must be in the range 0.9 to 2.10 as this
is in the linear range of the H&D Curve).
Enter mAs and Optical Enter the mAs and OD values in boxes 2
Density for next exposure Box 4 Box 5 and 3 respectively.
(Note OD must be between
0.9 and 2.10 and mAs must Make another exposure, but change the
be different from above) mAs, and if the final OD is within range,
mAs 2 OD 2
enter the mAs & OD values in boxes 4
and 5 respectively.
The Result box will now display the mAs
Result
The mAs required to get an required to obtain the desired OD.
Optical Density of 1.30 is: NaN
Reset
RETURN
Edward Singleton
Notes
Procedure
1. Set up the dosimeter as shown in Fig.1. The probe should be

centered relative to the central ray from the X-ray tube. Do not use any
absorber during this procedure.
2. Set the OTS SID to 100cm. Open the collimator such that the field
size at the location of the dosimeter is approximately 12 cm X 12 cm.
Ensure that the probe is fully radiated.
3. In GenWare Main page click on SETUP from the toolbar and select
DAP Setup. Temporarily set the DAP Mode to Ind. (see ROLL 1)
4. Select the desired DAP device to calibrate by selecting a Workstation

that uses that DAP device and set the generator to 70 kV, 100 mA, 20
ms.
5. On the Touch-screen Application Screen or in the GenWare Main

page, press DAP to access the RESET / TEST menu, then press
RESET to reset the DAP display to zero.
6. Make an X-ray exposure and note the dose per the dosimeter. Enter 10cm
the mR or mGy value in Box 1 of the DAP Calculator.
7. Note the DAP value displayed on the Touch-screen Console, and Fig.1 Dosimeter Setup
enter the value in Box 2 of the DAP Calculator.
DAP NEXT
ROLL 1 Calculator
Notes
8. Replace the dosimeter with an X-ray cassette and film (see Fig.
2). The film plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter was
in step 6. IMPORTANT: The radiated area measurement must be
made at the same distance from the x-ray source as the dose
measurement.
Do not change the collimator or SID settings.
9. Make another exposure using the same settings as in step 4 and

develop the film.
10. Measure the radiated image area. For film, measure the length
and width of the exposed area, and record the results in Boxes 3 and Place cassette at
4 of the DAP Calculator. this level
11. The DAP Calculator will calculate the % error between the DAP
and the Dosimeter, if the error is greater that 20% then increase or
decrease the Calibration Value for DAP 2 (usually OTS DAP) or the
Calibration Value for DAP 1 (usually Table DAP), depending on
which one is being used for the OTS tube, by the same percentage 10cm
as the percentage error (see ROLL 1).
12. Repeat steps 5-11 until the DAP and Dosimeter readings are
within ±20%.
Fig. 2 X-ray Film Setup
13. If DAP mode was changed from SUM to IND in step 3 change it
back to SUM (see ROLL 1), using GenWare.
DAP BACK
ROLL 1 Calculator
Notes
Procedure
1. Place 10cm thickness of Plexiglas blocks on the table and centre in

the x-ray field.
2. Fluoro and collimate exactly around the blocks using the image on
the monitor.
3. Enter the size of the Plexiglas blocks (this is the collimated area) in
Boxes 3 and 4 of the DAP Calculator.
4. In GenWare Main page click on SETUP from the toolbar and select
DAP Setup. Temporarily set the DAP Mode to Ind. (see ROLL 1)
5. Remove the Plexiglas blocks and set up the dosimeter as shown in

Fig.1. The probe should be centered relative to the central ray from the
X-ray tube and be at the same distance from the table-top as the top of
the Plexiglas blocks were in the earlier steps. Do not move the
10cm
collimator blades.
6. Select the desired DAP device to calibrate by selecting a Workstation

that uses that DAP device and set the generator to 70 kV, 100 mA, 20
ms.
7. On the Touch-screen Application Screen or in the GenWare Main Fig.1 Dosimeter Setup
page, press DAP to access the RESET / TEST menu, then press
RESET to reset the DAP display to zero.
Click to Continue DAP

ROLL 1 Calculator
Notes
Select Measurement Units mGy
Box 1
Enter Dosimeter
Dose Reading mGy
Box 2
Enter Touch-screen
mGy.cm2
DAP Reading 1
Enter Length (in cm) (Box 3) Box 3 Box 4

and Width (in cm) (Box 4) of
the exposed area on the film
Length (cm) Width (cm)
The Dosemeter Reading x

Exposure Area on Film mGy.cm2
reading is: 0.00
The % error between DAP

reading on the generator -100.00 FAIL: Adjust
and Dose x Area reading is: % Error Calibration Value in
DAP Setup Screen
Reset RETURN
below the
Notes
se, go to the
mA is No
Exposure
obtained
Procedure
1. Put the table horizontal and set the SID to 115cm (table tube) or
and 6.100cm (OTS tube).
2. Set up the dosimeter as shown in Fig.1.The probe should be
enter the
centered relative to the central ray from the x-ray tube. Do not use any
absorber during this procedure.
3. Select the Tube 1 table-top receptor (usually receptor 3) or Tube 2

table-top (usually receptor 5).
4. With no filtration in the field, make the following exposures, measure

the dose then enter the dose values in the red boxes below. Select your
dose units and the program will convert to mGy. These values will be
entered into the Air Kerma setup screen in GenWare.
Select your dose-meter measurement units mR
Measured Dose Dose in mGy
40kV 20mAs 0 0.000 30cm
50kV 20mAs 0 0.000
60kV 20mAs 0 0.000
80kV 20mAs 0 0.000 Fig.1 Dosimeter Setup
100kV 20mAs 0 0.000
120kV 20mAs 0 0.000 NEXT

RESET
Notes
5. Open GenWare and on the main

page click on SETUP from the toolbar
and select Air Kerma Setup.
20
6 Setup the Air Kerma screen as

follows:
Air Kerma: Tube 1 or Tube 2

Max Filters: 0
mAs reference: 20
7. Enter the dose values, in mGy,

recorded on the last page in the
appropriate kV/mGy boxes. Fig. 2 Air Kerma Setup
Screen
8. When complete click on Apply.
9. Verify the Air Kerma display. Note:

The values shown on the display have
to be within ±35% at minimum SID only
(this is the worst case or highest
patient dose scenario) with the dose
meter at 30cm above table-top.
BACK
Notes
Select System Version

Power Distribution
American Version
Hospital Power Hospital Power Hospital Power Hospital Power

Single Phase 230 or 277V Single Phase 120Vac Single Phase 120Vac Three Phase 480Vac
Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit

Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker 100A
Positioner 120Vac Emergency

230 or 277V Isolation Off Switch
Cabinet Transformer
Change taps on
120:120 Transformers T1
and T2 to 240V
and change
EPROM on DSS
Board
120Vac 120Vac Generator
Positioner
OTS
Positioner
Console
Wallstand
Digital PC Monitors
Notes
Positioner Motor Block Diagram
Motor Lateral
M
Controller Undertable
Fibre Optic Shutters
Host CPU Board ASSI Board
25S1 25S2 Motor
M Fixed Mask
Controller
Console CPU Roll Over
Motor
components for M Grid
Controller
Legend nomenclature
M Motor Interface Motor Cassette
M
Board Controller Tray In/out
Dynamo Speed
D 25S3
feedback Long
Motor
P Potentiometer M Cassette
Controller
Tray
Motor M II Elevate
DC Motor Controller
Relay on M SID
Controller
backplane
Relay 23S9 M Lat table-
Bd top
DC Motor DC Motor DC Motor 23S8
Controller Controller Controller Board M Palpator
Coll Lat
M P
Blade
M M M M M
23S6 M P Coll Long
D D Tube D D D Board Blade
Stand Table
Table Table M P Coll Iris
Tilt
Long P P SFD P Elevate P P
Notes Menu
Roll for DVM

Connection
Table Tilt
Setting Potentiometer
1. Put Table Horizontal 0O (see Fig.1). Note if you
are installing a new pot use Open Loop Mode to
move the table before mechanically connecting the
pot.
2. Place a DVM on TP2A-1 and TP2A-18 on CPU
Bd (25S1) or use readout display from TeleService
3. If necessary, adjust Pot to get 5V ±0.05 (see Figs
2 and 3) Fig.1 Table at 0O
Remove this cover

(four 2.5mm Allen
Screws)
Table Tilt Pot Non- Elevating

3P1
Fig.2 Table Base Covers Elevating Fig.3 Pot Location
Notes Menu
View Console
Service Keys
Table Tilt
Calibrating End-Stops
1. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select
Code 001.
2. Select value 002 and drive the table to
+90O(vertical) (see Fig.4), using the button
on the SFD Console (see Fig.6). Press
Enter to save settings.
3. Select value 001 and drive the table to - Fig.4 Table at +90O (Vertical)
90O(Trendelenberg) (see Fig.5), using the
button on the SFD Console (see Fig.6).
Press Enter to save settings.
4. If using Console Service Mode put the
Switch SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3
back to the off position when finished.
Note: Movement Tilt -90O Tilt +90O

moves very slowly
Fig. 6 SFD Console Fig. 5 Table at -90O

(Trendelenberg)
Notes Menu
Roll for DVM
Connection
Table Elevate
1. Put Table Horizontal 0O and raise the table top
until the distance is 136.5 ±1mm (see Fig.1). Note
if you are installing a new pot use Open Loop
Mode to move the table before mechanically 136.5mm
connecting the pot.
2. Place a DVM on TP2A-2 and TP2A-18 on CPU

Bd (25S1) or use readout display from TeleService
3. If necessary, adjust Pot to get 5V ±0.05 (see
Figs 2 and 3 for Pot Location)
Remove this cover Fig.1 Table Base

(four 2.5mm Allen
Screws)
Table Elevate
Pot 3P2
Fig.2 Table Base Covers Fig.3 Pot Location
Notes Menu
View Console
Service Keys
Table Elevate
Note: measure
Before starting, drive the II to the upper to outside top
position. This can be done by selecting the of frame
digital workstation.
Code 002. C
2. Select value 002 and drive the table
elevate, using the button on the SFD
Console (see Fig.5), until the distance C is
254 ±1mm (see Fig. 4) (measure to outside
top of black metal frame). Press Enter to
save settings.
3. Select value 001 and drive the table
elevate, using the button on the SFD
Console (see Fig.5), until the distance C is
19 ±1mm (see Fig.4) (measure to outside Fig.4 Table Base
top of black metal frame). Press Enter to
save settings. Increase
4. If using Console Service Mode put the Note: Movement Height
Switch SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3 moves very slowly
Fig.5 SFD Console

Decrease
Height
Notes Menu
Roll for DVM

Connection
Tube Stand
1. Remove the cover from around base of Tube Stand
(see Fig.2). 840mm
2. Drive the Tube Stand to the middle of the travel
range (840mm ±2mm from end-see Fig.1). Note if you
are installing a new pot use Open Loop Mode to move
the tube stand before mechanically connecting the pot.
3. Place a DVM on TP2A-3 and TP2A-18 on CPU Bd

(25S1) or use readout display from TeleService
4. If necessary, adjust Pot to get 5V ±0.05 (see Figs. 2
and 3) Fig.1 Middle of Tube Stand Travel
Angle the Tube Stand Tube Stand

then remove two Pot 3P3
screws- one each side
of cover (2.5mm Allen)
Remove this
Fig.2 Accessing Tube Stand Pot cover
Fig.3 Location of Tube Stand Pot
Notes Menu
View Console
Service Keys
Tube Stand
Code 003.
50mm
2. Select value 002 and drive the tube stand
to the foot end, using the button on the SFD
Console (see Fig.6), until the distance is 50
±2mm (see Fig. 4). Press Enter to save
settings.
3. Select value 001 and drive the tube stand
to the head end, using the button on the Fig. 4 Foot End Limit
SFD Console (see Fig. 6), until the distance
is 50 ±2mm (see Fig. 5). Press Enter to
save settings.
Head End Foot End

Drive Drive
50mm
Fig. 6 SFD Console

Fig. 5 Head End Limit
Notes Menu
Roll for DVM

Connection
Measure from
this flat surface
SFD
1. Drive the Tube Stand to the middle of the
travel range (674mm from end-see Fig.1).
Note if you are installing a new pot use 674mm
Open Loop Mode to move the SFD before
mechanically connecting the pot.
2. Place a DVM on TP2A-4 and TP2A-18 on

CPU Bd (25S1) or use readout display from
TeleService
3. If necessary, adjust Pot to get 5V ±0.05
(see Fig.2)
Fig. 1 Middle of SFD Travel Range: View from
under table
Remove cover over

the Pot (two 2.5mm
Allen Screws)
Fig. 2 Location of SFD Pot: View from rear of SFD

the table Pot 3P4
Notes Menu
View Console
Service Keys
Measure to this
SFD flat surface
A
Code 004.
2. Select value 002 and drive the SFD to the
foot end, using the button on the SFD Console
(see Fig.5), until the distance A is 214 ±2mm if
Longitudinal table-top motor is at this end (see
Fig. 3) or 54 ±2mm if it is not. Press Enter to
save settings.
3. Select value 001 and drive the SFD to the
head end, using the button on the SFD
Console (see Fig.5), until the distance B is 54
±2mm or 214mm if Longitudinal table-top motor Fig. 3 Foot End Limit: View from under table
is at this end (see Fig. 4). Press Enter to save
settings.
4. If using Console Service Mode put the Measure to flat
Switch SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3 back vertical surface
to the off position when finished.
B
Head End Foot End
Note: Movement Drive Drive
moves very slowly
Fig.5 SFD Console

Fig. 4 Head End Limit: View from under table
Notes Menu
Roll for DVM

Positioner Calibrations: Table-top Longitudinal
Connection
Symmetrical Movement
Table-top
Table-top Longitudinal
1. With the table horizontal drive the
Longitudinal Table-top to the middle of the
travel range (end of table flush with end of
Table Frame-see Fig.1)
2. Place a DVM on TP2A-6 and TP2A-18 Table Frame
on CPU Bd (25S1) or use readout display
from TeleService
(see Figs.2 and 3)
Fig. 1 Table-top long at Center of Travel
Pot Location
To access the Pot,

drive the Lateral
table-top out then Table-top Long
remove this cover Pot 3P17
(three 2.5mm Allen
Screws)
Fig. 2 Access to the Table-top Long Pot Fig. 3 Location of Table-top Long Pot
Notes Menu
View Console
Service Keys
Symmetrical Movement
475mm
Code 074.
2. Select value 002 and drive the Table-top
Console (see Fig. 6), until the distance from
the table frame to the end of the table-top is
475 ±2mm (see Fig. 4). Press Enter to save
settings.
to the head end, using the button on the
SFD Console (see Fig. 6), until the distance Fig. 4 Table-top at Foot End
from the table frame to the end of the table-
top is 475 ±2mm (see Fig. 5). Press Enter
to save settings.
4. If using Console Service Mode put the 475mm
Note: Movement Head End Foot End

moves very slowly Drive Drive
Fig. 6 SFD Console Fig. 5 Table-top at Head End

Notes Menu
Roll for DVM

Connection
Asymmetrical Movement
Table-top Longitudinal 355mm

1. With the table horizontal drive the
Longitudinal Table-top to the middle of the
travel range (left (head) side is 355 ±2mm
beyond the Table Frame-see Fig.1) Head End
2. Place a DVM on TP2A-6 and TP2A-18
on CPU Bd (25S1) or use readout display Table Frame
from TeleService
(see Figs.2 and 3)
Fig. 1 Table-top long at Center of Travel
Pot Location
To access the Pot,

drive the Lateral
table-top out then Table-top Long
remove this cover Pot 3P17
(three 2.5mm Allen
Screws)
Fig. 2 Access to the Table-top Long Pot Fig. 3 Location of Table-top Long Pot
Notes Menu
View Console
Service Keys
Asymmetrical Movement
150mm
Code 074.
Console (see Fig. 6), until the distance from
the table frame to the end of the table-top is
150 ±2mm (see Fig. 4). Press Enter to save
settings.
to the head end, using the button on the
SFD Console (see Fig. 6), until the distance Fig. 4 Table-top at Foot End
from the table frame to the end of the table-
top is 860 ±2mm (see Fig. 5). Press Enter
to save settings.
4. If using Console Service Mode put the 860mm
Note: Movement Head End Foot End

moves very slowly Drive Drive
Fig. 6 SFD Console Fig. 5 Table-top at Head End

Notes Menu
Roll for DVM

Positioner Calibrations: Cassette Tray Lat & Long
Connection
Cassette Tray Lateral

al
Setting Potentiometer t er
La
1. Place the Test tool (332±1mm) laterally (front to back)
in the Cassette tray (see Fig.1)
3. If necessary, adjust Pot to get 5V ±0.05 (see Fig.2) Lon
g
Cassette Tray Longitudinal

1. Place the Test tool (332±1mm) longitudinally (head to Fig.1 Test Tool inserted in
foot) in the Cassette tray. Drive in the cassette tray. Cassette Tray
3. If necessary, adjust Pot to get 5V ±0.05 (see Fig.2)
Pot
Adjusting Potentiometers Locations
1. To adjust pots remove the cassette tray, ke ep it
electrically connected and place upside down on the 3PT11 3PT10
table-top. Click HERE Long Pot Lat Pot
2. IMPORTANT: Before powering up the positioner

press the red Emergency Movements OFF switches on
the main & table-side consoles- this prevents any
movement.
3. Power on the positioner.
4. Place the Test tool (332±1mm) in the cassette tray.
5. Open Tele-Service and go to Table Feedback,
Cassette Dimension to view live pot voltage. Fig.2 Underside of Cassette Tray on Table-top
6. Adjust Pot to get 5V ±0.05.
Notes Menu
View Console
Positioner Calibrations: Cassette Tray Lat & Long
Service Keys
Cassette Tray Lateral

l
Calibrating End-Stops te ra
La
1. Before entering service mode, drive the cassette tray out.
2. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select Code 008.
3. Select value 001 (down arrow) and with no cassette in the
Cassette Tray (jaws fully closed) press Enter to save settings.
4. Select value 002 (up arrow) and insert the Test Tool
(471mm in Lateral direction) in the Cassette Tray or hold jaws
fully open. Press Enter to save settings (see Fig. 3). Remove Lo
ng
itu
Test Tool. din
al
5. Exit service mode. If using Console Service Mode put the
Switch SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3 back to the off
position when finished.
Fig.3 Test Tool inserted in

Cassette Tray Longitudinal Cassette Tray
1. Before entering service mode, with no cassette in the Cassette
Tray (jaws fully closed) drive the cassette tray in.
2. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select Code 009.
3. Select value 001 (down arrow) and press Enter to save sett ings.
4. Exit service mode and drive the cassette tray out.
5. Enter the Service Mode/Setup again and select Code 009.
6. Select value 002 (up arrow). Insert the Test Tool (467mm in
Longitudinal direction) in the Cassette Tray or hold jaws fully open.
Press Enter to save settings. Remove Test Tool.
7. Exit service mode. If using Console Service Mode put the Switch
SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3 back to the off position w hen
finished.
Notes Menu
View Console
Service Keys
Lateral Collimator Blades Calibration

Code 005.
2. Select value 001 and fully close Lateral Lateral Longitudinal
Collimator Blades. Press Enter to save Adjustment Adjustment
settings.
3. Select value 002 and and fully open
Lateral Collimator Blades. Press Enter to
save settings.
back to the off position when finished. Fig.1 Collimator
Iris Collimator Blades Calibration

Longitudinal Collimator Blades 1. Before entering service mode fully close the iris collimator
Calibration blades. To do this select Manual Collimation and close the Iris
1. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select using the buttons on the positioner console.
Roll to see
Code 006.
2. Select value 001 and fully close 2. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select Code 007.
Longitudinal Collimator Blades. Press Enter 3. Select value 001 (down arrow) then press Enter to save
to save settings. settings.
3. Select value 002 and and fully open 4. Exit service mode and in applications open up the iris
Longitudinal Collimator Blades. Press Enter collimator blades-make sure manual collimation is still selected.
to save settings. 5. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select Code 007.
4. If using Console Service Mode put the 6. Select value 002 (up arrow) then press Enter to save settings.
Switch SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3 7. Exit service mode. If using Console Service Mode put the
back to the off position when finished. Switch SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3 back to the off position
when finished
Notes
Film Border too large or too small?
If so, use the codes on this page to adjust.

This adjusts the collimator blade position.
Pre-Requisite
1. Cassette Sizing and Collimator pot
Calibrations
2. X-ray Tube Alignment
Procedure
1. Rotate the collimator 450
2. Place a 43 x 35cm cassette in the SFD. Perform an
exposure.
3. Develop the image and measure across the lateral and
longitudinal planes in the image (see Fig.1).
4. If the measured lengths are not correct, enter
TeleService service mode and select one of the following Fig.1 Image of Exposed film
codes.
021- Over Collimation on Lateral Blades
022- Over Collimation on Longitudinal Blades
023- Over Collimation on Iris Blades
and change the value.
Note: Each value represents a change of 0.1mm, so a
change from 300 to 290 would decrease the collimation by
1mm.
5. Click on Exit, the positioner will re-boot.
6. Repeat from step 2.
Notes
Collimator Blades not visible on Fluoro Image? Mag Lateral Collimator Longitudinal Iris Collimator
If so, use the codes on this page to adjust. Mode Blades Collimator Blades Blades
Pre-Requisite
Mag 0 Code 024 Code 025 Code 026
1. Cassette Sizing and Collimator pot calibrations
2. X-ray Tube Alignment Mag 1 Code 027 Code 028 Code 029
Procedure Mag 2 Code 030 Code 031 Code 032
1. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select one of
the codes from Table 1. Mag 3 Code 033 Code 034 Code 035
2. Use the buttons shown in Fig.2 to change the
collimation value. The value is displayed on the LED Table 1 Adjustment Codes
display (see Fig.2)
Note: Each value represents a change of 0.1mm, so
Display Collimation
a change from 300 to 290 would decrease the
Code Value
collimation by 1mm.
3. If using Console Service Mode put the Switch Increase/
SW1-1 on the Interface Bd 25S3 back to the off Decrease
position when finished. Code
Collimator
Reset
Blades
Enter
Increase/
Decrease Value
Fig. 1 Image showing
Collimator Blades Fig. 2 Positioner Console
Notes
Film Border not symmetrical? Film

If so, use the codes on this page to adjust. Note: these
adjustments can only correct an error of maybe 3mm. An
error larger than 3mm may require an alignment adjustment.
This adjusts the position of the cassette tray. X-ray Field
Pre-Requisite
1. Cassette Sizing and Collimator pot Calibrations Warning: Do not set
2. X-ray Tube Alignment the value for code 52
too low as it will Fig.1 Image showing
Procedure damage the switch unsymmetrical borders on film
3FC21: Error Code 133
1. Place a cassette in the SFD, collimate smaller than
Procedure
cassette
1. Enter thesizeService
(LED on Auto collimator
Mode/Setup buttonone
and select on console
of the
should be flashing).
following codes Make exposure.
2. Develop image and
052- Cassette check
Tray the centering
Position of the
Longitudinal x-ray
Position
exposure055-on the film/CR.
Cassette Tray IfLateral
not centered
Positionfollow step 3 below.
3. Enter the Service Mode/Setup and select one of the
following
2. Use thecodesbuttons shown in Fig.2 to change the value.
052- Cassette
The value is displayed Tray
on Position
the LEDLongitudinal
display (see Position
Fig. 2)
055- Cassette Tray Lateral Position
Note: Each value represents a change of 0.1mm, so a
Note:
change Each
fromvalue
60 torepresents a change
50 would move of 0.1mm,
the cassette soby
tray a
change
1mm. from 60 to 50 would move the cassette tray by 1mm.
Code
Code 052-
052- Smaller
Smaller values
values move
move the
the cassette
cassette tray
tray to
to the
the
head
head endend (left).
(left).
Code
Code 055- Smaller
055- Smaller values
values move
move the
the cassette
cassette tray
tray in
in ..
Press
Press Enter
Enter toto save
save settings
settings.then exit Setup mode.
4.
3. Check
If usingwith another
Console exposure
Service Modeandputrepeat if necessary.
the Switch SW1-1 Auto Collimator
If
on the Interface Bd 25S3 back to the off position whenon the
using Console Service Mode put the Switch SW1-1 button
Interface
finished. Bd 25S3 back to the off position when finished.
Notes
Film Division Borders too large or too small?
If so, use the codes on this page to adjust.

Cassette with 24cm
or 18cm dimension
Pre-Requisite
placed in this
1. Cassette Sizing and Collimator pot Calibrations direction
2. X-ray Tube Alignment
Procedure
1. Place a cassette in the SFD with a dimension of
24cm or 18cm in the longitudinal (head to foot)
direction (see Fig. 1). Make exposure and process
image.
2. Enter Teleservice, select Setup and select one of Fig.1 Cassette Orientation
the following codes in SFD
051- Lateral Division Borders
056- Longitudinal Division Borders
3. Change the value of the selected code to change

the collimation value.
Note: Each value represents a change of 0.1mm, so Lateral
a change from 80 to 70 would decrease the borders Code 051
(increase the collimation) by 1mm.
Note: The border size should be ideally 3mm.

Longitudinal
Code 056 Fig.2 4 on 1 Film Division
with large borders
Notes
Tomo Cut Height Adjustment

Procedure
1. Place a Tomo phantom (Fig.1) on the table-top.
2. Set the cut height on the console to cut through the
middle of the phantom (46mm if using phantom in Fig.1).
3. Set a tomo technique, 40o 1.2s, and make an exposure
using SFD technique (suggested technique settings if just
using phantom in Fig.1 is 50kV, 10mA, AEC off).
4. Using the resultant image measure the difference
between the set and actual cut heights in mm. Fig.1 Tomo
5. If adjustment is required, enter the Service Mode/Setup Phantom
and select one of the following codes
y 049- Cut Height Correction in SFD Mode
y 050- Cut Height Correction in Digital Mode Display Code Value
6. Note the value. Use the table below to determine the
new value based on the correction required. Increase/
Decrease
Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Code
Correction -8 -6 -4 -2 0 +2 +4 +6 +8
in mm
Reset
Example:
Set 50mm on Console:
Enter
Actual cut height 56mm
If original value is 5, then enter a value of 2 to subtract
6mm from the actual cut height.
7. Press Enter to save settings. Increase/

8. If using Console Service Mode put the Switch SW1-1 on Decrease Value
the Interface Bd 25S3 back to the off position when
finished.
Notes
DC Motor Controller Adjustments

Motor Controllers
If any of the DC Motor
Controllers are replaced the
vel
potentiometers must be
adjusted. Use the procedures bil
on these pages to adjust.
kv
DC Motor Controllers are:
y Table Tilt (23S1) der
y Table Elevate (23S2)
acc
y Tube Stand (23S3)
y SFD (23S4)
DC Motor Controller
Potentiometers
vel: Maximum motor speed. To be adjusted.
bil: Dynamo feedback balance. To be adjusted.

DC Motor Controller
showing Potentiometers
kv : The kv potentiometer is adjusted to eliminate motor
oscillations during drive. Normally factory adjusted.
der: The der potentiometer is adjusted to eliminate the

initial peak on motor speed. To be adjusted.
acc: Not used. NEXT
Notes

Select Motor Controller to Adjust SFD
MVS1 MVS2 MVS3 MVS4

Procedure
Set the system up as follows:
y Table Tilt 0 0
y SFD and Tube Stand centered
y SID at 1150mm
bil Offset Adjustment

1. Power the system off and on board 23S9 (backplane
board of 23 Group) place two wire leads wires on connector
MVS4-3 and MVS4-4 (see Fig.1). 23S1 23S2 23S3 23S4
2. Power on the Positioner and go to Positioner Service
Mode. Select Code 063 and Value 001 Fig. 1 Motor Controller
3. Connect a DVM to the lead wires on MVS4-3 and Rack 23
MVS4-4
4. Adjust the bil pot on the 23S4 Controller to get 0mV. Minimise overshoot or
5V/div ringing on the waveform
kv and der Adjustment 1s/div with DER
5. Connect an Oscilloscope to lead wires on MVS4-3 and
MVS4-4
6. Select Code 063 and Value 002
7. The movement will start moving back and forth.
8. Adjust kv pot to get a response as shown in Fig. 2
Adjust der pot on the 23S4 Controller to reduce
overshoot.
9. Exit service mode
10. Power off system and remove jum per wires. NEXT
Fig.2 Waveform
Notes

Tomo Slice
Table Tilt
SFD Height Display
velPotentiometer
vel Potentiometer Adjustment
Adjustment (Speed)
(Speed) 330 VEL Pot
400, 1.2s
1.1.On
Connect a volt meter
the Positioner on CPU
Console selectboard
tomo 25S1,
at 400, test
1.2spoint Exit Tomo Tomo Button
TP1
and – 3 (TP1
330mm -13
slice or 14(see
height ground) .
Fig. 1). Button
2. Tilt table to maximum speed with the joystick from
2.console.
Press PrepAdjust veltopotentiometer
to go to obtain
the start position +8.5
and then volt
make
a with
Tomo Exposure.
maximum tilting speed (or -8.5 with reverse tilting).
3. Release the exposure Switch.
4. Watch the SFD carefully and press the Prep switch

only. If you see movement (note small step is normal)
adjust the vel Pot on the SFD Speed Controller 23S4 (if Centre Tube
Motor Controller Stand
SFD moves backwards, speed is too high -Pot CCW Fig. 1 Positioner Console
decreases speed- if SFD moves forwards, s peed is too
low -Pot CW increases speed) (see Fig. 2).
VEL Pot
5. Exit Tomo Mode and centre Tube Arm. Repeat this
procedure from step 1 for further adjustments.
When the adjustment is correct the SFD and Tube

Stand will make a small movement when Prep is
pressed after a tomo run. Note that to get no mo tion is Fig. 2 Motor
not possible. Controller
BACK
Notes
Error Code Search
Click HERE for

Positioner Error Codes
Generator
Positioner Error
kW Limit Click HERE for Codes or Alarm
Generator Touchscreen Messages appear here
Error Messages
Click HERE for

Generator Error Log
Error Codes
Touchscreen Console
Positioner Console
To view the Error Log

Open TeleService, click
on Informations then
select Message Display
TeleService Service
GenWare Error Log Software
Notes
View & edit backed up APR Files

Laptop with the APR Editor. Click HERE
Setup Hyper Terminal as follows:
Connect using: COM 1
Bits per second: 57600 Transfer
Data Bits: 8 Complete Box
Parity: None
Flow Control: Hardware
On the Hyper Screen toolbar click on

Transfer select Receive File and set the
receiving protocol to:
Zmodem with Crash Recovery
Connect Laptop to Generator Fig.1 Hyperterminal

Touchscreen Console by plugging a Null Configuration Fig.3 Touchscreen screen
Modem cable (GE Part Number 2128821)
into J4 (see Fig.2).
Laptop Cable
Touch-screen connects here- J4
Select 'SYSTEM UTILITIES'
Enter Password '1973'
Select 'APR Backup/Restore'
Select the APR Protocol you wish to save and touch
the Touchscreen to Laptop Icon.
Transfer takes about 3 minutes and 'Transfer
Complete' box appears when complete (see Fig.3).
To restore a saved APR Protocol just touch the

Laptop to Touchscreen Icon. Fig.2 Laptop Connection to Touchscreen
Notes
DC Motor Controllers If the one of the following movements does not work, try
swapping the motor controller modules
The S1, S2 and S3 Motor Controllers have the Table Tilt (23S1)
same current rating (20A nominal- 40A peak) and Table Elevate (23S2)
are fully interchangeable but the plug in Resistor Tube Stand (23S3)
Pack located at the rear of the drive unit must be SFD (23S4)
exchanged. but you must change the Resistor Modules.
Note
Note: Do not get the resistor packs mixed up! After the first few systems (Q3 2004) the S4 Motor
Controller will be changed so that it is the same as the
S1-S3 Controllers (20/40 Current rating)
Resistor Packs
1 22K 14 Note 1 22K 14

Resistor Measure the
Pack resistance with
5 22K 10 the packs 5 56K 10
DC Motor Controller removed from
the board
23S1 Tilt 23S2 Elevate
The S4 Controller is rated for 14A nominal and
28A peak, it can be swapped with the other motor
1 32K 14 1 22K 14
controllers for troubleshooting purposes only-
but do not drive at full load.
The resistor pack must still be exchanged. 5 56K 10
Note: Do not get the resistor packs mixed up!

23S3 Tube Stand 23S4 SFD
Notes
Roll for
Overview
Procedure Procedure continued

1. Install Simple Dicom by clicking on the link below. 3. Note down the network settings and enter the information
When requested place the SIMPLE DICOM folder in the into the Precision (for Alias enter LAPTOP). Click on the
default location, directly on your C drive: link below to see how:
Icons will be created on your desktop for the Receiver Click HERE to Configure Precision
and Viewer (see Fig.1)
Click HERE to 4. Reset the Precision.
Install 5. On your Laptop, bring up the Simple Dicom Receiver
box again, and click on OK button (Fig. 2). Now your laptop
Click for procedure is ready to receive images.
to connect directly
Fig. 1 Desktop Icons to the Precision
6. Send Images: Go to the Application screen on the Digital
2. Connect your laptop to the network then click on the and select a patient from the patient list, then click on the
link below (SimpleDICOM\Receiver\ Send icon.
SimpleDICOMReceiver.exe) to find the AE Title, IP Click HERE to see how
Address and Port Number of your laptop (see Fig. 2).
Click HERE
7. The Images are sent to the following location in the
Simple DICOM folder:
C:\ SimpleDICOM \ DicomImages \ Patient ID \ Image
Type (XA or RF) \ Accession #_Date_Time \ Series # \
Network Note: the names of these folders

Settings are specific to each patient
OK View Images
OK Button To view the images, click on the Simple Dicom Viewer icon
Fig. 2 Simple Dicom Receiver Box
on your desktop.
Notes
Send Images directly to a Laptop using Simple DICOM

Procedure
1. Connect a network cable from your Connect network cable

laptop to the Platinum One PC (see Fig. 1) to motherboard
network socket
Note: A cross over network cable is not
required if using a Dell Latitude D620 or
D630 laptop. Older laptops, such as the
Dell 610 do require a cross over cable.
2. On you laptop set your IP address to an

address that is on the same subnet as the
Precision.
Example: If the Precision IP Address is
3.231.45.4
Set your laptop to: Click HERE for
3.231.45.5 procedure to
configure Laptop
Set the Subnet Mask to 255.255.252.0

Laptop
3. Open Simple DICOM on your laptop.
Click on the link below and follow the
procedure to install Simple DICOM (step 1 Back of Platinum One
of procedure) and then follow step 3 PC
onwards to configure and use Simple
DICOM. Click HERE for link Fig.1 Laptop Connection to Platinum One PC
to Simple DICOM
procedure
Notes
Computed Radiology (CR) Overview

CR Overview
CR is fast displacing film in the x-ray department.
CR Cassettes are placed in the bucky tray just like a film
cassette, but instead of containing film the CR Cassette has
a digital plate.
After (or even before) the exposure the cassette must be
identified prior to placing in the Reader. The identification
process adds patient and study informatiuon onto the plate.
The Cassette is then placed in the Reader where the digital
image is read off the plate and transferred to a review
station.
Agfa 25.0 CR Reader Agfa 75.0 CR Reader
Click HERE to see how to

use the Agfa CR Reader
Cassette in ID Viewer CR Cassettes for AEC Calibration
Notes
Using Agfa CR for an AEC Cal CR Setup

Procedure Note: The Cassette can be ID'd
1. On CR Reader PC, click on 'Start Centricity-CR' before or after taking an exposure
icon on the desktop.
2. When the Logon box appears enter:
User: administrator
Password: Set2adminpassw
3. The QC Viewer Screen appears, click on the ID
Viewer Icon or select View>ID from the toolbar (see
Fig.1). ID Viewer
4. The Centricity CR Opening Screen appears, click Icon (Skull)
on NEW (see Fig.2)
NEW
Fig. 1: Centricity QC Viewer Screen
5. Put the cassette in the ID Viewer as shown

in Roll over. Orange side up-label on right.
Roll to see
Fig. 2: Centricity CR Opening Screen NEXT
Notes
CR Setup
6. The ID Viewer screen
appears. Enter the data
following steps a to e as
shown.
e) Click on Write.
When message
appears remove
the cassette
a) Enter name
c) In Substudy field
select Flat Field
b) In Study Group
box select SYSTEM
DIAGNOSIS
d) Exposure
Class set to 200
To add additional images
to the same folder:
Right click in this box and
select Add Exposure.
Then give it a name.
Fig. 3: ID Viewer Screen NEXT
Notes
CR Setup
7. Expose the cassette on the
Precision then place it in the CR
Reader with the Orange side out and
the clips down (note: the silver dot
down at the front) see Fig.5.
8. Flat field image appears on the CR

reader PC.
Look at the LGM value it should be
between 2.1 and 2.3, if not:
re ID the cassette and take another
exposure using a different AEC
setting.
Roll to see
Silver dot
Clips down
Fig. 4: Agfa CR Cassette Fig. 5: Agfa CR Reader
Notes
Support Tool Updates
New versions of the Precision

Support Tool will be placed
periodically in the RF Category
on the X-ray Training Support
Central web-site.
You will receive an e-mail informing
you when the new file is available.
Click HERE to go to the

Support Central Site
Notes
Complete System Backup using Ghost 9.0
Procedure to Backup
Back Up
Drive
1. Enter the Infimed Digital Service mode.
2. Press the 'Windows' key to bring up the Start icon.
3. Click on the Start icon and select Programs >
Norton Ghost> Norton Ghost.
Back Up Drive
4. When the Norton Ghost 9.0 screen appear select
Basic view
Back Up Drive (see Fig.1-this is the Advanced
Click HERE
CLICK HERE to see Advanced
Basic view). Note: Backup
usually takes about 17 minutes and 3 CDs if there are
no patient images stored.
5. The Drive Backup Wizard screen appears, click on
NEXT
6. When the Drives to backup screen appears,
highlight the C drive and click on NEXT (see Fig. 2)
Fig.1
Fig.1 Norton
NortonGhost
Ghost9.0
9.0Basic View View
Advanced
Highlight C
NEXT
Fig.2 Backup Wizard Screen
Notes
Complete System Backup using Ghost 9.0
Procedure to Backup
7. For backup device select CD-RW/DVD-RW (see

Fig.3).
8. Click on NEXT.
9. When the Options screen appears, click on
NEXT (see Fig. 4)
10. Completing the Drive Backup screen appears,
put a blank CD in the Digital CD drive then click on Select CD-RW/
NEXT (see Fig.5). DVD-RW
Fig.3 Backup Location
BACK Fig.4 Options Fig.5 Completing the

Drive Backup
Notes
Problems Restoring?
Click HERE
Procedure
1. Put Norton Ghost 9.0 Product CD into the CD Drive
2. Shutdown the Digital PC, then power it back on while holding
down the DELETE and F1 keys.
3. System will boot into the Bios Setup Utilities screen. Use the
right arrow to select the BOOT tab, then use the down arrow to Boot Tab
select BOOT DEVICE PRIORITY <enter>. See Fig.6.
4. Highlight 1st BOOT DEVICE <enter> Boot Device
5. Use the down arrow to select the CD drive (CD drive may have Priority
‘CD’ somewhere in the title or it may have something like ‘4M-Hl-
DT-ST GCE 8527B1’), hit <enter>.
6. Press F10 to save and exit. Highlight OK and press <enter>.
7. The system will reboot. The following message will appear
'Press any key to boot from CD'. Press any key within 5 seconds.
8. When the End User Licence Agreement appears click ACCEPT
9. The Symantec Recovery Disk box will appear (Fig.7): Fig. 6 Bios Setup Screen
Select 'Advanced Recovery Tasks' <enter>.
Then select 'System Restore' <enter>
Then select 'Restore Drives' <NEXT>
Then select 'Single Drive' <NEXT>
10. When the 'Backup Image Folder & Filename' box appears
click on Browse. Advanced
11. When the OPEN box appears, remove the Norton Ghost 9.0 Recovery
Product CD from the CD Drive and put in Backup Disk 1. Tasks
Wait until the CD is running. A message box about D:\Document &
Settings may appear, click on OK. Then use the 'Up one Level'
button to locate the CD drive (D).
12. Select 'C_Drive.v2i' and click on OPEN.
13. Follow the instructions on the screen.
14. When complete set the 1st boot device back to the A drive. Fig. 7 Recovery Disk
Notes
Backup to an external USB device such as a Flash

Drive (minimum 4Gb if no patient images are on
the system) or USB Hard Drive.
Procedure to Backup
1. Enter the Infimed Digital Service mode.

2. Press the 'Windows' key to bring up the Start icon.
3. Click on the Start icon and select Programs >
Backup
Norton Ghost> Norton Ghost.
4. When the Norton Ghost 10 screen appear select
Backup then select Back Up Now.
5. The Back Up Now screen appears, click on Define Back Up Now
New Backup (see Fig. 2)
6. When the Define Backup Wizard screen appears,
click on NEXT Fig.1 Norton Ghost 10
Define New
Backup
Fig.2 Back Up Now Screen

Notes
Procedure to Backup
7. Highlight C Drive and click on NEXT (see Fig.3).

8. On the next screen select Independent Recovery
Point then click on NEXT (see Fig. 4).
9. On the next screen browse for a location (look for the
external USB Flash Drive or external USB hard drive) to
store the backup (D drive is usually the CD Drive) (see Select C Drive
Fig. 5)
Independent Fig.3 Wizard Backup

Recovery Point
Browse for location

to store backup
Fig.4 Wizard Backup

Fig.5 Wizard Backup
Notes
Procedure to Backup
10. On the next screen give the backup a name then click
on NEXT (see Fig. 6).
11. On the next screen click on FINISH.
12. The Back Up Now screen appears, highlight the
backup name created in step 10 then click on Back Up
Now (see Fig. 7).
13. The backup now starts (see Fig. 8). Give backup
a name
Fig.6 Wizard Backup
Highlight
backup name
Fig. 7 Back Up Now Screen

Fig.8 Backup Starts
Notes
Problems Restoring?
Click HERE
Procedure
1. Plug in the external USB device (Flash Drive or Hard Drive)

that contains the backup
2. Put Norton Ghost 10 Product CD into the CD Drive Boot Tab
3. Shutdown the Digital PC, then power it back on while
holding down the DELETE and F1 keys. Boot Device
4. System will boot into the Bios Setup Utilities screen. Use the Priority
right arrow to select the BOOT tab, then use the down arrow to
select BOOT DEVICE PRIORITY <enter>. See Fig.1.
5. Highlight 1st BOOT DEVICE <enter>
6. Use the down arrow to select the CD drive (CD drive may
have ‘CD’ somewhere in the title or it may have something like
‘4M-Hl-DT-ST GCE 8527B1’), hit <enter>.
7. Press F10 to save and exit. Highlight OK and press
Fig. 1 Bios Setup Screen
<enter>.
8. The system will reboot. The following message will appear
'Press any key to boot from CD'. Press any key within 1
second.
9. When the End User Licence Agreement appears click
ACCEPT
10. When the Symantec Recovery Disk screen appear select
Recover My Computer.
11. When the Select Recovery Point box appears select a
recovery point from the list
12. Click on Recover My Computer. The restore now begins.
When complete restore the latest cal/config backup data to the
default backup folder.
Notes
RXi Generator Touch screen Software Load

Procedure
1.Before starting note down the Licence key number (from Main Menu J4 Data Link Plug in
select Touch screen setup) ROLL Connector keyboard here
If it is not possible to get the Licence key number or it is blank, then click
HERE to go to the CPI web-site.
2. On the Acquisition screen make a note

of the Receptor Symbols used. You will
need to re-select these at the end of this procedure.
3. Backup the APR Protocols to your laptop. Receptor Symbols
4. Plug a keyboard into the back of the Touch-screen console (see Fig.1 ).
To do this you may have to unplug the J4 connector first.
Fig. 1 Connecting Keyboard to
5. Open the CD Drive and insert the Touch-screen SW CD.
the Touch-screen Console
WARNING: Do not insert this CD in your laptop or PC
Power off the touch-screen console.
6. Power on the console. The console with boot from the CD.
Follow the instructions on the screen, when the following prompts appear
enter the following:
Size of Screen: 12" LCD <enter> Insert CD here
Select Install Complete System <enter>
Customer Code: 8662 <enter>
7. When the install has finished the CD will automatically be ejected from
the CD drive and the touch-screen console will reboot.
8. Remove the CD, unplug the keyboard and plug back in the J 4 cable. Fig. 2 Inserting the CD in the NEXT
Touch-screen Console
Notes
RXi Generator Touch screen Software Load

Procedure
9. The touch-screen location calibration will appear. Carefully
press the X button in order to complete the calibration.
SETTINGS
10. When complete enter the Licence key number (from Main Digital Port COM 4
Menu select System Utilities then Touch screen Setup.
Select Settings tab)
11. Click on the icon (see fig.3). A keyboard screen will Digital Port Licence Key Number Make
appear. Enter the licence key number using the on screen to COM 4 a note of this in case of
keyboard, then click on Enter.
Software loads.
Click on to enter
12. Back on the Settings tab screen set Digital Port to COM 4
License key
(see Fig. 3).
Make sure Digital serial cable is plugged into COM 4 port on Fig. 3 Touch-screen Setup Screen
the rear of the Touch-screen console. Settings Tab
13. Click on the FEATURES tab (see Fig. 4) and check the
box if your system has the Infimed PC. Click on OK and save
settings.
14. From Main Menu screen select System Utilities

(password 1973) then Receptor Symbols. Select the
Receptor Symbols for your system as noted in Step 2 of this If your system has the
procedure. ROLL Infimed PC then select
the 'Infimed Digital
15. Restore the APR Protocol backup from your laptop Interface' box.
BACK Fig. 4 Features Screen
Notes
Note: For Fluoro mA

adjustment use R88
on CPU Bd.
Overview Click HERE for
This calibration procedure is performed if the console Procedure
mAs readout does not match the actual measured mAs
value. This is factory calibrated so usually does not need
any adjustment. mAs Plug
Connect mAs
The X-Ray Generator is factory calibrated a using a meter here
Dynalyzer III, which has an accuracy of ±2%. Another
instrument that is commonly used to measure mA, the
Keithley model 35035, mA/mAs meter, has an accuracy
of ±1% +2 digits. R34 mA
If the factory-set generator performance is measured Adjustment Pot
Fig. 1 HV Tank
against another measuring device, it is possible for them
to disagree by ±4%.
The procedure described here explains how to adjust the
X-Ray Generator to another measuring device.
If the discrepancy is greater than ±5% it could be
because either the generator has been damaged, or the
measuring device is not in calibration. Proceed with
caution.
When a radiographic exposure is made, the filament

current is initially set to the value held in the calibration
data. Once the exposure has started, the mA stabiliser
adjusts the filament current to obtain constant mA. As a
consequence, in short exposures (less than 10 ms) the
mA is largely dependent on the calibration data. For
longer exposures the mA is largely dependent on the mA
stabiliser. The mA stabiliser for this system is functional
<5 ms after the exposure starts. Fig. 2 Generator CPU Board
Notes
Enter Calibration Mode Bolt holding the

To enter calibration mode a jumper must be placed on the Console console (8mm Allen)
board FM562. Follow the steps below to access the board.
1. Remove the two bolts holding the arm of the console (8mm Allen).
See Fig. 1
2. Remove the rear cover of the console (four screws- flat blade OTS Console Display
screwdriver). See Fig. 2.
3. With the system powered off, place a jumper on JP5. See Fig. 3
4. Switch system back on and details will appear on the OTS Console
display. See Fig. 1.
Fig.1 Accessing the Console
To exit service mode, switch off the system and remove the jumper JP5
Remove back
Place a Jumper
cover (Flat blade
on JP5
screwdriver)
NEXT
Fig.3 Console Board FM562 Fig.2 Remove back cover
Notes
ALL Button
Scroll Back or
LONG Button
Select a Value
Use the buttons on the OTS Console, ENTER
as shown here, to navigate around
the service mode
This information is displayed LAT Button

on the OTS Console display Scroll Forward or
Select a Value
Fig.4 Console Controls

Calibrate Vertical
Use the ALL or LAT buttons VERTICAL FFD SID Potentiometer
to cycle through these menus
items, which appear on the
Console display. Calibrate Tube
Select the one which you INCL. ANGLE Angulation
wish to calibrate. Potentiometer
Use the PIVOT ROT, TUBE Calibrate Tube Rotation

ANG and VERT buttons to ROT. ANGLE Potentiometer Click HERE to select a
release the locks during the Potentiometer
calibrations. calibration procedure.
Information on Software Version
INFO press ENTER (LONG button) These procedures will
Use the LONG button to
and the display will show the step you through the
enter the data.
version: information which appears
When finished, power FM528 V.1.00 GE on the OTS Console
down and remove
display screen
jumper JP5 from FM562
Notes
Roll to see buttons RETURN
VERTICAL FFD VERT Use the VERT button to release the TIP: Position the OTS away
locks to raise/lower the tube from the table before starting
this calibration
LONG
ENTER
Put the OTS Telescoping arm

STAND TOP
all the way to the top position
LONG
ENTER
Pull the OTS Telescoping arm

STAND TOP -1m down 1 metre from the top
position
LONG
ENTER
In a rad room this would be placing the Focal spot of

tube 1m from the cassette in a table bucky.
PUT DFF= 1m
But on an RXi the SFD is not used as a receptor for 170cm
the OTS Tube so set the tube 170cm from the floor. from floor
LONG
ENTER To move to next calibration press
LONG button (ENTER) then the ALL
button, otherwise power down and
remove jumper JP5 from Board
END FM562
Notes
RETURN
INCL. ANGLE
TUBE
Use the TUBE ANG button to release Roll to see buttons
ANG
LONG
the locks to angle the tube
ENTER
Point the Tube at the Wall Bucky and press the

INC. : XXX ALL Button until the display readout is the
same as the actual tube rotation angle.
LONG
N.T.= No Test, which means there will be no
ENTER tube angulation exposure interlock.
ANGLE +900 Angle the Tube to +900
LONG
ENTER Tube Pointing at Wall Bucky:

Shown at +900 Rotation
ANGLE -900 Angle the Tube to -900
LONG
ENTER
ANGLE 00 Angle the Tube to 00

To move to next calibration
LONG
press LONG button (ENTER)
ENTER then the ALL button,
otherwise power down and
remove jumper JP5 from -900 Angle 00 Angle +900 Angle
END
Board FM562
Notes
ROT. ANGLE
RETURN
LONG
ENTER PIVOT
Use the PIVOT ROT button to release Lateral
ROT
the locks to rotate the tube Bridge Rails
ROT. : XXX Rotate the tube towards the Wall Bucky and X-ray Tube
press the ALL Button until the display readout is
LONG
the same as the actual tube rotation angle.
ENTER N.T.= No Test, which means there will be no
tube rotation exposure interlock.
Front
ANGLE +900 Rotate the Tube to +900 Roll to see buttons 00 Rotation
LONG
ENTER
ANGLE -900 Rotate the Tube to -900

LONG
ENTER Front
0 0 +900 Rotation
ANGLE 0 Rotate the Tube to 0
LONG
ENTER
Choose to show the Rotation Angle To move to next
degree readout on the OTS display. calibration press LONG
VIS. DISPLAY XXX
Use the ALL or LAT buttons to button (ENTER) then the
LONG select between YES or NO ALL button, otherwise
ENTER power down and remove
Finished. Power down and Front
jumper JP5 from Board
END remove jumper JP5 (FM562)
FM562 -900 Rotation
or move to next cal
Notes
Enter Calibration Mode

To enter calibration mode a jumper must be placed on the Automatic
Collimator board FM457-2. Follow the steps below to access the board.
1. Remove the rear cover of the OTS Carriage. See Fig. 1 Automatic
Collimation Board
2. Remove the metal housing covering the Auto Collimation Board. FM457-2 is behind
this cover
3. With the system powered off, place a jumper on JP2. See Fig. 2
4. Switch system back on and details will appear on the Collimator Display
(see Fig.1).
To exit service mode, switch off the system and remove the jumper JP2
JP2
Jumper for Collimator
Automatic Display
Collimation
Service Mode
Fig.1 OTS
Fig. 2 Auto
Collimation NEXT
Board FM457-2
Notes
Use the buttons on the Collimator

Console, as shown here, to navigate
around the service mode
The instructions are displayed

on the Collimator Console
display
: Increase
: Decrease
set values
set values
M1
: Back to previous
setting
: Enter
Collimator Buttons in The next page will step you

Service Mode through the information which
appears on the Collimator NEXT
Console display screen
Notes
Roll to see
buttons
Language Select between English Enter

and Italiano
Enter DFF Fixed Select 100cm
Select between
Measurement in Enter
centimetres or inches
Enter Lateral FFD 1 Select 100cm
Vx. FFD
Select FIXED Enter
measurement
Enter Lateral FFD 2 Select 180cm
Lat. FFD Select DISCREET Enter

measurement
These are not used on
Lateral FFD 3, 4, 5 the RXi so enter anything
Enter and continue with enter
Select BUCKY if Wall- Click for
stand tilts horizontally, more info. Enter
Vertical receptor otherwise select NO
Enter Dx. this is the Right receptor. Panoramic FFD 1 Select 200cm
The selection of the Right or Left
receptor depends WS location in the
Lateral Dx. receptor room and wiring to the Auto Collimation Enter
Bd in the OTS.
Enter Click HERE for more details Panoramic FFD 2 Select 205cm
on Right/Left selection
Click to continued on
Lateral Sx. receptor Sx. this is the Left receptor Enter next page
Notes
Roll to see
buttons
Cassette 18x13 in Place a 18 x 13cm Cassette
right/left lat. receptor in wall bucky. Note: If you don't have
18cm in the vertical direction an 18 x13 cm cassette
Enter then use a piece of wood
cut to 20.75 by 15.75cm
Cassette 43x35 in Place a 43 x 35cm Cassette
right/left lat. receptor in wall bucky. If Vertical 18cm
43cm in the vertical direction Receptor
Enter selection is
BUCKY the
It automatically selects cassette sizing
Minimum FFD steps will be
80cm. Use this value.
repeated
Enter Don't forget to move
vertical holding tab into
Maximum FFD It automatically selects position
180cm. Use this value.
Enter
Table Distance Select 5cm
Enter
Visual zazione DFF: Select YES

This is to see the SID readout on
the collimator display
Enter
Finished. Power down then remove jumper
END JP2 from Auto Collimator Board FM457-2
Notes
Connect cable to RIGHT Connect cable to LEFT

Auto
connection terminals connection terminals
Collimation Bd
M33, M35 and M58 to M30, M32 and M50 to
(FM457-2)
M65 M57
In OTS configuration In OTS configuration

(enabled with a jumper on (enabled with a jumper on
JP2 -Auto Collimation Bd) JP2 -Auto Collimation Bd)
set: set:
Lateral Dx. Receptor BUCKY Lateral Dx. Receptor NO
Lateral Sx. Receptor NO Lateral Sx. Receptor BUCKY
OTS Column
(viewed with user facing the
Wallstand on this side Wallstand on this side
collimator with both OTS
as viewed from the front as viewed from the front
Tube and Collimator rotation
of the OTS column is of the OTS column is
at 0o)
considered RIGHT (Dx) considered LEFT (Sx)
Notes
Collimator Cal & Config: Enter Service Mode

Overview
This service mode can be used to:
y Configure the Collimator
y Set the Potentiometers
y Enable/disable the manual collimation override
keyswitch (rear of collimator)
The potentiometer calibrations for the longitudinal and
lateral collimator blades are performed in the factory. For
our purposes, only use this service mode to enable the
collimator key switch manual mode operation. JP3
Jumper for
Enter Calibration Mode
Collimator Service
To enter calibration mode a jumper must be placed on the
Mode
Collimator board FM457-1. Follow the steps below to
access the board.
1. Power off the system then remove the lateral and

longitudinal collimator knobs off the front of the collimator
(2mm set-screws).
2. Remove the front cover very carefully as it plugs into

the collimator board, then place a jumper on JP3 of the
Collimator Board FM457-1. Do not remove jum pers from
Fig. 1 Collimator with Front
JP1 or 2 (See Fig. 1).
Cover removed showing Board
FM457-1
3. Put back the front cover and knobs.
4. Switch system on and details will appear on the Roll for close up
Collimator Display. of FM457-1
To exit service mode, switch off the system & remove NEXT
JP3
Notes
Collimator Cal & Config: Enter Service Mode
Use the buttons on the Collimator

Console, as shown here, to navigate
around the service mode
The instructions are displayed

on the Collimator Console
display
Cross (Lateral)
Shutters knob
Longitudinal
Shutters knob
:Step through M2
: Go back to
M1 preceding display
selections
: Enter
Collimator Buttons in The next page will step you

Service Mode through the information which
appears on the Collimator NEXT
Console display screen
Notes
Close the Cross (lateral) shutters and

Roll Over to see collimator Cross shutter
the value should be less than 200.
button function for service Value: xxxx
If not, adjust potentiometer
mode
Enter
MAX OPEN ENDSWITCH Fully open the cross

Cross shutters shutters
Enter
Choice: R309L
Type of Mechanics Close the Long shutters and the
R309I or R302ACS Long shutter
R302ACS value should be less than 200.
Select R302ACS Value: xxxx
If not, adjust potentiometer
Enter
Enter
Cross Shutters Choice: YES or NO
present: YES Select YES MAX OPEN ENDSWITCH Fully open the long
Long shutters shutters
Enter
Enter
Choice: Manual or Exclusion
Long Shutters Choice: YES or NO
Select Manual.
present: YES Select YES
KEY FUNCTION Manual allows the override key
MANUAL (rear of collimator) to bypass a
Enter
automatic collimator exposure
inhibit
Motorised Filter Choice: YES or NO Enter
present: NO Select NO
End Power down and remove jumper
Enter Remove the Jumper JP3 (or cycle power to go through
the menu again)
Notes
Conditions necessary for Auto Collimation Roll to see

Inputs 80 to 86 1. X-ray Tube must be pointing at the wall bucky Collimator
(i.e. rotated and angled in the correct position). Indicator
Input M81 on FM457-2 at 24Vdc. Lights and
location of
2. The OTS must be in the correct longitudinal FM457-2
zone- rail on longitudinal rail.
Input M80 on FM457-2 at 24Vdc. Click to
see Inter-
3. The 100cm or 180cm SID detent switches must connection
be activated. Schematic
Inputs M85 (100cm) or M86 (180cm) on FM457-2 for OTS,
at 24Vdc. Wall stand
Auto Collimation Bd FM457-2 etc.
4. Wall Bucky must be vertical and not rotated (if
wall bucky has these switches). Input M81 on Zone Rail,
Lateral bridge Rail FM457-2 at 24Vdc. located on
longitudinal
CEILING
5. A Cassette must be inserted in the wall bucky. rail:
R ai l
Input M35 (right) or M32 (left) on FM457-2 at 24Vdc Runs from

approximately
udinal
6. Collimator key must be in Automatic position. 80cm to

Four Switches: 200cm SID
g it
Function (from ceiling to floor):

Lon
OTS Park Switch (one of two Click to

in series- the other is the see
Lateral SW on OTS carriage)
180cm SID Switch
100cm SID Switch
OTS Switches Zone Rail Switch Zone Rail
GE Medical Systems
Digital PC Ugrade
Notes pag. 42 / 168
Object M4 Upgrade
Sparkling Pixel Defect

4.3.11. The sparkling pixels defect
WARNING
The presence of sparkling pixels on the image is a defect that sometimes may occurs on digital
Sparkling Pixels appear systems: if you experience this kind of problem on your system, you shall update the FPGA0
on the Digital Image. This device as per the following procedure.
software fix is part of the
M4 FMI Upgrade. The sparking pixels problem can be resolved by updating the FPGA0 device with software ver.0x13
as per the following steps:
Roll over to see an

example of an Image • Run the “ServiceApp” program and select the button.
with Sparkling Pixels
• The “Hardware” window will be displayed.
• Select the “IAPDB FPGA0” button.
• The browsing window will be displayed: you shall select “FPGA0_RevID-0x13.bin” file and
Note: The 'Sparkling click on the “Open” button.
Pixels' can also be
caused by a defective
Camera cable
• When the system displays the FPGA0 downloaded correctly pop-up, hit ok, exit the
application, and shut the machine down. It should be powered off fully, not just rebooted.
This should remove the sparkling pixels.
In this case the FPGA0 version will be Rev.0x0013.

Notes
Site Key
If the Site Key is removed (cleared), the Enter
Site Key box will appear on the Digital Monitor
(Fig.1). You will need to enter the Site Key.
To find the Site Key perform the following

procedure:
1. On Digital keyboard press the WINDOWS key,

select START then RUN. When the dialog box Fig.1 Enter Site Key Box
appears enter REGEDIT then click on OK.
2. When the Registry Editor screen appears

(Fig.2) follow the path:
My Computer
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
SOFTWARE
GE
OrionCore
Configuration
3. Double click on the file SiteKey. The Edit
String box will appear (Fig.3). The value data box
contains the system site key. Write it down.
Fig.3 Site Key Fig.2 Registry Editor

Notes
LV 52 LV 49
Output LEDs
Click for more
information
LV 96 LV 93
LV 97 LV 4 LV 1
ON= Tube 1 selected
(on in SFD, Digital and
Table-top techniques using
Tube 1) LV 97
Input LEDs
Click for more
information
LV 98
ON= Power Supply present LV 98
LV 48 LV 45
(+24Vdc)
Note: Supply is actually
around 27Vdc 25S3 Interface Board
Notes
25S1 CPU
Board L3: Watchdog:
L1: ON=CPU Bd
Fault (behind ON=OK
ribbon cable)
L4: CAN
L2: ON=+5V transmission- Not
(behind ribbon cable) used
ASSI Board Input Battery

LEDs (L23 to L38)
These LEDs provide L23 L5: ON= Low battery
fault status
information on the ASSI Board Output
stepper motor drives LEDs (L1 to L22)
and sensors. These LEDs provide
Click for more drive signal and
information direction information
L38 to the stepper motor
drives.
Click for more
information
25S2 ASSI Board
(piggy backed on
the CPU Bd)
L1 L22
Notes
X‐ray TAB 240

How to get on the X‐ray TAB List
To get updates of the X‐Ray RAD and R&F Service
Documentation CD‐ROM 2362753‐200 you need to be on the tab
list 240.
If you are a relatively new employee you may need to be

added to the TAB system before you can be added to an
individual TAB.
Click HERE
HERE for the Workflow form. X‐Ray RAD and R&F Service
Documentation CD‐ROM
2362753‐200
To add yourself to the X‐ray TAB click HERE
HERE for the
Workflow form.
For TAB Support Central Site click HERE

HERE
Notes
Problem sending DICOM Images to device on the Network

Issue:
C-Echo and PING are successful but images do not send.
The status box displays 'Aborted' a few seconds after
initiating the send.
Roll Over
1. Log in as Administrator. Open Digital Service mode,

go to Configuration and delete all the entries under
Archive Devices, Printers, Worklist and Query/Retrieve
2. In Windows Explorer go to C:\WINNT\system32\

drivers\etc. Open the hosts file with notepad then delete
all the dicom device entries. Roll Over
3. In Windows Explorer go to C:\program files\GE\

Dicom App\Merge and open the MergeCom.app file
with notepad. Scroll down until you see:
'List Remote Application Entities that the system can
connect to'
delete all the entries (see Fig. 1) then save the file. Delete all
entries
4. Re-boot system
5. In Digital Service mode, go to Configuration and re-

enter the information for all the devices
6. Re-boot System
7. In applications select a patient and send the images Fig. 1: Mergecom.app File
Notes
Click to go to Digital
Applications Screen
Status
Click on these
tabs to go to the
screens
This screen shows the

status of network transfers
Status Screen
Notes
Click to go to Digital
Applications Screen
Status
Click on these
tabs to go to the
screens
This is the Software
Version of the Digital
PC Platinum One
RXi Software Versions Screen
Notes
Select Version Infimed Digital
DVD Recorder connection for

Infimed Image System
Infimed PC:
Rear View
Use this BNC

Connector Sony DVD Recorder
230Vac Power
Console
NTSC or PAL Use this Video In

Select the video format in the BNC Connector
Digital Service mode. Select
Config. Control
Click on System Configuration The DVD Recorder, like a
Tab VCR must be controlled
then click on System Options using its own remote
tab. control. There is no control
Select option under Scan signal from the RXi.
Converter DVD Recorder: Rear View
Notes
Image Intensifier Levelling Adjustment
Overview
The II should be level with the table-top. If not the Measure the distance
levelling bolts on the II Mounting Bracket must be between the II Mounting
adjusted. The procedure is performed with the table Bracket & the II Plate at
at 45O to split the difference between the sag in the II the 3 places marked X
mounting between horizontal and vertical.
Procedure II Plate
1. Put the table angle to 45 0 (this is a compromise X
position between vertical and horizontal).
2. Measure the distance between the II Mounting

Bracket and the II plate (see Fig.1) at three positions
around the bracket. II Mounting
Bracket
X
3. If the distance is not the same, adjust the levelling
bolts (13mm and 17mm wrenches or sockets).
Click for close up view
4. Check the distance and adjust again if necess ary. X
Levelling
Bolts
Fig. 1 II Levelling
Adjustment
Notes
Receptor Time-Out Message

Symptom
If the RECEPTOR TIME OUT message appears on generator touch screen the
first time the system is switched on then try the following procedure.
Possible Cause
This message could be caused by a OUTPUT missing from digital system. Click on
Relay
1. Enter Digital Service Mode
2. On the main service screen, click on the relay button in the GUI (see Fig.1).
3. The Fluoro Inhibit should be ON, as shown in Fig.1
If is OFF this is probably the cause of the RECEPTOR TIMEOUT message.
Follow the procedure below to fix.
The Fix
1. In the Digital Service mode, click on the CONFIG button.
2. Select GENERATOR LINES
3. Select RELAY OUTPUTS Fluoro
4. The first line is Fluoro Inhibit and will be ENABLED, select DISABLED and Inhibit
click on the SAVE button to save changes. Roll to see
5. Exit CONFIG menu.
6. Re-enter the configuration menu again by clicking on the CONFIG button.
7. Select GENERATOR LINES then RELAY OUTPUTS
8. Put back FLUORO INHIBIT to ENABLED. Click on the SAVE to save
changes then exit.
9. Exit Service App.
10. Enter Clinical Application mode. Fig.1 Digital Service Mode
When application opens, a relay will activate on GIM (this is the Fluoro Inhibit Screen
Relay).
11. Exit Clinical Application and enter Service App again.
12. Check Relay output list, FLUORO INHIBIT output should be ON (see
Fig.1).
Notes
Platinum One Log On

During power on of the Platinum One PC, it
should automatically boot to the applications Double Click on
mode. If it boots to a logon box, then follow the these files
procedure below to change the default logon to
operator:
1. On Digital keyboard press the WINDOWS key,

select START then RUN. When the dialog box
appears enter REGEDIT then click on OK.
2. When the Registry Editor screen appears

follow the path:
My Computer
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
SOFTWARE
Microsoft
Windows NT
CurrentVersion
Winlogon
3. Double click on the file DefaultUserName and

change the value data box to operator. See
(Fig.1).
Double click on the file ForceAutoLogon and Fig. 1 Registry Editor
change the value data box to 1.
Double click on the file AutoAdminLogon and
change the value data box to 1.
Notes
Issue
In the Iris Calibration Spot screen the Subtracted button is Subtracted Button is
greyed out and not available Note: this is normal for RF greyed out
systems but should be available on DSA systems.
This is a software bug that can be eliminated through the
following procedure:
Procedure
1. On Digital keyboard press the WINDOWS key, select
START then RUN. When the dialog box appears enter
EXPLORER then click on OK.
2. When Windows Explorer screen appears follow the path:

C:\ Program Files \ GE \ XML
3. Right click on the SysConfig.xml file and open with

Notepad.
4. Press Control and F keys to display a FIND box. Type in
‘Spot Subtract Calibration’ and click on Find Next button.
Spot Iris Calibration Screen
Roll Over to see file
5. Look for the text ‘CurrentSetting=”1" ,this occurs three

times, and change the “1” to “2”.
6. Save and close the file.
Notes
Problems Restoring Ghost Backup
Issue IAPDB Board was here

Sometimes there are problems restoring
a Ghost backup.
One possible cause is the IAPDB. The
IAPDB has a virtual HDD on it and this
causes a mismatch when trying to restore
the Ghost.
To fix this issue, completely remove the

IAPDB board and move the SVGA
monitor cable from the Video Interface Bd
(bottom) connector to Matrox Bd
connector as shown in Fig.1.
Move SVGA Primary Monitor cable

from Video Interface Bd connector
(bottom) to SVGA socket on Matrox Bd
as shown.
If the system has a Reference Monitor
there will be a cable already in this
socket, so remove it and plug in the
Primary Monitor cable.
Completely remove the IAPDB
Board (disconnect all the
Fig.1 Platinum One PC
connectors (4) and also remove it
with left side cover and
from the slot). Remember to follow
IAPDB Board removed
ESD procedures!
Notes
RXi Receptor Settings
If the system has an

analog Nical image chain Receptor Technique Tube AEC AEC Interface
receptors 1 and 6 are not Number Channel Chamber Options
used. Type
1 Digital Positioner 3 Ion 19
DFR (Fluoro/Record) Tube 1 (only with Infimed
If the system has no OTS Digital)
and no Wallstand receptors 2 Spot Film Positioner 1 Solid 13
4 and 5 are not used. SFD (Cassette) Tube 1 State
If the system has no OTS 3 Table-top Positioner None N/A 13

but has a Wallstand inline
1 (Direct) Tube 1
with the table, receptor 4
is used with Tube 1 and 4 Wallstand OTS 2 Solid 13
receptor 5 is not used. 2 Tube 2 State
5 Table-top OTS None N/A 13

Receptor 6 is only used if 2 (Direct) Tube 2
the system has a digital
Infimed image chain and 6 Digital (DSA) Positioner 4 Ion 19
the DSA option has been DSA Tube 1 (only with Infimed
Digital with DSA
purchased. option)
DFR SFD 1
2 2 DSA Receptors
Generator Applications Screen
Notes
MAC Address
Infimed Platinum One Digital PC: Windows 2000
1. Press the WINDOWS key on the digital keyboard.
2. From the menu list click on RUN.
3. When the Run box appears type in cmd.
4. In the Command window type ipconfig/all at the command prompt
The 12 digit Physical Address is the MAC address
MAC Address
Notes
Note
When replacing the Positioner CPU you must
either load software to the EEPROM on the new
board or swap EEPROMs with the old board (see
Fig.1). 25S1 CPU Board
The old CPU board must be returned with an

EEPROM on it!
The software version on the CPU Board must be

the same as the keyboard. After replacing the
board use TeleService to check software
versions.
25S2 ASSI
No Serial EEPROM
If the versions are the same, restore the Board
Port on
positioner calibration and configuration backup.
Laptop? Serial Port SN18 (right
Click HERE most connector,
behind ribbon cable)
If the versions are different or if the version is not
used to load J1, J2
the latest then double click on the paper clip icon
Positioner CPU
to view the procedure to update the CPU Board
software
EEPROM software.
When the software load has been completed

remember to restore the positioner calibration
and configuration backup. For Software Download
procedure double click
on the paper clip Fig. 1 25S1 CPU Board
Notes
Note
The software version on the

Console CPU board
(keyboard) must be the
same as the Host (25S1) 1S2 Console
CPU board. If the board is CPU Board
replaced use TeleService to
check software versions.

Connector CN6
If the versions are different or (used to cycle
if the version is not the latest power to the
then double click on the board)
paper clip icon to view the
procedure to update the Connect Parallel cable to this
Console CPU Board socket (CN9) as shown. Fibre Optic
EEPROM software. CN9 is a 25 pin male Cables
Parallel Cable (25 connector (from 25S1 CPU
pin female to 25 Board)
pin male)
For Software Download Connect to the

procedure double click Infimed Digital PC’s No Parallel Port
on the paper clip parallel port or to on Laptop?
your laptop if it has a Click HERE
Infimed Digital PC parallel port.
Notes
Component Replacement
To see all the jumpers, adjustments & calibrations
that must be performed after replacing a board or
Click for
major component use the drop-down box to the replacement guide
right to select the component. for other system
Note: The list of tasks does not include any components
HHS tests that may need to be performed.
Select Component ...Select Component
CPI Indico Generator
Notes
Component Replacement
To see all the adjustments & calibrations that

must be performed after replacing a board or
major component use the drop-down box to the
right to select the component.
Note: The list of tasks does not include any
HHS tests that may need to be performed.
Select Component ..Select Component
Precision RXi
Notes
Overview
An optional Injector can be
connected to the Precision RXi
using the connector on the table
base. The control of the injector
is done from the Infimed Digital Click HERE for
Applications Screen. Interface
Rate: 6 fps Fluoro Loop Diagram
Store Image
Medrad Injector
Pressing the Injector icon will cycle

through the three modes of operation
No Injector Mode Possible (check that a multiple
record frame rate has been selected - Injector sync
does not work when Rate is set at Single)
The Injector will start when X-ray starts
The Injector will be delayed by the selected time (1

to 30 seconds) after the start of X-ray
The Injector will start immediately on the press of

the exposure switch, but the x-ray will be delayed
by the selected time (1 to 30 seconds)
Digital Application GUI
Notes
Injector Connection Diagram
Injector Connector on table base
Notes
Offline Knowledge Click HERE to go to the

A incredibly useful tool that allows easy access to troubleshooting solutions. PSDB Support Central
The troubleshooting solutions database can be easily searched by typing in
keywords and clicking on the Search button.
Offline Knowledge
The whole database for a selected
modality can be downloaded to your
laptop and viewed offline for 30 days.
When on-line you can renew your 30

Type in keyword here,
which could be an error day licence and update the database
code or a symptom by clicking on Offline in the toolbar.
Notes
Light Field to X-ray Check X1
1. Place a cassette on the table-top and manually

collimate to an area smaller than the cassette size.
2. Turn on the collimator light and place coins in Measure the
difference
each corner of the light field plus one of
between the light
orientation- see Fig.1, or use a collimator light field & x-ray fields (X1
tool. & X2) across one
3. Set the SID to 115 cm-use collimator tape plane.
measure. Make a table-top exposure. On the
developed image measure the difference between X2
Fig. 1 Light Field with
the light and x-ray field across one plane Coins
(longitudinal or lateral) X1 and X2 - see Fig.2. Fig. 2 Developed
Enter the SID, X1 and X2 values into the formula Image
boxes below then repeat for the other plane.
The resultant error cannot exceed 2% (23mm at Click HERE for Lateral Click HERE for
115cm SID). (front to back across Longitudinal (head to
If the error is >2% click on one of the Adjustment table-top) Adjustment foot) Adjustment
links to the right.
Formula Click HERE if Light field

SID 115 cm is larger or smaller than
(X1 + X2)
x 100% = Error x-ray field
X1 0.00 mm SID
X2 0.00 mm
Result: % Error: 0.00 %
Notes
Alignment Steps
Don’t be nervous
about aligning the 2 2. Align X-ray tube to Click for
RXi...just follow centre of SFD using light procedure
these steps field (remove table-top to do
this)
1 1. Light to X-ray Field Click for

procedure
3 3. Perform SFD alignment Click to

procedures such as x-ray select
coverage to cassette and procedures
centering using Tele-Service
5 5. Adjust II levelling bolts Click for

so that II is parallel to procedure
table-top
4 4. Align Camera to centre of Click for

II using outline of blanking procedure
mask as the reference
Notes
OTS/Wall-stand ✔ YES NO
Cassette Tray does not drive No Exposure (SFD, DFR or Table No Exposure (Wall Bucky selected)
out Top selected) Check LED on the console
Check the following: Check LED on the console
1. SFD Technique is selected
2. Table height needs to be
raised to allow the II to drive
down or press & hold cassette
tray out button – newer software
3. Table Tube is not tilted Flashing= Inhibit -caused by one or
4. Remove Cassette from Wall Flashing= Inhibit -caused by one or more of the following:
Stand bucky more of the following: 1. OTS is in manual collimation mode
1. Table Tube Angled (3FC13 not (maybe overridden with collimator key
No Movement and 99 flashing actuated- LV10 on 25S3 is lit) switch)
on Console 2. Cassette in the wall bucky 2. OTS not in longitudinal (SID) detent at
1. Emergency Off switch on Main 100 or 180cm
console or SFD console pressed. 3. Wall Bucky must be vertical and not
No Exposure (DFR selected)
2. Antenna switch(es) under the rotated
The Infimed Digital must be in the
Image Intensifier are actuated. 4. OTS tube not pointing at Wall Bucky
acquisition screen to allow fluoro and
5. No cassette inserted in wall bucky
patient data entered to allow rad
No SFD Scan, Lateral or 6. Cassette needs to be removed & re-
exposures.
Longitudinal Table-top drive inserted after exposure
1. Palpator (Cone) is out of upper
limit. No Table Tilt
Check the following:
No Tomo Table will not raise or lower 1. OTS not in park position when LED on
1. Palpator (Cone) is out of upper 1. Make sure one of the Tomo console is ON
limit. buttons is not selected on the
positioner console.
2. Table is not horizontal
Notes
Precision RXi Service (Blended Class/Lab) Enrolled/ In

Progress
Learning Plan
1. Open MyLearning Click on ‘Go to

2. In Learning Plan click on ’Go to Content’ button next to the class Content’
3. In the Online Content Structure box the two objects have to completed in
the order shown. Credit will be received for this class when all the objects
have been completed.
4. The class participation object will be completed after participation in this
class and the last object will complete after successfully passing the end of
course test.
Precision RXi Class Participation- End of Course Acknowledgement
Precision RXi In resident Class Test
Online Content Structure

Click HERE to go
to MyLearning
Website
Notes
ISD For procedure

The Integrated Service Desktop to run Exceed
Tool can be used to remotely click HERE
service many GE DI systems.
This overview shows:

Pre-requisite training
required for ISD
Where to get more
information about ISD
How to connect to a system Pre-requisite training required for an ISD
using ISD Account
Service tools available
through ISD. Americas
Note: For RXi and MPi, Service Operations Safe Connect (CM927T)
Hummingbird Exceed (Part Security and Privacy Awareness (CM2284)
Number 2393060) is required ISD Training Assessment (CM9005)
to view the system’s desktop
Europe
PSDB Training (CM2045)
Security and Privacy Awareness (CM2284)
ISD Training Assessment (CM9005)
ISD ISD ISD Click HERE for

Once the pre-requisite Once an ISD For more information on procedure to connect
training is complete click Account has been ISD including laptop Java to a system using ISD.
HERE for Workflow form granted click version required, go to the
to request an ISD HERE to go to the ISD Support Central. NEXT
Account. ISD web-site Click for link
Notes
Click for ISD

Overview
Bookmark | Preferences | Themes | Help | Logout
1. Click on
Preferences
ISD Desktop
Notes

Click on Main to
return to previous
screen
4. Select RFS
5. Click on
Remote
Service Tools
ISD Desktop
Notes
7. Click on
Preferences
ISD Desktop
Notes
Green when connected

to system, red when
disconnected
12. Click on Tools

and select Start
VNC
13. Click on Insite
Tools and select
VNC
14. Exceed box pops up.

To end the Message Bar:
connection Indicates
click on the status of 15. Enter User ID which is
Disconnect connection to the IP address the system is
button VNC Viewer using for ISD. Press <enter>
16. Password is orion

Press <enter>
Continue
Notes
Back Up Patient Data Restore Patient Data
1. Plug in a USB thumb drive or portable hard drive 1. Plug in a USB thumb drive or portable hard drive
(check size of C:/Image_Db folder to see if drive is large (containing patient data backup folders)
enough to store all the patient image files) 2. Login as serviceapp
2. Login as serviceapp 3. Exit service application, exit clinical application
3. Exit service application, exit clinical application 4. Follow the path Start/ Programs/ MSDE/ Service
4. Follow the path Start/ Programs/ MSDE/ Service Manager: This will display the SQL Server Service Manager
Manager: This will display the SQL Server Service control panel
Manager control panel 5. Click the Stop button and observe that the SQL Server
5. Click the Stop button and observe that the SQL stops
Server stops 6. Use Windows Explorer to confirm the USB drive has been
6. Use Windows Explorer to confirm the USB drive has recognized and note the drive letter.
been recognized and note the drive letter. 7. Copy the Image_Db folder and all of it’s contents from the
7. Copy the C:/Image_Db folder and all of it’s contents USB Drive to the C: drive
to the USB drive 8. Answer Yes to any queries regarding the transfer of data
8. Confirm that the USB drive now contains a folder 9. Copy the Data folder and all it’s contents from the USB
labeled Image_Db Drive to the C:/MSSQL7 folder
9. Copy the C:/MSSQL7/Data folder and all it’s contents 10. Answer Yes to any queries regarding the transfer of data
to the USB drive 11. Click Start/ Programs/ MSDE/ Service Manager: This
10. Confirm that the USB drive now contains a folder will display the SQL Server Service Manager control panel
labeled Data 12. Click the Start button and observe that the SQL Server
11. Follow the path Start/ Programs/ MSDE/ Service starts
Manager: This will display the SQL Server Service 13. Start the clinical applications and confirm that the patient
Manager control panel list has been restored and that images can be reviewed.
12. Click the Start button and observe that the SQL
Server starts
Notes
Backup Overview Positioner Cal/Config
Calibration/Configuration Files Generator Cal/Config

Click HERE
Make sure you have a current backup
of the calibration/configuration files for Digital Cal
the system.
A complete Calibration/Configuration Digital Config (3 files)
backup consists of 6 files (see Fig.1).
System Backup Folder Files
Click HERE Backup Management
Use one of the Backup Management
methods to save the Cal/Config files
Click HERE APR Protocol File

Backup the APR Protocol file which
the customer is using.
Click HERE Site Key

The 32 digit Infimed P1 Site Key
should also be recorded.
Notes
Creating desktop backup folder
Backup Management
To create a complete Cal/Config backup of System Backup
the system involves capturing data files from
the Digital Infimed, Generator and Positioner.
It is recommended to create a folder on the

1. Click on 2. Select System
desktop of the Infimed PC called System
Desktop icon Backup folder
Backup, then use the respective service
modes (TeleService, GenWare and Digital 3. Rename or use 4. Click on
Service) running on the Infimed PC to backup default name Save
the cal/config files.
Note: When performing the backup of the

Digital, Generator & Positioner they will try
and save the files to their default folder
locations, so do the following to save them in
the System Backup folder: Saving Files to the System Backup Folder
Positioner Cal/Config
1. When the backup box appears, click on the
Desktop icon on the left of the backup box
Generator Cal/Config
2. Select the System Backup folder
3. Rename the file by adding a date to the
Digital Cal
default name or just use the default name
4. Click on Save.
Digital Config (3 files)
Once all the Cal/Config files are stored in the System Backup Folder Files
System Backup folder, copy the folder to a Click HERE for
USB Flash Drive for safe keeping. After completing a backup or restore steps to create/
procedure check that the files have in load backup/
fact been backed up or restored. restore files
Notes
Using batch files
Backup Management
The backup file RXi-Backup Utility-USB.bat and restore file
RXi-Restore Utility-USB.bat are located in the Supporting
Docs folder of the Support Tool.
These files can be used to copy the Digital Cal/Config files,

Positioner Cal/Config files and the Generator Cal/Config and
Installation Report files located in the default folders (C:\
Program Files\GE\XML\Backup, C:\GMM\TeleserviceV2.x and Drive letter of USB Thumb drive (E)
C:\CPI Canada\Genware32\generator respectively) to or from a
USB Thumb drive with an assigned drive letter E. Fig. 1 RXi-Backup Utility-USB.txt
Note: if your system assigns a different drive letter, change the
file extension of the two Utility files from .bat to .txt, open the
files with Notepad and change the E to your assigned drive Note: GMM changes the folder name
letter (see Fig. 1). Save then rename file with .bat extension. with every version of Teleservice. The
Batch files in the Supporting Docs
To use the files: folder support versions 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3.
1. Copy the two files, RXi-Backup Utility-USB.bat and RXi-
Restore Utility-USB.bat from the Supporting Docs folder to Note: A backup or restore procedure will
your USB Thumb drive. overwrite any files in the destination
location with the same name as a file
2. Plug the USB Thumb drive into the Platinum One Digital PC. being transferred, without any warning.
3. Use Windows Explorer to open the USB Thumb Drive. After completing a backup or restore
procedure check that the files have in
4. To backup the cal/config files to the USB Thumb drive, fact been backed up or restored.
double click on RXi-Backup Utility-USB.bat file.
To restore the cal/config files from the USB Thumb drive to the
default folders on the C drive, double click on RXi-Restore Click HERE for steps to create/load backup/
Utility-USB.bat file. restore files
Notes
1. Press the Menu button on the Monitor Power Indicator

Green: Normal
2. On the Monitor menu select Mono Menu Orange: Power Saving, No Signal
Off: Power Off
3. Select Gamma and set value to 2.0 Click
Source: Input source selection
4. On the Display menu select Auto
Click Mode: Mode items selection.
Brightness select FL/RAD
Automatically adjusts the Image Position
Lock the keyboard by the follow procedure: and H. size (or V. size) setting and fine
Setup menu -> Lock mode -> Mode 1. settings.
For Unlock the keyboard press for 10 second Enter: Access and control the function
the button ( - ). of sub-menu when OSD is shown.
Display Mono Image Options OSD + Press the “+” to selection sub-menu
Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Utility
items and increase adjustment when
Display Menu OSD is shown.
- Press the “-” to selection sub-menu

items and decrease adjustment when
AutoBrightnes Monitor Controls OSD is shown.
s
Operation Quick mode item selection.
Brightness
Help Menu: Start the OSD feature.
Contrast Exits the OSD controls.
Exits to the OSD main menu.
OSD Control
Button State
Menu Items
Notes
Click on the
buttons below
PrecisionRXi
Generator Generator CPU Board
Touch-
screen
Generator
Software Version
Example:
2.0.6 (older console)
Positioner Generator Software 3.0.6F (newer console)
Version (label on EPROM
on Generator CPU Board)
Example: Revision D
Infimed
Digital
Top of Generator Cabinet

Generator Touch-
screen Console
Generator Software
Generator Touch-screen Software
Notes
LEDs 1 to 4 (left to right)

LED 1
Programmable from FPGA2. ON indicates
that FPGA2 is running. ON is normal.
LED 2
Programmable from FPGA1, currently
indicates whether SDRAM clock is locked.
OFF is normal
LED 3
Programmable from FPGA0, ON indicates
a camera iris fault. OFF is normal.
LED 4
Is hardwired and indicates that all of the
FPGAs have been loaded OFF is normal.
LED 1……...….LED 9
IAPDB
Inside of Platinum One PC (shown LEDs 1 to 9 can be viewed

with left panel removed) in the reflective tape on the Click HERE for
base of the PC cabinet. information on the
LEDs status
Notes
The DVD Drive upgrade (replaces CD Drive in P1 Chipset Identification

cabinet) can only be installed on systems with Infimed (865 in this example)
SW version 2007.12.14.02 or later and Intel
motherboard chipset 865 or 965– see chart below.
Motherboard Accepted Infimed Software Version

Optical Drive
Chipset IAPDB type 2007.12.14.02 installed
CD Drive Supported
845 IAPDB
DVD
Not Supported
Upgrade Kit
CD Drive Supported
IAPDB
DVD
Supported
Upgrade Kit
865
CD Drive Supported
IAPDB-MF
DVD
Supported
Upgrade Kit
CD Drive Supported
DVD
965 IAPDB-MF Supported Motherboard in Infimed
Upgrade Kit
Platinum One PC
DVD Drive Supported
Notes
IAPDB-MF (Image Acquisition Process Display Board- Multi

Format) Camera Cable
The IAPDB–MF board was primarily designed to provide support for (Tan/Beige)
detectors other than the CCD camera (MF = Multi-Format). The
original IAPDB was designed specifically for the Infimed Innovision
camera. A secondary objective in the re-design was to simplify the
physical board itself, thereby reducing manufacturing cost,
addressing some power and thermal concerns, and increasing
reliability.
From a functional standpoint, the two versions of the board are
pretty much identical. They perform all of the same features and
support all of the same functions. The –MF board has an upgraded
FPGA (FPGA1) that essentially performs the functions of both
FPGA1 & FPGA2 of the original board. Because the functions of two
original FPGAs were combined into a single FPGA on the –MF, the
newer board only has 3 FGPAs. Camera Cable
(Black)
Software Version
For all practical purposes, the two versions are interchangeable,
though subject to software support on the system in question. The
Infimed must be running software version v2007.12.14.02 or newer.
Sparkling Pixel Issue

The sparkling pixel issue was resolved with the original IAPDB by
upgrading FPGA0. But if your P1 is still using the the tan/beige
coloured camera cable and the IAPDB is replaced with the IAPDB-
MF version, the sparkling pixel issue could reappear (MF version
does not have an FPGA0). To fix this issue, the camera cable may
need to be replaced with the newer black coloured cable.
Camera Cable Colours
Notes
Replaces existing
P1 PC
Windows XP
Operating System
Existing
Applications
Software can still
be used but a
Patch will need to
be applied
3 Serial Ports (2
on Motherboard,
PC Cabinet 1 on PCI card)
No Parallel Port
Click HERE for

Inside and rear
view of PC
Motherboard
PC Cabinet-
Rear View
Notes
Generator
J3 J2 J4
Prep
3 7
Prep
7 Interface
Rad Expose Rad Expose Board
1 8 8
Generator
Touch-screen
Console Exposure
Switches
CP3 1S1 25S3 TDI II Board

(Generator)
AMP1 AMP4
LV46
Prep
6 6 Prep
Console Prep/ 8
Rad Expose
8
Expose Switch Fluoro LV54 AMP11 J6
7 7 Prep
3 33
LV47
4 Rad Expose 32
Rad Expose
CP1 Fluoro
2 30
LV55
Click 3 LV45
4 Fluoro
Console Fluoro
2
Foot-switch
AMP5 LV53
Prep
Rad Expose
Fluoro
In-room Exposure
Switches
Notes
Infimed Platinum One
Streaky lines in these

images were caused by
a faulty CCD Camera
Notes
Parallel Connection for Software Flash (especially for Dell

D620 and D630 Laptops)
Problem:
No parallel port on laptop to flash software to the 1S2 Console
CPU board.
Solution:
Use a parallel adapter such as Quatech SPP-100 (PCMCIA).
PCMCIA QYATECH SPP-100G
Loading the driver:
- Remove the cache slot located on the left front of Laptop and
plug the PCMCIA card
- when a message appears , load the CD that came with the
adapter
- Give a choice of automatic installation
- Click on "Next" and then "Finish"
Configure:
- Right click on "My Computer" and select "Properties"
- Click on the "Hardware" tab, then "Device Manager"
- By double-clicking the group Ports (COM & LPT), the SPP- Docking Station for Dell E6400 Laptop
100 must appear
- Right click on the SPP-100 and select "Properties"
Newer Dell laptops such as the E6400
- Click on the tab resource, it helps to have access to the
does not have serial or parallel ports.
address window.
- Uncheck the box "Use automatic setting" and select the 0005
Solution: Order a docking station which
configuration in the drop down menu. This gives us the
has both serial and parallel ports.
address 378 defined in the Teleservice version 2.1 or newer.
Thank you to Didier Vicedo for this procedure.

Notes
Platinum One
Troubleshooting
Guide
This is a new guide
from Infimed which can
be used to troubleshoot
camera, image and
display problems on the
Infimed image chain. Display
The guide is not Problem
completed yet so you covers these
will find some ‘coming issues:
soon’ pages. No Video
Display
Click HERE to open Corruption
the guide.
Camera Video Problem

covers these issues:
No Camera Video The other buttons
Image Corruption or are not completed
Artifacts
Iris/ND Filter Oscillation
Common Error
Messages covers
Infimed P1 pop-up
Parts & Other Stuff box errors and
covers: warnings
Platform Identification Click to see
Parts Identification
Notes
Platinum One Error Messages

Use the Platinum One Troubleshooting Guide
to find out more information about the error
message boxes that appear on this page. Unable to get DICOM information
Click HERE to open the tool then click on

Common Error Message button.
Failed to access a required Database Object Failed to Get Site ID
This box is blank,

Failed to register device type <COARBDevice> especially when
starting service
applications
A software device failed

Error: No Camera detected
GE HEALTHCARE TECHNOLOGIES
e-Pricebook for the Americas
Notes Precision RXi - 3 August 1, 2007
POSITIONER 90/30 TILT TABLE POSITIONER 90/90 TILT TABLE

230 50/60 Hz Service Manual 230 50/60 Hz Service Manual
English Operator Manual Table Controls Console English Operator Manual Table Controls Console
Rectangular Collimation Collimator lamp & SID tape Rectangular Collimation Collimator lamp & SID tape
Pair of shoulder rest Pair of Handgrips Pair of shoulder rest Pair of Handgrips
Automatic Paddle Parking Grid 13:1, 150 L/inch F120 cm Automatic Paddle Parking Grid 13:1, 150 L/inch F120 cm
Footrest 210cm Table Top Length Footrest 210cm Table Top Length
Installation Dolly X-Ray Tube 0.6/1.2, 600 KHU Installation Dolly X-Ray Tube 0.6/1.2, 600 KHU
3 Fluoro Dose Levels Solid State Chamber 3 Fluoro Dose Levels Solid State Chamber
Table Installation Dolly Column & I.I. Installation dolly Table Installation Dolly Column & I.I. Installation dolly
Rear Tabletop Protection Non Height Elevating table Rear Tabletop Protection Elevating Table Height
Table Mounting Plate Carbon Fiber Tabletop Table Mounting Plate Carbon Fiber Tabletop
Table Top Long Movement SFD Vertical Divisions Table Top Long Movement SFD Crossed Divisions
Analog Tomography Iris Collimation Metric crossed division Mounting Plate – Elevating Table
Analog Tomography Iris Collimation
S13401AD S13401AE
CASSETTE FILM ADPATER IN INCHES

PDU NOTE: CONSULT WITH
PDUPLANNING
SITE NOTE: CONSULT
AND WITH S1303K
SITE PLANNING
SERVICE. REQUIREDANDSELECT
INSERVICE.
USA (eitherREQUIRED SELECT
in equipment
IN USA
quote (either
or room in equipment
prep quote) or
quotecustomer
ensure or room prep quote) it
purchases or
ensure customer purchases it
MAIN POWER DISCONNECT (PDU)

380-400V 50/60Hz
MAIN POWER DISCONNECT (PDU)
480V 50/60Hz
P500D Opti
E4502KR E4502KP
CONTROL ROOM CONSOLE STAND
S1303JE
Click on the Green
Boxes to move forward
through the flowchart
A
B
and the red boxes to
move backwards
Precision RXi - 4 BACK TO1, START
August 2007
Notes
A
B
Analog Version Digital Version
GENERATOR 65KW GENERATOR 80KW

GENERATOR 65KW FOR DIGITAL TV CHAIN
FOR DIGITAL TV CHAIN
FOR ANALOG TV CHAIN • 100 KHz
• 100 KHz
• 100 KHz • 2 Tubes
• 2 Tubes
• 2 Tubes • AEC I/F
• AEC I/F
• AEC I/F • Digital I/F
• Digital I/F
• Fluoro • HS Starter
• HS Starter
• HS Starter • Touch Screen
• Touch Screen
• Touch Screen • Pulsed Fluoro
• Pulsed Fluoro
• EPROM for Volt change • HLC Fluoro / SID comp
• HLC Fluoro / SID Comp
S1303JK • EPROM for Volt change
• EPROM for Volt change
S1303JL S1303JM
TV CHAIN CCD 1Kx1K

For 23 or 32 cm II
• Last Image Hold IMAGE INTENSIFIER / DIGITAL SYSTEM IMAGE INTENSIFIER / DIGITAL SYSTEM
• Frame Grabber for 64 32cm / 12” 40cm / 16”
FLUORO GRAB 1024*1024x12bit 1024*1024x12bit
Images ONLY Heliflex Lens w/CCD Camera Heliflex Lens w/CCD Camera
• Pulsed Fluoro Measurement Package Measurement Package
• (1) Control Room Flat 120GB – 55,000 Images 120GB – 55,000 Images
Screen B/W 18” (1) Control Room Flat Screen 18” Monitor (1) Control Room Flat Screen 18” Monitor
Monitor (1) Exam Room Flat Screen 18” Monitor (1) Exam Room Flat Screen 18” Monitor
Remote Diagnostic (Insite) Modem Remote Diagnostic (Insite) Modem
S1303JY Requires Trolley or ceiling suspension Requires Trolley or ceiling suspension
Scan converter & video splitter Scan converter & video splitter
One Way S1303NC S1303ND
NOTE: DICOM IS DICOM KIT INCLUDING DICOM CD R/W

IMAGE INTENSIFIER IMAGE INTENSIFIER NOTE: DICOM IS
NOT STANDARD S1303NE
23cm / 9” 32cm / 12” NOTBASE
STANDARD
S1303JR S1303JS WITH
WITH BASE
CATALOG
CATALOG
NUMBER. YOU
NUMBER.
MUST ADD ITYOUIF
MUST
YOU ADD
NEED IT.IT IF
YOU NEED IT. E
C
DSA W/AUTO INJECTOR KIT
S1303KB
EXAM ROOM MONITOR (Note: Not included with Base system ADDITIONAL EXAM ROOM MONITOR
and requires monitor trolley or ceiling suspension) (Note: requires dual ceiling monitor suspension)
S1303KC
S1303NJ
TIP:
TIP:IS A SECOND EXAM
THIS
THIS IS
ROOM A SECOND
MONITOR. EXAM
TWO
B
E ROOM MONITOR.
MONITORS
MONITORS
WHEN DSA ISSRE
TWO
SRE PREFFERED
PREFFERED
INCLUDED
WHEN DSA IS INCLUDED
Precision RXi - 5 BACK TO1,START
August 2007
Notes
B
F
IN ROOM TROLLEY (CART) IN ROOM CEILING SUSPENSION FOR (1) IN ROOM CEILING SUSPENSION FOR (2)
FOR 1 MONITOR MONITOR INCLUDING BRIDGE & CARRIAGE MONITORS INCLUDING BRIDGE & CARRIAGE
S1303KL S1303NG S1303NH
UNISTRUT CEILING KIT FOR MONITOR
S13401CF Required Select

STOP!! Do you
have an Exam
Room monitor?
If YES, then you
will need either OTS LONGITUDINAL RAILS (NOTE: Must add if no
the cart or ceiling already OTS is currently installed)
suspension installed
S1303ME
DOSE AREA PRODUCT

INCLUDING GENERATOR DAP I/F
NOTE: CANNOT S1303JN

NOTE:S1303JN
QUOTE CANNOT
QUOTE
OR S1303JN
S1303NK
OR USA
FOR S1303NK
FOR USA
DAP PRINTER
S1303NK
VERTICAL TILTING WALL VERTICAL TILTING WALL VERTICAL NON-TILTING WALL VERTICAL NON-TILTING WALL
STAND - Left Hand STAND - Right Hand STAND - Left Hand STAND - Right Hand
Bucky with Cassette Sensor Bucky with Cassette Sensor Bucky with Cassette Sensor Bucky with Cassette Sensor
Cassette Tray Cassette Tray Cassette Tray Cassette Tray
Solid-State Chamber Solid-State Chamber Solid-State Chamber Solid-State Chamber
Grid R 12/L90/F180 Grid R 12/L90/F180 Grid R 12/L90/F180 Grid R 12/L90/F180
Floor fastener w/fixation bracket Floor fastener w/fixation bracket Floor fastener w/fixation bracket Floor fastener w/fixation bracket
Export Packaging Export Packaging Export Packaging Export Packaging
Incl. Cables Incl. Cables Incl. Cables Incl. Cables
S1303RL S1303RP S1303RM S1303RN
Lateral Arm Support (tilt) Lateral Arm Support (non-tilt)
S1303RR S1303RS
C
G
Notes
August 2007
C
G
ACCESSORIES OVERHEAD X-RAY TUBE & SUSPENSION
X-Ray Tube 0.6/1.2mm 400 KH 40/100 KW

Collimator w/Light Indicator & SID Tape Rotating Collimator
Ceiling Suspension Rails Manual Collimation
Air Kerma Dose Display (USA)
S1303PT
NOTE: ADD ONLY ONE

NOTE:
PER ADD IF
ORDER. ONLY
YOUONE
HAD UNISTRUT CEILING KIT FOR MONITOR AND/OR OTS
PER ORDER.
ALREADY IF YOUITHAD
INCLUDED ON
ALREADY
THE INCLUDED
PREVIOUS , DO NOTIT ON S13401CF Required Select
THE PREVIOUS , DO NOT
DUPLICATE.
DUPLICATE.
AUTOMATIC COLLIMATION FOR OTS

Note: Only valid with Wallstand
S1303LW
NOTE: CANNOT
NOTE:S1303MD
QUOTE CANNOT FOR ADDITIONAL DAP FOR OVERHEAD X-RAY
QUOTE
USA. FORS1303MD
CANADAFOR TUBE (NOT FOR USA)
USA.
AND FORAMERICA
LATIN CANADA
AND LATIN AMERICA
ONLY S1303MD
ONLY
COMPRESSION BAND
S1303L
ON BOARD CONSOLE WITH JOYSTICK
S1303LB
PAIR OF ANKLE SUPPORTS
S1303LC
PAIR OF LEG SUPPORTS
S1303LD
D
H
Notes
August 2007
D
H
ACCESSORIES CONTINUED
HEAD CONTENTION DEVICE
S1303LE
ADAPTER FOR CASSETTE 13X18 CM
S1303LF
TRANSLATED OPERATOR
MANUALS (OTHER THAN
ENGLISH)
Spanish S1303KR
ADAPTER FOR CASSETTE 15X40 CM Portuguese S1303KW
S1303LG
LATERAL CASSETTE HOLDER
S1303LH
PHOTOCELL NOTE: THE S1303LJ IS TO

BEPHOTOCELL
USED WHENNOTE: THE S1303LJ
THE CEILING IS IS
HEIGHT TO
BE USED
BELOW 260WHEN THEISCEILING
cm. THIS USUALLYHEIGHT
WHENIS PHOTOCELL FOR LOW CEILINGS
BELOW
THERE IS 260 cm. THIS IS USUALLY WHEN
NO OTS
THERE IS NO OTS S1303LJ
WHEN THE ROOM IS EQUIPPED WITH
WHEN
OTS, THETHE ROOM CEILING
MINIMAM IS EQUIPPED WITH
HEIGHT IS
OTS, THE
290CM WHICHMINIMAM CEILING
WILL NOT HEIGHT
REQUIRE THEIS
290CM WHICH
PHOTOCELL. WILL NOT REQUIRE THE
PHOTOCELL.
INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
S1303LK
E
I
Notes
August 2007
EI
ACCESSORIES CONTINUED
SUPPORT FOR GLASS OF BARIUM
S1303LL
DOUBLE R/F REMOTE FOOT PEDAL

W/EXAM ROOM EXPOSURE AUDIBLE
INDICATOR
S1303LM
PATIENT STEP
S1303NF
PRECISION R&F SEISMIC ANCHOR
R4390JK
RXI PAIR OF SHOULDER RESTS
S13401CA
RXI Bio Med Training

(8 Days)
R0158RY
END
Loupe Fuses LEDs Menu
Tool
Notes
DAP
+15V
Q6
+15V
Q5
+5V
J2-1
SWITCHED +15V
Q4 J2-6
TEST +15V
R2
Q3 R31 J2-7
TEST +15V
+5V +5V DS1 J2-2
+5V + DOSE
U1 DAP
J2-3
+5V +5V - DOSE CHAMBER
R5
J2-4 #1
DS32 DS29 OPTO
DAP J2-5
RELAY
R7
R8
R71
R69
CHANNEL 1
DS3 U5 J2-8
U31 U38 U2 GROUND
RN12C J2-2 J1-2 RS-422 J2-9
GROUND
RS-232 RS-232 DRIVER
RN12A J2-3 J1-3
TRANSMITTER / TRANSMITTER / MICRO-
UART
RECEIVER RECEIVER CONTROLLER +5V
RN12B J2-7 J1-7
R9
J2-5 J1-5 +5V
R10
Q1
5 6 1
R11
JW1
3 2 1 U8 D6
DATA BUS
D0..D7 D2 4 3
+15V
Q8
+15V
Q7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD J3-1

SWITCHED +15V
Q10 J3-6
TEST +15V
Q9 R44 J3-7
24 VDC TEST +15V
+15V +5V
TP2 TP3 J3-2
+5V + DOSE
TB8 DAP
J3-3
1 +5V +5V - DOSE CHAMBER
R25
R26
R5
J3-4 #2
2 OPTO
DAP J3-5
R13
R14
3 RELAY
CHANNEL 2
4 DS2 U6 J3-8
GROUND
5 RS-422 J3-9
+5 AND +15 VOLT GROUND
J4-2 R45 DRIVER
REGULATORS
(U7, U4, L1, D4
TB7 J4-1 D5, ETC) +5V
R15
1 +5V
TP1 R16
2 Q2
5 6 1
3 R17
JW2
4 3 2 1 U9 D7
5
D3 4 3
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD DAP INTERCONNECT BOARD
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 16 JULY 2001
CHECKED DAP
M. LODER 21 AUG 2001
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 28 AUG 2001 MD-0828 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
Tool
Notes
System On
24 VDC RETURN
T2 F5 D3
+ 24 VDC
S3
Relays K2 and K3
Q1 LOCKOUT NORMAL energize when ON
switch is pressed
R15
24 VDC SUPPLY FOR Q2 D4 K3
SYSTEM ON/OFF.
SEE MD-0788, PAGE 4
S1 D16
OFF REFER TO DC BUS &
K2 POWER DISTRIBUTION,
Q3 MD-0788, PAGE 4
R13
P1-3 J3-3 J5-10 J4-10 S2
31 X 42 CM DS1
ON
6.
K1
CONSOLE 3
ON P1-2 J3-2 J5-11 J4-11
White Service
JUMPER POSITION:
OFF
P1-1 J3-1 J5-12 J4-12
On/Off Buttons TO ENERGIZE K1 ONLY WHEN
THE CONSOLE IS SWITCHED ON
JUMPER JW1 PINS 1-2
TO ENERGIZE K1 AT ALL TIMES THAT
JW1
3 2 1 THE GENERATOR AC MAINS IS ON
23 X 56 CM CONSOLE JUMPER JW1 PINS 2-3
CONSOLE KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY BOARD (K1 SWITCHES THE 110 & 220 VAC
Normally Jumper 2-3: K1 energized all the SUPPLIES TO THE ROOM
INTERFACE BOARD)
time this keeps 120Vac power to the
P1-3 J2-3 J3-9 J6-9 J5-10 J4-10 1 Generator Touch-screen console
ON P1-2 J2-2 J3-7 J6-7 J5-11 J4-11 2
OFF
P1-1 J2-1 J3-5 J6-5 J5-12 J4-12
CONSOLE CPU
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY DISPLAY BOARD BOARD
P1-16 J7-16 J8-7 J4-10
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE ON P1-15 J7-15 J8-6 J4-11
OFF
P1-17 J7-17 J8-3 J4-12
CONSOLE
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY BOARD
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
TOUCH SCREEN USE DRAWING DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0788, IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
CONSOLE P1-2 J5-2 J2-10 J4-10
Touchscreen is ON P1-3 J5-3 J2-11 J4-11
RXi console
OFF
5
P1-4 J5-4 J2-12 J4-12 DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 02 JUN 2000
TOUCH SCREEN CHECKED_________ SYSTEM ON
_________
INTERFACE
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY BOARD DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 02 JUN 2000
MD-0762 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 2
Notes
Loupe
Tool DC Bus & Power Dist Fuses
3 PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE
LEDs Menu
1. PHASE 1 F5B
K5 D1
~ +
E23 INVERTER BOARDS DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
R18, R19
~
REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR LOGIC LEVELS, E1 + E1 + E1 +
R20
PHASE 2 F5A DC BUS INVERTER INVERTER INVERTER
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY OUT BOARD BOARD BOARD
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL: 3 PHASE AC E2 - E2 - E2 -
~
PHASE 3 F5C
MAINS INPUT E11
Double Click 400Vac or -
NEUTRAL
R16, R17
for Theory of 480Vac Input
R11
R10
E16 E9 F2
GROUND + DUAL SPEED STARTER
Operation
IS OPTIONAL. LOW SPEED
Soft Start (SS)
-**
560 VDC
E8 E10 F1 STARTER IS STANDARD
IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS
Relay K1
K1
DC BUS CHARGED DC BUS DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
+12V
SENSING DISCHARGE
F2
JW3 CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
1 (R5-R8, D3) (Q1, D10) T1
11 *
JUMPER POSITION: SOFT START OK F1 380/400/480 VAC
J6-1
10
R48
1 PHASE GENERATORS 2 +12V
PROTECTION
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS 3
CIRCUIT 1 5 1
U2
6V=OK on SS
(U1C, Q7, ETC) 240 VAC
R12
JUMPER PINS 1-2 2 J4-10 J4-10 U1
+12VDC 4 5
4 2 D2 OK J6-3 208 VAC
SS
K1 D3 J4-8 J4-8 N/C
2 1
DC BUS
J6-5 120 VAC
OKOK
S.S. +12V K2 OK D9
CONTINUED ON
JW2 +12V 94 VAC PAGE 3
Permission now that
1
R31
JUMPER POSITION: SOFT START
1 PHASE GENERATORS 2 J2-1 P2-1 J6-6 73 VAC
DRIVER
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS 3
CIRCUIT
(U3B, Q6, ETC)
3
D2
CNCTR
CLOSED
SS OK to turn on K5 D4 K5 52 VAC
TX Bottom
JUMPER PINS 1-2 J4-13 J4-13 J2-2 P2-2
J6-7 F1 RETURN
J4-2 J4-2 of Cabinet
K2 K1 & K2 energize
J5-1 J1-1 F1
after CPU passes
SOFT START D8 F4 120 / 240 VAC
FAULT SIGNAL R1, R2 J4-1 J4-1
+12V J5-3 J1-3 F2
Low Speed
self test.
TO AUXILIARY 50 / 73 / 94 VAC
BOARD, PAGE 3 K1 J4-4 J4-4
J5-4 J1-4 F3 Starter (not
If SS is not OK K1
K1 COMMON
4 D5
+12V +12V on MPi/RXi)
will turn off, and
+12V J4-3 J4-3
2.
J3-3 J2-3 TP4
J4-14 J4-14
J4-15 J4-15
turn off SS Power J3-4
J3-2
J2-4
J2-2
TP1
TP1
J4-16 J4-16 +12V
J4-18 J4-18
9 TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT

COMMAND TO MD-0787
5
D7 K3
J3-9 J2-9
REFER TO MD-0764
J4-17 J4-17 LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD
MPi- 1 Tube +12V K4

J10-3 FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS
J10-1 ONLY. DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION,
RXi- 2 Tubes R72
D37 6
+12V ONE, TWO, OR THREE FANS MAY BE USED
FLUORO
FLUORO FAN FAN ON
J4-5 K3 TUBE 1 /TUBE 2
TIMER / DRIVER J4-5 D6 K4 J11-4 F2 J5-4
CIRCUIT SOLENOID
(U11, Q9, ETC) J11-6 J5-6 (TWO TUBE HT
THREE FAN TANKS ONLY)
R&F GENERATORS ONLY UNITS ONLY H.T. TANK
E21 E17
J5-6 J5-7 J5-3 J5-4 J1-6 J1-5 J1-3 J8-3

AUXILIARY BOARD
240V * FOR
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
400 VAC MAINS) ***
FAN comes ON for 20 J8-1

OPTIONAL 400/480 VAC
K4: Power to fans 200V *** 480 VAC GENERATORS

minutes at power on and Top of
F3 J7-1
230/277 VAC
***
FROM PAGE 3
stays on for 20 minutes after 180V J7-3
Cabinet NEUTRAL OPTIONAL
a rad or fluoro exposure 3. J7-5

GROUND
T1 AND T2 MUST BE TAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOMINAL AC MAINS VOLTAGE. 0V
* REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE GENERATOR SERVICE MANUAL.
240V
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4
3 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD
ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS
(REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR 1 PHASE POWER DRAWN DATE

THIS VOLTAGE IS APPROXIMATELY 560 VDC FOR 400 V GENERATORS, AND APPROXIMATELY INPUT BOARD)
** 680 VDC FOR 480 V GENERATORS
200V
24V goes to
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
F4: On newer
Gen IF Bd DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
units only HTW 10 MAR 2000 MD-0788 REV G
and lights
J5 3-4 24V
0V
SHEET 1 OF 6
ON LED
Loupe Single Phase Fuses LEDs Menu
SINGLE PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE
Tool Version
Notes K5
E33
ONE OR TWO INVERTER MODULES DEPENDING
ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
LINE 1 F5A
230 MAINS BUS 650 VDC E1 + E1 +
1 PHASE AC LINE 2 VAC RECTIFIER CAPACITORS OUT
F5B E34 INVERTER INVERTER
MAINS INPUT BOARD BOARD
VOLTAGE DOUBLER CIRCUIT E2 - E2 -
GROUND
Theory of
Operation Note
R11
R10
DC BUS ASSEMBLY
P1-4 P1-1
J6-1 380/400/480 VAC TAPS
*
K1
J12-4 J12-1 NO CONNECTION
T1
F2 240 VAC
J6-3
DC BUS CHARGED
F1 208 VAC
SENSING CIRCUIT
(R6-R8, R16-R21, D3, ETC)
1 J6-5 120 VAC
CONTINUED ON
J4-10 J4-10 PAGE 3
94 VAC
5 1
J4-8 J4-8
U1 J6-6 73 VAC
4 2 D2
52 VAC
+12V DC BUS
OK J6-7 F1 RETURN
J2-1 P2-1 K2
D4 K5
J4-13 J4-13 J2-2 P2-2 J5-1
J4-2 J4-2 J5-3

K2
D8 J5-4
J4-1 J4-1
LOW SPEED
AUXILIARY BOARD +12V +12V STARTER BOARD
J4-4 J4-4
REFER TO PAGE 1 K1
F4 J3-3 REFER TO PAGE 1
J3-4
D5
J3-2
R12
J4-3 J4-3
J4-14 J4-14
D9
J4-15 J4-15 +12VDC J3-9
OK
J4-16 J4-16 +12V
J4-18 J4-18
J10-3
D7 K3 FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS
K4
J4-17 J4-17 J10-1 ONLY. DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION,
ONE OR TWO FANS MAY BE USED
+12V
6 K3
J11-4
J11-6
H.T. TANK
J4-5 J4-5 D6 K4
REFER TO PAGE 1
J8-3
E21 E17 OPTIONAL 230 VAC
J8-1
T1 / T2 MUST BE TAPPED TO 200 / 240 VAC IN ACCORDANCE WITH

240V * FOR
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
240 VAC MAINS)
F3 J7-1
J7-3 230 VAC
* THE NOMINAL AC MAINS VOLTAGE. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE 200V J7-5
GROUND
OPTIONAL
GENERATOR SERVICE MANUAL.

180V Top of
Cabinet ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS
0V
CONTINUED ON 1 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD
240V PAGE 4
DRAWN DATE
200V
G. SANWALD 10 MAR 2000 DC BUS & POWER
CHECKED________ ________ DISTRIBUTION
24V goes to DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Gen IF Bd and HTW 10 MAR 2000 MD-0788 REV G
0V
lights ON LED SHEET 2 OF 6
Notes
Loupe
Tool DC Bus & Power Dist. T1
+35V
R71
+12V +12V
+5V
Fuses LEDs Menu
26 VAC J7-1 F4 J6-4 J7-4 U34 TP16
R65
0V J7-3 C22 D31 J6-5 J7-5 +5 V
+/-35V REGULATOR
D32
26 VAC J7-6 F3
Double click for
+12V +12V
R64
C21 D28
FROM J4-1 J1-1
Theory of PAGE 1, 2
J7-2
TP5 J6-1 J7-1
J4-3 J1-3
Operation +12V TP1 TP15 J4-5 J1-5 +5V

15 VAC U5,U6
-35V -12V -12V J4-7 J1-7 U27
J7-4 F1 R70 J6-2 J7-2
+12 VDC
0V REGULATOR J4-9 J1-9 +5 V
C24, D29 J6-3 J7-3 REGULATOR
J7-5
15 VAC C25 D27 J4-11 J1-11
J5-7 F2 D33 U4 +12V
TO PAGE 1 J4-12 J1-12
R68
-12 VDC
+/-12V
J4-13 J1-13
This signal goes to REGULATOR
D16 J4-15 J1-15
8
D30
turn on Main TO MD-0786
C19
-12V
-12V +12V J4-17 J1-17
J4-19 J1-19
Contactor K5 D1 ON=Fault R32
D1
+12V +12V +/- 12V/SS FAULT
D19 J5-5 J6-5 +/- 12V/SS FAULT TO GENERATOR DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
5.1V REF READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
J5-6 J5-7 J5-3 J5-4 J1-6 J1-5 J1-3
AUXILIARY BOARD CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
DUAL SPEED STARTER IS
-
18 +/-35V used CONTROL BOARD OPTIONAL. LOW SPEED
STARTER IS STANDARD IN
for Filament
+
J6-6 J6-7 J6-3 J6-4 J8-6 J8-5 J8-3 U3C
9 INDICO 100 GENERATORS
+35V +35V
8 -
JW1 J9-1 J1-1 F2
JUMPER POSITION:
+ +12V +12V
5 U3D
7 TUBE 1/TUBE 2 FLUORO RAD GENERATORS
SELECT SIGNAL -12V J9-4 J1-4
JUMPER "RAD"
TO MD-0765 RAD R&F GENERATORS -
CONTACTOR
CLOSED JUMPER "FLUORO" +
J9-3 J1-3
SIGNAL TO +12V U3A
MD-0765 R22 +12V J9-2 J1-2 F1
-12V -12V
+12V
R223
12VDC / SOFT START J9-5 J1-5

R217
R123
Q1 SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL -35V -35V

R20 TP2
FAULT SIGNAL TO MD-0764, PAGE 1
R227
J9-6 J1-6
R21
FROM AUXILIARY
BOARD, PAGE 1
AUXILIARY BOARD FILAMENT BOARD ONE FILAMENT BOARD IS
+12V 4 5 4 5 4 5
Q16 STANDARD IN INDICO 100
R228
GENERATORS, THE SECOND

2 1 2 1 2 1 FILAMENT BOARD IS OPTIONAL
RN4F
+35V
RN2D
RN2C
R226
U7 U40 U41
R225
R2
R11
R10
J1-1 F2 +12V
CONTROL
BOARD J1-25 J1-6 J1-10 J1-29 J1-18 J1-19 J2-14 J2-6 J2-15 J2-7 J1-4
J1-3
+5V J10-25 J10-6 J10-10 J10-29 J10-18 J10-19 J3-14 J3-6 J3-15 J3-7 J1-2 F1
13 +5V
-12V
+15V
R27, R32
RN7F
J1-5
10 +5V TP2
-35V
D1 +5V +5V J1-6
CONT. 11 12
R14
RN11A
RN11I
DS9 DS10
U9
R9
Q4 FILAMENT BOARD
12 11
GRN RED P/S ON Q1
2 1
TO 2.1 V DS34 DS35 DRIVER DRIVER DS22 DS23 DS2 DS4
R13
4 5 -15V
CURRENT 4 5
SINK 2 1 GRN RED
TO 2.1 V
U16
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
U16 FLUORO FLUORO
TO 2.1 V
LOW HIGH
TO 2.1 V
* THE POWER SUPPLY ON COMMAND (P/S ON) WHICH ENERGIZES
K1 / K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD IS ISSUED BY THE GENERATOR
CPU BOARD AFTER THE +5 VDC RAIL IS DETECTED BY THE CPU.
14 U17 15 CURRENT 16 CURRENT 17 CURRENT
R33
TO MD-0787
SINK SINK SINK THE DC RAILS, INCLUDING THE +5 VDC RAIL, ARE ESTABLISHED
U24 WHEN THE SYSTEM ON COMMAND IS RECEIVED. REFER TO MD-0762.
DATA LATCH,
BUFFER, &
U27, U19 DATA LATCH Not used on MPi DATA DATA
BUFFER & U16 & BUFFER
but used on RXi U27
DRIVER LATCH LATCH
U27, U19 U49 DRAWN DATE
DATA BUS
*
BIT 0 BIT 2 BIT 7 BIT 3
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
D0..D7 DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW 10 MAR 2000 MD-0788 REV G
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
PAGE 3 SHEET 3 OF 6
Tool
Notes J4-12 J5-12
REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762
24 VDC RETURN J4-14 J5-14 +5V
Relays K2 and 3 close K3
TP2
TP4 CONSOLE BOARD & LCD DISPLAY
ASSEMBLY SHOWN WITHIN DASHED
when the ON Switch on 24 VDC J4-13 J5-13 TP3 + 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY LINES USED ON 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE
J4-15 J5-15 F1 U39 ONLY. REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR
the console is pressed
CIRCUIT
+24V +15V
(U38, Q11, T1, -12 V 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE AND FOR
TP13 U5 TP1 D7, D9, ETC.) REGULATOR RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
TP13 R1 TP5
+15 V
T2 J1-2 D3 REGULATOR
18 VAC F5 -12V
R81
+5V
C10 TP3 TP2
U40
0V J1-1 R3 J10-1
+5 / +16VDC +12V 300 VAC FLUORESCENT LAMP
R2
POWER SUPPLY BACKLIGHT
F6 U3
CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY J10-4
J1-3 F3 (U47, Q4, T1, -12V
+12 V
18 VAC C16 D17, D18, ETC.) REGULATOR
FROM K2 D1 LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
J1-4
PAGE 1, 2 TP7
Power to top
0V U2
J1-5 F4 R6
-12 V
CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 CM CONSOLE)
18 VAC
J1-7 F2
REGULATOR
chassis boards
110 VAC U4 -12V TP5
R5
R4 220 VAC 220 VAC
J1-9 F1 -15 V
220 VAC -24V REGULATOR 110 VAC J2-1 J1-1 110 VAC
TP6 J2-3 J1-3 +24VDC
+24V
-15V
J2-6 J1-6
110 VAC U40 R7
R78 J2-7 J1-7
K1 ZERO CROSS LINE SYNC DS1
220 VAC DETECTOR TO MD-0767 J2-8 J1-8
D15 POWER ON
J2-9 J1-9
Line Sync: Alternative to
external synch for Pulsed ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
110 & 220Vac used for Rm
Fluoro.
IF Bd Buckies and 110Vac
K1 MPi/RXi uses an external +12V +12V
is used for Console +24V +24V
Synch from Infimed J10-13
J10-19
When relays K2 and 3

J10-11
K2 REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762 REFER TO MD-0757 (AEC) FOR
J10-16 PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS
turn ON, low voltage -12V J10-17 -12V
ON THE AEC BOARD
power is sent to the other

4.
-24V -24V
K3
boards, including CPU AEC BOARD

Bd.
+5V +15V +24V +15V +15V
TP17 +15V +12V +5V
+12V
+12V J3-3 J13-3 R77 +12V
TP19
R78
R86
R76
-15V +5V J3-6 J13-6 R85 +5V J11-1
TP16
J3-1 J13-1 R75 TO REMOTE FLUORO
J13-9 J13-21 J13-23 J13-11 J13-13 J13-17 J13-15 DS36 DS38 DS33 CONTROL, PAGE 5
J11-5
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD J3-8 J13-8
J3-5 J13-5 R89 Not used on

TP20
RXi/MPi
THE DIGITAL I/O BOARD IS OPTIONAL WITH R&F -12V R80 -12V
GENERATORS DS37 DS39
-15V TP18
-15V
REFER TO MD-0767 (DIGITAL INTERFACE) FOR TP4
7
TP21
R81
R90
PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS +5V +15V +24V -15V
SHOWN TO THE RIGHT OF THIS TEXT J3-2 J13-2
J3-4 J13-4
J3-7 J13-7 -15V -12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD

DIGITAL I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
DC Bus & Pwr Dist.

DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 4 OF 6
Tool
Notes
+12V +12V +5V
U8
J11-1 P1-1 +5 V
REGULATOR
D4
J11-5 P1-5
+5V +5V
J1-17 J2-17
Standard Consoles: Do not apply
+12V +12V
J1-18 J2-18
MPi
J1-15 J2-15
J1-19 J2-19
J1-20 J2-20
GENERATOR CPU BOARD REMOTE FLUORO REMOTE FLUORO

(FROM PAGE 4) CONTROL BOARD DISPLAY BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL OPTIONAL WITH
INDICO 100 R&F GENERATORS
J5-12 +5V +5V +5V

REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762
J5-14 J8-1 J1-1
FROM GENERATOR TP2
INTERFACE BOARD + 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY J8-2 J1-2
(PAGE 4) J5-13 F1 U31
DC Bus & Power

CIRCUIT
J5-15 J8-23 J1-23
(U30, Q5, T1, -12 V
D7, D8, ETC.) REGULATOR J8-24 J1-24
J8-25 J1-25
-12V J8-26 J1-26
THESE ITEMS ARE

USED ON THE 23 X 56
CM CONSOLE ONLY.
U32
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD
Distribution
J10-1
-12V FLUORESCENT LAMP
J10-5
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 x 56 CM CONSOLE) LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
J4-14 J8-3 +5V

TP3
FROM GENERATOR TP7
INTERFACE BOARD TP2 + 5 / -20VDC
(PAGE 4)
J4-13 J8-8 POWER SUPPLY
F1
CIRCUIT
(U12, L1, D2,
D3-D7, ETC.)
TP8
-20V
TP9
+5V 19
THESE ITEMS ARE 300 VAC J5-1

BACKLIGHT FLUORESCENT LAMP
USED ON THE “RAD-ONLY” POWER SUPPLY J5-5
CONSOLE ONLY. (Q1, Q2, T1,
C36, ETC.)
DRAWN DATE
CONSOLE BOARD (RAD-ONLY CONSOLE) LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY CHECKED________ ________ DISTRIBUTION
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 5 OF 6
Tool
Notes
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 THIS VOLTAGE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED. THIS WILL RISE TO APPROXIMATELY 6 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE FULLY CHARGED.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MUST CHARGE WITHIN APPROXIMATELY 0.25 SECONDS OF THE GENERATOR BEING SWITCHED ON. IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS DO NOT CHARGE NORMALLY, THE SOFT START
2 OK PROTECTION CIRCUIT ENERGIZES RELAY K1 (SEE # 4) AND INHIBITS OPERATION OF THE SOFT START DRIVER CIRCUIT (SEE # 3).
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) COMMANDS THE MAIN CONTACTOR K5 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD TO CLOSE. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = CONTACTOR OPEN. THIS OUPUT WILL NOT SWITCH
3
“LOW” IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED (SEE # 1 & 2).
K1 REMAINS DE-ENERGIZED (CONTACTS AS SHOWN) IF NO SOFT-START FAULT IS DETECTED. THEREFORE, K1 AND K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD WILL ENERGIZE WHEN THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED
4
ON. A SOFT-START FAULT ENERGIZES K1 ON THE AUXILIARY BOARD, DE-ENERGIZING K1 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD. THIS WILL INHIBIT FURTHER DC BUS CHARGING.
5 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) ON, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) OFF. FAN(S) ARE SWITCHED ON DURING PULSED OR CONTINUOUS FLUORO OPERATION, AND
6
REMAIN ON FOR APPROXIMATELY 20 MINUTES AFTER SWITCHING TO RAD MODE.
7 “LOW” INDICATES CONTACTOR CLOSED (SEE # 3). THE CONTACTOR CLOSED SIGNAL OCCURS APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER INITIAL GENERATOR TURN-ON, ASSUMING NORMAL DC BUS CHARGING.
8 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
9 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
10 24 VDC (APPROXIMATELY) ENERGIZES K1 AND / OR K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD, INITIATING THE POWER-ON SEQUENCE. SEE # 4.
11 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
12 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
13 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
14 DS9 LIT = CONTACTOR CLOSED, DS10 LIT = CONTACTOR NOT CLOSED.
15 DS34 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND ISSUED (CONSOLE PASSED ALL SELF TESTS). DS35 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND NOT ISSUED (DURING CONSOLE SELF TESTS, OR IF SELF TESTS FAILED).
16 DS22 LIT = FLUORO SELECTED, DS23 LIT = RAD SELECTED.
17 DS2 LIT = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. DS4 LIT = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. SEE # 13.
18 D1 LIT INDICATES + OR - 12 VDC FAULT, OR SOFT START FAULT.
19 THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 1 BELOW.
18 s
4V
FIGURE 1
-8 V
DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 6 OF 6
Tool
Notes
KV actual 2
KV actual R53
2
TP6 TP8 1V=20kV between TP6-8 TP9 TP8 1V=20kV between TP8-9 R68 1 -
2
3 R49 J9-6
+
6 R91 R67
R41
-
R42
7 R26 RN4A U12A
R36
R35
5
R52
+ J9-5
R48
U15B
-
2 RN2A J10-31 J1-12 R24 1 -
2
R89 kV actual Feedback - 6
R215 kV Cal
R31
1 3 7
R215
+
+
3 +
5 J9-7 KV FEEDBACK SIGNAL
J10-12 J1-31 U16A FROM PAGE 3
U15A
Latch Reset Signal
U16B
RN2B R23 R54
R37
RN4B
R69 -
6
7
R72
RESET COMMAND 5 R50 J9-8
+
FROM MD-0761, PG 2
U12B
R221
HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT
R220
TO GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD, D92 ANODE OVERVOLTAGE
SEE MD-0761, PG 2 +12V SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
+12V +12V +12V
HV ON SIGNAL Inverter D80 D81 D82 D93 CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE
R172
U37 TO MD-0767, PG 1 SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
Fault LEDs
10
A/D
INV 3 INV 2 INV 1
R208
R209
R210
CONVERTER 3 U33E
D69
kV INVERTER 1 J14-1
TP26 INVERTER 1
11
FAULT LATCH &
HIGH KV FAULT DETECTOR
LOGIC INVERTER J14-3
D63 DETECTOR (T3, U36, D83, ETC)
(U39B, U35F)
AND LATCH
(U31, U32A, U33A)
HV ON DETECTOR
CIRCUIT (U30C INVERTER 2 J15-1
JW3 INVERTER 2
U30D, Q6, ETC) “OR” FAULT LATCH & INVERTER FAULT SIGNALS
125kV 150kV FAULT DETECTOR
LOGIC LOGIC INVERTER J15-3 FROM PAGE 2
(T4, U37, D84, ETC)
JUMPER POSITION: (U39C, U35E)
125kV GENERATORS
JUMPER “125kV” D87-D89, U35C
150 kV GENERATORS
TP2 JUMPER “150kV” INVERTER 3
INVERTER 3
J16-1
FAULT LATCH &
1V=15kV
FAULT DETECTOR
D86 LOGIC INVERTER J16-3
(T5, U38, D85, ETC)
TP2 (U39D, U35D)
1
4
R25
R46
U22 +5V
kV Ref
2 R26, R45
TP17 TP19
- 1 J10-7 J1-7
D/A 3+ D48
R132
CONVERTER 2- ERROR AMPLIFIERS
R171
R180
U14A 1 R71 R70
3+ INCLUDES U13B, U21A
R106 U24A U26A
2
J10-26 J1-26 R25, R44 U13A - D49 3 2 7
D35 - R107 6- 1
+ VCO
7
U13B
+
5+ INCLUDES U19, U20, DRIVE PULSES
R43
+12V U21A U23, U25, U27, Q10 U24B U26B CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
U21B 5 6 4 5
R108
Ir LED ON if
4
R175
D66
Resonant D70 Drives Inverter
DATA BUS Ir
D0..D7 Current too high Signals
HIGH RESONANT 3 R62

CURRENT LATCH 7 -
& LOGIC INVERTER +
2 D27-D30
(U32D, U33D)
R64
U15 R65 CURRENT SENSE

R63
R66
DRIVE ENABLE
T1 T2 COMMAND FROM
MD-0761, PAGE 2
-12V
J13-4 J13-1 Zero Crossing

GENERATOR CPU BOARD CONTROL BOARD
Info to
synchronize DRAWN DATE
inverter firing
kV Control & Feedback

H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE G. SANWALD 18 MAY 2000 KV CONTROL &
FROM PAGE 2 CHECKED
S. BLAKE 18 MAY 2000 FEEDBACK
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 18 MAY 2000 MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 4
Tool
Notes E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+) REFER TO MD-0786 FOR
K1 DRIVE CIRCUITS
* USED ON R&F K1 *
GENERATORS ONLY
J2-1
TO J14-1 INVERTER FAULT
J2-3 SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
TO J14-3
J10-1 J1-1 MOSFET MOSFET

J10-2 J1-2 SWITCHES SWITCHES
E3
J10-3 J1-3
SWITCHES SWITCHES
*
E4
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)

INVERTER BOARD #1
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1
TO J15-3

J11-2 J1-2 SWITCHES SWITCHES
GATE DRIVE CIRCUIT H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT
E3 CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
FOR MOSFET INVERTER
(INCLUDES Q19 TO Q26) J11-3 J1-3
SWITCHES SWITCHES
E4
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)

INVERTER BOARD #2
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1
TO J16-3

J12-2 POWER MODE J1-2 SWITCHES SWITCHES
SELECT
E3
BOARD
J12-3 (REFER TO J1-3
J12-4 MD-0786) J1-4 MOSFET MOSFET
DRIVE PULSES SWITCHES SWITCHES
FROM PAGE 1
E4
Power Mode
Bd selects
CONTROL BOARD third Inverter INVERTER BOARD #3
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
RESONANT BOARD
J1-1 J1-4
INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE INVERTER

MODULES DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT TO J13-1
SENSE, TO PAGE 1 TO J13-4
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 18 MAY 2000 KV CONTROL &
CHECKED FEEDBACK

S. BLAKE 18 MAY 2000
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 2 OF 4
Tool
Notes
HV ANODE
BOARD
J1
ANODE
C S
L
J3-8
TO J9-8 HV MULT
ASSY +
J3-7 (ANODE)
KV FEEDBACK TO J9-7
SIGNAL
TO PAGE 1 J3-5
TO J9-5
J3-6
TO J9-6
X-ray Tube
E9
HV MULT
ASSY-
E10 (CATHODE)
FROM
PAGE 2 L
C
S
HV CATHODE J2
TANK LID CATHODE
BOARD
BOARD
RESONANT BOARD PART OF H.V. OIL TANK
** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE

TANKS WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED FEEDBACK

DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN 18 MAY 2000 MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 4
Tool
Notes
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 kV REFERENCE OUTPUT, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 15 kV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
2 kV FEEDBACK TO THE CPU. SCALING IS 1V = 20 KV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
3 HV ON SIGNAL. THIS IS “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS ON, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS OFF.
THE VOLTAGE AT TP17 AND TP19 SHOULD BE A 50% DUTY CYCLE SQUARE WAVE, RANGING IN FREQUENCY FROM APPROXIMATELY 80 kHz TO APPROXIMATELY 250 kHz, DEPENDING ON GENERATOR
4
OUTPUT POWER. SEE FIGURE 1.
12 VDC
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED FEEDBACK
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
18 MAY 2000
MD-0759 REV C
L.FOSKIN
SHEET 4 OF 4
Tool
Notes
+5V J2-8 5.5 A 6.5 A JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
JW1 1 2 3 FILAMENT CURRENT
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
RN7C
J2-7
Filament Inverters
use a +/-35V
FIL BUFFER &
J2-9 CURRENT LIMIT ERROR
supply rail. Fuses
DS13 DS14 CIRCUIT AMPLIFIER &
+12V DRIVER CIRCUIT
GRN RED TP2
3 F1 & F2 are on
these supplies.
TO 2.1 V
RN2H
CURRENT OPTO-COUPLER TP1
U24 “ON” = NO FILAMENT FILAMENT FAULT J2-10
SINK C22
FAULT J10-4 J1-4 TO MD-0761, PAGE 2
BUFFER BUFFER /
5 1 J2-4 AMPLIFIER & T1 J5-4
+5V FILAMENT
FILAMENT CURRENT CURRENT RMS SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE
U7
FEEDBACK SIGNAL COMPARATOR CONVERTER J4 J5-3 CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
(SM) TO PAGE 2 J2-3
RN7E
4 2 J10-23 J1-23 RN4D CIRCUIT
R137 J3-10
HV Q15
+12V
3 FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (SMALL)
Measure on J5 output plug
DS11 DS12 J10-5 J1-5 RN2G
Standby:
GRN RED 5 1
TO 2.1 V U8 RN4C
U24
CURRENT
4 2 J10-24 J1-24 Q14
R136 HV / MA FAULT
FROM MD-0761,
J2-6
JW1
5.5 A 6.5 A
1 2 3
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
FILAMENT CURRENT
15-30Vrms with 2.3A
Open Circuit (filament
SINK
PAGE 2 5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
J2-5
BUFFER
OPTO-COUPLER
“ON” = NO HV / MA J3-2 J2-2 Sm Fil Ref J3-8 J2-9
BUFFER & open) full drive approx.
69Vrms
FAULT CURRENT LIMIT ERROR
CIRCUIT AMPLIFIER &
J3-10 J2-10 J3-7 DRIVER CIRCUIT
TP3
1 TP2
3
TP3 1V=1A Small
R10
J3-9 TP1
R5
U18 J2-10
13 - R7 C22
14 TP21 BUFFER /
D/A 12 + AMPLIFIER &
J2-2 T1 J5-2
CONVERTER FILAMENT
U14D TP1
1 FILAMENT CURRENT RMS LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE
TP1 1V=1A
CURRENT
R17 FEEDBACK SIGNAL COMPARATOR CONVERTER J8 J5-1 CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
(LG) TO PAGE 2 J2-1 CIRCUIT
R11
U22 6 - 7
R24 J10-9 J1-9
Lg Fil Ht Ref J3-6
D/A 5 +
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (LARGE)
CONVERTER J10-28 J1-28 J3-5
U14B
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH OPTIONAL TWO FILAMENT BOARDS (TYPICALLY USED IN R&F
+5V GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN ABOVE
RN11E
JW5 JUMPER POSITION: INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH STANDARD SINGLE FILAMENT BOARD (TYPICALLY USED IN RAD
INDICO GENERATORS ONLY GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN BELOW
JUMPER PINS 1-2
DS24 DS25 DO NOT USE JUMPER
POSITION 2-3
J2-6 5.5 A 6.5 A JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
LARGE SMALL JW5 JW1 1 2 3 FILAMENT CURRENT
OPTO-COUPLER
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
TO 2.1 V 1 2 3 “ON” = LARGE FOCUS J2-5
CURRENT SELECTED
U27 SINK U19, U16 “LG/SM REQUEST” 4 BUFFER &
J3-11 J2-9 CURRENT LIMIT
2 J10-17 J1-17 RN1A DETECTOR CKT TO J3-6, J3-5, J3-9, J3-10 ERROR
DATA BUFFER AND (U11C, Q2, ETC) ON CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT AMPLIFIER &
LATCH DRIVER 1 5 DRIVER CIRCUIT
J10-36 J1-36 3
+5V U1 TP1
RN1B 2 4 J2-10
T1 C22
K1 not used on Fluoro
RN6E
OPTO-COUPLER
U24 “ON” = SMALL FOCUS
SELECTED
+12V J2-4 BUFFER / RMS System
J10-8 J1-8 RN2E FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK AMPLIFIER & CONVERTER
BUFFER SIGNAL (SM) TO PAGE 2 J2-3
FILAMENT CIRCUIT J5-3
5 1 J2-2 CURRENT SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE
FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK COMPARATOR J5-4 CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
U10 SIGNAL (LG) TO PAGE 2 J2-1 TP2 +12V
DATA BUS 4 2 RN4A J5-1
J10-27 J1-27 K1
D0..D7 R75 J2-11 LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE
K1
Q3 J5-2 CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (UNIVERSAL)
DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, THIS PAGE SHOWS
DRAWN DATE
ONLY THE MAJOR FILAMENT BLOCKS. REFER TO
REFER TO PAGE 4 FOR LOGIC LEVELS, G. SANWALD 12 MAY 2000 FILAMENT DRIVE
Fil Dr & mA Control

PAGE 3 FOR A MORE DETAILED FUNCTIONAL CHECKED
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY DIAGRAM OF THE FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD. S. BLAKE 12 MAY 2000 & MA CONTROL
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL: DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 15 MAY 2000 MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 4
Tool
Notes
J3-4 J2-3
FILAMENT CURRENT FROM J2-4
FEEDBACK SIGNAL SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK
J3-3 J2-11 CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
(SM) FROM PAGE 1 FROM J2-3
J2 **
J5-1 J4-1 CATHODE
LARGE J5-2 J4-2 S
C J3-2 J1-13
L FILAMENT CURRENT FROM J2-2
FEEDBACK SIGNAL LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK
J3-1 J1-32 CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
(LG) FROM PAGE 1 FROM J2-1
FROM PAGE 1 5
8
J5-3 J4-3
TP4 TP5
SMALL J5-4 J4-4
R163
R5
R6
CATHODE
H.T. BOARD 6- R4 J1-11
7
5+
RAD MA FEEDBACK
R216 U30B R3 J1-30 CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
FILAMENT SUPPLY
R165
R164
BOARD H.T.TANK R213
2
- 6 9
J1
R33, R32 3
+
TP6 TP7 1V=2.5mA
HV ANODE
ANODE BOARD U9
R36
HIGH MA FAULT TO
GENERATOR READY
R17
R16
S C 7 +12V DETECTOR CIRCUIT
L TP2 TP3 ON CONTROL BOARD, R15
SEE MD-0761, PAGE 2 J2-1
R34 R212
R179
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK
R14 J2-9 CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
R7
R9
10
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE D72
J3-1 J9-1 RN6C, RN6D R19

SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1 U33E mA Feedback
ANODE I
11
ANODE OVER- HIGH ANODE
6- CURRENT LATCH
7 CURRENT DETECTOR
& LOGIC INVERTER
R8
5+ (U18, RN9E-H, ETC.)
(U32C, U33C) D65
J3-2 J9-2 RN6A, RN6B U6B D95
R38
mA
TEST
E18 JACK
-
RESET COMMAND
+ FROM MD-0761, PG 2
E17
+12V
R177
R39 CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE D71
SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1
J3-4 J9-4 RN6G, RN6H CATHODE
HIGH CATHODE
CATHODE OVER-
2- CURRENT LATCH
1 CURRENT DETECTOR
R18
& LOGIC INVERTER

3+ (U17, RN9A-D, ETC.)
(U32B, U33B) D64
J3-3 J9-3 RN6F, RN6E U6A D96
L C
R40
S H.T.TANK
J2
CATHODE HV CATHODE TANK LID
BOARD BOARD DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 12 MAY 2000 FILAMENT DRIVE
CHECKED & MA CONTROL
PART OF HV OIL TANK CONTROL BOARD S. BLAKE 12 MAY 2000
Fil Dr & mA Control

DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE L. FOSKIN 15 MAY 2000 MD-0760 REV E
TANKS WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
SHEET 2 OF 4
Tool
Notes
MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT SET MAX
LIMIT CIRCUIT CURRENT
6
1V=1A JW1
ERROR AMPLIFIER, PWM REGULATOR,
AND FILAMENT CURRENT DRIVERS
TP25 TP24
R61 Max Fil Jumper +
3
6.5 A
(5.5A or 6.5A)
R57
2
-
1 5.5 A
RN8D U1A +35V
-12V
J3-11 RN9D 6-
7 R63
SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK 5 +
FROM ON PAGE 2 J3-3
U30B D6
R62
RN9C RN3G 11
RN8C
Q6 Q12
J2-8 RN2A 6- TP3
7 RN5G RN4H U3
5+ -
6 J2-7 RN2B U1B +
U4B PWM
TP23 TP22
1V=1A REGULATOR
RN3F
R67 J2-6 RN1A
R64
J2-5 RN1B
RN8B Q13
J10-32 RN9B 2- Q7
1 R59
RN3H
LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK 3 + C22
FROM ON PAGE 2 J10-13
U30A
R60
J2-9
RN9A
RN8A
-35V
3 TP1 10
U37
11 J2-10 TP2 TP4 J5-2
+12V
TP7 TP10
1V=100mA J5-1
TP1
RN5D
R39 A/D K1
CONVERTER K1 IS FITTED ON “UNIVERSAL” (LARGE/SMALL) K1 J5-4
R38
Fil too Low if FILAMENT BOARDS. J8 IS FITTED ON LARGE

FILAMENT BOARDS, AND J4 IS FITTED ON J5-3
RN1D
<2A SMALL FILAMENT BOARDS. J8
J10-30 RN2D J2-11
9- R29
8 J4
RAD MA FEEDBACK 10 +
FROM ON PAGE 2 J10-11 13 -
U15C 14
R34
RN2C 12 +
RN1C
U15D
R23
T1
J2-4 RN2C D12, 13
Q1 U7 D27, 28
U4A RMS
J2-3 RN2D +
12 1.7 V CONVERTER
1V=2.5mA U2A Ref -
R34/R88
TP11 TP14 -
J2-2 RN1C +
Calibration Pots
R50
R45
Normally do not
J2-1 RN1D
RN4C
RN5C
need adjusting. -
J3-9 2-
1 R79 +
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK 3+ U2B R21
FROM ON PAGE 2 J3-1
U23A
R88
RN5D
RN4D
FILAMENT CURRENT SENSE, RMS

R87
CONVERTER, AND FILAMENT FEEDBACK
DATA BUS
D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD
DRAWN DATE
Fil Drive & mA Control

DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 3 OF 4
Tool
Notes
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 FILAMENT REFERENCE OUTPUTS, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
2 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = SMALL FOCUS SELECTED. THIS SIGNAL IS USED IN SINGLE FILAMENT SUPPLY GENERATORS ONLY.
3 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FILAMENT FAULT (FILAMENT CURRENT < 2 A). “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO FILAMENT FAULT.
4 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) SMALL FOCUS SELECTED.
5 PRIMARY FILAMENT CURRENT AT THESE POINTS MAY BE CONFIRMED USING A CURRENT PROBE ON ONE OF THE OUTPUT LEADS ON THE SMALL OR LARGE PAIR OF OUTPUTS.
6 THE VOLTAGE AT THESE TEST POINTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
7 THESE TEST POINTS ALLOW MEASUREMENT OF A VOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL TO ANODE CURRENT. THE SCALING IS 0.4 VDC = 100 mA. SHORT EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE CONSIDERED AND APPROPRIATE
MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES MUST BE USED.
8 THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 100 mA OF X-RAY CURRENT.
9 THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 2.5 mA OF X-RAY CURRENT (R&F GENERATORS ONLY).
10 FILAMENT FEEDBACK CURRENT TEST POINT. THIS IS SCALED 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
11 PWM OUTPUT. THE WAVEFORM WILL BE AS PER FIGURE 1 FOR LOW AND HIGH FILAMENT CURRENT DEMAND.
Approx 25 usec (40 kHz)

+12 V
LOW FILAMENT
DEMAND
0V Fixed Frequency Inverter of 40kHz,

FIGURE 1
Pulse width changes to vary power
transfer
+12 V
HIGH FILAMENT
DEMAND
0V
DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 4 OF 4
Tool
Notes 1. NOTE: THE PORTION OF THE REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE,
+24V +24V
J12-17 J6-17 EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND
40ms Fluoro On
REMOTE EXPOSURE, AND REMOTE TOMO SELECT INPUTS U22
1 5 TO J10-35 (PAGE 2)
SHOWN WITHIN THE DASHED OUTLINES IS DETAILED ON 1 5 3
1 5
MD-0763, PAGE 1
after fluoro U44
U32
EXPOSURE ENABLE
2 4
footswitch
2 4 +5V
REFER TO PAGE 4 FOR LOGIC LEVELS, LAST IMAGE COMMAND FROM +12V
R39, R57
2 4
HOLD CIRCUIT MD-0767, PAGE 1
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
released
RN19B
(U39, C30, ETC.)
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:
1 5
R92
EXP
U42 U25, U12, U7 SWT U28
2 4 ADDRESS DECODER, J12-6 J6-6

DATA LATCH, AND DS42 DS41
R82
CPU
DRIVER
+5V 4
1 5 BUFFER AND ADDRESS TO 2.1 V
TP7 REMOTE FLUORO DECODER (U18, U25) CURRENT 1 5
EXPOSURE INPUT U30 SINK
TP9 TP8
2 U46
R65
R66
R64
2 4
1 J9-8 R70 2 4
SEE NOTE 1
R93
R92
R94
U18, U25 RN14C
J5-6 J4-6 R19 R20 +24V
BUFFER AND J12-5 J6-5
J5-7 J4-7 1 5 ADDRESS
TP6 J5-8 J4-8 DECODER RN14D
U15 5
+24V
R24
1 5 1 5 1 5
R25 2 4 1 5
R95
U29 U30 U31
U38 U25, U12, U7
2 4 2 4 2 4 J5-9 J4-9
U32 2 4 ADDRESS DECODER, J12-7 J6-7 RN14B
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
4
BUFFER
Click on red box 1 5 U18, U25
for MPi Console U37 BUFFER AND J12-4 J6-4 RN14E
ADDRESS
setup
R18 R72 2 4
DECODER
5
5 1 5 1 5 1
KV CONTROL
DATA BUS U34 U35 U36 +24V
REFER TO MD-0759
D0..D7
4 2 4 2 4 2
4 3 2 1 JW15 SEE NOTE 1
J13-7 J9-3
MA CONTROL
FOOT
SWITCH These are not J9-4
R77 REFER TO MD-0760
J13-9
applicable to MPi
1 5
U43 U25, U12, U7
J13-3 2 4 ADDRESS DECODER, J12-5 J6-5 RN14D
PREP DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
REMOTE
4
J13-1 1 5 BUFFER AND ADDRESS
HAND EXPOSURE DECODER (U18, U25)
X-RAY
SWITCH INPUT U41
R76 2 4
J13-5
COM
J3-18 J3-19 J3-20

CONSOLE BOARD
+24V
P1-18 4 3 2 1 JW2 SEE NOTE 1 RN14A

J9-24
P1-19 R23
PREP J9-25
1 5
J6-8
X-RAY U8 U25, U12, U7 DATA BUS
THE CONSOLE BOARD & P1-20 ADDRESS DECODER, D0..D7
2 4 J12-8
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY DATA LATCH, AND
SHOWN ON THIS PAGE IS REMOTE DRIVER GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TOMO BUFFER AND ADDRESS
4
USED ON THE 31 X 42 CM 1 5
SELECT DECODER (U18, U25)
CONSOLE ONLY. REFER TO PAGE INPUT DRAWN DATE
U10
3 FOR THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE
R21
G. SANWALD 26 APR 2000 X-RAY EXPOSURE
AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY 2 4 CHECKED RAD/FLUORO
AND PAGE 4 FOR THE S. BLAKE 26 APR 00
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD MD-0761 REV E
Exposure Rad/Fluoro
L. FOSKIN 26 APR 2000
SHEET 1 OF 4
Tool
Notes
Not used on
MPi -one tube
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH &
THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL
FROM MD-0787
Used on RXi
13
J1-4
AUXILIARY BOARD
J8-4 +12V
Resets Latch Fault LEDS
+5V +5V
on Control Bd
RN11B
RN11D
R174
KV
EN D19 U33F
+5V R173 J9-9 J3-9
DS30 DS31
14 13 12 RESET COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1 &
MD-0760, PAGE 2
DS26 X-RAY TP10 J9-7 J3-7
RN11C
GRN RED RN2B “KV ENABLED”

YEL J1-14
DETECTOR CKT ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0764
6 TO 2.1 V
PREP 1 5 (U11A, RN8, ETC) H.T. TANK
CURRENT 8
SINK U4
DS27 DS28 9 J10-14 RN2A 2 4 RN5E
J1-33
GRN RED
10 +12V
7 TO 2.1 V
D21
CURRENT J10-33 15
SINK U19, U16
RN2F
U27 TP18
J1-15 RN1C “PREP ENABLED”
DATA BUFFER AND J10-15 DETECTOR CKT PREP COMMAND TO MD-0764 & MD-0765
1 5 (U11B, U10C, ETC) J1-3
LATCH DRIVER
CONTINUED
U2 D24 D25 RN4B J1-22 ON PAGE 3
J10-34 RN1D 2 4
J1-34
“GENERATOR READY” 18 R133
DETECTOR CIRCUIT Q12
11 J10-16 (U10A, Q6, D37, ETC)
Sum of faults
DATA BUS
D0..D7 12
which gives a
J10-35 +/- 12V/SS FAULT FROM MD-0788,
generator not
EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND
FROM PAGE 1 PAGE 3 (CONTROL BOARD)
J1-16 RN1H “X-RAY REQUEST”

DETECTOR CKT
FILAMENT FAULT FROM MD-0760, PAGE 1 ready signal
1 5 (U11D, RN7, ETC) STATOR FAULT FROM MD-0764 & MD-0765
U5 HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT FROM MD-0759, PAGE 1
J1-35 RN1F 2 4 & HIGH MA FAULT FROM MD-0760, PAGE 2
16
HV / MA FAULT TO MD-0760, PAGE 1
TP12
RN1G “X-RAY REQUEST”
DETECTOR CKT TP14
1 5 (U10D, RN7, ETC) 17
LOGIC “OR / NOR”
U3 CIRCUITS (U10B, U14, DRIVE ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1
Q4, Q13, D91, ETC)
RN1E 2 4
Enables the
Inverters
DRAWN DATE
Exposure Rad/Fluoro
CHECKED RAD/FLUORO
S. BLAKE 26 APR 00
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 26 APR 2000
MD-0761 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 4
Tool This Page is Not Applicable
Notes as MPi does not use these
+5V
Console Types
RN7D
+5V
P/S
READY
DS17 DS18
1
R10
R8
R9
GRN RED
19 TO 2.1 V J5-6
J4-6
CURRENT J5-7
SINK J4-7
OPTO-COUPLER “ON” U24 J5-8
= GENERATOR READY J4-8 TO
1 5 1 5 1 5 GENERATOR
BUFFER INTERFACE
J1-3 J10-3 1 5 U14 U12 U10 BOARD
FROM (PG 1)
U6 2 4 2 4 2 4
PAGE 2 J1-22 J10-22
2 4 J5-9
U3 J4-9
BUFFER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
5 1 5 1 5 1
CONTROL BOARD GENERATOR CPU BOARD
U21 U13 U11
4 2 4 2 4 2
DATA BUS
D0..D7
1
TP12 TP13 TB1-1
FOOT
J8-4 TO SWITCH
+5V +5V J4-7 GENERATOR TB1-2
J8-5
J4-8 INTERFACE
J8-3 BOARD
J4-9 (PG 1) TB1-3
R67
R66
PREP
U17
HAND TB1-4
X-RAY
SWITCH
CPU
TB1-5
COM
5 1 5 1 J6-6 J6-8 J6-10

CONSOLE CPU BOARD
U9 U10
DATA BUS
D0..D7 4 2 4 2
P1-18 J2-18 J3-6

J3-3
PREP
PREP P1-19 J2-19 J3-8
HAND J3-1
X-RAY
SWITCH
X-RAY
J3-5 P1-20 J2-20 J3-10
COM
J7-3 J7-2 J7-1 CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN

CONSOLE CPU BOARD
DASHED LINES ARE USED
ON THE 23 X 56 CM
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY DISPLAY BOARD CONSOLE ONLY.
P1-3
PREP P1-2
Exposure
X-RAY
P1-1 DRAWN DATE
CHECKED RAD/FLUORO
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN S. BLAKE 26 APR 00
Rad/Fluoro
DASHED LINES ARE USED DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
ON RAD-ONLY CONSOLE. L. FOSKIN 26 APR 2000
MD-0761 REV E
SHEET 3 OF 4
Tool
Notes
Exposure
P1-6 J5-6 J2-7
J4-7
TO
P1-7 J5-7 J2-8 GENERATOR
PREP J4-8 INTERFACE
Rad/Fluoro
BOARD
X-RAY (PG 1)
P1-5 J5-5 J2-9
J4-9
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
J3-3
PREP
J3-1
This is the Console
HAND
SWITCH
X-RAY used on RXi and
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN COM
J3-5 MPi
DASHED LINES ARE USED
ON THE TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE ONLY. TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE BOARD
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) AT THESE POINTS INDICATES FOOT SWITCH INPUT CLOSED, PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED RESPECTIVELY. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) =
1 OPEN CIRCUIT (I.E. NOT PRESSED) FOOT SWITCH, OR PREP SWITCH, OR X-RAY SWITCH. FOR RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, “LOW” INDICATES PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED, RESPECTIVELY.
2 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = AN X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED VIA ONE OF SEVERAL EXPOSURE INPUTS. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
3 EXPOSURE ENABLE LINE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) INDICATES AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
THE CATHODE OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS HELD “LOW” UNDER CPU CONTROL DURING AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST ONLY. NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE MADE ON THIS LINE AS THIS IS A
4 DATA LINE. THE REQUIRED DATA IS LATCHED BY THE REGISTER CIRCUIT(S) AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME.
THE OUTPUT OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS LATCHED BY A REGISTER. THIS IS THEN READ BY THE DATA BUS AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME. AS THIS IS A DATA LINE, NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE
5 MADE AT THIS CONNECTION.
6 DS30 LIT = KV ENABLE REQUEST SENT. THIS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. DS31 LIT = KV ENABLE NOT REQUESTED.
7 DS27 LIT = PREP REQUEST SENT. DS28 LIT = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
8 DS26 LIT = X-RAY EXPOSURE IN PROCESS.
9 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = KV ENABLED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
10 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
11 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED.
12 “LOW” = X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUESTED AS PER # 3. THIS LINE MUST BE “LOW” IN ORDER FOR THE X-RAY EXPOSURE LED’S ON THE CONTROL BOARD TO BE ENERGIZED (SEE # 16).
13 “LOW” = (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH OR THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = NO FAULT.
14 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = KV ENABLED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
15 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
16 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED.
17 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE ENABLED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE DISABLED.
ALL INPUTS TO THE “GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT” MUST BE AT THE CORRECT LOGIC LEVEL IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. THIS MEANS ALL FOUR FAULT INPUTS SHOWN
18
MUST BE CLEARED, AND THE KV ENABLE AND PREP COMMANDS MUST BE PRESENT.
DS17 LIT INDICATES GENERATOR READY TO MAKE AN EXPOSURE. THIS REQUIRES THAT ALL CONDITIONS PER # 18 BE SATISFIED. DS18 LIT INDICATES A “GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT” INPUT IS
19
NOT SATISFIED TO ENABLE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE.
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED RAD/FLUORO
S. BLAKE 26 APR 00
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 26 APR 2000 MD-0761 REV E
SHEET 4 OF 4
Tool
Notes
DIP Switches selects
LUT for Rotor Type CS1, U10, U11
+5V SW1 * SW2 * INVERTER

+5V FAULT
DETECTOR
RN7G
DS1
INVERTER Starter Inverter 560 / 650 VDC (+)
FAULT
Overcurrent Fault
DS8 DS7
R24
HS LS
Inverter
5
TO 2.1 V U17, U18
1 CURRENT U19, U22, U24
SINK U19, U16 R40
U27 IGBT IGBT
J10-2 J1-2 2 J4-6 J1-6 DRIVER SWITCH SWITCH
DATA BUFFER AND 1 5
CIRCUIT AND (Q2) (Q4)
Drives
LATCH DRIVER
J10-21 J1-21 J4-8 J1-8 U12 FAULT
CURRENT
Inverter
2 4
LATCH
(U1-U10, IGBT IGBT
+12V HIGH SPEED T1-T4, ETC). SWITCH SWITCH
SELECT (Q1) (Q3)
K4 disconnects
Inputs Required PREP COMMAND
FROM MD-0761
K4 Rotor from
R96
1. High/Low Speed
+12V
D47 R41
6
Inverter when not
2. Prep Q7
J4-2 J1-2 1 5 560 / 650 VDC (-)
in use
3. Tube Select R94 J4-4 J1-4 U13
3
2 4
DUAL SPEED
K5,K6 Current Sense TUBE 1
CONTACTOR
PREP
INITIATED
STARTER CPU,
BUFFERS, Relays K5 K1-A TB2-3 SHIFT
+12V DRIVERS
CLOSED
SIGNAL FROM R42
K2-A
MD-0788, PAGE 3 J4-14 J1-14 K1 D47
1 5
U14 Q5
J4-16 J1-16
TB2-2 MAIN
R31
2 4
K6 +12V
4 K2 K5
R32 TB2-1 COMM
+5V TUBE 2 C22
TUBE 1/TUBE 2 SELECT
SELECT SIGNAL
RN7A
FROM MD-0788, K3 HIGH SPEED

PAGE 3 PHASE SHIFT
ROTOR CAPACITOR
K6 K1-B
DS20 DS21
+12V TUBE 2
GRN RED K4
K2-B TB3-3 SHIFT
TO 2.1 V
8 OPTO-COUPLER
R1
uP checks voltage at end

CURRENT
U24 “ON” = NO FAULT
SINK
J10-1 J1-1
BUFFER
5 1 +12V of Prep from Q5 K3
U5
7 Rotor OK (integrated and stored on TB3-2 MAIN
R121
J4-10 J1-10
C22 from chattering close
4 2 J10-20 J1-20 RN4E LOW SPEED
Signal Out PHASE SHIFT
TB3-1 COMM
of Current Sense relay)

R138 CAPACITOR
Q18
K4 and (K1 (tube 1) or K2

(tube 2) or K3 (Low Speed)
Close on Prep.
STATOR FAULT TO
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
DATA BUS ON CONTROL BOARD,
D0..D7 SEE MD-0761
GENERATOR CPU BOARD CONTROL BOARD DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
* REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE

PROCEDURE TO SET DIP SWITCHES SW1 AND SW2 DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 30 MAR 2000 DUAL SPEED
Anode Starter
CHECKED STARTER
STEVE BLAKE 30 MAR 2000
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN 30 MAR 2000 MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
Tool
Notes
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 DS8 LIT INDICATES HIGH SPEED SELECTED, DS7 LIT INDICATES LOW SPEED SELECTED.
2 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = HIGH SPEED SELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = LOW SPEED SELECTED.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 7 VDC) = CONTACTOR CLOSED AND PREP REQUESTED. THIS INITIATES THE BOOST CYCLE. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOST NOT REQUESTED (PREP COMMAND NOT
3 RECEIVED, OR CONTACTOR IS NOT CLOSED).
4 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 2 DESELECTED. THIS CONDITION DEFAULTS TO TUBE 1.
DS1 LIT INDICATES AN INVERTER CURRENT FAULT. POSSIBLE CAUSES INCLUDE INCORRECT DIP SWITCH SETTINGS FOR THE TUBE IN USE (SEE ** ON PAGE 1), INCORRECT STATOR IMPEDANCE, OR
5
DEFECTIVE STATOR CABLE.
6 K4 OPEN CIRCUITS THE STATOR COMMON LEAD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
7 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
8 DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMAL STATOR CURRENTS. DS21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 30 MAR 2000 DUAL SPEED
CHECKED STARTER
STEVE BLAKE 30 MAR 2000
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN 30 MAR 2000 MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
Tool +24V
Notes TB1-5 J2-15 J9-15

NOTE *
Room
TABLE 4 3 2 1 JW7
STEPPER TB1-4 J2-16 J9-16
INPUT +24V 1 5
NOTE * U7, U12, U18,
R53 U21
TB2-5 J2-13 J9-13 U19, U25
+24V R54 2 4
Interface
BUCKY 4 3 2 1 JW10
NOTE *
CONTACTS TB2-4 J2-14 J9-14
4 3 2 1 JW9 1 5
TB2-7 J2-11 J9-11 R55 U31
1 5 R56
COLLIMATOR 2 4
INTERLOCK TB2-6 J2-12 J9-12 R66
U29 +24V
R67 2 4 NOTE *
TB3-5 J2-24 J9-24
4 3 2 1 JW2
REMOTE TOMO SEE
SELECT TB3-4 J2-25 J9-25 MD-0761 J12-1 J6-1
D0
R23
TB3-7 J2-22 J9-22 U8
TOMO
U10 J12-2 J6-2
EXPOSURE TB3-6 J2-23 J9-23 D1
R21
+24V
TB4-4 J2-21 J9-21
1 5
ROOM DOOR U14 +24V
D2 J12-3 J6-3
INTERLOCK TB4-5 +24V NOTE *
R29 R38 2 4 1 5 JW3
TB4-6 J2-20 J9-20 U13 4 3 2 1
D3 J12-4 J6-4
THERMAL R34 R36 +24V 1 5
2 4
SWITCH 2 TB4-7
R32 BUFFER, DRIVER
U9
T2 FROM MD-0787 R22 AND ADDRESS
TB4-8 J2-19 J9-19 U16 2 4
DECODER CIRCUITS D4 J12-5 J6-5
R33 R37
THERMAL
SWITCH 1 TB4-9
T1 FROM MD-0787
TB5-12 J2-17 J9-17 D5 J12-6 J6-6
MULTIPLE SPOT +24V

EXPOSURE TB5-11 J2-18 J9-18 NOTE *
+24V D6 J12-7 J6-7

TB6-4 J2-9 J9-9 4 3 2 1 JW6
NOTE *
MPi Fluoro I.I.
JW8
R35
1 5
SAFETY TB6-3 J2-10 J9-10 4 3 2 1
Footswich R68
U20
D7 J12-8 J6-8
+24V 1 5 R52
plugs in TB6-5 J2-8 J9-8 2 4
** U27
REMOTE FLUORO
here EXPOSURE TB6-6 J2-7 J9-7 R71
U30, U42,
U44
R69 2 4 DATA BUS
R70 DO..D7
TB6-8 J2-5 J9-5
REMOTE
PREP TB6-7 J2-6 J9-6 +24V
NOTE *
TB6-10 J2-3 J9-3
4 3 2 1 JW14
REMOTE
+24V
EXPOSURE TB6-9 J2-4 J9-4 R75
NOTE * 1 5
TP14 J2-1 J9-1

R77
4 3 2 1
**
JW15
R74
U28
2 4 Click for Outputs
J2-2 J9-2
U41,
R76 U43
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR CPU BOARD
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE OUTPUTS ARE
SHOWN ON PAGE 2
* * DRAWN DATE
24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT POSITION DRY CONTACT INPUT POSITION G. SANWALD 13 APR 2000 ROOM
FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9, FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9, CHECKED
14 APR 2000
INTERFACE
** ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS ARE USED IN THE AREAS INDICATED **. THESE CIRCUITS ARE NOT JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN. JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN. JUMPER S. BLAKE
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 2-3; 24 VDC CONNECTS PINS 1-2 AND 3-4; AN DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
RELEVANT TO THIS ROOM INTERFACE DIAGRAM, HOWEVER, THEY ARE PART OF THE X-RAY APPLIED EXTERNALLY ACTIVATES EXTERNAL DRY CONTACT CLOSURE
EXPOSURE FUNCTION AND ARE SHOWN ON MD-0761 ACTIVATES THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING L. FOSKIN 13 APR 2000 MD-0763 REV C
THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING THE
APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER. THE APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
SHEET 1 OF 2
Tool FOR +24 VDC SOURCE, REFER TO
Notes MD-0788, PAGE 4, ON
+24V +24V
C2
Room
J9-40 J2-40 TB1-2
U6, U7, U11, U12 R2 JW12
U24, U25, U34 TOMO / BUCKY 4
J9-39 J2-39 K1 TB1-1
SELECT
DRIVE 1 J9-30 J2-30

C1
K1
Interface
TB1-11
JW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R1 JW9
BUCKY 3
DRY * LIVE * K2 TB1-12
SELECT
DRIVE 2 J9-29 J2-29
K2
TB11
JW2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J9-28 J2-28 1 DRY * LIVE *
DRIVE 3 K6
K3 2 Cut JW11 to stop Wall
J6-1 J12-1 K3
D0
3 C3 Bucky oscillating all the
K4
J9-27 J2-27 4 R3 JW11 time. TB2-2
DRIVE 4 K1 BUCKY 2
5 K3 TB2-1
J6-2 J12-2 K4 K2 SELECT
D1
C4
DRIVE 5 J9-34 J2-34 220 VAC TB2-11
JW3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R4 JW10
J6-3 J12-3 K5
TB10
BUCKY 1
D2 DRY * LIVE * K4 TB2-12
SELECT
1
DRIVE 6 J9-32 J2-32 2 TB3-1
K6 COLLIMATOR
J6-4 J12-4 D3 3 JW4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 K5 TB3-2
BYPASS
ADDRESS DECODERS, 4 DRY * LIVE *
BUFFER, REGISTER, DRIVE 7 J9-31 J2-31 5
TB3-11
AND DRIVER TOMO / BUCKY
J6-5 J12-5 K7 TB3-12
D4 CIRCUITS START
TB7-TB11 C6 JW14
110 VAC
R6
Supply
DRIVE 8 J9-35 J2-35 C5 TB4-11
TB9 K6
J6-6 J12-6 K8 ROOM
selection
D5 1 K8 TB4-12
R5
LIGHT
2 JW13
DRIVE 9 J9-36 J2-36
3 JW5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TB4-1 TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
J6-7 J12-7 K9
D6 4 DRY * LIVE * INDICATOR (COMM)
K7 TB4-3
5 TUBE 1 INDICATOR
DRIVE 10 J9-37 J2-37
TB4-2
K10 NOTE THE FOLLOWING IF USING JW1, JW2, TUBE 2 INDICATOR
J6-8 J12-8 +24V
D7 24 VDC JW3, JW4, OR JW5 IN THE LIVE CONTACT
POSITION: TB5-2
TB8
J9-38 J2-38 A JUMPER WIRE MUST BE CONNECTED TO K9 TB5-4
DRIVE 11 1 JW6 1 2 3 4 MAG 3
TB11 PIN 1, 2, 3, 4 OR 5 AS APPROPRIATE
DATA BUS K11 TB5-3
2 FROM TB8, TB9, OR TB10 IN ORDER TO
DO..D7 SUPPLY 24 VDC, 110 VAC, OR 220 VAC DRY ** Digital (Infimed)
3 FROM THE SELECTED OUTPUT K10 TB5-7
LIVE 24 VDC ** Systems:
DRIVE 12 J9-33 J2-33
4 TB5-6 These signals go
K12 MAG 2 to II Power Supply
5
TB5-5 TB5: 2-3 Mag 3
TB5: 5-6 Mag 2
DRIVE 13 J9-26 J2-26
TB7 K12 TB5-8 TB5: 8-9 Mag 1
K13
DRIVE 1 TO 1 K11 TB5-10
DRIVE 13 = “LOW” +24V MAG 1
ENERGIZES 2 TB5-9
THE RELAYS 3 K13
JW7 1 2 3 4 TB5-1
4
+24V
5 DRY **
TB6-1
LIVE 24 VDC ** ALE
TB6-2
JW8 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT
TB6-11
DRY ** SPARE
TB6-12
LIVE 24 VDC ** OUTPUT
GENERATOR CPU BOARD GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE * LIVE CONTACT LIVE CONTACT ** LIVE CONTACT 24VDC LIVE CONTACT 24VDC
DRAWN DATE
OUTPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS ARE G. SANWALD 13 APR 2000 ROOM
SHOWN ON PAGE 1 CHECKED INTERFACE
DRY CONTACT DRY CONTACT S. BLAKE 14 APR 2000
DRY CONTACT DRY CONTACT DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DRY CONTACT POSITION FOR LIVE CONTACT 24VDC POSITION
Click for Inputs DRY CONTACT POSITION

FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 4-6
LIVE CONTACT POSITION
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 6-8
JW6 TO JW8 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS
PINS 2-3
JUMPERS CONNECT
PINS 1-2 AND 3-4
L. FOSKIN 13 APR 2000 MD-0763 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
Tool
Notes
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
D36 LIT INDICATES RAD OR PULSED FLUORO
REFER TO MD-0759 1 MODE. D36 NOT LIT INDICATES CONTINUOUS
K1
PAGE 2 FLUORO MODE.
+12V
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON
Rad RESONANT BOARD ENERGIZED IN RAD / PULSED
R44
+12V
2 FLUORO MODE. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC)
Mode D36 = K1 ON RESONANT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN
THESE CIRCUITS USED
LED RAD
J2-1
J2-1
ON R&F GENERATORS
CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE.
1 MODE “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON POWER

J2-2
J2-2 K1 ONLY
FROM J1-5 (AUXILIARY R79 MODE SELECT BOARD ENERGIZED IN FLUORO OR
Fluoro Contactor used to short out fluoro Inductor (this changes
BOARD), SEE MD-0788, Q5
PAGE 3 2 LOW POWER RAD MODE (< 20 kW APPROX). “HIGH”
R47 3 (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = K1 ON POWER MODE
the resonant frequency of the inverter). De-energized in Fluoro SELECT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN HIGH POWER
HI = RAD MODE
Note: Pulsed Fluoro operates in the Rad Mode RAD MODE (> 20kW APPROX).
RESONANT BOARD
Rad/Fluoro &
+12V
D38
J10-1 J3-1
THE POWER MODE SELECT
Power Mode Select

K1
D1 BOARD IS USED ON 65 / 80 kW
Third Inverter is taken GENERATORS WITH THREE
D44 J10-2 J3-2
FROM J1-3 (AUXILIARY R69
BOARD) SEE MD-0788, Q4
PAGE 3 3
out of operation during INVERTER BOARDS ONLY
R66
low power exposures,

such as fluoro
AUXILIARY BOARD
ENERGIZING K1
DISABLES DRIVE
TO INVERTER
BOARD No. 3
J12-1 J1-1 K1
J4-1 J1-1
J12-2 J1-2
INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL J4-2 J1-2
J12-3 J1-3 INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL
FROM MD-0759 J4-3 J1-3
J12-4 J1-4 TO MD-0759
J4-4 J1-4
Power Mode Board

Selects the 3rd Inverter
CONTROL BOARD POWER MODE SELECT BOARD INVERTER BOARD
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 21 MAR 2000 RAD / FLUORO AND
CHECKED________ ________ POWER MODE SELECT
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW 21 MAR 2000 MD-0786 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
Digital Interface
Tool
Notes
+24V +15V +5V
J13-11
J13-13
J13-17
J13-15
-15V
D0 RN14H J6-1 J12-1 RN4A RN3A J13-1

D1 RN14G J6-2 J12-2 RN4B RN3B J13-2
D2 RN14F J6-3 J12-3 RN4C RN3C J13-3
D3 RN14E J6-4 J12-4 RN4D RN3D J13-4
D4 RN14D J6-5 J12-5 RN4E RN3E J13-5
D5 RN14C J6-6 J12-6 RN4F RN3F J13-6
D6 RN14B J6-7 J12-7 RN4G RN3G J13-7
D7 RN14A J6-8 J12-8 RN4H RN3H J13-8
J6-9 J12-9
WRITE ENABLE J6-11 J12-11 J13-10

READ ENABLE J6-13 J12-13 J13-12
RESET J6-20 J12-20 J13-16 CONTINUED
ADDRESS LATCH ENABLE R91 J6-15 J12-15 R115 R84 J13-18 ON PAGES
J7-20 J11-20 J13-19 2 TO 6
HV ON SIGNAL FROM J13-14
EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND
MD-0759, PAGE 1
TO MD-0761, PAGE 1
“DIGITAL IMAGING” ABS

TO MD-0758
J13-20
ABS Signal
+5V
RN19D from Infimed
J13-22
4
ON=Synch Pulses
6
5 DS40
SYNC 3
U45B
3 1 R97 J7-15 J11-15 2
2 JW22
5 1 1
U45A
U28 3 U51
JUMPER POSITION:
2 4 2 INTERNAL (LINE SYNC)
CPU JW3 LINE SYNC FROM JUMPER PINS 1-2
1 MD-0788, PAGE 4 EXTERNAL (DIGITAL IMAGING SYNC)
JUMPER POSITION:
Not used on JUMPER PINS 2-3
INVERTED SYNC
JUMPER PINS 1-2
RXi or MPi J13-9
NON-INVERTED SYNC J13-21

JUMPER PINS 2-3
DATA, ADDRESS, J13-23
AND CONTROL BUS
GENERATOR CPU BOARD GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 16 MAY 2000 DIGITAL
CHECKED INTERFACE
KVR 17 MAY 2000
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 17 MAY 2000 MD-0767 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 6
Tool
Notes
+24VR +24VR
+5V +15V +24V +24VR
J3-25 J2-1
J1-11 J3-27 J2-3
J1-13 J3-29 J2-5

D6 J3-31 J2-7
J1-17 F1
J3-33 J2-9
J1-15 D5 J3-35 J2-11
R10
Q1 J2-13
J2-17
-15V
R9
D3 U17
12 U10D 11 J2-19
J1-19 MONOSTABLE
13 TIMER J2-18
D4 J2-20
U14 U16
J2-14
J1-1
J2-12
J1-2
J2-10
J1-3
J2-8
J1-4 DATA
DRIVER J2-6
J1-5 LATCH
J2-4
J1-6 ADDRESS DECODER +24V +24VR
J2-2
J1-7 CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C)
J1-8
R15
J1-10
U13 U15 R13 J3-34
J1-12 Q2 J2-23
J1-16 J3-32
J1-18 J3-30
D1 J3-28
DATA DRIVER J3-26
LATCH
J3-36
FROM
PAGE 1
+24V +24VR
+24VR +24VR +24VR
U12
R14
R12
J1-9 Q3
BUFFER 5 1 R1 5 1 R2 5 1 R3 J2-16
J3-47
J1-21 J2-22
U3 U4 U5
J1-23 D2
4 2 4 2 4 2 J3-41
J3-39
U11 SW1
J3-37
J3-38
BUFFER J3-40
J3-42
Plug J2 is a
R4 R5 R6
J3-44 terminal
5 1 5 1 5 1 J3-46
SW 1=ON U6 U7 U8 Strip
SW 2-8 = OFF 4 2 4 2 4 2 J2-15
+24VR
J3-45
J3-43 J7 1/2
R16
J2-24
J8 20/21 J1-22 J3-48

(TDI II Bd)
(TDI II Bd) J1-20 J2-21
DIGITAL I/O BOARD J2-21 ABS Signal

THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733947, 735921. from Infimed via GIM
Digital I/O Board has been replaced by the DRAWN
G. SANWALD
DATE
16 MAY 2000 DIGITAL
TDI II Board CHECKED
KVR 17 MAY 2000
INTERFACE
Digital Interface
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
ABS signal comes in on J7 1/2 on TDI II L. FOSKIN 17 MAY 2000 MD-0767 REV B
Board and out on J8 20/21 SHEET 3 OF 6

Loupe
ABS
Fuses LEDs Menu
Tool
Notes
ABS from Infimed “DIGITAL IMAGING” ABS External ABS (jumper on JW23 INSTALLED FOR UNITS FITTED
JW21 pins 1 &2) used from FOR UNITS WITH DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER
FROM MD-0767, PAGE 1 WITH ANALOG POTENTIOMETER, OMITTED
(2.5V at correct
JW13 * R43 1
dose) Infimed via Digital IF Bd
R48 is removed R27 JW23 TP13 TP15
JW12 * R62 JW21 *
from the Bd for

R65 1
JW4 * C19
R58
R54
1 2
2
R63 2 - 3
R42 MPi R52 U37
1 D13
3
JW11 * 3 R64
+ R45 6 R41
R48 13 - R56 SAMPLE AND HOLD
- 7 9 14 A/D
U17A - J11-3 J7-3 CIRCUIT (U47,
5 +
8 12 + CONVERTER
4 10 R95, C102, ETC.)
Set +
R44
U17B U23D
ABS gain U17C
RN5A
R51
R31
**
JW24 JW25
TP8: Set system for
+12V TP8
(IN) (OUT)
J7-4 C22 1
J7-5
2.0V (Normal dose)
TP9
PMT / PHOTO DIODE /
PROPORTIONAL DC CONTROL SIGNALS at correct dose.
J7-7
R50
TP14 GND
VIDEOINPUT -12V FROM DATA BUS DIGITAL
ADDRESS REGISTERS POTENTIOMETER
J7-12 R61 (U24, U25) For different doses the user sets the
From CPU
U49 TP14
value in the Service Menu and the CPU
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J8
1
Dig Pot** gives a different resistance will change the drive reference value.
COMPOSITE VIDEO 2
INPUT 3
JW19 *
R49 (gain) for Cont and Pulsed Fluoro Ex:
C21 R47 U34
Normal Dose: Set 200 = 2.0V on TP8
D11 GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL
High Dose: Set 400 = 4.0V on TP8
13 - DRIVER
14
R28
TO MD-0757
12 +
C20 R26 U17D
REFER TO CHAPTER
3E OF SERVICE MANUAL
JW20 *
R30
R46
FOR DETAILS ON JW5 *

ABS INPUT CONNECTIONS
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR CPU BOARD
* REFER TO CHAPTER 3E OF SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE REQUIRED JUMPER

POSITIONS FOR THESE CONNECTORS. NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
** ANALOG POTENTIOMETER R48 IS USED ON GENERATORS WITH THE CONVENTIONAL A DC VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT FROM TP8 (TO TP9 OR GROUND),
(CONTINUOUS) FLUOROSCOPY OPTION. THE DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER IS FITTED AND FROM TP13 TO TP15 WHEN OPERATING WITH ABS ON. THIS
ON GENERATORS WITH THE PULSED FLUORO OPTION. THE DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER 1 VOLTAGE WILL TYPICALLY RANGE FROM 0.5 TO 5 VDC, AND WILL
IS ADJUSTED VIA THE ABS SETUP MENU ON THE CONTROL CONSOLE.
VARY DEPENDING ON THE NOMINAL DOSE VALUE IN THE
ABS SETUP MENU.
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 16 MAY 2000
ABS
CHECKED
(AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS
KVR 16 MAY 2000 STABILIZATION)
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 16 MAY 2000 MD-0758 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
Notes Tool
REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR LOGIC LEVELS,
+24V +12V
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL: GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL
J10-13
(NOT USED AT THIS TIME)
FROM MD-0758 J10-19
J10-16
J10-11
-24V -12V
U25, U23 U33
D0 RN14H J6-1 J12-1 8 11
4 CH 4 SELECT J10-2
D1 RN14G J6-2 J12-2 7 12

4 CH 3 SELECT J10-3
To AEC Bd
D2 RN14F J6-3 J12-3 6 13 4 CH 2 SELECT J10-4
D3 RN14E J6-4 J12-4 5 14

4 CH 1 SELECT J10-5
BUFFER &
RN14D J6-5 J12-5 DRIVER 5
D4 DATA LATCH 4 15 “L” FIELD SELECT J10-7
D5 RN14C J6-6 J12-6 3 16

5 “M” FIELD SELECT J10-8
D6 RN14B J6-7 J12-7 2 17

5 “R” FIELD SELECT J10-9
CONTINUED
D7 RN14A J6-8 J12-8 1 18
7 START J10-6 ON PAGES
3 TO 5
+5V
R88
+5V
R87
U28
1 Terminates the
R99
TP10
CPU
8 9
R100 J7-19 J11-19 exposure
10
Q6
U45C
R86
6
PTSTOP J10-1
Q5
2
R85
Ramp from
TP9 TP12
AEC Bd to
R44
R42
TP11
2
J11-4 CPU Bd PTRAMP J10-15
U37
-
9
A/D 8
10 J7-4 TP12
CONVERTER
AEC Ref
+
3
U23C J11-1 PTREF J10-10
RN5B
+12V
R117
J10-17
3 TP4 U46
R89
4 5 +12V
R116
R30
2 1
U18 Q7
9 - 8 J7-1
D/A 10 +
CONVERTER -12V
U14C J14-6 J14-7 J14-14 J14-3 J14-1 J14-2 J14-4 J14-12 J14-13 J14-15 J14-8 J14-9 J14-10 J14-11
DATA BUS
DO..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TO A2EC2 DETECTOR CIRCUIT

CONTINUED ON PAGE 2 DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 02 JUN 2000
AEC
CHECKED AEC
__________ __________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 02 JUN 2000 MD-0757 REV F
SHEET 1 OF 14
Notes Tool
+12V +12V +50V TP4
+500V
AEC CH 1
J1-3 J5-3 +12V J1-1
U1E U1F +300V +500V +500 V
J1-19 J1-19 J1-2
R22 R47 +300V +300 V
R31
J1-15 J1-15 +12V J1-3
-1000V +50V +50 V
J1-17 J1-17 J1-4
R27
+12V +12 V
J1-1 J5-1 J1-5
-12V -12 V
16 J1-6
R15
+12V J1-4 J5-4
R32
-24V -24 V
+12V +12V +12V +12V J1-7
-12V J1-2 J5-2 -12V TP3 GND
6-
7 J1-8
R23
-24V -24V R28 5+ FEEDBACK START
D45 D46 D47 START 1
R16
R18
R20
R21
J1-9
U1B LEFT 1 LEFT
CONVERTER CIRCUIT J1-10
U1D MIDDLE 1 MIDDLE
12 VDC TO 50 VDC, 300 VDC, J1-11
CH 4 RIGHT 1 RIGHT
J10-2 J5-2 D44 500 VDC, AND -1000 VDC
CHAMBER 4 SELECT D43 J1-12
U1C SIGNAL 1 SIGNAL
CH 3 INCLUDES U3, Q1-Q4, D1-D6,
U2C
U2D
U2A
J10-3 J5-3 D37 TO D12-D21, AND T1
CHAMBER 3 SELECT D42
U1B SHT 10 AEC CH 2
CH 2
J10-4 J5-4 D38 5.1V REFERENCE J2-1
CHAMBER 2 SELECT D41 +500V +500 V
U1A J2-2
CH 1 +300V +300 V
R19
R10
R24
J10-5 J5-5 D39 J2-3
CHAMBER 1 SELECT D40 +50V +50 V
J2-4
+12V +12 V
+12V J2-5
-12V -12 V
J2-6
-24V -24 V
J2-7
R14
START 1~ J2-1 J6-1 GND
START 1
D36 SHT 9 J2-8
J2-3 J6-3 START 2 START
J10-6 J5-6 TO START LEFT 1_ LEFT 1 J2-9
START LEFT 2 LEFT
SHT 10 FROM J2-5 J6-5
MIDDLE 1_ MIDDLE 1 J2-10
SHT 9 J2-7 J6-7 MIDDLE 2 MIDDLE
+12V +24V RIGHT 1_ J2-11
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2 RIGHT
J2-9 J6-9 J2-12
SIGNAL 1_ TO SHT 10 SIGNAL 1 SIGNAL 2 SIGNAL
R29*
R90*
START 2~ J2-11 J6-11
START 2
SHT 9 J2-13 J6-13
LEFT 2_ LEFT 2 AEC CH 3
R42 FROM J2-15 J6-15
FROM MIDDLE 2_ MIDDLE 2 J3-1
PAGE 1 D69* SHT 9 +500V +500 V
R43* J2-17 J6-17 J3-2
RIGHT 2_ RIGHT 2 +300V +300 V
Q4 J3-3
J2-19 J6-19
SIGNAL 2_ TO SHT 10 SIGNAL 2 +50V +50 V
D34 TO AEC INPUT J3-4
START 3~ J2-2 J6-2 +12 V
J10-15 J5-15 START 3 CONNECTORS J1 -J4 +12V
PT RAMP SHT 9 J3-5
JW29 J2-4 J6-4 -12V -12 V
J10-10 J5-10 FROM LEFT 3_ LEFT 3 J3-6
PT REF D33 FROM J2-6 J6-6 -24V -24 V
SHT 10 JW30 MIDDLE 3_ MIDDLE 3 J3-7
J10-1 J5-1 SHT 9 GND
PT STOP J2-8 J6-8
RIGHT 3_ RIGHT 3 J3-8
D22 START 3 START
J2-10 J6-10 J3-9
SIGNAL 3_ TO SHT 10 SIGNAL 3 LEFT 3 LEFT
JW31 START 4~ J2-12 J6-12 J3-10
J10-19 J5-19 START 4 MIDDLE 3 MIDDLE
+24V D24 SHT 9 J2-14 J6-14 J3-11
JW32 LEFT 4_ LEFT 4 RIGHT 3 RIGHT
J3-12
TP1 FROM J2-16 J6-16 SIGNAL 3 SIGNAL
MIDDLE 4_ MIDDLE 4
J10-13 J5-13 TP2 D26 SHT 9 J2-18 J6-18
+12V RIGHT 4_ RIGHT 4
J10-17 J5-17 JW33 J2-20 J6-20 AEC CH 4
SIGNAL 4_ TO SHT 10 SIGNAL 4
D28 J4-1
JW34 +500V +500 V
TP5 J4-2
+300V +300 V
J10-11 J5-11 J4-3
-12V D30 +50V +50 V
J4-4
+12V +12 V
J10-16 J5-16 JW35 J4-5
-24V D32 -12V -12 V
JW36 J4-6
-24V -24 V
J4-7
TP5 GND
J4-8
START 4 START
-1000V J4-9
LEFT 4 LEFT
J4-10
MIDDLE 4 MIDDLE
J4-11
RIGHT 4 RIGHT
J4-12
SIGNAL 4 SIGNAL
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD AEC BOARD J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 AEC INTERFACE BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734654, WHICH DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE DRAWN DATE
CONSISTS OF AEC INTERFACE BOARD 728399 AND AEC BOARD SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL. G. SANWALD 02 JUN 2000
734630. THE AEC BOARD CIRCUITS ARE CONTINUED ON PAGES CHECKED AEC
__________ __________
9 AND 10.
* REFER TO PAGES 11 AND 12 FOR THESE COMPONENT VALUES. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
SHEET 8 OF 14
Notes Tool
J10-7 J5-7
LEFT FIELD SELECT
FROM J10-8 J5-8
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT
PAGE 1
J10-9 J5-9
RIGHT FIELD SELECT +12V +24V +12V +24V +12V +24V
R29*
R29*
R29*
R90*
R90*
R90*
R28 R26 R27
R9* R8* R5*

Q2 Q1 Q3
D31 D9 D17
JW5 JW13 JW21

D19 RIGHT 1_ D1 MIDDLE 1_ D8 LEFT 1_
JW6 JW14 JW22
R3
D20 D2 D10
JW7 JW15 JW23

JW8 JW16 JW24
J2 J2 J2
D23 SHT D4 SHT D11 SHT
8 8 8
JW9 JW17 JW25
JW10 JW18 JW26
D27 D6 D15
JW11 JW19 JW27

JW12 JW20 JW28
R12 R6 R10
D35 D13 D18
R111 JW73 R110 JW72 R109 JW71

U19C U19B U19A
R104 JW68 R103 JW67 R112 JW74

U17B U17A U19D
R99 JW63 R107 JW70 R105 JW69

U16D U16C U16B
R102 JW66 R101 JW65 R100 JW64

U16A U17D U17C
R66 R65 R47 R48 R62 R69 R57 R64
2- 6- 2- 6-
JW47 R88, R67 1 S/S OUT 1 JW52 R74, R46 7 S/S OUT 2 JW57 R73, R80 1 S/S OUT 3 JW62 R87, R54 7 S/S OUT 4
START 1~ 3+ SHT 10 START 2~ 5+ SHT 10 START 3~ 3+ SHT 10 START 4~ 5+ SHT 10
SHT 8 U6A SHT 8 U6B SHT 8 U14A SHT 8 U14B
R38
R44
R68
R59
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734654, WHICH DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE DRAWN DATE
CONSISTS OF AEC INTERFACE BOARD 728399 AND AEC BOARD SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL. G. SANWALD 02 JUN 2000
__________ __________
8 AND 10.
SHEET 9 OF 14
Notes Tool
START
FROM SHT 8 R50E R52* JW43
R50A
R36 U4C
R50F
R50B -
6
6 7
JW2 C4 7 - 5 JW44 R86*
5 + SIGNAL 1_
R1 + R50D START R50G FROM SHT 8
U7B* JW45
R41
U5B* FROM SHT 8
R37
JW3 R45
-
2 JW46 S/S OUT 1
R50C
1
R50H
CH 1 3 FROM SHT 9
D51 +
FROM SHT 8 U4A
U7A*
R120 R34 2
1 - C9*
+
3
C39 U3B
R121 U5A* R40
R91
C48
START
R118 FROM SHT 8 R51A R75* JW48
R51E
R114 R58 U4D
R51B
R116 2 R51F -
6
6 1 - 6 7
7 - 3 JW39 C12 7 - 5 JW49 R85*
+ 5 + SIGNAL 2_
5 + R51H
+ R2 START U11B* R51C JW50 FROM SHT 8
R39
U18A
U10B* FROM SHT 8
R31
U18B JW40 R49
-
2 JW51 S/S OUT 2
R51G
1
R51D
CH 2 3 FROM SHT 9
D56 +
FROM SHT 8 U4B
U11A*
R113 R32 2
1 - C20*
+
3
C36 U3A
R108 U10A* R60
R92
START
FROM SHT 8 R70A R71* JW53
R70E
R76 U12C
R70B
R70F -
6
+12V 2 6 7
JW37 C14 7 - 5 JW54 R84*
5 + SIGNAL 3_
3 TP4 R3 + R70H START FROM SHT 8
U8B* R70C JW55
R56
U9B*
R25
FROM SHT 8
R30
TP3 JW38 R72
2
- JW56 S/S OUT 3
R70G
1
R70D
R53 CH 3 3 FROM SHT 9
PT RAMP D59 +
FROM SHT 8 U12A
R17 U8A*
TO R98 R33 2
PT REF 1 - C19*
SHT 8 3
+
PT STOP C33 U3C
R97 U9A* R55 +12V
R93
R106*
D49 START
R24
FROM SHT 8 R82A R81* JW58
R82E
R19 R77 U12D
3
7 - R82B
2 R82F -
6
+ 6 7
JW41 C15 7 - 5 JW59 R83*
SIGNAL 4_
R22
+
U2 5
D50 R4 + R82H START R82C FROM SHT 8
U15B* JW60
R63
U13B* FROM SHT 8
R79
JW42 R61
-
2 JW61 S/S OUT 4
R82G
1
R82D
CH 4 3 FROM SHT 9
D65 +
FROM SHT 8 U12B
U15A*
R96 R35 2
1 - C21*
+
3
C32 U3D
R95 U13A* R78
R94
AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734654, WHICH DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES”
THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE DRAWN DATE
CONSISTS OF AEC INTERFACE BOARD 728399 AND AEC BOARD LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 12V = ON). G. SANWALD 02 JUN 2000
__________ __________
8 AND 9.
SHEET 10 OF 14
Tool
Notes
+12V
R39
ON OFF JUMPER POSITION:
1 2 3 R&F GENERATORS (WITH THERMAL SWITCH)
+12V
JW4 JUMPER JW4 PINS 1-2 (ON)
RAD GENERATORS (NO THERMAL SWITCH) D42
THERMAL
JUMPER JW4 PINS 2-3 (OFF)
R41
4 CUTOFF
OPEN
J2-4 R40
Q10
R43
J2-3
+12V
D26
THERMAL SWITCH ON
INVERTER HEATSINK
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH &
R6
(R&F UNITS ONLY) 5
THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL TO
+12V MD-0764 AND MD-0761, PAGE 2
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
TELLBACK LOGIC R7
CIRCUIT Q8
1 5
(U9, U10, R84) MD-0764 is to Low +5V +5V
R8
U7
Speed Starter Bd
RN11H
RN7H
2 4
FOR TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
SOLENOID DRIVE
CIRCUITS SEE
INVERTER BOARD
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT DS5 DS6
MD-0788, PAGE 1 1 5
SIGNAL FROM MD-0788,
U8 PAGE 3 TUBE TUBE
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT 2 1
2 4 COMMAND FROM MD-0788,
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 PAGE 1 U35
RELAY CONTACTS 3
(SHOWN IN TUBE D39 +12V DECODER/
J5-1 J11-1 J4-20 J4-20
1 POSITION) DEMULTIPLEXER
R28 J1-2 J8-2 J2-5 J3-5 1 5
TUBE 2
J5-2 J11-2 J4-19 J4-19 R38 SELECTED
U3
J1-1 J8-1 J2-13 J3-13
1 2 4
2
OPTO COUPLER
“ON” = TUBE 2 SELECTED
POWER INPUT
H.T. TANK BOARD AUXILIARY BOARD CONTROL BOARD GENERATOR CPU BOARD
REFER TO MD-0763 (ROOM INTERFACE) FOR INTERLOCKS ACCESSED VIA THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
TUBE 1
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
J5-1 TUBE 1 THERMOSTAT TO T1
ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
THERMAL
NOTE SWITCH
REMARKS J5-2
REFERENCE
1 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
TUBE 2
2 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED. STATOR
TERMINAL
DS6 LIT INDICATES TUBE 1 SELECTED. DS5 LIT INDICATES TUBE 2 SELECTED. NEITHER LED LIT INDICATES A MISMATCH BETWEEN THE BLOCK
3
TUBE THAT HAS BEEN REQUESTED, AND THE TUBE THAT HAS ACTUALLY BEEN SELECTED (SEE # 5). J5-3
TUBE 2 THERMOSTAT TO T2
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH CLOSED (OR JUMPERED VIA JW4), “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = THERMAL ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
4 INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH OPEN, OR JW4 JUMPER OMITTED ON RAD GENERATORS. SWITCH J5-4
THE TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 TELLBACK LOGIC CIRCUIT ENSURES THAT THE TUBE ACTUALLY SELECTED MATCHES THE TUBE THAT WAS
5 REQUESTED. FOR EXAMPLE, IF TUBE 2 WAS REQUESTED BY THE CONSOLE BUT TUBE 1 WAS ACTUALLY SELECTED BY THE H.T. TANK, GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
THE LOGIC CIRCUIT WILL INDICATE A FAULT CONDITION.
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 18 MAY 2000
INTERLOCKS &
CHECKED TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
S. BLAKE 18 MAY 2000 TELLBACK
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 1 OF 1
Tool
Notes
Inverter
Tool
Notes HV Tank Interconnections
Loupe
Menu
Tool
Notes
Power Mode Select Board REVISIONS
ZONE LTR DESCRIPTION DWN CHKD APPROVED DATE
A CREATED PER ENG H.W. G.F. H.WANG 21JAN99
J1 K1
J4
1
1
2
2
FROM CONTROL BD(J11) TO INVERTER MODULE #2
GATE DRIVE J1
3
3
4
JW2EN-DC12V
4
J2 K2
J5
1
1
2
2
FROM CONTROL BD(J12)
GATE DRIVE TO INVERTER MODULE #3
3
J1
3
4 JW2EN-DC12V
4
J3
FROM AUX BD
1
FLUORO/LOW POWER MODE D1
2 1N4007
DRAWN Communications & Power Industries

HIGHEST REFERENCE H.WANG 30JUN98
DESIGNATIONS
ORIG/DES ENG Canada Inc.
HTW 21JAN99
D1, J5, K2 APPROVALS DATE
PROD ENG TITLE

SCHEMATIC,
DES/MFG AUTH
POWER MODE SELECT
H.WANG 21JAN99
REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS NOT USED CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
----------
B
732961 INDICO 100 02845 732959 A
COMPUTER GENERATED January 21, 1999
NEXT ASSY USED ON SCALE SHEET
NTS DWG LEVEL 3 1 OF 1
Loupe
Notes Tool Menu
400Vac (Europe) or
480Vac (Americas)
3-Phase Input
Indico Generator Overview Diagram
Power Input Board Inverters connected in parallel Resonant Board HV Tank
K5 Main Inverter 1 100 and 80kW: 3 Inverters
K1 Relay 50 & 65kW: 2 Inverters
Contactor
Primary
DC Bus + Inputs
Inverter 3 only
Inverter 2 Inverter 3 on 100 & 80 kW
versions K1 Fluoro
DC Bus -
Contactor
+
K1 Relay
K2 Relay K1 Power Mode

Power Mode X-ray
Relay Select Board Tube
Gate Driver Control Board
T1 Circuit kV Feedback
Power Supply
Auxiliary Large Small
VCO Filament Board Filament Board DSS Board
Transformer
Filament ref
±12V
High/Low Speed Select & Prep DAP
Fil Actual Fdbck Chamber
+12V DC Bus
CPU Board kVref from Aux Bd
via Control Bd
D/A D/A Data
Latch ±12V
±35V AEC
from Aux Bd Interface &
A/D Ion Chamber
±35V Data Bus AEC
±12V Boards
DAP Interface
Auxiliary Board Board
±15V Photo-
T2 Generator ±12V ±12V Diode
Auxiliary ±15V +5V
Transformer +5V +24V 110Vac +24V
±24V Generator 220Vac
110Vac Room Interface CCD Camera
Interface Board
220Vac Board ±12V
K1 Fluoro Roll Over for J4
±24V
Contactor more Information from Gen IF Bd
+24V
Roll Over the boxes below for Generator ±15V
component locations. Block Diagram +5V ABS
+24V
component outline colour ties in with the Roll
Over Box colour. TDI II Board
GIM
Roll Over Roll Over Roll Over Console Digital PC
for View 1 for View 2 for View 3
Loupe Menu
Notes Tool
Interconnections
.
) - / ) ) ) ! ) ) ) ) ) (
#'
#'
#'
%&
#
#
' #' #'
$
) ) ) ) ) )
$ (!
$ ( (
* * *
+ + + +
' ' (
'
$ $ $
& & & '
$ ! !
$
) ) - !
$ &%%
$ ! &%% ! $
!
'
$ &%% ' ' #% '
$ ! $ $ $ $ $ (
$ (! &%% $ $ (
$ (! $
-
$
( ) ) )
) ) ) & $ $$
$ $ * $ $
$ $
$ ! ( *
'
! " &
# # ' (
$ ! &%%
$ (
$
$
'
! #%
$ $
# )
# )
+ # # ! '
'# ) ) ! '
$$ $ .
! , ! " . &&
# .) % && ) ! '
)%% &&
)%%% && ) ! '
)%%%% && # .
. && && # &

$ + " .
'
% ' # &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& & $
-
Loupe
Menu
Tool
Notes
TDI II Board
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
NOTES:
A CREATED PER ENG ECO # 80320 J.B. M.D. J.BARNES 07JAN04
1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W, 1%
B INC. PER ECO No. 22714 J.B. M.D. J.BARNES 26FEB04
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
C INC. PER ECO No. 22995 J.B. M.D. J.BARNES 25JUN04
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS
D INC. PER ECO No. 23365 J.B. G.F. S.CARTWRIGHT 29NOV04
3.3V
+24V
D U7 R30 D
U8
R14
1K
DS2
F1 TABLE
TBLSTEPREQ\ 1 18 TBLSTEPREQ
XRAYON\ 2 17 XRAYON
TABLE STEP REQUEST AECCENTER\ 18 1 AECCENTER TBLXRAYREQ\ TBLXRAYREQ INTERFACE
X-RAY ON MIN 10ms SELTBLSTEP\
1
17 2 10K AEC CENTER U14 TABLE
GENRDYEXP\ 3 16 GENRDYEXP GENERATOR READY FOR EXP. GRN J6
TBLSTEPDIR\ 16 3 FIELD ONLY XRAY
TBLTUBESEL\ 4 15 TBLTUBESEL TABLE TUBE SELECT TOMOTIME0\ 15 4 REQUEST TBLSTEPREQ 1 OUTPUT
SPARE1\ 5 14 SPARE1 4N35
TOMOTIME1\ 14 5 GENRDYEXP 2
2
SPARE2\ 6 13 SPARE2 OUTPUT
TOMOTIME2\ 13 6 R15 SPARE1 3
SPARE3\ 7 12 SPARE3 SELTBLSTEP OUTPUT
12 7 SPARE3 4 OUTPUT
SPARE4\ 8 11 SPARE4 10K SELECT
11 8 EXPEN0 AECCENTER 5 INPUT
+24V TABLE TBLSTEPDIR
1
3.3V U15 6 INPUT
STEPPING TOMOTIME1
9 10 7 INPUT
3.3V 10 9 SELDIGRAD 8
R16 R31 INPUT
TBLSTEPDIR 4N35 SPAREIN1 9
2
TBLXRAYEN\ +10V INPUT
UDN2981A C7 ULN2803 MAG0 10
10K SELECT 3.3V 2K INPUT
0.1 11
3.3V STEP SID SOURCE
+24V DIRECTION SID_INPUT 12
R27 ANALOG INPUT
DS1 13
TBLFLUOROREQ\ 1K TBLFLUOROREQ INPUT
RN4A R17 TBLSTEPSYNC_PWR 14
C4 AECCENTER\ TOMOTIME0
1
8 1 U12 TABLE
0.1 GRN TBLSTEPSYNC_SIG 15
+15V 1K 10K TOMO FLUORO 16
REQUEST 24V
TIME 17
RN4B SELECT 0 4N35 24V
2
SELTBLSTEP\ 7 2 18 24V SWITCHED FOR II
R49 1K R18 19 24V SWITCHED FOR II
+10V TOMOTIME1 XRAYON 20
2.49K EXPEN0 OUTPUT
RN4C TBLTUBESEL 21
C
TBLSTEPDIR\ 10K TOMO OUTPUT C
1
6 3 U13
TIME SPARE2 22 OUTPUT
1K SELECT 1 SPARE4 23 OUTPUT
R48 R28 SELTBLSTEP 24
RN4D 4N35 INPUT
2
U21 7.5K TOMOTIME0\ 5 4 R19 TBLFLUOROEN\ TOMOTIME0 25
TOMOTIME2 INPUT
TL431 2K TOMOTIME2 26
+C19 1K INPUT
1 K 10K TOMO 3.3V SELTOMO
REF 3 10
TIME
27 INPUT
RN5A SPAREIN2 28 INPUT
A TOMOTIME1\ SELECT 2 MAG1
8 1 R35 29 INPUT
2 1K 1K DS3 TBLFLUOROREQ 30 INPUT
R47 TBLPREPREQ\ TBLPREPREQ MAG2 31
2.49K RN5B TBLXRAYREQ
1
U19 TABLE 32
TOMOTIME2\ 7 2 GRN PREP TBLPREPREQ 33
1K REQUEST 34 OV24
4N35 R36 35
2
OV24
U10 36
10V SUPPLY FOR POT >= 1K SELDIGRAD\ 18 1
R20
SELDIGRAD 2K 37
OV24
OV24
SELTOMO\ 17 2 24V FROM M1
10K SELECT
SYNC SPAREIN1\ 16 3 +24V +24V ROOM M2
SYNC DIGITAL
SPAREIN2\ INTERFACE
15 4 RADIOGRAPHY
SID R43 J9
SID MAG0\ 14 5 DSUB 37VS
TBLSTEPREQ\ R21 2.49K
TBLSTEPREQ\ MAG1\ 13 6 1
XRAYON\ SELTOMO
XRAYON\ MAG2\ 12 7 2
GENRDYEXP\
2
GENRDYEXP\ 11 8 10K SELECT 1 2N3906 3
TBLTUBESEL\ TOMO
TBLTUBSEL\ 3.3V Q3
SPARE1\
3
B SPARE1\ R42 B
SPARE2\ 10K
SPARE2\ 10 9 R22
SPARE3\ 3.3V
SPARE3\ SPAREIN1 R44
SPARE4\ ULN2803
SPARE4\ 10K TBLSTEPSYNC_PWR
AECCENTER\ C9 K1
AECCENTER\
SELTBLSTEP\ 0.1 1K 13
SELTBLSTEP\ 11
TBLSTEPDIR\ 9
TBLSTEPDIR\ 3.3V
TOMOTIME0\ TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN 4
TOMOTIME0\ 6
TOMOTIME1\ R23 R45 +24V 8
TOMOTIME1\
TOMOTIME2\ RN6A SPAREIN2 SYNC TBLSTEPSYNC_SIG
TOMOTIME2\ 1
SELDIGRAD\ SELDIGRAD\ 8 1 10K
SELDIGRAD\ 1K IIPWR\ 16
SELTOMO\ 1K
SELTOMO\ JW2EN-DC24
SPAREIN1\
SPAREIN1\
SPAREIN2\ RN6B
+15V +15V
SPAREIN2\
MAG0\ SELTOMO\ 7 2
MAG0\ R24
MAG1\ 1K U23A D5
MAG1\ MAG0 E1
MAG2\ TL082ACD
MAG2\ 10K MAG 8 1N4148 R46
TBLXRAYREQ\ RN6C R54
TBLXRAYREQ\ MODE 3 SID_INPUT
EXPEN0 SPAREIN1\ 6 3 SID 1 +
EXPEN0 2 1K
TBLXRAYEN\ 1K
-
TBLXRAYEN\ 7.5K
TBLFLUOROREQ\ 4 D6
TBLFLUOROREQ\ R53
RN6D R25 1N4148
TBLFLUOROEN\ SPAREIN2\ 5 4 MAG1 2.49K -15V
TBLFLUOROEN\
TBLPREPREQ\ 1K 10K MAG
TBLPREPREQ\
MODE
IIPWR\ RN7A
A IIPWR\ A
MAG0\ 8 1
TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN
TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN 1K
SID R26
SID
RN7B MAG2
DRAW N
MAG1\ 7 2 10K MAG
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS J.BARNES 05JAN04
Communications & Power Industries
ORIG/DES.ENG J.BARNES 05JAN04
1K MODE C20, D6, DS3, E1, F1, Canada Inc.
U23B APPROVALS DATE
J11, K1, Q5, R54, RN8, TITLE
TL082ACD U23, TP1
PROD. ENG.
S.CARTWRIGHT 07JAN04 SCHEMATIC,
RN7C 5 DES/MFG AUTH.
MAG2\ 6 3 7 +
J.BARNES 07JAN04 TDI BOARD
- 6 REFERENCE DESIGNATION NOT USED
1K CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DRAWING NO. REV
R27, R30, R32, R35, R41,

738947 GENERATOR
Tuesday, July 16, 2002 D 02845 738945 D
ORCAD FOR WINDOWS R44-R46
NEXT ASSY USED ON
SCALE : NTS DWG LEVEL 3 SHEET 1 OF 3
APPLICATIONS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NEXT
Loupe
Menu
Tool
Notes 8 7 6
TDI II Board
5 4 3
ZONE
2
LTR DESCRIPTION
REVISIONS
DWN
J.B.
CHKD
1
APPROVED DATE
FOR REVISION SEE SHEET 1 M.D. J.BARNES 07JAN04
+24V
3.3V 3.3V
J4A +24V
RN2D
8A J4G FLUORO_ENABLE_IN 5 4
RN1A RADIATION_READY
7A 1K RADIATION_READY
8G 8 1 SPOT_SELECT
6A SPOT_SELECT
7G RN2C REQ_FOR_EXP
D
5A CINE_ENABLE_IN 6 3 1K REQ_FOR_EXP
D
6G SINGLE_PHOTOSPOT
4A 1K RN8D SINGLE_PHOTOSPOT
5G PREP_FOR_EXP
3A 4 5 PREP_FOR_EXP
4G RN2B II_MODE_2
2A TABLE_STEP_IN 7 2 1K II_MODE_2
U6 3G PULSED_RAD_ON
1A 1K PULSED_RAD_ON
2G II_MODE_1
RADIATION_READY 1 18 8XRJ45 U3 RN3D RN1A II_MODE_1
1G
II_MODE_1 2 17 8XRJ45 EXPOSET 5 4 8 1
SPARE_OUT_5 1 18
PREP_FOR_EXP 3 16 1K 1K PULSED_FLUORO_SEL
SPARE_OUT_6 2 17 PULSED_FLUORO_SEL
II_MODE_2 4 15 RN3C FLUORO_STORE
SPARE_OUT_3 3 16 RN2A FLUORO_STORE
REQ_FOR_EXP 5 14 +24V INJECTOR_SYNC 6 3 II_MODE_3
SPARE_OUT_7 4 15 8 1 II_MODE_3
SINGLE_PHOTOSPOT 6 13 1K LOW_DOSE
J4B SPARE_OUT_4 5 14 +24V 1K LOW_DOSE
PULSED_RAD_ON 7 12 RN3B VERT_REVERSE
SPARE_OUT_8 6 13 VERT_REVERSE
SPOT_SELECT 8 11 1B PHOTOSPOT_IN 7 2 RAD_EXPOSE_ON
SPARE_OUT_2 7 12 J4H RAD_EXPOSE_ON
2B 1K HORZ_REVERSE
+24V FLUORO_EN_OVERIDE 8 11 1H HORZ_REVERSE
3B FLUORO_PULSE_ON
2H RN1D FLUORO_PULSE_ON
9 10 4B +24V SPOT_SUBTRACT 5 4
3H
ULN2803 5B 1K
9 10 4H STATION_BIT_1
6B STATION_BIT_1
5H RN1C HIGH_DOSE
7B ULN2803 UNILATERAL_BILAT 6 3 HIGH_DOSE
6H STATION_BIT_0
8B 1K STATION_BIT_0
7H STEP_REQUEST
8XRJ45 8H RN1B STEP_REQUEST
TABLE_READY
SPARE_IN_1 7 2 TABLE_READY
8XRJ45 STATION_BIT_3
1K STATION_BIT_3
+24V +24V SPARE_OUT_1
SPARE_OUT_1
J2 STATION_BIT_2
C J4C R4 STATION_BIT_2 C
8C 6 6
10K 5 +24V +24V +24V +24V SPARE_OUT_5
7C R5 5 SPARE_OUT_5
4 FLUORO_EN_OVERIDE
6C 10K 4 PORT 2 R37 R39 FLUORO_EN_OVERIDE
R6 3 SPARE_OUT_4
5C 3 2.49K 2.49K SPARE_OUT_4
U2 2 SPARE_OUT_8
4C 10K 2 SPARE_OUT_8
1 SPARE_OUT_3
3C FLUORO_ENABLE_IN 1 SPARE_OUT_3
2
18 1
1 2N3906 1 2N3906 SPARE_OUT_7
2C CINE_ENABLE_IN 17 2 SPARE_OUT_7
U5 Q4 Q5 SPARE_OUT_2
1C TABLE_STEP_IN 16 3 SPARE_OUT_2
3
8XRJ45 R38 R40 SPARE_OUT_6
PULSED_FLUORO_SEL 1 18 15 4 SPARE_OUT_6
FLUORO_PULSE_ON 2 17 14 5 J3 10K 10K
R7
VERT_REVERSE 3 16 EXPOSET 13 6 6 PORT 1 FLUORO_ENABLE_IN
10K 6 FLUORO_ENABLE_IN
RAD_EXPOSE_ON 4 15 INJECTOR_SYNC 12 7 5 PF_SYNC_EN CINE_ENABLE_IN
+24V 5 CINE_ENABLE_IN
II_MODE_3 5 14 PHOTOSPOT_IN 11 8 4 TABLE_STEP_IN
4 CINE_SYNC_EN TABLE_STEP_IN
LOW_DOSE 6 13 R9 3
3.3V 3
HORZ_REVERSE 7 12 J4D 2
10K 2
FLUORO_STORE 8 11 1D 10 9 1 EXPOSET
1 EXPOSET
2D ULN2803 INJECTOR_SYNC
+24V 3D J11 INJECTOR_SYNC
PHOTOSPOT_IN
PHOTOSPOT_IN
9 10 4D 1
5D 2 INJECTOR SYNC
ULN2803 SPOT_SUBTRACT
6D 3 SPOT_SUBTRACT
UNILATERAL_BILAT
7D UNILATERAL_BILAT
+24V +24V +24V +24V SPARE_IN_1
8D SPARE_IN_1
J1
8XRJ45 1 R41 J7 FLUORO_ON
B R10 R12 R3 1 ABS FLUORO_ON B
U1 2 1 RAD_ON
2.49K 2.49K 2 ABS ERROR RAD_ON
SPOT_SUBTRACT 18 1 10K 3 1K 2
R2 3 D3
UNILATERAL_BILAT 17 3
2
2 4 4 PORT 3 BZX84C9V1 PF SYNC

1 2N3906 1 2N3906 10K ABS
SPARE_IN_1 16 3 5 4 ABS
Q1 Q2 R1 5
15 4 6 D4 5 SYNC
3
6 CINE SYNC SYNC

R11 +24V 14 5 10K BZX84C9V1 6
10K SPARE_IN_2 13 6 CON100/6 PF_SYNC_EN
FLUORO_ON J4E CINE_RATE 12 7 PF_SYNC_EN
R13 SYNC
8E SPARE_IN_3 11 8 J10 CINE_SYNC_EN
10K 7E CINE_SYNC_EN
R50 1 1
RAD_ON 3.3V
6E 2 SPARE_IN_2
2 SPARE_IN_2
5E 10 9 R51 10K 3 CINE_RATE
3 PORT 4 CINE_RATE
4E ULN2803 4 SPARE_IN_3
4 SPARE_IN_3
3E 10K 5
R52 5
2E 6
U4 6
1E 10K
STATION_BIT_1 1 18 8XRJ45
STATION_BIT_2 2 17
TABLE_READY 3 16
STATION_BIT_3 4 15
STATION_BIT_0 5 14 +24V
STEP_REQUEST 6 13 3.3V
SPARE_OUT_1 7 12 J4F
HIGH_DOSE 8 11 1F RN8A
SPARE_IN_2 1 8 J4I
+24V 2F
A
3F 1K M1
A
9 10 4F M2
5F RN8B M3
ULN2803 CINE_RATE 2 7
6F M4
7F 1K M5 HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS DRAW N J.BARNES 05JAN04
8F M6 ORIG/DES.ENG
J.BARNES 05JAN04
Canada Inc.
8XRJ45 APPROVALS DATE
8XRJ45 SEE SHEET 1 TITLE
RN8C PROD. ENG
S.CARTWRIGHT 07JAN04 SCHEMATIC,
SPARE_IN_3 3 6 DES/MFG AUTH.
J.BARNES 07JAN04 TDI BOARD
1K REFERENCE DESIGNATION NOT USED
CONTRACT No. SIZE DRAWING NO. REV
CAGE CODE
738947 GENERATOR
W ednesday, December 03, 2003
D 02845 738945 D
ORCAD FOR WINDOWS SEE SHEET 1 NEXT ASSY USED ON
APPLICATIONS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Tool Menu
Notes 8 7 6
TDI II Board
5 4 3
ZONE
2
LTR DESCRIPTION
REVISIONS
DWN CHKD
1
APPROVED DATE
FOR REVISION SEE SHEET 1 J.B. M.D. J.BARNES 07JAN04
RADIATION_READY
ABS_OUT ABS RADIATION_READY
SPOT_SELECT
SPOT_SELECT
REQ_FOR_EXP
REQ_FOR_EXP
SINGLE_PHOTOSPOT
SINGLE_PHOTOSPOT
PREP_FOR_EXP
PREP_FOR_EXP
II_MODE_2
D II_MODE_2 D
PULSED_RAD_ON
3.3V 3.3V PULSED_RAD_ON
J8 U11 II_MODE_1
II_MODE_1
AD0 PULSED_FLUORO_SEL
1 U9 TBLXRAYEN 1 18 TBLXRAYEN\ PULSED_FLUORO_SEL
AD1 FLUORO_STORE
2 TBLFLUOROEN 2 17 TBLFLUOROEN\ FLUORO_STORE
AD2 32 VCC II_MODE_3
3 VCC 51 IIPWR 3 16 IIPWR\ II_MODE_3
AD3 96 VCC LOW_DOSE
4 VCC 115 FLUORO_ON_1 4 15 FLUORO_ON LOW_DOSE
AD4 VERT_REVERSE
5 3 VCCO RAD_ON_1 RAD_ON VERT_REVERSE
AD5 VCCO 41 5 14
RAD_EXPOSE_ON
6 17 VCCO PF_SYNC_EN\ PF_SYNC_EN RAD_EXPOSE_ON
AD6 VCCO 58 6 13
HORZ_REVERSE
7 30 VCCO TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN\ TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN HORZ_REVERSE
AD7 VCCO 67 7 12
RAD_EXPOSE_ON
8 94 VCCO CINE_SYNC_EN\ CINE_SYNC_EN FLUORO_PULSE_ON
VCCO 81 8 11
+24V +15V +5V
STATION_BIT_1
9 105 VCCO STATION_BIT_1
IOWR2 VCCO 122 +24V HIGH_DOSE
10 HIGH_DOSE
SELDIGRAD\ 116 52 HORZ_REVERSE STATION_BIT_0
11 I/OA0 I/OE0 9 10 STATION_BIT_0
IORD2 SELTOMO\ 117 53 II_MODE_3 STEP_REQUEST
12 I/OA1 I/OE1 C3 STEP_REQUEST
SPAREIN1\ 118 54 FLUORO_STORE ULN2803 TABLE_READY
13 I/OA2 I/OE2 0.1 TABLE_READY
EXPEN0 SPAREIN2\ 119 55 VERT_REVERSE STATION_BIT_3
14 I/OA4 I/OE4 STATION_BIT_3
MAG0\ 120 56 LOW_DOSE SPARE_OUT_1
15 I/OA5 I/OE5 SPARE_OUT_1
RESET\ MAG1\ 121 57 PULSED_FLUORO_SEL STATION_BIT_2
-15V 16 I/OA6 I/OE6 STATION_BIT_2
MAG2\ 124 60 HIGH_DOSE SPARE_OUT_5
17 I/OA8 I/OE8 3.3V ISP CABLE SPARE_OUT_5
A LE ADC 125 61 SPARE_OUT_1 FLUORO_EN_OVERIDE
18 I/OA9 I/OE9 J5 FLUORO_EN_OVERIDE
HVON TBLFLUOROREQ\ 126 62 STEP_REQUEST SPARE_OUT_4
19 I/OA10 I/OE10 SPARE_OUT_4
ABS_OUT TBLXRAYREQ\ 127 63 STATION_BIT_0 SPARE_OUT_8
20 I/OA12 I/OE12 1 SPARE_OUT_8
TBLPREPREQ\ 128 64 STATION_BIT_3 SPARE_OUT_3
21 I/OA14 I/OE14 TDO SPARE_OUT_3
SYNC 2 SPARE_OUT_7
22 SPARE_OUT_7
TDI SPARE_OUT_2
C 23 MUXA 4 68 TABLE_READY 3 SPARE_OUT_2 C
I/OB0 I/OF0 SPARE_OUT_6
24 MUXB 5 69 STATION_BIT_2 ISPEN SPARE_OUT_6
I/OB1 I/OF1 4 FLUORO_ENABLE_IN
25 MUXC 6 70 STATION_BIT_1 C6 FLUORO_ENABLE_IN
I/OB2 I/OF2 CINE_ENABLE_IN
26 PF_SYNC_EN\ 7 71 FLUORO_EN_OVERIDE 10nF 5 CINE_ENABLE_IN
I/OB4 I/OF4 TABLE_STEP_IN
TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN\ 8 72 SPARE_OUT_2 TMS TABLE_STEP_IN
CONRIBBON26 I/OB5 I/OF5 6 FLUORO_ON
CINE_SYNC_EN\ 9 73 SPARE_OUT_8 FLUORO_ON
I/OB6 I/OF6 RAD_ON
SPARE_IN_2 11 75 SPARE_OUT_4 7 RAD_ON
I/OB8 I/OF8 ABS
CINE_RATE 12 76 SPARE_OUT_7 TCK ABS
I/OB9 I/OF9 8 SYNC
SPARE_IN_3 13 77 SPARE_OUT_3 SYNC
U16 I/OB10 I/OF10 CON100/8 EXPOSET
+5V 3.3V 14 78 SPARE_OUT_6 EXPOSET
LM1117MPX-3.3 I/OB12 I/OF12 INJECTOR_SYNC
TBLXRAYEN 15 79 SPARE_OUT_5 INJECTOR_SYNC
I/OB13 I/OF13 PHOTOSPOT_IN
3 VIN TBLFLUOROEN PHOTOSPOT_IN PHOTOSPOT_IN
VOUT 2 16 I/OB14 I/OF14 80
SPOT_SUBTRACT
SPOT_SUBTRACT
+5V +5V +5V +5V +5V UNILATERAL_BILAT
GND UNILATERAL_BILAT
+ C11 AD5 29 93 SPARE2\ SPARE_IN_1
C18 C10 +C17 I/OC0 I/OG0 SPARE_IN_1
0.1 1 AD4 28 92 SPARE3\ PF_SYNC_EN
10 0.1 10 I/OC2 I/OG2 R34 R33 R29 PF_SYNC_EN
AD7 27 91 SPARE4\ CINE_SYNC_EN
I/OC4 I/OG4 10K 10K 121K CINE_SYNC_EN
AD6 26 90 SPOT_SUBTRACT SPARE_IN_2
I/OC5 I/OG5 U17 8 SPARE_IN_2
IOWR2 25 89 UNILATERAL_BILAT CINE_RATE
I/OC6 I/OG6 CINE_RATE
IORD2 23 87 SPARE_IN_1 VCC SPARE_IN_3
I/OC8 I/OG8 7 DSCHG RST 4 SPARE_IN_3
RESET\ 22 86 FLUORO_ENABLE_IN
I/OC9 I/OG9
A LE 21 85 CINE_ENABLE_IN U18B 6 THR
I/OC10 I/OG10 C16
RAD_ON_1 20 84 TABLE_STEP_IN 4
I/OC12 I/OG12 6 2 TRG TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN
FLUORO_ON_1 19 83 EXPOSET HVON 5 D1 TABLE_STEP_SYNC_EN
+5V 2.5V I/OC13 I/OG13 1nF TBLSTEPREQ\
IIPWR 18 82 INJECTOR_SYNC 5 CV RAD_EXPOSE_ON TBLSTEPREQ\
I/OC14 I/OG14 74HC00 OUT 3 XRAYON\
1N4148 XRAYON\
B
GND GENRDYEXP\ B
RADIATION_READY 47 111 GENRDYEXP\
R8 I/OD0 I/OH0 TBLTUBESEL\
II_MODE_1 46 110 TOMOTIME2\ LM555 1 TBLTUBSEL\
200 I/OD1 I/OH1 C12 C13 SPARE1\
U22 PREP_FOR_EXP 45 109 TOMOTIME1\ SPARE1\
I/OD2 I/OH2 0.1 0.1 SPARE2\
TL431 II_MODE_2 44 108 TOMOTIME0\ SPARE2\
I/OD4 I/OH4 SPARE3\
REQ_FOR_EXP 43 107 TBLSTEPDIR\ SPARE3\
3 REF I/OD5 I/OH5 SPARE4\
K 1 SINGLE_PHOTOSPOT 42 106 SELTBLSTEP\ SPARE4\
I/OD6 I/OH6 D2 AECCENTER\
A PULSED_RAD_ON 39 103 AECCENTER\ AECCENTER\
I/OD8 I/OH8 SELTBLSTEP\
SPOT_SELECT 38 102 TBLSTEPREQ\ SELTBLSTEP\
2 I/OD9 I/OH9 1N4148 TBLSTEPDIR\
AD1 37 101 XRAYON\ TBLSTEPDIR\
I/OD10 I/OH10 TOMOTIME0\
AD0 36 100 GENRDYEXP\ TOMOTIME0\
AD3 35 99 TBLTUBESEL\ TOMOTIME1\
AD2 34 98 SPARE1\ +5V TOMOTIME2\
I/OD14 I/OH14 SELDIGRAD\
SELDIGRAD\
SELTOMO\
114 2 TDI C20 SELTOMO\
CLK0/I TDI SPAREIN1\
48 31 TCK U20 0.1 SPAREIN1\
CLK1/I TCK SPAREIN2\
50 66 TMS ADC0848/LCC SPAREIN2\
CLK2/I TMS MAG0\
TDO
VCC 2
112 CLK3/I TDO 95 MAG0\
+5V MAG1\
AD0 25 4 SID MAG1\
DB0/MA0 CH1 MAG2\
1 65 AD1 24 5 MAG2\
GND GND DB1/MA1 CH2 TBLXRAYREQ\
10 74 AD2 23 6 TBLXRAYREQ\
TP1 GND GND DB2/MA2 CH3 EXPEN0
24 88 AD3 21 7 EXPEN0
C15 C14 GND GND DB3/MA3 CH4 TBLXRAYEN\
GND 33 97 AD4 20 9 TBLXRAYEN\
GND GND DB4/MA4 CH5 TBLFLUOROREQ\
1
0.1 0.1 40 104 AD5 19 10 TBLFLUOROREQ\

GND GND DB5 CH6
49 113 AD6 18 11
GND GND DB6 CH7 TBLFLUOROEN\
59 123 AD7 17 12 TBLFLUOROEN\
A GND GND DB7 CH8 TBLPREPREQ\ A
ADC 28 TBLPREPREQ\
3.3V CS IIPWR\
IOWR2 27 2.5V IIPWR\
ISPMACH4128V WR SID
IORD2 3 SID
13 AGND
RD
+5V 26 INTR 16 GND VREF 14 DRAW N
C1 C2 C5 C8 HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS J.BARNES 05JAN04
ORIG/DES.ENG Communications & Power Industries
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 J.BARNES 05JAN04
Canada Inc.
14
U18A U18C U18D SEE SHEET 1

APPROVALS DATE
1 9 12 PROD. ENG TITLE
SCHEMATIC,
3 8 11 S.CARTWRIGHT 07JAN04
2 10 13
TDI BOARD
DES/MFG AUTH.
J.BARNES 07JAN04
74HC00 74HC00 74HC00 REFERENCE DESIGNATION NOT USED
7
CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DRAWING NO. REV

738947 GENERATOR
D 02845 738945 D
ORCAD FOR WINDOWS SEE SHEET 1 NEXT ASSY USED ON
W ednesday, August 07, 2002
APPLICATIONS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BACK
Loupe
Menu
Tool
Notes 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Power Input Board

REVISIONS
NOTES: ZONE LTR DESCRIPTION DWN CHKD APPROVED DATE
1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W 5% A CREATED PER ENG Emir Emir H.WANG 14MAY97
B INC. PER ECO No. 18074 Emir Emir PTS.BLAKE 09OCT98
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS C INC. PER ECO No. 18531 Emir Emir JIM CLARKE 04FEB99
D INC. PER ECO No. 18956 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 13AUG99
3. * REFER TO PARTS LIST. E INC. PER ECO No. 19068 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 26OCT99
4. FOR ASSY 732161-02, -03, K4A (CONTACTS) 9 & 11 JUMPERED. F INC. PER ECO No. 19119 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 17NOV99
5. FOR ASSEMBLY 732161-04, R10 AND R11 ARE 25 OHMS G INC. PER ECO No. 19213 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 05JAN00
(TWO 50 OHMS - 20 WATT RESISTOR IN PARALLEL)
H INC. PER ECO No. 19376 G.F. G.F. H.WANG 09MAR00
J INC. PER ECO No. 20996 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 25FEB02
K INC. PER ECO No. 21005 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 13MAY02
D L INC. PER ECO No. 21259 G.F. G.F. S.CARTWRIGHT 14JUN02 D
* M INC. PER ECO No. 21699 G.F. G.F. C. FRIAS 19DEC02

2
C16 N INC. PER ECO No. 22187 G.F. G.F. C. FRIAS 03SEP03
* * 0.01
E25 L2 E16 P INC. PER ECO No. 22279 G.F. G.F. C. FRIAS 03SEP03
500VAC
* R INC. PER ECO No. 22603 G.F. G.F. C. FRIAS 13JAN04
F5B * L1A K5A D1 * T INC. PER ECO No. 23164 M.D. G.F. C. FRIAS 27AUG04
* * R22 * * * A D
C29 C28 10M C25 C24 * L3 ~ + C17
0.047 D3
U INC. PER ECO No. 23551 G.F. C.W. C. FRIAS 11MAR05
400/480VAC 3PH F5A 0.5W E26 L1B K5B C10 VR1 C14 C15 C18 R5
B E
50/60 Hz *
* *
* ~ - 0.1 550VAC + 470 + 470 +
470
R30
10M 24K R7 U1C
F5C R21 * L1C K5C * 1000V 450V 450V 450V 1N4733
C F 2 3K3
10M C27 C26 R23 E24 L4
~ - .5W 10W
5
60A 0.5W 10M R4 0.5W
0.5W R2
600V 10M
2 + C19 U1
10M 4.7 4N35
* 0.5W
E28 * * * * * * * 0.5W R6 35V *
R13 C13 U1E
4
NEUTRAL C21 R14 * R9 * R25 R26 R10 R11 3K3 E23
C22 C20 C3 C6
10M 0.01 10M 47 47 47 47 0.22 C7 C8 0.5W
10M 0.01 0.01 0.22 + 470 + 470 + 470
E27 0.5W 500VAC 0.5W 0.5W 4.5W 4.5W 4.5W 4.5W 1250V * *
GND 500VAC 500VAC 450V 450V 450V R8 L10A
1250V DS1 E22
* 24K
J7 * * E30 1 C2 DCBUSS OK TO INVERTER MODULES
1 10W
230/ F3 0.22
6
*
1 1250V E8 E12
277VAC * K1A K1B * * L10B
* 5A SB R3 C11 C9
VR2 E29 R31
250V 0.01
8
E18 0.047 *
250V F2 10M 500VAC 10M * * E11
TO SYSTEM NEUT. 3
B 0.5W .5W R18 R19 R20
10A SB 1000 1000 330K
E19 E20 500V 4.5W 3W
* E15 2 2 4.5W
J8 F1
GND 5
A E9
1 10A SB * * *
230/ J9 * E14 E13 500V C12 C4 C5 R27 R28 R29 2
C 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 10M 10M 10M C
8
277VAC IRG4BH20K-L
4
K2A K2B 500VAC 500VAC 500VAC .5W .5W .5W
TO 12V TO GENERATOR 3 Q1 R24
6
SUPPLY CONTROL SWITCHED
2
NEUT. 3
OPTION 400/480 VAC * * 47.5
1
1
50/60 Hz R16 R17 D10 C30 U2
1000 1000 4N35
1N4744A 100pF
4.5W 4.5W
GND 5
2
J6
400/ 1 DS2
480 VAC
+12VDC OK
12V
3 R12
TO P/S AUXILIARY 240V * J5
TRANSFORMER E32 * 240 VAC 1K
* 1 R39
E31
16
F4 1K
120V 5 J4
K3A
2A S.B. 250V TO L.S.S. TUBE TELLBACK1 20 D7
50V 6 3 50 VAC DS3
1N4007
TUBE TELLBACK2 19 GRN
1
COM. 7 4 COMMON
GND 18
*
J10
11
11
COM. C23 TUBE SELECT 17

3 K4C K3C 0.1
SEE 12V
GND 16
TO NOTE 4 J3
13
9
13
9
FAN R15 +12VDC 15 1

120V 1 DS4 J2P2
47.5 R40 D4 12V 2
J11* +12VDC 14 1N4007 1
1K K5 3
B
6 GRN B
COM. MAIN CONTACTOR ON 13 2 4
*
VR3 5 TO L.S.S.
250V ROTOR RUN 12
6
120V 4 TO AUXILIARY
BOARD ROTOR BOOST 11 7
TO HT TANK
TUBE SELECT U1C 8
DCBUSSOK COLLECTOR 10
9
T1/ 2
ROTOR CURENT MONITOR 9 10
T2 12V
1 U1E R41
DCBUSSOK EMITTER 8
12V
16
1K
N/C 7 DS5 12V
E21 K4A GRN
TO GENERATOR KVENABLE 6 D6 R43
AUXILIARY E17 1N4007 K1C 1K
R37
1
TRANSFORMER FLUORO/FAN ON 5 D5
1
2K 1N4007
R36 10 DS7
AUX/SOFTSTART 4
499 GRN
5
-CUSTOMER DRIVE 3 U3
R32
82 4N36
+CUSTOMER DRIVE 2 3W
Q2
4
AUX/SOFTSTART 1 MJE181
R42
1K R38
D8 1 DS6 1K
1N4007 10 GRN
K2C
A
HIGHEST REFERENCE DRAWN A
DESIGNATIONS Emir 31MAR97

CHECKED
C30,DS7,D10,E32,F5,J11,K5, Emir 14MAY97
L10,P2,Q2,R43,U3,VR3 APPROVAL DATE
TITLE
ENGINEER
G.SANWALD 14MAY97
SCHEMATIC
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
DES/MFG AUTH. POWER INPUT BOARD
NOT USED H.WANG 14MAY97
Size CAGE Code DW G NO Rev
C1,D2,D9,E1-E7,E10,J1-J2, CONTRACT No.
L5-L9,P1,R1, R33 - R35 732161 100KHZ P/S
D 02845 732159 U
NEXT ASSY USED ON
Wednesday, March 16, 2005 Scale Sheet
NTS DWG LEVEL 3 1 of 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Loupe
Menu
Notes
Tool
1 2 3
CPU Board 4 5 6 7
REVISIONS
8

1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W, 1% +5V C43 VBAT +5V A CREATED PER ENG. G.F. G.F. J.BARNES 10NOV98
C47
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. U25 B INC. PER ECO No.18888 G.F. G.F. J.BARNES 22JUN99
20 0.1 U26
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS 74HC573 32 0.1 C INC. PER ECO No.19053 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 18OCT99
128K_RAM
D0 2 VCC 19 A0 D INC. PER ECO No.19557 G.F. G.F. J.PENNOCK 12MAY00
*
3. COMPONENTS MARKED NOT FITTED. D1 Q1 VCC G.F.
D1 3 18 A1 S A16 2 E INC. PER ECO No.19898 G.F. S.CARTWRIGHT
CS2 30
15NOV00
D2 Q2 A16 30 MAR01
D2 4 17 A2 S A15 31 F INC. PER ECO No.20292 G.F. G.F. J.PENNOCK
D3 Q3 A15 G INC. PER ECO No.20292 G.F. G.F. 01EPT04
D3 5 16 A3 S A14 3 S.CARTWRIGHT
D4 Q4 A14 H INC. PER ECO No.23788 G.F. S.B. C.WINTERS 25MAY05
VBAT D4 6 15 A4 S A13 28
PW B ASSY C29 D5 Q5 A13
COMPONENTS NOT FITTED +5V +5V +5V D5 7 14 A5 S A12 4
DASHES D6 Q6 A12
U21 +5V D6 8 13 A6 S A11 25 21 D7
D7 Q7 A11 D7
A
00 AREA 1
DS1302 8 0.1 D7 9 D8 Q8 12 A7 S A10 23 A10 D6 20 D6 A
01 AREA 2 S A9 D5
R40 R41 R99 26 A9 D5 19
02 AREA 1 2 X1 VCC A LE 11 C
4.75K 4.75K 4.75K C67 C42 C52 C46 U28 S A8 27 18 D4
03 AREA 2 1 OC A8 D4
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 A7 5 17 D3
CLK 7
RTCCLK 1 23 42 64 80C188EB GND A7 D3
A6 6 15 D2
Y1 10 A6 D2
RTCIO VCC VCC VCC VCC A5 D1
I/O 6 C36
ADDRESS 7 A5 D1 14
32.768kHz LATCH +5V C61 A4 8 13 D0
RTCRST\ D0 A4 D0
TEST RST 5 41 CLKIN AD0 61
U36 A3 9
FUNCTION SHEET 66 D1 A3
POINT 3 X2 33pF AD1 74HC573 20 0.1 A2 10
GND 68 D2 A2
TP1 Large Fil. Ref. 5 Y3 AD2 A1 11
70 D3 A 16 2 D1 VCC Q1 19 S A16 A1
TP2 KvP Ref. 5 4 AD3 A0 12
72 D4 A 17 3 D2 S A17 A0
TP3 Small Fil. Ref.. 5
24.576MHz AD4 Q2 18
74 D5 A 18 4 D3 S A18
Q3 17
*
TP4 AEC Ref. Out 5 C41 AD5 BRD\ 24 OE
76 D6 A 19 5 D4 S A19
TP5 1 Hz 1 40 OSCOUT AD6 Q4 16 RAM\ 22 CE R2
78 D7 6 D5
AD7 Q5 15 BWR\ 29 WE
*
TP6 KvP - 4 R20 R22 7 D6 +5V
Q6 14
*
22pF
TP7 mA Rad. - 4
8 D7 GND 1K
Q7 13
*
VBAT 39 PEREQ 62 S A8 J14
TP8 KvP + 4 3.01M +5V 4.75K A8 9 D8 R1
Q8 12 16
*
C2 L1 67 S A9 RAM 1
*
TP9 AEC Ramp - 4 C3
+
+ A9 C57 1K
S A10 A LE
*
TP10 mA Rad + 4 U4 B1 C1 A10 69 11 C +5V R3 2
0.1 3 8.2uH 71 S A11 1 OC U33
TP11 I Fluoro - 4 MAX691 0.1 BATTERY 2200 C37 A11 32
14 TEST/BUSY 73 S A12 GND 512K_FLASH 0.1 3
TP12 AEC Ramp + 4 +5V VCC 330pF A12 392
2 VOUT S A13 VCC -12V
TP13 ABC In + 4 BATT 1 A13 75 10 MA18 1 4
TP14 I Fluoro + 4 77 S A14 ADDRESS A18
5 BATT WDI\ A14 MA17 BWR\ BWR\
TP15 ABC In - 4
R104 WDI 11 79 S A15 LATCH +5V C56
30 A17 WE 31 5
10K +5V A15 S A16 2
TP16 +5V DC 6 13 LCS\ U32 A16 BRD\
RESET\ 15 CE IN S A15 3 6
B
TP17 +15V DC 6 RESET 12 RAM\ 80 A 16 GAL16V8 20 0.1 A15 B
RESET 16 CE OUT 18 READY A16 S A14 29 TEST\
TP18 -15V DC 6 RESET 81 A 17 A14 7
R105 6 A17 RD\ 1 I/C VCC I/O 19 BRD\ S A13 28
TP19 +12V DC 6 LOW LINE 82 A 18 A13 A0
+5V 14 A18 WR\ 2 I BWR\ S A12 D7 8
TP20 -12V DC 6 10K WDO 83 A 19 I/O 18 4 A12 D7 21
7 ONCEA19 UCS\ 3 I FLASH\ S A11 D6
TP21 GND 5 OSC IN I/O 17 25 A11 D6 20 9
BATLEV 10 PFO 8 S A19 4 I EPROM\ S A10 D5
OSC SEL I/O 16 23 A10 D5 19
RESET\
TP22 LF F/B 4
9 PFI 13 HOLD S0 10 S A18 5 I S A9 D4 10
I/O 15 26 A9 D4 18
TP23 LF F/B 4 S1 9 S A17 6 I MA18 S A8 D3 D0
I/O 14 27 A8 D3 17 11
TP24 SF F/B 4 S2 8 S A16 7 I MA17 A7 D2
TP25 SF F/B 4
R21 GND I/O 13 5 A7 D2 15
D1
8 I RDWR A6 D1 12
3.32M I/O 12 6 A6 D1 14
TP26 HV ON 4 4 RESET\ 37 RESIN DT/R 16 9 I A5 D0 D2
TP27 CLKOUT 1 G/I 11 7 A5 D0 13 13
A4 8
A LE A4 D3
ALE 6 JW2
GND A3 9 14
+5V A3
10 A2 10 D4
RD\ 1 A2 15
SYNCIN 31 BD 4 R66 A1 11
INT0 WR\ 2 A1 D5
INT1 32 WR 5 4.75K +5V C68 A0 12 16
+5V INT1 3 A0
SHEET TEST POINT NUMBER ADCINT 33 U39 D6
INT2/INTA0 11 17
1 TP5, TP27 PTSTOP 34 DEN 74HC138 16 0.1
INT3/INTA1 12 BRD\ 24 OE D7
35 HLDA 18
2 INT4
CLKOUT 44 TP27 S A8 1
A VCC Y0 15 IOWR1 FLASH\ 22
CE
3 R47 15 S A9 2 IOWR2 19
4 TP6-TP15, TP22-TP26 R82 R92 4.75K LOCK B Y1 14 GND
38 S A10 3 PSWR
5 TP1-TP4, TP21 1K 10K RESOUT C Y2 13 20
DAC1WR
6 TP16-TP20 EXPSW\ +5V Y3 12 16
+5V FLASH TEST
UCS\ DAC2WR
7 UCS 30 Y4 11
LCS\ DACLD AC
1
17 NMI LCS 29 6 G1 Y5 10
SHEET IC NUMBER U46 BWR\ 4 MUX C71 RN13
U4, 21, 25, 26, 28, 29, 32, 33, 36, 4N35 G2A Y6 9 U41 4.7K
28 IO\ IO\ 5 G2B WDI\
1 R68 Y7 7
C C
39, 40,41, 43, 46 P1.0/GCS0 27C040 32 1 0.1
27 TEST\
2
2 U50 0 P1.1/GCS1 GND

26 UART +5V VCC VPP
3 U1, 2, 11, 12, 20, 31, 38, 42 P1.2/GCS2 8 MA18 31 +5V
EXPSW +5V 25 UART2 A18
4 U15, 23, 30, 34, 37, 44, 47, 48, 49 P1.3/GCS3 I/O WRITE MA17 30 C70
5 U13, 14, 18, 22 24 RTCCLK A17
D[0..7] 46 T0IN P1.4/GCS4 DS16 +5V C76 S A16 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6 U45, 51 21 RTS0 A16 0.1
P1.5/GCS5 YEL U43 S A15 3
U3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 16, 17, 19, 24, A[0..7] 48 T1IN 20 ADC A15 U40
7 P1.6/GCS6 74HC138 16 0.1 S A14 29
27, 35
R65 A14 74HC245 20
IOWR1 TXD0 S A13
IOWR1 TXD0 P1.7/GCS7 19 S A8 1 VCC Y0 15 IORD1
28 A13 SW1
IOWR2 IOWR2 RXD0 RXD0 475 A S A12 4 VCC
S A9 2 IORD2 A12 D0
PSWR PSWR CTS0 CTS0 TP5 B Y1 14 S A11 25 21 D7
18 B1 A1 2 1 16
S A10 3 P SRD A11 D7 D1
DAC1WR DAC1WR RTS0 RTS0 T0OUT 45 C Y2 13 S A10 23 20 D6
17 B2 A2 3 2 15
ADCSYNC A10 D6 D2
DAC2WR DAC2WR T1OUT 47 +5V Y3 12 S A9 26 19 D5
16 B3 A3 4 3 14
IDENT A9 D5 D3
DACLD AC DACLDAC TXD1 TXD1 Y4 11 S A8 27 18 D4
15 B4 A4 5 4 13
53 RXD0 6 G1 A8 D4 D4
MUX MUX RXD1 RXD1 RXDO Y5 10 A7 5 17 D3
14 B5 A5 6 5 12
7 BHE/RFSH 52 TXD0 BRD\ 4 ADC2 A7 D3 D5
IORD1 IORD1 TXDO G2A Y6 9 A6 6 15 D2
13 B6 A6 7 6 11
51 CTS0 IO\ 5 G2B KEY A6 D2 D6
IORD2 IORD2 +5V CTS0 Y7 7 A5 7 14 D1
12 B7 A7 8 7 10
54 GND A5 D1 D7 11 9 8 9
P SRD PSRD P2.5/BCLK0 A4 8 13 D0 B8 A8
60 NCS A4 D0 SW8DIP
ADCSYNC A3 9
ADCSYNC 57 RXD1 I/O READ 8 A3 G 19
ADCINT P2.0/RXD1 A2 10
ADCINT R70 58 TXD1 A2 DIR 1
*
ADC P2.1/TXD1 A1 11 PRODUCT
ADC 4.75K 56 +5V C49 A1 GND
ADC2 3 ERROR P2.4/CTS1 A0 12 IDENT
ADC2 59 EXPSW\ U29 A0 10 JUMPERS
UART UART P2.2/BCLK1 GAL16V8 20 0.1
P2.3/SINT1 55
UART2 UART2 BRD\ 24 OE
A0 1 I/C VCC 19 D0
A LE ALE I/O EPROM\ 22 IDENT
RTCIO A1 D1 CE
RESET RESET 36 PDTMR P2.6 50 2 I I/O 18
GND
RTCRST\ A2 D2
P2.7 49 3 I 17
D D
RESET\ RESET\ I/O
A3 4 I 16 D3 16
INT1 INT1 I/O EPROM
5 I 15 D4
SYNCIN SYNCIN VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS I/O
6 I 14 D5
BWR\ BWR\ I/O
2 22 43 63 65 84 7 I 13 D6 DRAW N
BRD\ I/O HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS GUI FONE 10NOV98
BRD\ 8 I 12 D7 Communications & Power Industries
BATLEV BATLEV I/O B1, C113, DS48, D10, E4,
ORIG/DES.ENG J.BARNES 10NOV98
Canada Inc.
9 I 11 KEY
RD\ RD\ G/I JW5, J16, L1, Q6, RN20, R103, APPROVALS DATE
SW1, TP27, U54, Y3 ENGINEER TITLE
WR\ WR\ GND
S.CARTWRIGHT 10NOV98
SCHEMATIC,
PTSTOP MICRO DES/MFG AUTH.
PTSTOP 10 J.BARNES 10NOV98 GENERATOR CPU BOARD
REFERENCE DESIGNATION NOT USED
KEY 734573 MILLENIA
CONTRACT No.
SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO. Rev
J4, J5, J8, J9, J12, Q5 D 02845
734571 H
COMPUTER GENERATED NEXT ASSY USED ON Thursday, April 11, 1996
SCALE DWG LEVEL 3 1 OF 7
APPLICATIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NEXT
Loupe
Menu
Tool
Notes 1 2 3 4
CPU Board
REVISIONS

FOR REVISION SEE SHEET 1 G.F. G.F. J.BARNES 10NOV98
A A
+5V +5V +5V +5V
DS45 DS47 DS48 DS46

RTS0 RTS0
TXD0 YEL YEL YEL YEL
TXD0
RXD0 RXD0
1
CTS0 CTS0 RN16D RN16C RN16B RN16A
1K 1K 1K 1K
TXD1
2
TXD1
RXD1 RXD1
B B
+5V +12V
C100 C101
0.1 0.1
16 1 J16
U50
V CC V DD 1
MAX1406
3
RN18B 7
TXD0 14 TX 3 4 3 2
RN18C 8
RTS0 12 TX 5 100 6 5
RN18D 6
RXD0 15 RX 2 8 7 100 4
RN18A 9
CTS0 13 RX 4 100 2 1 5
TXD1 10 TX 7 100 M1
C90 C92 C89 C91 R94 M2
RXD1 11 RX 6 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF TBA
GND VSS
9 8 C99
-12V
0.1 J15
-12V RN17D
7 8 1
RN17B 3
C 100 4 3 7 C
RN17C 2
6 5 100 8
100 6
RN17A
1 2 4
C88 C87 9
100pF 100pF 100 5
M1
M2
D D
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS DRAW N GUI FONE 10NOV98

Canada Inc.
APPROVALS DATE
SEE SHEET 1 ENGINEER TITLE SCHEMATIC,
DES/MFG AUTH.
J.BARNES 10NOV98
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTRACT No.
734573 MILLENIA SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO. Rev
COMPUTER GENERATED SEE SHEET 1 NEXT ASSY USED ON D 02845 734571 H

Monday, November 02, 1998 SCALE DWG LEVEL 3 OF
APPLICATIONS 2 7
1 2 3 4
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Notes
Tool
1 2 3
CPU Board
4 5 6 7
REVISIONS
8
Menu

D[0..7]
+5V
A[0..7]
U2 UART
8 UART
SN75176A UART2 UART2
VCC RD\ RD\
3 DE A 6 J7-10 WR\ WR\
4 D
RESET RESET
1 R
INT1 INT1
A B 7 J7-11 A
2 RE
RS422 O/P +5V +5V +12V
GND
C66 C65
5
+5V DS43
0.1 0.1
YEL 16 1
DS44 U42 V CC V DD
YEL R98 MAX1406 J1
1K
RN12E 1
+5V 14 TX 3 12 5
R93 3
RN12F
U1 1K 12 TX 5 100 11 6 7
+5V +5V +5V SN75176A 8 RN12G 2
15 RX 2 10 7 100
VCC 8 AUX.
3 DE RN12H
A 6 J7-12 13 RX 4 100 9 8 6 SERIAL
*
DS1 DS3 4 D 4 PORT
U20 1 R R16 10 TX 7 100
44 33 YEL YEL JW4 9
PC16552 100 +5V
B 7 3 11 RX 6 C79 C80 C81 C82
R72 5
VCC VCC 2 RE 2 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF M1
D7 9 R18 GND VSS 1K
D7 R15 GND U31
D6 8 1K 1 M2
D6 1K J7-13 PC16552 44 33 9 8
D5 7 D5 TXBDY1 1 5 C64 -12V
D4 6 VCC VCC
D4 TXBDY2 32 RS422 I/P D7 9
D3 5 AREA 1 D7 0.1
D3 D6 8 -12V
D2 4 D6
D2 D5 7
D1 3 D5 TXBDY1 1
D1 SOUT1 38 D4 6
B D0 2 D4 TXBDY2 32 B
D0 D3
RTS1 36 5 D3
D2 4
A3 16 D2
CHSL SIN1 39 D1 3
A2 15 +5V +12V D1 SOUT1 38
A2 D0
A1 14 CTS1 40 C24 C23 2 D0
A1 RTS1 36
A0 10 A0 DCD1 42 A3 16
0.1 0.1 CHSL SIN1 39
UART 18 A2
CS DIR1 37 15 A2
RD\ 24 A1 14 CTS1 40
RD A1
WR\ 20 RT1 43 16 1
A0 10
WR U12 V CC V DD A0 DCD1 42
RESET 21 MR DSR1 41 UART2 18
C40
MAX1406 CS DIR1 37
RD\ 24
11 XIN 26 RD
SOUT2 TX
RN3A
TXD TO WR\ 20 RT1 43
23 14 3 1 16 J7-6 WR
RTS2 RESET 21
22pF
Y2 25 TX 100 2
RN3B CONSOLE MR DSR1 41
R103 SIN2 12 5 15 J7-17
18.432MHz CTS2 28 RN3C
3.32M RX XOUT 11 XIN 26
C35 DCD2 30 15 2 3 14 100 J7-7 SOUT2
RN3D RTS2 23
13 XOUT DIR2 27 RX 100 4
13 4 13 J7-18 SIN2 25
31
*
22pF RI2 TX 100 28
XOUT 29 10 7 CTS2
D4 DSR2 C11 C12 C13 C14 R19 30
INT1 34 INTR1 RX DCD2
11 6 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF 13 XOUT DIR2 27
1N4148
D5 MF2 19 GND VSS RI2 31
17 INTR2 MF1 35 DSR2 29
9 8 C22 -12V D7
1N4148 34 INTR1
GND GND
INT1 1N4148
C
12 22 AREA 2 -12V
0.1
D6 MF2 19 C
INT1 17 INTR2 MF1 35
1N4148
R51 +5V GND GND
4.75K +12V 12 22
+5V
DS15
YEL
C21
+5V +12V
C20
JW1
1
* +5V
C75
+5V +12V
C74
FLUORO
2 DS29
0.1 0.1 +5V 0.1 0.1
DS19 16 1 3 16 1
R43 YEL
YEL 1K U11 V CC V DD U38 V CC V DD
DS32
MAX1406 J11 R69 MAX1406
J2
YEL 1K
R46 RN3E 1 RN12A
14 TX 3 5 12 14 TX 3 16 1 1
1K 3
RN3F R71 RN12B 3
12 TX 5 100 6 11 7 12 TX 5 100 15 2
1K 7
RN3G 2 RN12C
15 RX 2 7 10 100 TO REMOTE 15 RX 2 14 3 100 2
RN3H 8 FLUORO RN12D AUX.
RX 100 RX 100 13 8
13 4 8 9 6 CONTROLLER 13 4 4 SERIAL
6
TX 100 4 TX 100 PORT
10 7 10 7 4
9
RX C7 C8 C9 C10 RX C83 C84 C85 C86 R73 9
11 6 5 11 6
100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF 100pF 1K 5
GND VSS M1 GND VSS M1
M2
9 8 9 8 M2
C19 C73 -12V
D D
0.1 0.1
-12V
-12V
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS DRAW N GUI FONE 10NOV98

ORIG/DES.ENG Communications & Power Industries
J.BARNES 10NOV98
Canada Inc.
APPROVALS DATE
SEE SHEET 1 ENGINEER
TITLE SCHEMATIC,
DES/MFG AUTH.
J.BARNES 10NOV98
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTRACT No.
734573 MILLENIA SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO Rev

APPLICATIONS Tuesday, November 03, 1998 DWG LEVEL 3
3 OF 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Notes
Tool
1 2 3
CPU Board
4 5 6 7 8
Menu
+5V REVISIONS
+15V RN10B TP26
C18 3 4 ZONE LTR DESCRIPTION DWN CHKD APPROVED DATE
10K R49
0.1
10 + R53 R48 1K
U15A RN10A 8
RN2B LM324 J10-7 1 2 9 - J7-20 HV ON
4
R35 kVp REF U30C 30.1K 200K RN10D
3
3 4 3 + TP8 10K 12 +
J10-12 1 R26 LM324 14 7 8 2
10K 2 - U15B 13 - U30D Q6
4
4.75K 1K 10K D[0..7]
1
RN4B LM324 LM324 MPS8099
11
C17 5 + RN10C R37 MUX
20K 7 5 6
C6 6 - ADCSYNC
3
kVp C28 kVp
0.047 0.1 R31 10K 392K ADCINT
0.1 -15V
4.02K U34 ADC2
-15V
A
RN2A RN4A R36 +15V 78L05 ADC A
1 2 2 1 TP6
J10-31 BRD\
10K 20K 4.75K BWR\
*
3 IN OUT 1
R29 U37 C107
GND
STBY 44
VDD 13
+ AD7891AS 0.1
MODE 6
VDD 4
U15C U15D 2 C59 C58
1K C62
RN2C LM324 R34 LM324 0.1 10
5 6 10 + R38 12 + 0.1 20 D0
J10-11 8 TP10 14 D0
10K 9 - 1k 13 - 19 D1
D1
6
4.75K 18 D2
RN1C D2
C5 43 VIN1A 17 D3
mA RAD 20K C34 RAD C4 D3
0.047 R23 42 VIN1B 16 D4
5
0.1 mA 0.047 D4
RN2D RN1D R39 F/B 4.32k 15 D5
7 8 8 7 TP7 41 VIN2A D5
J10-30 12 D6
10K 20K 4.75K 40 VIN2B D6
11 D7
D7
39 VIN3A D8 10
38 VIN3B D9 9
D10 8
37 VIN4A
D11 7
U23C 36 VIN4B
LM324 35 VIN5A
10 + R42 BRD\
J7-4 8 TP12 34 VIN5B RD 22
9 -
BWR\
4
RN5B
4.75K 33 VIN6A WR 21
10K C38 AEC 32 VIN6B 6
RAMP 5
3
B 0.1 31 VIN7A B
R44 4
TP9 30 VIN7B CS 23 3 RN20
AEC RAMP 4.75K 29 VIN8A 4.7K
INPUT CONVST 24 2
+15V 28 VIN8B 1
C53 NC 25
3 REF I/O
EOC 26
0.1 2 NC
U30A R59 1 REF GND
14 DGND
27 AGND
5 AGND
RN9A LM324 1K
4
1 2 3 + R64 C108 +5V

J10-13 1 TP22
2 - 0.1
10K U44
2
4.75K
RN8A 74HC574 20
11
C54 R60
20K
C51 C55 4.02K +15V VCC
1
I FIL #1 L.F. F/B 2 19 D7

0.047 0.1 0.1 D1 Q0
-15V 3 18 D6
D2 Q1
RN9B RN8B R67 4 17 D5
TP23 C95 D3 Q2
3 4 4 3 5 16 D4
J10-32 0.1 U48 D4 Q3
10K 20K 4.75K 6 15 D3
MUX08 13 D5 Q4
U23B 7 14 D2
D6 Q5
+12V +15V VDD LM324 8 13 D1
U30B D7 Q6
D0
RN9C LM324 IN/OUT 8 5 +
7
9 D8 Q7 12
R57 4 I/O 0 6 -
5 6 5 + TP24
7
J3-3 7 5 I/O 1 +5V 11 CLK
10K 6 - R63 RN15A RN15C RN15E RN15G
6
4.75K 6 I/O 2 1 OC
RN8C 1K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 7
C50 C48 EN 2 GND
C C
I/O 3
16
14
12
10
I FIL #2 20K S.F. F/B 12
0.047 0.1 I/O 4 10
5
RN9D RN8D R61 11 I/O 5 A 1 DATA LATCH

7 8 8 7 TP25 10
J3-11 R62 I/O 6 B 16
10K 20K 4.75K 4.02K 9 I/O 7 C 15 ADC2
15
13
11
ADC
9
+15V VEE GND
C33 RN15B RN15D RN15F RN15H ADC
3 14 ADCSYNC
4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K
8
0.1 ADCINT
U23A R79
C96 +5V
RN5D LM324 681
4
7 8 3 + R45 0.1
J3-1 1 TP14 -12V -15V MUX U49
10K 2 - R88 -15V 20 74HC574
8
4.75K
RN4D POWER SUPPLY SENSE +15V VCC
11
C32 19 2 D7
20K 1K Q0 D1
C27 C39 FLUORO C93 C94 18 3 D6
7
I FLUORO Q1 D2
0.047 0.1 0.1 mA F/B 17 4 D5
-15V 0.1 U47 0.1 Q2 D3
R87 16 5 D4
LF398 4 1 Q3 D4
RN5C RN4C R50 4.32K R83 HIGH\/LOW HIGH\/LOW 15 6 D3
TP11 -15V Q4 D5
5 6 6 5 V- V+ 24.3K 14 7 D2
J3-9 Q5 D6
10K 20K 4.75K 13 8 D1
5 O/P Q6 D7
LOG 8 12 9 D0
R84 Q7 D8
5.1K MUX
U23D CLK 11
LM324 3 I/P REF 7 OC 1
12 + R56 R58
D
J7-3 14 TP13 GND D
13 - CH
2
3.3K 4.75K 10
RN5A 6 MUX LATCH
AUX. ABC C45
10K ABC
INPUT 0.1
1
R95 HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS DRAW N GUI FONE 10NOV98

R52 R54
TP15 15K ORIG/DES.ENG J.BARNES 10NOV98
Canada Inc.
4
APPROVALS DATE
10K 4.75K SEE SHEET 1 TITLE
C102 RN1A RN1B ENGINEER
S.CARTWRIGHT 10NOV98 SCHEMATIC,
D2 D3 0.01 20K 20K DES/MFG AUTH.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J.BARNES 10NOV98
3
CONTRACT No.
10V 10V D 02845 734571 H
COMPUTER GENERATED SEE SHEET 1 NEXT ASSY USED ON
DWG LEVEL 3
APPLICATIONS Thursday, November 05, 1998 4 OF 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Tool Menu
Notes 1 2 3
CPU Board
4 5 6
ZONE
7
LTR DESCRIPTION
REVISIONS
DWN CHKD
8
APPROVED DATE
+15V
TP1
C31
R17
U22
R11 0.1
VDD 21
10K U14B AD7237
10K
LM324 +15V
J10 R24 6 15 D0
7
-
D0 C110
19 FIL REF #1 J10-9 5 22 VOUTA 14 D1
J10-19
+
A
3.3K D1 U52 A
37 13 D2 0.1
D2 MX7837
D3
VDD 6
18 TP2 5 VOUTB D3 11
36 10 D4
+15V D4 D0 24
17 J10-17 C16 9 D5 D0
D5 D1 23
35 J10-35 R25 8 D6 D1 VOUTA 4
D6 D2 22
16 J10-16 10K 0.1 U14A 7 D7 D2 R102
D7 D3 21
LM324 D3 VOUTB 9
4
34 4 ROFSB
D4
15 1 + 3 20 D4 30K
J10-15 kVp REF J10-7 DACLD AC D5 U54
33 - 2 24 ROFSA LDAC 20 19 D5
D6 18 TL431
14 D6
11
J10-14 C15 3 REFINB DAC2WR D7 R55 R101
32 J10-32 CS 18 17 D7 3 REF K 1
1 REFINA WR\
13 J10-13 0.1 WR 19 ROFSB 12 1K 10K
A
31 DACLD AC 14 -15V
J10-31 -15V 2 REFOUT A1 LDAC ROFSA 2
12 J10-12 A0 16 2
A0
30 A1 17 DAC2WR 1 CS REFINB 10
12 DGND
6 AGND
J10-30
WR\
23 VSS
11 J10-11 13 WR REFINA 3
TO J1 29
POWER J10-29
10 A1 16 A0
SUPPLY J10-10 C30 AGND 8
28 A0 15 A1
11 DGND
5 AGND
9 J10-9 0.1
7 VSS
27 J10-27 -15V
8 J10-8 TP4
26 C111
+15V
7 C26
J10-7
25 0.1
J10-25 U18
B
6 R30 0.1 -15V B
VDD 21
J10-6 U14C AD7237
24 10K
J10-24 LM324
5 J10-5 9 15 D0
+15V
-
AEC REF OUT J7-1 8 D0
23 J10-23
+ 10 22 VOUTA 14 D1
D1 C112
4 J10-4 13 D2
D2 U53
22 J10-22 5 VOUTB 11 D3
D3 MX7837 0.1
D4
VDD 6
3 J10-3 D4 10
21 TP3 9 D5
D5 D0 24
2 J10-2 8 D6 D0
D6 D1 23
20 J10-20
R10 7 D7 D1 VOUTA 4
D7 D2 22
1 J10-1 R5 4 ROFSB D2
D3 21
M1 10K
10K U14D D3 VOUTB 9
LM324 24 ROFSA LDAC 20 DACLD AC D4 20
M2 D4
R7 - 13 D5 19
FIL REF #2 J3-2 14 D5
12 3 REFINB DAC1WR D6
CS 18 18
+
3.3K D6
1 REFINA WR\ D7
TP21 WR 19 17 D7
ROFSB 12
2 REFOUT A1
A0 16 DACLD AC 14
A0 LDAC ROFSA 2
A1 17
12 DGND
6 AGND
J3
DAC1WR 1
23 VSS
8 CS REFINB 10
15 WR\ 13 WR REFINA 3
7 J3-7 C25
14 A1 16 A0 AGND 8
6 J3-6 0.1 A0 15 A1
11 DGND
5 AGND
13 J3-13 -15V
7 VSS
C
TO J2 5 RESET\
C
J3-5
POWER 12 +5V
SUPPLY C113
4 U13A
11
VCC 14
J3-11 74HC74
PR 4
3 0.1
J3-3 -15V
10
5 Q D 2
2 J3-2
9 J3-9 CLK 3
1 J3-1 6 Q
7 GND
R8 R6
1 CL
M1
M2 10K 10K
3
3
2 2
DACLD AC
1
Q2 Q3
R12 R4
MPS8099 MPS8099 U13B
10K 10K DACLD AC
PR 10
74HC74 DACLDAC
DAC1WR DAC1WR
DAC2WR DAC2WR
9 Q D 12 WR\ WR\
CLK 11 RESET\ RESET\
8 Q
A[0..7]
13 CL
D[0..7]
+5V
PSWR
D E3 E4 E1 E2 D
GND PSOUTEN
1
2
1
2
1
2
C44
0.1 GND DRAW N
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS GUI FONE 10NOV98
Canada Inc.
APPROVALS DATE
SEE SHEET 1 TITLE
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
J.BARNES 10NOV98
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTRACT No.

Friday, November 06, 1998 DWG LEVEL 3
APPLICATIONS SCALE 5 OF 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Tool Menu
Notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CPU Board
REVISIONS

A J6 RN14H A
J7 9 8 D0
1
1 J7-1 RN14G
100 10 7 D1
2
2 RN14F
11 6 100 D2
3 RN14E
3 J7-3 100 12 5 D3
4
4 J7-4 RN14D
13 4 100 D4
5
5 RN14C
100 14 3 D5
6
6 J7-6 RN14B
15 2 100 D6
+5V 7
7 J7-7 RN14A
100 16 1 D7
8 +12V
8 100
9
9
5
TO J12 GENERATOR IOWR1
3
TO J11 GENERATOR RN19D RN19C INTERFACE PWB 10
10 J7-10 RN19B
INTERFACE PWB 1K 1K IOWR2
11 1K
6
11 J7-11 +12V
4
+5V IORD1
12
12 J7-12
*
IORD2
DS40 13
13 J7-13 R96 DS42 DS41
YEL 14
14
14 1K R91 VLED
R97 1 U45B A LE GRN RED
3 4 JW3 15
15 2 6 100
1K U45A 5 1
16
5
16 SYNCIN 2
7
U51 74HC00 74HC00
3 17 EXPSW
B
17 J7-17 4N35 B
LINESYNC
18
4
18 J7-18
PTSTOP\ 19
19 U45C RESET\
9 20
20 J7-20 R100 8
10 PTSTOP
475 IOWR1
74HC00 IOWR1
C109
0.01 IOWR2 IOWR2
TP16 IODR1 IORD1
IODR2 IORD2
+5V +15V +12V +5V A LE
R75 ALE
10K LINESYNC LINESYNC
R78 R86 R76
3.3K 2.2K 1K RESET\ RESET\
VLED
+
R74
TP17 C69 C72
10K D[0..7]
0.1 220 DS36 DS38 DS33
J13
GRN GRN GRN
1 R77
+15V
10K
2 TP18
+ D10
3 C63 1N4007
C
+ R80 10 C
4 DS37 DS39
C78 C77 10K
D9 GRN GRN
0.1 220
1N4007
TP19
5
TO J3 GENERATOR R81 R90
C98 D8
INTERFACE PWB C97
+
-15V R85 3.3K 2.2K
1N4007
220 10K +12V
0.1 TP20
-15V -12V
6
+
7 R89
C104 C103 POWER SUPPLY LEDS
10K
0.1 220
8
9 C106
C105 -12V
+
0.1 220
D D
U45D DRAW N
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS GUI FONE 10NOV98
12 Communications & Power Industries
11 ORIG/DES.ENG J.BARNES 10NOV98
13 Canada Inc.
APPROVALS DATE
SEE SHEET 1 TITLE
74HC00 ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
J.BARNES 10NOV98
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTRACT No.

Friday, November 06, 1998 DWG LEVEL 3
APPLICATIONS SCALE 6 OF 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Notes
Tool
1 2
CPU Board 3 4
REVISIONS
Menu
+5V
1
RN11A RN11B RN11C RN11D RN7G RN7H RN11H RN11E RN11I
1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K
10
DS34 DS35 DS30 DS31 DS27 DS28 DS26 DS8 D S7 DS5 DS6 DS25 DS24 DS22 DS23
RED RED RED YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL +5V
+5V GRN GRN GRN YEL YEL YEL YEL
U16 U27
U19 20
A
UDN2981A P/S ON KV EN. PREP X-RAY HS/LS T2/T1 SMALL LARGE FLUORO 74HC574 A
VCC 20
74HC540
VLED VCC
18 1 18 2 19 2 D0
Y0 A0 Q0 D1
J10-14 17 2 17 3 18 3 D1
Y1 A1 Q1 D2
J10-15 16 3 16 4 17 4 D6
Y2 A2 Q2 D3
J10-16 15 4 15 5 16 5 D5
Y3 A3 Q3 D4
J10-2 14 5 14 6 15 6 D4
Y4 A4 Q4 D5
J10-17 13 6 13 7 14 7 D3
Y5 A5 Q5 D6
J10-19 12 7 12 8 13 8 D2
Y6 A6 Q6 D7
J3-6 11 8 11 9 12 9 D7
Y7 A7 Q7 D8
+5V
10 9 OE1 1 CLK 11 PSWR
10 GND
JW5 OE2 19 OC 1
FOCUS 1 GND
2 10
FLUORO SELECT 3
PSOUTEN
+15V
R32
100 +5V
R27
J10-10
100
1
B
D1 B
RN7B RN7A RN6A RN7D RN6B RN7C RN6C RN7E RN6D RN7F RN6E
1N4007
1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K
6
J10-29
1
U17
4N35
DS20 DS21 DS17 DS18 DS13 DS14 DS11 DS12 DS9 DS10
2
3 GRN RED GRN RED GRN RED GRN RED GRN RED +5V
2
R33
Q4
1
1K U24
MPS8099
VCC 20
ROTOR P/S READY FILAMENT HV 74HC540
-15V
VLED CONTACTOR ROTOR FAULT 2 18 D0
J10-1 A0 Y0
NOT READY D1
1
3 A1 Y1 17
U5 FIL FAULT 4 16 D6
4N35 HV FAULT A2 Y2
5 15 D5
CONTACTOR OFF A3 Y3
6 14 D4
2
J10-20 LARGE FIL A4 Y4

7 13 D3
A5 Y5
J10-3 8 12 D2
A6 Y6
9 11 D7
A7 Y7
1
+5V
U6
4N35 U35 1 OE1
10 GND
74HC138 19 OE2
16
2
J10-22 D[0..7]
J10-4 1 A VCC 15
Y0
1
2 B Y1 14
C
U7 3 C 13
C
4N35 Y2
+5V Y3 12 PSRD
11
2
J10-23 Y4
6 G1 Y5 10 LINESYNC
J10-5 4 G2A Y6 9
C60 BATLEV
1
5 G2B Y7 7
U8 0.1
GND
4N35
8
2
J10-24 +5V +5V +5V

J10-6
1
U9 R14 R9
4N35 4.75K 1K
1
2
2
J10-25 Q1
3
MPS8599 DS2 D S4
J10-8 R13
YEL YEL
1
10K
U10
4N35 VLED
J3-7 HIGH\/LOW
+5V
2
LOW HIGH
J10-27
J10-33 ITLK1
R28
D
1K D
J10-35 EXPSW
J3-5
1
1
U3
RN7I RN11F RN11G HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS DRAW N
GUI FONE 10NOV98
4N35
1K 1K 1K ORIG/DES.ENG
J.BARNES 10NOV98
Canada Inc.
2
10
8
APPROVALS DATE
J3-13 SEE SHEET 1 TITLE
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
J.BARNES 10NOV98
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTRACT No.
SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO. Rev
734573 MILLENIA
Monday, November 23, 1998 SCALE DWG LEVEL 3
7 OF 7
1 2 3 4
BACK
Loupe
Menu
Notes
Tool
1 2 3 Control Board 4 5 6
R91
7
REVISIONS
8
NOTES: 1K ZONE LTR DESCRIPTION DWN CHKD APPROVED DATE

1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE OHMS .25W, 2% -12V A CREATED PER ENG. G.F. G .F H. W ANG 23MAY97
B INC. PER ECO No 16131 G.F. G .F H. W ANG 07JUL97
+12V
8
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. C INC. PER ECO No 16625 EMIR EMIR R. HAN 18MAR98
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS 2 - D INC. PER ECO No 16894 G.F. G .F R. HAN 29APR98
E INC. PER ECO No 18717 G.F. G .F S. BLAKE 29MAR99
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 1 F INC. PER ECO No 18867 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 18JUN99
3. COMPONENTS MARKED " * " ARE NOT INSTALLED
R89 3 G INC. PER ECO No 18949 G.F. G .F S. CARTW RIGHT 09AUG99
C37 +
H INC. PER ECO No 18983 G.F. G .F S. BLAKE 08SEP99
4. COMPONENTS WITH NO VALUE SHOWN ARE +12V CD3240 J INC. PER ECO No 19057 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 25OCT99
.1 1K
4
IDENTIFIED IN PARTS LIST R154 U16A K INC. PER ECO No 19420 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 27MAR00
L INC. PER ECO No 19567 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 17MAY00
M INC. PER ECO No 19694 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 10AUG00
D33 -12V N INC. PER ECO No 19735 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 25AUG00
R155 R153 1K
J9 1N4148 U12A P INC. PER ECO No 19918 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 21NOV00
R49 10K 10K R INC. PER ECO No 20247 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 19MAR01
4
CD3240 R68 3 T INC. PER ECO No 20730 EMIR EMIR C. FRIAS 01NOV01
6 3 +
U INC. PER ECO No 20742 G.F. G .F J . PENNOCK 12DEC01
1 U29 1 V INC. PER ECO No 20960 G.F. G .F C.F. / S.M.C 04MAR02
5 OMIT FOR SW1 10K 2 R67 W

Y
INC. PER ECO No 22213
INC. PER ECO No 22271
G.F.
G.F.
G .F
G .F
C. FRIAS
C. FRIAS
03JUL03
04SEP03
TAB-00 D34 - 15K TL431 2 AA INC. PER ECO No 22443 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 07NOV03
D 7 TAB-01
1 16 C24 C25 C26 C27 R156 R152 D
TAB-02 1N4148 R158 AB INC. PER ECO No 22672 G.F. G .F C. FRIAS 17FEB04
8
8 R48 TAB-03
2 15 R52 +12V 7.5K 3.3K 15K C81 AC INC. PER ECO No 23284 M.D. G .F C. FRIAS 28OCT04
TAB-04 10K AD INC. PER ECO No 23567 G.F. J .C. C. FRIAS 31MAR05
4 27.4K C28 3 14 20K .1 8 56

-12V C36
3 10nF 4 13 R53 U16B * R90 3
.1 -
7
1 5 12 CD3240 2
6 -
+
2 6 11 +12V 20K 7 U31

R54 10K 41 LM311
9 J9_9 7 10 R215 5 +
M1 R37 C33 8 9 D32 10K R69 -12V
C35 C34 C30 C29 6 - R157
M2 27.4K 1N4148 7 R72 C82
SW8DIP R50 12.1K
5 + 7.5K 33nF JW3
U12B 15K 1 1
+12V 10K CD3240 2 2
D31
R219 3 3
1N4148
D13 24.3K R24
R39 D93 R221 J1_12
1N4148 -12V
RN6G RN6H +12V 10K
7 10 9 8 20K 1N4148 12.1K +12V C9
10K 10K 47nF
+12V +12V R23
J1_31
C115 D15 C88
14
+12V C8 RN9C R172 10K
13
0.01 1N4148
R18 C7 8 .1 C49 10K .1 2K
C121 +12V
16
10K 1 -12V D96 .1 RN9D
5
2
D12 1 16RN9A1 R92 -12V 270PF 4 2 R159 R42
-
3
-12V 10K D69
Y CC
EN
S
3
4
Q
1N4148 U6A 41
KV 10K TP8
14
+
RN6E 1N4148 10K 20K 3 U32A
6 RN6F11 12 5 LF412CN 2 C86 R D63 10K C12
4 G ND
14043B
+
7 JUMPER 1-2 = 150kV 1 2 1nF
10K 10K 3
8
- U17 1nF TP9
JUMPER 2-3 = 125kV U33A 1N4148
C116 D14 R40 -12V C11 8 56 LM311 R163
7
C
R164 4584 C
2
0.01 1N4148 20K .1 *
C48 RN9B 27K4
10K R176
R222 D94 -12V 10K +12V
U30B FAULT_X
15
8.25K R213 OMIT FOR TAB -01 1K
6 +12V
1N4148 R19 -
7 20K
5 + N
+12V R177
20K D92 R220 R216 LF412 11 10
+12V R36 2K U32E_D58
TP2 R33 U33E
D3 12.1K 10K
1N4148 4K7 D71 CATHODE I 4584
1N4148
R7 RN6C RN6D R165 R212 D64
1
7
5
3 14 13 4 R32 3 6 9 3 4 R178
+12V 27K4 2K S
6
+ Q
10K RN9F 6 U33B FAULT_Y
100 10K C54 +12V 20K 7
10K 2 R U32B 4584 1N4148 475
C117 .1 U9
5
-
+12V D5 R34 14043B
11
C4 0.01 6 D95 R76 RN9E C23 LF356
8RN9H9
4
R8 C6 1N4148 -
7 +12V 100
0.047 5 8 56 10K .1 R17
10K 1 D4 +
U6B 10K 20K -12V TP6
12
-12V 3
1N4148 LF412CN 1N4148 -
7 10K C5
R9 RN6B 2
1 RN6A16 15 2 1nF
+
U18 TP7
100 10K 10K 41 LM311 R15
7
C53 R179 J2_1
C118 D6 R38 RN9G C120 +12V
* R168 10K
TP3 0.01 1N4148 20K 10K -12V 270PF 2K C3
10K mA FLUORO
10
D72 ANODE 1 R14 47nF
J2_9
-12V D65
12 S Q 10 5 6 10K
U33C
R46 11 1N4148
B R U32C 4584 R4 B
+12V J1_11
G 14043B Ir
10K C1
15K D66 mA RAD
H 14 1 9 8 R3 47nF
D11 S Q J1_30
+12V U33D
1N4148 C56 * C38 C14 15 U32D D70 1N4148 10K
R26 R45 * C60 R 4584
1.5nF R127 14043B R5
J1_7 TP4
R88 D62
10K 10K C40 3.3K 180pF 10K C2
24.3K R47 R126 R175 1N4148
D9 .1 R84 1nF
43.2K 2K TP5
8
1N4148 2 15K 15K

+12V
-
R71 R70 D16 C74 * C65 +12V
C13 1
KV REF -12V 3
0.47 +
* U15_U31D
U13A 12.1K C119 12.1K 1N4148
D10 R125 R109
4
CD3240 47nF
1N4148
R25 R44 D35 * R73 D54 0.0
C47 C57_C44
J1_26 1N4148 2K
* 6 -
10K 10K D98 7 D48
-12V +12V 1N4148
D8 R43 C41 1N4148 D40 5 + +12V
U13B
1N4148 15K .1 1N4148 1N4736A
CD3240
* C70 R106
D97 * R116
8
-12V D99 I R55 R129 R128 2 .1
CONTROL BOARD 1N4148 47.5K -
D49 10K
1N4148 12.1K 1 R107 6 -
TEST 10K 33.2K 3 7
POINT SHEET U21B_R132
+
FUNCTION
U21A 10K
3
TP1 GROUND 2 * 1N4148 R110 5 + U21B

2
4
TP2 ANODE mA FEEDBACK (+) 2 D100 D55 CD3240
TP3 ANODE mA FEEDBACK (-) 2 R145 CD3240
1N4148 Q9 1N4743A
1
TP4 RAD mA FEEDBACK (+) 2 15K R111 R112 C59 R108

TP5 ANODE mA FEEDBACK (-) 2 MPS8599
A
TP6 FLUORO mA FEEDBACK (+) 2 C71 10K 10K .1 4K7 A
TP7 FLUORO mA FEEDBACK (-) 2 * D50 .1

TP8 kV FEEDBACK (+) 2 D101 R115
TP9 2
1N4730 +12V -12V -12V
kV FEEDBACK (-) 1N4148 20K +12V
TP10 kV ENABLE 3
TP12 X-RAY 3 +12V
8 LF412
DRAW N
14
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS

TP13 FLUORO mA REF 2
GUI FONE 08APR97 Communications & Power Industries
ORIG/DES ENG
TP14 DRIVE ENABLE 3 3 U30A C127, D106, GND, J16, H. W ANG 23MAY97 Canada Inc.
TP15 GROUND 3 3 4 1 2 +
1 JW3, K2, L3, Q27, R242,
U10B_U22B 2 APPROVALS DATE
TP16
TP17
+5V DC
GATE DRIVE SIGNAL
3
4 U22B U22A
-
RN9, SW1, T5, TP21, PROD ENG
G. SANW ALD 23MAY97
TITLE
SCHEMATIC
4
7
U48
TP18
TP19
PREP
GATE DRIVE SIGNAL
3
4
4584 4584 DES/MFG AUTH.
H. W ANG 23MAY97 CONTROL BOARD
TP20 RECTIFIED IR FEEDBACK (-) 4
TP21
-12V CONTRACT No.
CODE IDENT NO. SIZE DRAW ING NO. REV.
4 INDICO 100
RECTIFIED IR FEEDBACK (+) 732816
02845 D 732814 AD
J5, L2, TP13
ORCAD FOR WINDOWS NEXT ASSY USED ON DW G LEVEL 3 SCALE NTS SHEET 1 OF 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NEXT
Loupe
Menu
Notes
Tool
1
+12V OMIT FOR

2 3 Control Board 4 5 6
ZONE
7
LTR DESCRIPTION
REVISIONS
DWN CHKD
8
APPROVED DATE
--- --- FOR REVISIONS SEE SHEET 1 --- --- --- ---
TAB-00
TAB-01 6
R217
1K 5
OMIT FOR TAB-00

J2-6 R10 4
+12V
267 1 5 3
S3 J2-5 J8-2
U40 R225 R227 2
FLUORO J2-13 J8-1
4N36 R13 J2-7 1K 1
J2-4 1 5 J8
J2-14 R11 2 4 R229 267
R235 9 8 13 12 5 1 267 PULSE
K FLUORO U41 P
267 1K
* U22D U22F 2K JW2 4N36
R223 U8 ROTOR DEFEAT R226
M1
M2
2 4
D D
R236 4584 4584 D61 J2-15
100K A * 4N36 J1
1K R232 1N4733 R12 J1-1 1
4 2 J2-12
2K 267 R228
+12V +12V
J1-20 20
M 267 100K J1-2 2
RN2C R21 +12V OMIT FOR
J1-19 3 14 D103 RN4E TAB - 00 J1-21 21
R121 ROTFLT
270 1N4733 12 5 J1-20 TAB - 01 J1-3 3
1 5 1K +12V
2K J1-22 22
R22 470
1
R138 2 Q18 J1-4 4
U7 1K ROTOR FAULT
TUBE SELECT TUBE1/2 R174 MPS8599 J1-23 23
4N36 1K +12V
3
49.9K D53 R1 J1-5 5
2 4 +12V J1-1
RN2D 2 3 1N4743A J1-24 24
J1-18 4 13 Q1 D19 R173 FILAMENT
13 12 +12V 267 J1-6 6
270 MPS8099 N J3
1
R20 J1-32 J3-1 FILAMENT 1 J1-25 25

U33F RN4D 1
16
10K 1N4148 475 R120 J1-23 J1-13 J3-2 CURRENT
4584 13 4 2 J1_7 7
FILFLT
15
14
RN8A C91 D58 2K J2-11 J3-3
1
R137 470 3 J1_26 26
10K RN8B RN8C TP10 1 2 Q15 FILAMENT 2
FILAMENT FAULT J2-3 J3-4 J1-8 8
1 10K 10K 1K MPS8599 4 CURRENT
J1-28 J3-5
12
1N4148 J1-27 27
3
RN2B RN5F D59 5
3
FILAMENT 1
J1-14 2 15 6 11 4 D90 D46 1N4743A +12V J1-9 J3-6 J1-9 9
RN2H
-
2 R95 6 REF
270 1 5 10K 5 + PREP1 +12V 9 8 J1-4 J2-10 J3-7 J1-28 28
U11A 7 FILAMENT 2
C19 J2-2 J3-8 J1-10 10
LM339 1N4148 1K 1N4148 270 8 REF
3
U4 .1 U32E_D58 R119 GND J3-9 J1-29 29
RN4C 9 GROUND
KV EN 4N36 +12V 2K 14 3 J1-24 FILFLT J3-10 11
D57 10 FILAMENT FAULT
1
2 4 R93 R136 J1_11
PREP3 2 Q14 470 LARGSMAL J3-11 LARGE-SMALL 30
RN2A RN5E 1K mA FAULT 11 J1_30
+12V D21 D23 D24 D20 2K MPS8599 12 12
J1-33 1 16 5 12 1N4148 J1_12
3
J9_9 D52 ROTOR
1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 +12V 31
C
270 10K RN2G 13 BOOST J1_31
C
1N4743A 7 J1-5
13
D45 10 14 TIME J1-13 13

12
TP18 270 J1-32 32

RN8D PREP2 +12V 1N4148 15
RN8E
1
10K R78 DRIVE_EN 16
J1-14 14
3
RN1C RN5B 10K 2 Q5 R134 2 J1-33 33
4
J1-15 3 14 2 15 6 Q13 17
5
1K MPS8599
-
1 J1-15 15
3
270 10K 7 10K R135 MPS8099 TP14 18
1
+
U11B R122 J1-34 34
1 5 D36 2K 19
LM339 1K D44 +12V J1-16 16
1N4743A +12V +12V 20
C20 D25 RN4B J1-35 35
PREP U2 15 2 J1-22
.1 1N4148 D43 R118 J1-17 17
4N36 +12V
3
R80 10K 470
1
RN1D 2 4 RN5D 5 + R133 G_D J1-36 36
10K 2 2 Q12 READY
J1-34
11
10
4 13 4 13 1N4148 4 - J1-18 18
D22 D37 U10A D51 1K MPS8599 +12V +12V
3
270 10K J1-37 37
3
RN8F RN8G R81 2 RN2F J4
12
1N4148 UNDERV Q6 C39 LM339 1N4743A 11 6 J1-3 +12V +12V J1-19 19
10K 10K 1
RN5A 68K 1N4148 MPS8099 R30 C15 .1 270 +12V
6
1
1 16 8 -
68K 2200pF 2
14 R79 +12V
+12V
3
10K 9 +
U10C CONCL
C89 10K 4
LM339 D42 R29 R28 R57 +12V
C22 10nF 5 J2
+12V 1N4148 +ROTIMEXT ROTOR BOOST
.1 10K 10K 10K 6 J2_1 1
RN5C +12V
3 14 R27 41 R59 +CONDRIVE J1-10 7 J2_9 9
+12V R77 C10 -ROTIMEXT
10K D26 10K 2 100K 8 ROTOR BOOST J3-8 J2-2 2
1K 2200pF +
7 +12V
1N4148 J1-29 9
16
D41 6 - 3 U14 -CONDRIVE J3-7 J2-10 10

9
1 -
ROTFLT
10 ROTOR FAULT
RN7A 7 +
OR J3-4 J2-3 3
RN7H TP12
U10B 856 LM311 +ROTIMEXT R124 J1-2
GND
11 J3-3 J2-11 11
10K 10K D17 +12V
3
1N4148 GND
RN1H RN3F R61 2 LM339 12 J2-4 4
1
B
J1-16 8 9 6 11 10 Q4 R31 R58 GND B
R117 C42 R56
-
13 68K MPS8099 68K OR 13 J2-12 12
270 10K 11 1N4148 +12V
1
10K 10K
+
1 5 U11D 10nF 100 -ROTIMEXT R97 J1-21 14 J8-2 J2-5 5
R60 C50 GND
LM339 15 J8-1 J2-13 13
10K 10nF TUBE1/2
U5 C18 16 TUBE1/ TUBE2 J2-6 6
X-RAY GND
4N36 0.01 17 J2-14 14
2 4 5 6 CHARGE J6-1 +12V 18 J2-7 7
RN1F RN3E U10B_U22B GND
J1-35 6 11 5 12 +12V D91 U22C 19 J2-15 15
D18
270 10K 4584 20 J2-8 8
1N4148 FLUORO
RN4A OMIT FOR TAB-00
J1-27
10
13
1N5819 16 1
LARGSMAL MPS8599
M1
M2
RN7G RN7D R75 2 470
Q3 LG-SM-FIL
10K 10K +12V
1K5 RN2E
7
3
RN1G RN3D 12 5 J1-8
7 10 4 13 10 -12V +12V VDD U34 VCC +5V TP16
+12V 270
-
13 LM7805
270 10K 11 +
U10D R188
1 5 +12V 1 VI VO 3
+5V
J6
LM339 -12V
2 GND
1
J6-1 CHARGE
4 D47
R96 1
U3 D77 +C99
1
3W C96 +C97 PREP3 68K 2 FLUORO 2
4N36 C16 1.5KE13CA 47 Q7 +CONDRIVE
2 4 1 33 3
2
0.01 TP15 TP1 GND 1N4148 MPS8599 -CONDRIVE
3
RN1E RN3C 4
5 12 3 14 +12V R94 CONCL UNDERV
GND 5
270 10K GND
GND VSS 1K RN4F 6
J1-25
12
11
11 6 CONCLSD
7
MPS8599
1
PREP1
RN7E RN7F CONCLSD R123 2 470 8
10K
Q16 +12V CONTACTOR CLOSED PREP2
10K 12 9
11 1K R2 J1-6 ROTFLT
5
3
A
RN1A RN3A R74 13 10
A
J1-17 MPS8599
1
1 16 1 16 8 -
U24D 267
14 2 Q2
270 10K 9 +
U11C 74LS132
1 5 1K
3
LM339 10 11
C17 R35 HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS DRAW N
GUI FONE 08APR97 Communications & Power Industries
FIL LG-SM U1 U22E
.1 ORIG/DES ENG
H. W ANG 23MAY97 Canada Inc.
4N36 4584
2 4 68K 9 SEE SHEET 1
APPROVALS DATE
J1-36 2
RN1B
15 2
RN3B
15 C21 10
8 PROD ENG
G. SANW ALD 23MAY97
TITLE
SCHEMATIC
270 10K .1 U24C DES/MFG AUTH.
H. W ANG 23MAY97 CONTROL BOARD
74LS132 REFERENCE DESIGNATION NOT USED
CONTRACT No. DRAW ING NO. REV.
CODE IDENT NO. SIZE
732816 INDICO 100
SEE SHEET 1 02845 D 732814 AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Tool Menu
Notes 8 7 6
Control Board5 4 3
ZONE
2
LTR DESCRIPTION DWN CHKD

1
APPROVED DATE
--- --- FOR REVISIONS SEE SHEET 1 --- --- --- ---
+12V
R207
6.8K
+12V
D82
+12V +12V RED
C112 R206
.1 4.7K
D
INV.1 D
C107
R195 R210
.1
8 56 4.7K 6.8K
J14 T3 D83 R193 R194 3
7 6 9 13 12
-
S
3 4 2 2 +
Q
U35F
U36 7
2 4.7K 4.7K 41 LM311
R U39B 4584
3 1 1N4148
1 14043B
1:10
R191 C101 R192 C102
2.2nF 10K 100pF C108
.1
-12V
TABLE 2 * KEY COMPONENTS THAT AFFECT FUNCTIONALITY

+12V
COMPONENT 732816 732816 732816 732816 732816
TAB -00 TAB -01 TAB -02 TAB -03 TAB -05
D44 NOT FITTED 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 D81
C14 2.2nF 3.3nF 3.3nF 3.3nF 3.3nF RED
C28, C33 NOT FITTED 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF OMIT FOR INV.2
+12V +12V
C C32 10nF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF TAB - 00 C
C69 NOT FITTED 180pF 180pF NOT FITTED 180pF TAB - 01 R209
C74 220pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF C109
R200
6.8K
R65 75 100 49.9 56 49.9 .1
8 56 4.7K
R99 33.2 22R1 15R 20 15R J15 D84 R198 R199 3
T4 -
7 12 10 11 10
R100 NOT FITTED NOT FITTED 15R 20 15R 3 4 2 2 +
S Q
U35E
R110 100K 221K 221K 221K 221K U37 11
2 4.7K 4.7K 41 LM311
R U39C 4584
3 1 1N4148
R125 49K9 221K 221K 221K 221K 1 1:10 R196 C103 R197 C104
14043B
R163 43K2 27.4K 27.4K 27.4K 27.4K 2.2nF 10K 100pF
R165 10K 27.4K 27.4K 27.4K 27.4K C110
R191 51.1 39.2 39.2 39.2K 39.2K
R196 NOT FITTED NOT FITTED 39.2 39.2K 39.2K .1
-12V
R216 2K 20K 20K 20K 20K
R201 NOT FITTED NOT FITTED NOT FITTED 39.2 NOT FITTED
L3 NOT FITTED NOT FITTED 100uH 100uH 100uH
T1 & T2 30:1 30:1 30:1 40:1 30:1
J4 NOT FITTED FITTED FITTED FITTED NOT FITTED
+12V
J8 NOT FITTED FITTED FITTED FITTED NOT FITTED
S1 NOT FITTED NOT FITTED NOT FITTED NOT FITTED FITTED
C24-C27
D80
C29, C30 NOT FITTED NOT FITTED NOT FITTED NOT FITTED 10nF RED
B
C34, C35 INV.3
B
D97-D101 NOT FITTED NOT FITTED NOT FITTED NOT FITTED 1N4148 +12V +12V
OMIT FOR R208
R90 3.9K 3.9K 3.9K 3.9K 4.75K TAB - 00 6.8K
R233 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 TAB - 01 C111
R234 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 TAB - 02 .1
R205
8 56 4.7K
* SEE PARTS LIST J16 T5 D85 R203 R204 3
7 14 1 9 8
-
S
3 4 2 2 +
Q
U35D
U38 15
2 4.7K 4.7K 41 LM311
R 4584
3 1 1N4148
1 C106
R201 C105 R202 U39D
1:10 100pF
39.2 2.2nF 10K 14043B
C113
.1
-12V
D87
D88
D89 1N4148
1N4148
1N4148
D86
5 6 FAULT_Y
U35C
+12V 1N4148
4584
R211
14
A +12V 10K A
1 2
U35A FAULT_X
4584
16
7
5
4 2
Y CC
+12V DRAW N
EN
S HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS

Q GUI FONE 08APR97 Communications & Power Industries
ORIG/DES ENG
-12V 3 R U39A H. W ANG 23MAY97 Canada Inc.
G ND
APPROVALS DATE
14043B SEE SHEET 1 TITLE
SCHEMATIC
8
+ 3 4
PROD ENG
G. SANW ALD 23MAY97
C100 C98
U35B CONTROL BOARD
+ DES/MFG AUTH.
330 1000/25V H. W ANG 23MAY97
4584 REFERENCE DESIGNATION NOT USED
CONTRACT No. DRAW ING NO. R e v.
CODE IDENT NO. SIZE
732816 INDICO 100
02845 D 732814 AD
SEE SHEET 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BACK
Loupe
Tool Menu
Notes
NOTES:
1
1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE OHMS .25W, 2%

2 3
Room Interface Board 4 5 6
ZONE
7
LTR
A
DESCRIPTION
CREATED PER ENG.
REVISIONS
DWN
B.M
CHKD
EMIR
8
APPROVED
L. FOSKIN
DATE
08MAY97
B INC. PER ECO NO. 19690 EMIR EMIR S. CARTWRIGHT 08MAY97
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. C INC. PER ECO NO. 22263 G.F G.F S. CARTWRIGHT 18AUG03
C CONVERTED FM. DOS TO WINDOWS M.N.D G.F S. CARTWRIGHT 09SEP03
3. PARTS MARKED * ARE NOT INSTALLED
RECORD CHANGE PER ECO # 22430
J1
TB10
TB9 1
NOMINAL 5 R8
A
220V AC 4 C8 5 2
A
475K NOMINAL
1.5A TOTAL 3 0.1 110V AC 4
TB11 SOURCE C9 R9 3
2 2.5A TOTAL 3
5 -- K2 SOURCE 0.1 475K
1 2 4 TO
4 -- K1
-- K4 E6 1 GENERATOR
3 5
RELAY CONTACT INTERFACE
2 -- K3 VOLTAGE SELECT
-- K6 6 BOARD
1
+ 7
R7 C7
TB7
TB8 3.01K E7 1000 8
+24V ZERO 5
UNREG 5 VOLTS
JW8 DS1 RETURN 4 9
C1 C4 24VDC 4
R1 R4 4A LED 3
4 4 3
6 TOTAL 2
22R, 0.5W 0.1 22R, 0.5W 0.1 8 K13A 3 SOURCE 2 POWER
JW4 1
2 1 ON
JW9 1 1
JW10 2
JW2
3 TB6
4 K2A 1 K4A
TB1 6 TB2 4 4 SPARE OUTPUT
12
8 2 6
BUCKY 12 8 5 11
OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT BUCKY 1 12 TP14
3 SELECT 11 SELECT 6 REMOTE + 10
4 11
10 7 EXPOSURE - 9
5 10
9 8 REMOTE + 8 1
6 9 PREP - J2
8 E1 E4 7
7 8 INPUT REMOTE
7 E2 + 6
B
8 INPUT COLLIMATOR + 7 FLOURO
- 1 B
6 E3 INTERLOCK - EXPOSE 5
6 2
+ 5 II + 4
INPUT SPARE
BUCKY + 5 SAFETY - 3
- 4 INPUT - 3 +24V
CONTACTS 4 4
3 JW1 JW3
ALE 2 JW7
3 OUTPUT 5
TOMO/BUCKY 2 BUCKY 2 1
OUTPUT
4 SELECT
1 OUTPUT 2 1 8 K12A 4 6
1 2
SELECT
1 2 6 3 7
4
3 3 2 8
4 8 4 1 9
8 5 6 5 10
6 4
4 6 K3A 6 11
K1A JW11
JW12 7 C3 7 12
8 R3 8 13
R2 C2 22R, 0.5W 14
0.1
15
22R, 0.5W 0.1 16
17 TO
18 GENERATOR
19 INTERFACE
BOARD
R5 C5 20
21
22R, 0.5W 22
0.1 23
24
25
C JW13 16 1 TP13
K13B
* 26
C
16 1 TP4
* 27
4 K8A 16 1 TP3 * K4B
28
TB4
8
6 K3B 16 1
K2B
TP2
* 29
DRY ROOM 12 16 1 TP1
K1B
* 30
CONTACTS LIGHT 11
10 16 1 TP6 *
16 1
K7B
TP7
* 31
K6B 32
TB5 INPUT
THERMAL 9 1 16 1 TP12
* 33
INPUT MULTIPLE SPOT + 12
SWITCH 1 8
R6 C6 JW5 16 1 TP5
K5B
* K12B
34
EXPOSURE - 11 INPUT
THERMAL 7
1 16 1 TP8
* 35
10 4 K11A
6
SWITCH 2 6 22R, 0.5W 2 16 1 TP9
K9B
* K8B
36
MAG1 9 8 INPUT
ROOM DOOR
INTERLOCK
5 0.1 3 +24V
16 1
K10B
TP10
* 37
8 K10A TUBE 1 INDICATOR
4
3 +24V
JW14 4 16 1 TP11
K11B
* 38
7 4 K6A 5 39
DRY 6 2 JW6 TB3 4
CONTACT MAG2 6 8 OUTPUT TUBE 2 INDICATOR 4 6 6 40
COMMON 1 6 4 12 8
5 8 K7A OUTPUT
TOMO/BUCKY
7
4 K9A 3 START 11
4 6 8
8 2 10
MAG3 3
1 9
2 E5
8
1
TOMO + 7
INPUT -
EXPOSURE 6
INPUT REMOTE + 5
TOMO SELECT - 4
4 K5A
3 6
D DRY COLLIMATOR 2 8 D
CONTACT BYPASS
1
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS DRAW N MARVIN DUARTE 08OCT03

ORIG/DES ENG
STEVE BLAKE 08OCT03 Canada Inc.
C9, DS1, E7, J2, JW14, APPROVALS DATE
TITLE
K13, R9, TB11, TP14 PROD ENG
S CARTWRIGHT 09OCT03 SCHEMATIC
DES/MFG AUTH.
STEVE BLAKE 15OCT03 ROOM INTERFACE
CONTRACT No. DRAW ING NO. REV.
CODE IDENT NO. SIZE
733184 GENERATOR
02845 D 733182 C
COMPUTER GENERATED NEXT ASSY USED ON DW G LEVEL 3 SCALE NTS SHEET 1 OF 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Loupe
Tool Menu
Notes 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NOTES:
1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W 5%
AEC Board E (4)
Z ONE LTR
A
B
DESCRIPTION
INC PER ENG.
INC PER ECO No. 19065
REVISIONS
D WN
Emir
Emir
C HKD
Emir
Emir
APPROVED
D.YAKE
DATE
0 8OCT99
S.CARTWRIGHT 2 5OCT99
C INC PER ECO No. 19263 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 28JAN00
3. FOR COMPONENTS VALUE/TYPE OF ITEMS WITH
SEE SHEET 3 TO 5 FOR A LISTING OF COMPONENT * +12V -3V D INC PER ECO No. 19348 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 2 9FEB00
VALUE CHANGES.
JW 43 R 52
* 5 R50E 12 E INC PER ECO No. 20684 Emir
Emir
Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 0 5OCT01
4 .99K 33K 14 5 7 F INC PER ECO No. 20781 Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 14NOV01
4. D69 AND C48 NOT ON PWB LAYOUT.
1 R50A 16 G INC PER ECO No. 20859 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 14DE C01
5.
** NOT FITTED.
+12V
C 41
3 3K 3 4 H INC PER ECO No. 21803 J.H. J.H. S.CARTWRIGHT 01APR03
1 nF
J INC PER ECO No. 22412 G.F. G.F. S.CARTWRIGHT 1 6OCT03
1 U4C R36
140 66 G.F. G.F.
* D 62I
11 R50F 6 6
- U 7B
* 1K K
L
INC PER ECO No. 23141
INC PER ECO No. 23141 G.F. S.C.
S.CARTWRIGHT
S.CARTWRIGHT
18AUG03
05NOV04
D 8 7 15 R50B 2 6 D
-
SIG (1) R 86 JW 44 33K 5
+
7
33K M INC PER ECO No. 23635 G.F. B.Z. S.CARTWRIGHT 30MAR05
8 5
+
1 00 J W45 10 R5 0G 7 R 41 C4
8
**
C 22 J W46 33K R 50H
LF 412 100K 14 R 50C 3 LF 412 CH1 .47 JW 2 U 3B
N INC PER ECO No. 23805 G.F. C.W. S.CARTWRIGHT 02J UN05
14
D62J 3 3K
2
33K 4 * U 5B R1 AEC R 34 11
140 66
10
P INC PER ECO No. 23986 G.F. C.W. S.CARTWRIGHT 25AUG05
100K TIME R 45 JW 3 100 R INC PER ECO No. 24147 G.F. C.W. S.CARTWRIGHT 3 1OCT05
+12V 9
-12V R 50D ADJUST T INC PER ECO No. 24453 G.F. C.W. S.CARTWRIGHT 11APR06
1 33K 10K
E (4) U4A CW 12
R 38 +12V 13 140 66
D62A 1M 13 D 51
8 +12V U3 -12
JW 47 R 88 2 R 37 1N41 48
START (1) R67 3 8 1K
+ 1 1
100 2 1 00 2 3
- U6A + 1 4 -12V
D 62B C10 2
4 L F412 - 2
-
14 1
-12V * C9
.22
U7A
4 LF 412 * 3
+ 1 U3 -13
-12V
A (1) R66 R 65 -12V D 53 D 52
R 40 8
U5A
LF 412 *
1 00 1M 1K +12V
JW 48 R 75
* 1 R 51A 16
E (4)
U3 -5
4 .99K 3 3K
+12V
C 42 5 R51E 12
6
U3 -6
SEE SHEET 2
1 1nF 3 3K
D 62K
15 R51B 2 6
U 11B
* 9 8
*
-
9 7 11 R51F 6 6 C48 47 0pF
-
R 85 JW49 3 3K U4D
SIG (2) 5 7
+
33K 14 066 R58
5
+
J W50 4
1 00 9 14 R 51C 3 CH2 1K R118
D 62L
**17
C J W51 3 3K R 51D
LF 412 R 39
100K
10 R5 1G 7 U10B
* AEC
C 12
.47 JW 39 4 9.9K
R 114
3 3K 33K 8 LF 412 R2 TIME
14 10 100K
+12V 13 ADJUST JW 40 4 9.9K
-12V R 5 1H R49
U 4B 33K
1 CW 1 0K -12V
C R 44 E (4) 12 140 66 4 C
D 62C 1M 9 D56 R 120 2
-
+12V R116
JW 52 3 R 46 1N41 48 1 6
-
START (2) R74 5 8 R 31 49.9K 3
+
7 X
+ 7 11 1K U18A 49.9K 5
+
100 3 100 6 3 13
J2 - U 6B + 1 4 -12V R 91
R 121 8
LF 412 U 18B
LF 412
START (1)
1
L (1) 14
D 6 2D
C 11 L F412 *C 20 2
- U11A * 2
-
1 R32 2 1
20K 4.99K
C 39
+12V
3 1 .22 4 LF 412 0.1

3 CH1
+
1 00 CW
5
N (1)
R (1)
-12V
A (2) R47 R 48 -12V D 57
8
U10A
LF 412 * U3A
14 066
7 D 58
R 60
SIG1 1 00 1M +12V
9 1K
START2
AEC SHORT TIME
JW 53
11
13
L (2) *
R 71
4.99K
1 R 70A 16
33K
COMPENSATION
E (4)
N (2) +12V
15 C 43 -3V R113
+12V
17
R (2) 1 nF 5 R70E 12
1 49.9K
19
SIG (2) D6 2M U 8B
L F412 * 3 3K 14 5 7
R 108
START (3) 15 R70B 2 6
*R 84
-
2 R 92
11 JW54 7 11 R7 0F 6 6
-
20K
L (3) SIG (3) 3 3K 5
+
7 3 4 4.99K
4 R 56 33K C 36
5
+
J W55 4
N (3) 100 11 14 R 70C 3 100K U 12C CH2 0.1
6
8
R (3) D 62N **13
C
J W56 3 3K R 7 0D
33K
10 R70G 7
33K
U9B
L F412 * R3
CH3
AEC C 14
140 66 R76
1K
CW
8 .47 JW 37
SIG (3) 14 +12V 2 100K TIME
10 13
START (4) 1 R 7 0H ADJUST
12 -12V U12A R72 JW 38
+12V 3 3K
L (4) D62E R 68 E (4) 13 140 66
14 1M 8 9 CW 10K +12V -3V
N (4) JW 57 5 +12V
16 START R 73 R 80 3 R 30 D 59
R (4) (3) + 1 8 1K 1N4 148
18 100 5 100 2 1
SIG (4) - U14A 3
14
20 +
5
7
C 28 C 19 1 4 -12V
D62F
14 1
4 L F412
* .22 2
- 2
*
-
U8A R 33
-12V 1 3 4 R 98
4 L F412
B B
3
+
D 55 D 54 100 49.9K
-12V A (3) R62 R 69
-12V
8
*LF
U9A
412
U3C
140 66
1 00 1M R 55 R 97
1K R 93
JW 58 R 81
* 1 R 82A 16
+12V 20K 4.99K
C 33
+12V 4.99K 33K CH3 0.1
+12V CW
1 C 44 E (4)
D6 2O
*
R106
1 nF
5 R 82E 12
SIG (4) R 83 * 12
15 R82B 2 6
-
3 3K 6
AEC SHORT TIME
7 11 R82F 6 6 COMPENSATION
-
1 00 JW59 33K 5 7 9 8
12
+
33K
4
* 5
+
J W60 14 R 82C 3 U15B R 63
14
D62P
**
C 29 J W61 33K R 82D
LF 412 10 0K
10 R8 2G 7
U 13B
LF 412 * CH4
U 12D
14 066 R77 R 96
33K AEC C 15 1K 49.9K
3 3K R4 JW 41
-12V +12V 100K TIME .47
13 10 8
ADJUST R 94 R95
1 R61 JW 42
R59 R 8 2H CW 20K 4 .99K
D6 2G 1M U12B 1 0K C 32
E (4) 12 33K D65
JW 62 R 87 7 140 66 CH4 0.1
START (4) R 54 5 +12V 9 R 79
+ 1N41 48 CW
100 7 1K
100 7 6
-
U14B
11 8 6
D 62H C8 4 -12V
1 LF 412 3
14 + 1 2
-
2 1 R 35 9 8
-12V * C.2221 - U15A
* 3
+
1 00
A (4)
R 57 R 64
4
L F412
D 60 D 61 8
U13A
L F412 * U3D
140 66
100 1M R 78
-12V 1K
+12V +12V
A C 25 C6 C 18 C1 C 38 D RAWN A
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 HIGHEST REFERENCE Emir 29APR99
DESIGNATIONS Communications & Power Industries
CHECK ED D.YAKE 0 8OCT99 Canada Inc.
C48, D69, J5, Q4, R120, TP5
APPROVAL DATE
U 19
-12V
E NGINEER
SCHEMATIC
SCHEMATIC
C35
0.1
C31
0.1
C 26
0.1
C 23
0.1
C 16
0.1
C5
0.1
C37
0.1
DES/MFG AUTH. D.YAKE 0 8OCT99
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL
NOT USED
MANUALS
D63, D67, J3, J4, R115, R117 73 4630 GENERATORS CONTRACT No.
D 02845 734628 T
OrCAD FOR WINDOWS NEXT ASSY U SED ON
M o n d a y , A p r i l 1 0, 2006 Scale
NTS LEVEL 3
Sheet
1 of 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NEXT
Loupe
Tool Menu
Notes 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
AEC Board Z ONE LTR

---
DESCRIPTION
SEE SHEET 1 FOR REVISIONS
REVISIONS
D WN
---
C HKD
---
APPROVED
---
DATE
---
+12V J1
+12V 1
3
R 23 5
1 0K 7
-12V 9
11
13
15
17
19
2
R 15 4
12 6 J5
U 1F 13
D D
10K 8
10 1 PTSTOP
12 CH4
+12V -24V 14 2
16 CH3
R 21 11 U 1E 10 18 3
D 40 D39 20 CH2
10K 4
2 U 1A 1
5 CH1
D 45
U3 -12 4584 EXP START
+12V 6
R 20 7 L FIELD
D 41 D 38 M FIELD
4 10K 8
U 1B 3
9 R FIELD
D46 RST
U3 -13 +12V 12
R 18 10 VREF
D42 D37 -12Vdc
6 1 0K 11
U1C 5 +12Vdc
13
D47 RAMP
U3 -5 +12V 15
VSS T P5 +24V DQ
R 16 -12V 14
FROM PAGE 1 U3 -6 8 U1D 9
10K D 43 D44
18 C LK
+24Vdc
19
C 27
+
10 20
V DD T P1
16 -24Vdc
+12V
T P4 TP3 + C 40 GND
3 30 -24V 17
RAMP VREF
C 24 C 30 + C7
0.1 C 34
T P2 0.1 0.1 330
R 53 R 17
C 1 00 D 36 C
1 0K
E (4) 1N58 19
R 24 D 49 C47
+12V C 45 C 46
X
10 0K 1N41 48 R14 1nF 1nF 1nF
1 0K Y R27 R5 Y R26 R8 Y R 28 R9
+12V +12V
*
1 0K 1K 10K 1K 10K 1K
C3 R25 D17 D31 Q2
0.1 1 0K Q3 Q1
D9 MPS8599 M PS8599
M PS8599
8
5
6
R 19 3 L (1) JW 21 N (1) JW 13 R (1) JW 5

1 0K 2
- 7
Y
R 42
10K
D 69 * R 43
* J W22 D8 J W14 D1 J W6
D 19
+ U2
LM311 1K D2
1 N4733A
4
1
R 22 D 50 JW 23 JW 15 JW 7
10K L (2) N (2) R (2) D20
1 N4733A D34 Q4 D 10 D 12 D3 D 21
C2 M PS8599 J W24 J W16 J W8
0.1 START (1) JW 29 D4
D 33
J W30 L (3) JW 25 N (3) JW 17 R (3) JW 9
D 11 D 14 D5 D 23 D25
J W26 J W18 J W10
-12V
START (2) JW 31 D6
D22 D24
J W32 L (4) JW 27 N (4) JW 19 R (4) JW 11
D15 D 16 D7 D27 D 29
J W28 J W20 J W12
+12V START (3) JW 33

D26 D28
+5V -3V J W34 R 10 R6 R 12
R89 -12V R119 1 0K
1 0K 10K
1 0K 681
START (4) JW 35
D30 D 32 D 18 R11 D 13 R7 D 35 R 13
J W36 1 0K 1 N4733A 10K 1 N4733A 10K
D 66 1 N4733A
D 48
B 1 N4733A 1 N4728A B
+12V
A1 1 A2
+12V +12V +12V
+12V +5V D 68M A3
1 1 1 A4
JW 74 R112
11 U 19D
D6 8G L (2) 6 S D 7 D 64C D 64I
Y
IN 8
13
12
JW 71 7 100 11 JW 69 3 U 16B JW 64 8 U 17C

L (1) R 109 L (3) R105 14 S D 15 L (4) R100 11 S D 10
3 S D 2 DG4 45DJ
+24V +12V
-12V +12V
+5V
100 7 IN 1 +12V
D 68N
100 IN 16 1 00 8 IN 9
U 19A
14 +12V +5V 3
* R 29 * R90 DG 445DJ
1 +12V
DG 445DJ
+12V D64J
DG 445DJ
GND
D 68H
10 10 14 D 64D 14
D6 8O -12V 1 1
14
13
12
12
4
JW 67 R 103 D 64E D64K -12V

N (2) 3 S
-12V D 2 -12V
-12V +12V
+5V
+12V 5 U 1 6C 9 U 17D
100 12 U17A IN 1 N (3)
JW 70 R107 11 S D 10 N (4)
JW 65 R 101 6 S D 7
1 D68P
DG4 45DJ
100 5 IN 9 1 00
9 IN 8
GND
-12V
DG 445DJ D 64L +12V DG4 45DJ
D 68I 14 D6 4F +12V
14 +12V +5V
8 U19B 14
5
JW 72 R 110 1 1
N (1) 14 S D 15 -12V +12V -12V
1 00 8 IN 16 1
-12V D6 4G D 64M
13
12
DG 445DJ JW 63 R 99 7 U 16D JW 66 11
R (3) 6 S D 7 R (4) R102 3 S
D6 8J D64A -12V D 2
-12V +12V
+5V
14
+12V
2 U17B 100 7 IN 8 1 00 11 U 16A IN 1
JW 68 R104
1 R (2) 14 S D 15 D 64H DG4 45DJ DG 445DJ
-12V IN 16 D 64N
GND
1 00 2 14
D 68K 14
9 U 19C DG4 45DJ
JW 73 R111 D64B -12V
R (1)
5
11 S D 10 -12V
14
1 00 9 IN 9
DG4 45DJ -12V -12V
D 68L
14
-12V
A A
D RAWN
HIGHEST REFERENCE Emir 29APR99
DESIGNATIONS Communications & Power Industries
CHECK ED 0 8OCT99
D.YAKE Canada Inc.
APPROVAL DATE
E NGINEER
SCHEMATIC
SCHEMATIC
DES/MFG AUTH.
D.YAKE 0 8OCT99
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL
NOT USED
MANUALS
CONTRACT No.
73 4630 GENERATORS
D 02845 734628 T
OrCAD FOR WINDOWS NEXT ASSY U SED ON
Tuesday, August 23, 2005 Scale
NTS LEVEL 3
Sheet
2 of 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BACK
Loupe
Tool
Menu
Notes
NOTES:
8

7 6
Auxilary Board 5 4 3
ZONE
2
LTR
A
DESCRIPTION
CREATED PER ENG

REVISIONS
DWN CHKD
1
APPROVED DATE
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. Emir Emir H.WANG 04NOV96
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS B INC. PER ECO No. 16019 Emir Emir J.BROOKS 03JUN97
+35V C INC. PER ECO No. 16188 G.F. G.F. L.FOSKIN 22JUL97
3. COMPONENTS MARKED "*" AND IN AREA 1, 2, & 3, REFER
TO PART LIST FOR FITTING. U5 D INC. PER ECO No. 18146 G.F. G.F. H.WANG 02OCT98
LT1084CP R57
0.01 E INC. PER ECO No. 18842 Emir Emir C.FRIAS 01JUN99
3 2
C22 IN A OUT F INC. PER ECO No. 18955 Emir Emir C.FRIAS 20AUG99
D32 10000 R65 R71 D
PBU805 50V 10K 2K J G INC. PER ECO No. 19338 Emir Emir C.FRIAS 21FEB00
ASSEMBLY JW1 JW2 JW3 JW4 DESCRIPTION
H INC. PER ECO No. 20121 Emir Emir C.FRIAS 26FEB01
1
732221-00 1.5 SEC (-00) D31 J INC. PER ECO No. 22370 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 19SEP03
732221-03 .15 SEC (-03) ON ON OFF 3PH RAD, 1T C21 R64 LED D25
732221-06 OMIT(-06) 10000 10K +35V 1N5402 K INC. PER ECO No. 23456 G.F. S.B. C.FRIAS 26JAN05
-
50V
D D
D28
732221-01 1.5 SEC (-01) TP7
732221-04 .15 SEC (-04) OFF OFF OFF 1PH RAD, 1T J7 F4 U6 +12V
732221-07 OMIT(-07) 25VAC 1N4758 LT1084CP R60
1 TP8 51V
8A 0.01
-35V 1W 3 2
732221-02 1.5 SEC (-02) 3PH R&F 1 or 2T 15VAC IN A OUT C29
732221-05 .15 SEC (-05) ON ON ON 80kW 2 D R70
D33 2200
732221-08 OMIT(-08) TP5 F1 J D27 1K * *
GND PBU805 35V
FROM GND 12A C24 C25 1.5KE16 C30 R67
3 C28 * 10 C23
AUX. 10000 10000 R59 0.1
732221-09 1.5 SEC (-09) D21 1 820
50V 50V
732221-10 .15 SEC (-10) OFF OFF ON 1PH R&F 1,2T XFORMER GND 1N4007 -12V 50V D29
732221-11 OMIT(-11) 4 TP9 TP10 121 LED
F2
12A U4 C17 +12V
15VAC UA7912 10 R58
5 D24
2 3 1.1K
IN G OUT
25VAC N * *
6 D D16 R68 R61
C27 C26 C20 1N4007
C33 D46 F3 C19 1.5KE16 1K
GND1 820 10 0.1
8A 2200
1 50V
35V
1.0 1N4148
D30
R83 LED
100K -12V
R81 Q16
MPS8099 +/-35VDC AND +/-12VDC CIRCUIT TO CONTROL BD
10K
R80 J6
100K +12V -12VDC
1
R82
10K
-12V GND
C36 D45 AREA 1 2
R6
R84 GND
1.0 1N4148 1.4K 1K +12V 3
D39 R7 4 +12VDC
ON OFF D44 D43 10K R8
1N4148 1N4148 TP6 LED 1 5 1 5 1 5 C37 +12V
10K TO CONTROL BD
TUBE2 1.0
+12VDC
SELECTED U7 U9 U10 Q8 +12V +/-12VDC UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE DETECT KVEN * J1 5
* R38
4N36 4N36 4N36 MPS8099 R28
1
JW4 1K TUBETELLBACK1(-)
TELLBACK2
C 1 2 3 511 2 4 2 4 2 4 C
C32 2 TUBETELLBACK2(+) TO FILAMENT BD

1.0 1 5 +12V R55 R54 R56 R50
+12V 475 10K 4.75K 10K +35V J9
TELLBACK1 U8 3 PULSE FLUORO +35VDC
4N36 D17 1
R41 D26 R51
2K R39
* 2 4 TUBE SELECT TELLBACK LOGIC CIRCUIT 1N4148 1K
1M
4 KVENABLE
2
-35VDC
J2 9 1N4148
TUBE 14 ______
4 U3C FLUORO 5 -35V
THERMAL 8 FLUORO -12VDC
CUTOFF * Q5
+12V D42 LM339 D18 _____ 3
C31 D36 LED 1N4148 TUBE1/TUBE2 +12V -12V
3
1.0 * LED
R79
FLUORO
AREA 3 THERMAL 6
4
+12VDC
D35 RAD CUTOFF R52
10K
1N4007 MODE TIP122 R47 R49 4 8 U11 OPEN 4.75K +12V
FLUORO 2 10K R53 C18 TUBE SELECT GND
100K 5
CONTACT +12V 5.11M 0.1 R40 Q10
DRIVE R44 2 R V 3 MPS8099 C15 R32
1 TR C Q 10n 1K GND
1K 10K 10
C 6
U3D 13
R78 7 C35 11
J10 R74 DIS 1.0
1K LM339
TO 475K
POWER MODE 1 G R43 R37 +12V D1
5 6
SELECT BD D38 CV N THR 10K C16 20K D23 LED
1N4148 D C14 10n +12V/S.S.
1N4733
2 C34 1 MC1455P1 220 AREA 2 5.1V C13
-
FAULT
TO CONTORL BOARD TO CONTROL BD
D40 0.1 D41 0.1
1N4148 1N4148 THERMAL PROTECTION CIRCUIT 3 J5 *
-12V 4 CHARGE J3
Q4 R69 FLUORO FAN 1 +12V
U3A 2
MPS8099 TIMER CIRCUIT ______ 1
10K 5
R66 LM339 FLUORO
10K +12V 2 +12V
1
* K1 2
2
R63 +12V D19 +CUSTOMER DRIVE
10K S.S.OK 1N4148 +CUSTDRIVE 3 +12V
+12V R13 D3 3
+12V +12V 1K LED R31 -CUSTOMER DRIVE
S.S. 1K -CUSTDRIVE 4 CONTACT CLOSED
R2
* R1 -CUSTDRIVE
S.S.OK
OK 4
R72 (12VDC)UNDERVOLTAGE
47.5 47.5 5 +12V
1K
C1 R19 R77 R33 D13 D2 5
D4 R15 U1C 10 9.09K 1M 1M 1N4148 R12 D14 LED GND
J4 * 10K LM339 2.74K CNCTR 6
6
+ROTOR BOOST
+CUSTOMER DRIVE D37 9 1N4148 CLSD
2 +CUSTDRIVE LED 1N4148 CONTACT CLOSED
14 D9 7
B FLUORO 7 +12V B
Q7 8 U3B 1
AUXRELAY FAN ON 7
6 R34
1 PREP1 FOR ROTOR
R16 1N4148 C11 LM339 10K PRE1 8
100K R18 D10 R20 C9 C12 -ROTOR BOOST
S.S.RELAY MPS8099 D8 12.1K 1N4148 0.1 3.01K 10 .68 8
4 R48 1N4148 1 2 3
3.32K JW3 JW2 Q6 9 +12V
R11 9
-CUSTOMER DRIVE TIP122
3 1 ROTOR FAULT
0N 2K 10
R10 ROTOR FAULT
DC BUSS DETECT R75 2.21K 10
10 R17 30.1K 2 ON OFF
C10 3.32K GND
DC BUSS DETECT RTN
8
0.1
3
OFF
+12V * 11
SOFT START PROTECTION CIRCUIT J8
___________________ GND
POWER CONTACT CLOSE 4 12
13
___________ +12V GND
TUBE SELECT D11 3 13
17 TO EXTERNAL
* +12V P/S +12V
TUBE TELLBACK1
20 TELLBACK1
* R9 1N4148 +12V 2 14
220
Q9 * 2W 1 15
GND
TUBE TELLBACK2 MPS8099 R62
19 TELLBACK2 10K +12V .15SEC 1.5SEC
______ TUBE SELECT R76 R23 R85 R22 R25 R42 TUBE1/TUBE2
R24
FAN ON
5
* 1k 100K 1.78M 3.01M 3.65K C7 1K 511 16
R45 C5 0.1
10n Q12 JW1 GND
10K 17
MPS8599
TO POWER INPUT BD 7 1 2 3
Q15 D15 3 * 18
+12V
ROTOR SAFETY 4 D6 D7 Q3
RELAY 6 KVEN MPS8099
U1A 2
+12V 1N4148 5 GND
MPS8099 TP2 19
+12VDC R46 R4 LM339 1N4148 1N4728A
14 D12 10k 5 1 R3 3.3V R30
10K 1 R29
1N4148 2 * D5 20K C6 10K 68.1K
20
FLUORO
+12VDC R27 Q2 U2 10
15 TP4 C3 R21 1N4148
R26 10k MPS8099 4N36
TP3 7 1.0 10K
GND R5
1 U1B 100K 4 2
16 TP1 1k
6
R35 LM339
GND R36 10K
18
___________ 10K R14 PRE1
C2 48.7K
ROTOR BOOST 0.1 C8 C4
A 11 2.2 2.2 DRAWN A
_________ HIGHEST REFERENCE Emir 24OCT96 Communications & Power Industries
ROTOR RUN DESIGNATIONS
12 D34 CHECKED Canada Inc.
1N4148 Emir 04NOV96
ROTOR CURRENT MONITOR C37, D46, F4, J10, JW4, K1,
9 APPROVAL DATE
11 Q16, R85, TP10, U11
TITLE
TEST 13 ENGINEER
U1D
POINT FUNCTION 10 M.McCAULEY 04NOV96
LM339
TP1 GROUND LSS INTERFACE CIRCUIT DES/MFG AUTH. SCHEMATIC,
H.WANG 04NOV96
TP2 GROUND
____________ REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS AUXILIARY
TP3 ROTOR BOOST NOT USED
__________
TP4 ROTOR RUN
D20, D22, Q11, Q13, Q14 CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
TP5 GROUND 732221 VPW2920 D
R73, Q1 02845 732219 K
NEXT ASSY USED ON
COMPUTER GENERATED January 26, 2005
SCALE SHEET
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Loupe
Notes Tool Menu
NOTES:
8 7 6
Generator Interface Board
5 4 3
ZONE
2
LTR DESCRIPTION
REVISIONS
DWN CHKD
1
APPROVED DATE
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. A CREATED PER ENG B.M. Emir P.NEYSMITH 13MAR97
JW15
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS 1 2 3 4 B INC PER ECO No. 15935 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 22APR97
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. +24VR
C INC PER ECO No. 16134 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 15JUL97
3. PARTS ENCLOSED IN AREAS 1, 2 & 3
NOT FITTED ON ASSY 732177-03 AND -07. R39 D INC PER ECO No. 16532 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 02DEC97
EXPEN
4. PART MARKED * NOT FITTED ON SFEXP-1 E INC PER EC0 No. 18354 G.F. G.F. J.PENNOCK 26NOV98
ASSY 732177-02, -03, -06, AND -07. EXPEN 1K +24VR EXPEN-0
R77 E RECORD CHANGE ECO No. 18467 Emir Emir J.CLARKE 26JAN99
5. PARTS ENCLOSED IN AREA 4 NOT FITTED 5 1 1K +24VR
ON ASSY 732177-02 AND -03 U43 1 5 F INC. PER ECO No.18880 G.F. G.F. A.ROGERS 18JUN99
4N36 U22
6. PINS 21 TO 26 OF J13 NOT FITTED 5 1 R57 4N36 G INC. PER ECO No.19121 G.F. G.F. J.PENNOCK 15NOV99
ON ASSY 732177-02.
U38 1K
4 2 H INC. PER ECO No.19284 G.F. G.F. L.FOSKIN 10FEB00
7. FOR OTHER ASSYS SEE BOM. SFSEL 4N36 2 4
J INC. PER ECO No.20315 G.F. G.F. J.PENNOCK 06APR01
D 4 2 D
SFEXP CONSEL K INC. PER ECO No.22021 G.F. G.F. S.CARTWRIGHT 06JUN03
5 1
+5V U41 CONCOM L INC. PER ECO No.22298 G.F. G.F. G.RAYMOND 03SEP03
4N36 5 1
C23 M INC. PER ECO No.22545 G.F. G.F. S.CARTWRIGHT 08DEC03
U37
4 2 R76 4N36 N INC. PER ECO No.23298 G.F. J.P. S.CARTWRIGHT 03NOV04
U11 2 .1 U6 SFEXP-0
74HC574 0 ULN2803 4 2 R72 R18 P INC. PER ECO No.23615 G.F. C.W. C.WINTERS 16MAR05
1K X RAY
BD0 DRIVE 4 XRAY R REVISED PER ECO 23989 G.F. C.W. C.WINTERS 25AUG05
2 19 1 18
BD1 D0 V Q0 1 18 DRIVE 3 1K 1K
3 18 2 17 JW14
BD2 D1 C Q1 2 17 DRIVE 2 +24VR
4 17 3 16
BD3 D2 C Q2 3 16 DRIVE 1 +24VR 1 2 3 4
5 16 4 15
BD4 D3 Q3 4 15 DRIVE 7 CONPREP
6 15 5 14
BD5 D4 Q4 5 14 DRIVE 6 5 1
7 14 6 13
BD6 D5 Q5 6 13 DRIVE 12
8 13 7 12
BD7 D6 Q6 7 12 DRIVE 5 U15
9 12 8 11 R75
D7 Q7 8 11 SFPREP SFPREP-1 4N36
9 10
OUT1 G 9 10 5 1
11
LE N U28 1K
1 4 2 R25 R24
RESET\ OE D +24VR 4N36
PREP PREP
U45A 1 1K 1K
4 R20 R19
74HC74 0 FLUOROSW
4 2 R74 FLUORO_SWT
2 5 C17 SFPREP-0
D P Q 1K 1K
.1 1K
3 R
CLK
C R71 JW6
6 SFFL-1
L Q +5V +24VR 1 2 3 4
+24VR 1K
C24
1
LATCHEN 2 .1 U7
LATCHEN U12 SPARE
0 ULN2803
74HC574 C30 R60 5 1
BD0 2 19 1 18 DRIVE 8 10 10K J9
BD1 D0 V Q0 1 18 DRIVE 9 1 5 35V U39 U20
3 18 2 17 8 5 6
BD2 D1 C Q1 2 17 DRIVE 10 U44 4N36
4 17 3 16 LM311
BD3 D2 C Q2 3 16 DRIVE 11 4N36 1
5 16 4 15 3
BD4 D3 Q3 4 15 SFSEL R40 R35
6 15 5 14 7 4 2
BD5 D4 Q4 5 14 FLUOSEL 1K SPARE-1 2
7 14 6 13 2
BD6 D5 Q5 6 13 CONSEL SFEXP-1
8 13 7 12 2 4
BD7 D6 Q6 7 12 TOMSEL 1K 3
9 12 8 11
D7 Q7 8 11 SFEXP-0
9 10
OUT2 G 9 10 EXPEN C39 4 1 R52 4
11
LE N .1 SPARE-0 SFPREP-1
1
OE D +24VR 5 1 5
C U42 R58 R59 C
RESET\ 1K SFPREP-0
1 4N36 10K 10K 6
0 SFFL-1
1 7
U45B C18 +24VR
0
74HC74 SFFL-0
.1 4 2 8
12 9 FLUOSEL RISWUT
D P Q 5 1 SFII-1
R +5V 9
11
CLK U16 SFII-0
C SFFL 4N36 10
8
L Q C42 5 1 GICON-1
.1 5 1 U32 R73 11
U30 4 2 R37 R33
1 4N36 2K05 RISWUT-0 GICON-0
3 4N36 12
+24VR 1K 1K GRCON-1
13
4 2
4 2 RISWOT GRCON-0
5 1 14
WBCON-1
AREA 1 U13 J5 15
4N36 RISWUT-0 WBCON-0
+5V R70 SEE NOTE 3 1 16
SFFL-0 FLUOROSW 4 2 R36 R34 SPARE-1
C35 RISWOT-0 17
1K 2 SPARE-0
1K 1K 18
U26 .1 +24VR RISWUT-0
74HC138
1
6
JW8
1 2 3 4
3 TUBE 19
RIDOOR RISWOT-0
A0 1 15 OUT1 +24VR 5 1 RISWOT-0 20 TO J2 ROOM
A0 A1 2
A0 V Y0 14 OUT2 4 THERMOSTAT RIDOOR-0
A1
A2
A2 3
A1
A2
C Y1
C Y2
13
U14 21 INTERFACE
12 IN1 R68 4N36 TORDY-1
Y3
Y4
11 AEC2
AEC2
IN1 SFII
5 1
SFII-1 5 22 PWB
A3 6 10 U27 4 2 R38 R29 TORDY-0
A3 CS1 G Y5 1K RIDOOR-0 23
4 9
IORD2A CS2 N Y6 4N36 6 TOPREP-1
5 7
CS3 D Y7 1K 1K 24
8 TOPREP-0
25
4 2 R69
SFII-0 DRIVE 13
JW3 K13 26
1K 1 2 3 4 DRIVE 4
+24VR 27
AEC1 DRIVE 3
AEC1 +5V JW9 28
1 2 3 4 DRIVE 2
+24VR 29
R32
1 TORDY-1 DRIVE 1
B TORDY 30 B
RN1 5 1 1K DRIVE 7
+5V 4K7 31
R66 U9
GICON GICON-1 DRIVE 6
C28 5 1 4N36 32
U29
1K DRIVE 12
4N36 33
4 2 R22
.1 1 TORDY-0 DRIVE 5
U18 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 34
74HC245 0 1K DRIVE 8
4 2 R67 35
BD0 2 18 SFEXP GICON-0
BD1 A1 V Y1 SFPREP DRIVE 9
3 17
BD2 A2 C Y2 SFFL 1K 36
4 16
BD3 A3 C Y3 CONCOM JW2 DRIVE 10
5 15
BD4 A4 Y4 CONPREP 1 2 3 4 37
6 14 JW10
BD5 A5 Y5 TORDY +24VR DRIVE 11
7 13
BD6 A6 Y6 TOPREP 1 2 3 4 38
8 12
BD7 A7 Y7 +24VR +24VR
9 11
A8 Y8 39
G
19 R23
OE1 N EXPEN TOPREP-1 40
1
DIR D
R55 1K
+5V GIRCON GRCON-1 5 1
1 5 1
0 U31
1K U8
4N36 4N36
1
PTSTOP RN2 4 2
4K7 4 2 R56 TOMSEL
+5V GRCON-0
C29 1K
1
JW7
U19 2 .1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 TOPREP
74HC245 0 +24VR 1 2 3 4 5 1
BD0 2 18 SFII
BD1 A1 V Y1 GICON U10
3 17
BD2 A2 C Y2 GIRCON 4N36
4 16
BD3 A3 C Y3 WBCON
5 15
BD4 A4 Y4 RISWUT WBCON
6 14 R53 4 2 R21
BD5 A5 Y5 RISWOT WBCON-1 TOPREP-0
7 13
BD6 A6 Y6 RIDOOR 5 1
8 12 U21
BD7 A7 Y7 SPARE 1K 1K
9 11
A8 Y8 4N36
G
19
OE1 N
1
DIR D
4 2 R54
1 WBCON-0
0
A 1K DRAWN A
HIGHEST REFERENCE B.M. 16FEB97 Communications & Power Industries
DESIGNATIONS
ORIG/DES ENG Canada Inc.
J.PENNOCK 27FEB97
CB5,C66,D21,DS1,E3,F6,J18,
APPROVAL DATE
JW28,K3,Q8,R127,RN5,S3,T1,
TITLE
PROD ENG
TP14,U53 G.SANWALD 11MAR97 SCHEMATIC
BD[0..7]
BD[0..7] DES/MFG AUTH.
P.NEYSMITH 13MAR97 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
|LINK
|732175R2.SCH REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
RESET\ |732175R3.SCH NOT USED
RESET\ MANUALS
C1, C15, C43, C44, E2, JW16, CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
732177 GENERATOR D
JW17, JW18, R17, R79, R82, 732175 R
NEXT ASSY USED ON 02845
COMPUTER GENERATED R83, U1 August 24, 2005
SCALE SHEET
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NEXT
Loupe
Notes Tool Menu
Generator Interface Board
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J13 REVISIONS
26 ZONE LTR DESCRIPTION DWN CHKD APPROVED DATE
J13 25
- FOR REVISION SEE SHEET 1 --- --- --- ---
+24V +5V
SEE NOTE 6
+15V
SHEET 1 24
C64 * U50A *
2 3
23 J12 D S
1
RESET\ EXTABS IN
20 1
DG445DJ
22 SYNC SIN2
19 R112 * SIN2 U50D *
+12V 7 6
21 C26 JW21 D S
100 8
LINE-SYNC IN
EXTABS 18 L_SYNC 1 SIN1 DG445DJ
20 .1 SIN1
R27 JW23
EXPEN-0 JW13 R43 C32
HVON 17 EXPEN-0 2
19 33.2K
D 1K D
R84 R115 1n0 JW4 C19
ALE 16 JW12 3
R62 R65
18 R42 U50B *
100 0
15
ALE
33K
* 33 15
D S
14
33K R48 D13 16
17 +5V +5V 11K NOT FITTED IN
JW11 R120 R63 4 U17A ON -08 DG445DJ
RESET\ 14 C38 C34 R45 U17B 1N4148
2 R48
16 1 R41 SIN3
1 6 U17C
IORD2 JW26 33K 33K SIN3
3 7 9
13 .1 .1 33K 5 8
15 2 TL084ACN 1K
U35 1 TL084ACN 20K 10
IORD1 2 U25 2 R121 R64
12 74HC573 1
EXPEN-0 0 74HC245 0 TL084ACN
14 -15 3
D0 2 19 A0 D0 2 18 BD0 R51
IOWR2 D1 D1 V Q1 A1 A0 D1 A1 V Y1 BD1 JW27 33K 33K D14 D10
3 18 3 17 -12V 1K
11 D2 D2 C Q2 A2 A1 D2 A2 C Y2 BD2 C25 1N4148 1N4148
4 17 4 16
13 D3 D3 C Q3 A3 A2 D3 A3 C Y3 BD3 4 R44 .1
5 16 5 15 JW24 JW25
IOWR1 D4 D4 Q4 A3 D4 A4 Y4 BD4 33K
6 15 6 14
TO J1 12
IORD2 10 D5 7
D5
D6
Q5
Q6
14 D5 7
A5
A6
Y5
Y6
13 BD5
D6 8 13 D6 8 12 BD6
EXPANSION 9
D7 9
D7
D8
Q7
Q8
12 U36B D7 9
A7
A8
Y7
Y8
11 BD7
4
PWB 11 ALE 11
G
LE N
6 19
OE1 N
G ABC_OUT
D7 1 5 1
IOWR2 TO J6 8 OE D DIR D
10 GENERATOR 74HC08
1 1
CPU PWB D6 0 U36C 0
7 +5V
9
9
8 *
RN3H RN4H D5 10 J14 U49 R31
D7 6 -12V 4K75
9 8 8 9
8 U36A 74HC08 10
100 22 1 14
D4 IOWR1 +5V VB VCC TP8
RN3G RN4G 1
7
10 7 7 10 D6
5
3
IORD2A 12
GND * * R114 * HI
100 22 IORD1 2 D21 R107 2 13
D3 1N751 H1 S OUT
RN3F RN4F 475
6
11 6 6 11 D5
4 74HC08
11
-12V 1K
R113
* C22 ABC TEST POINTS
100 3 12 .1
22 L1 W0
RN3E RN4E D2
5
12 5 5 12 D4
3 AREA 4 -12V 14
PDUPRES 1K LO
22 -12V 4 11 TP9
100
RN3D RN4D 2
D1 +5V SEE NOTE 5 W1 H0 R50
13 4 4 13 D3 GND 4K75
4
100 +5V SHEET 1 13
5 10
RN3C
22
RN4C 1
D0 ABS/VIDEO PRST RST L0
14 3 3 14 D2 GND GND
3
100 22 R87
15 INPUT PCLK
6
CLK C OUT
9 COUT
COUT
4.7K +12V TP14
RN3B RN4B
C 15 2 2 15 D1 R99 +12V C
2 9
100 22 3K32 7 8
RN3A RN4A TO GND DQ
16 1 1 16 D0 PTSTOP +12V 2 2
1
100 22
PTSTOP 8 A EC DS1267-050
AREA 3 7
PDSTOP DEVICE PDQ
Q6
SEE NOTE 3 SHEET 1 MPS8099 5 1
U46
6
PDSTOP RTN DUAL
4N36
R86 Q5 E3 DIGITAL POT
J10-1 MPS8099 N/O
5
33K2 4 2
R85 PDSTART RTN

4 J7
10K
JW22
PDSTART 1
1 L_SYNC +5V PDQ 3
LINE SYNC PDQ
2
PRST GND
2 C33 PRST 2
PCLK C65 R116 +12V
EXTERNAL SYNC 3 SYNC
PCLK
1
PTREF 3
.1 COUT
COUT 10K
2 .1 GE 4
U24 U34
0
74HC574 ULN2803
R109
*
BD0 2 19 1 18
J11 BD1 D0 V Q0 1 18 +12V 5
3 18 2 17 0
20
HVON BD2 4
D1 C Q1
D2 C Q2
17 3
2
3
17
16
16 ABS
BD3 5 16 4 15 DRIVE K13
BD4 6
D3
D4
Q3
Q4
15 5
4
5
15
14
14
K13 CHANNEL 6
-12V
PTSTOP\ BD5 7 14 6 13 +24V
19 BD6 8
D5
D6
Q5
Q6
13 7
6
7
13
12
12 R89 5 7
BD7 9 12 8 11 1K
CTS (RS232) RXD- D7 Q7 8 11
9 10 R117
18 G 9 10
11 10K
LE N 8
1
RTS (RS232) TXD- OE D
17 R88
C37 Q7 +12V
1 J10 9
0 3K32
16 .1 18
MPS8599 10 D5
SYNC INPUT GND R118 1N4148
15 17
47.5K
SIN1
SIN1 R110
* 11
AEC2 R61
B 14 AEC2 SIN2 +12V 14 B
SIN2 0 12
RXD- RS422 RXD- SIN3 +12V 100
13 SIN3 13 +12V +12V
+5V C27 D8
RXD+ RS422 RXD+ -24V 220pF 1N4148 R49
12 C31 * 16
R111 D6 D7
TXD- RS422 TXD- -24V 1N4148 1N4148 33K
TO J7 11 .1
0
12
-12V C21 R47 U17D
GENERATOR TXD+ RS422
10
TXD+
U23
2
U33
+24V
11
-12V 13 D11
0 JW19 14
CPU PWB 74HC574 ULN2803
1
.1 1K 12
BD0 2 19 1 18 -12V START 2 JW5 R30 1N4148
9 BD1 D0 V Q0 1 18 6 R28
3 18 2 17 TL084ACN
BD2 D1 C Q1 2 17 1K
4 17 3 16 1
INTLK (NOT USED)
8
BD3 5
D2 C Q2
D3 Q3
16 4
3
4
16
15
15
9
RFIELD TO J2 2 75
BD4 6 15 5 14 J8 C20 R26
BD5 7
D4
D5
Q4
Q5
14 6
5
6
14
13
13 A.E.C. 3
RXD (RS232) RXD+ BD6 8 13 7 12 MFIELD
7 BD7 9
D6
D7
Q6
Q7
12 8
7
8
12
11
11
8 TRANSITION JUMPER FOR 75 OHMS .1 1K
9 10 D9 D12 R46
TXD (RS232)
6
TXD+ 11
LE
G
N
9 10
7
LFIELD PWB 1N4148 1N4148 33K
1
OE D C36
CHAMBER1
5 1 5 JW20
0 .1 -12V -12V
PTRAMP CHAMBER2
4 4
3
ABC_OUT LATCHEN
LATCHEN
PTREF
3
CHAMBER3 AREA 2 SEE NOTE 3, SHEET 1
AEC1 TP11 TP12 TP10
AEC1 CHAMBER4
2 2
PTRAMP PTSTOP
PTREF PTRAMP PTRAMP
1 15
PTREF PTREF
10
PTSTOP
J10-1 PTSTOP PTSTOP
1
IN2
IN2 +24V 20
BD[0..7]
A BD[0..7] DRAWN A
19 HIGHEST REFERENCE B.M. 16FEB97 Communications & Power Industries
DESIGNATIONS
RESET\ ORIG/DES ENG Canada Inc.
RESET\ J.PENNOCK 25FEB97
RXD-
RXD- +5V APPROVAL DATE
SEE SHEET 1
TITLE
RXD+ PROD. ENG.
RXD+ +12V G.SANWALD 11MAR97
C41
* .1 DES/MFG AUTH.
SCHEMATIC
TXD- U50C U36D
TXD- P.NEYSMITH 13MAR97
10 11 12
9
D
IN
S C62 C63 11 PROD ENG GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
TXD+ .1 .1 13 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
TXD+ DG445DJ NOT USED
-12V 74HC08 MANUALS
CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV

732177 GENERATOR D
SEE SHEET 1 02845 732175 R
NEXT ASSY USED ON
COMPUTER GENERATED August 24, 2005
SCALE SHEET
BACK 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NEXT
Loupe
Notes Tool Menu
8 7 6
+24V Generator Interface Board 5 4 3
ZONE
2
LTR DESCRIPTION
REVISIONS
DWN CHKD
1
APPROVED DATE
FOR REVISION SEE SHEET 1 --- --- --- ---
+5V
T1
CB1 * 2
D17 TP1
220VAC
MUR410
K1C F6
F1 11 C54 C55 R103 R105
5 1000 1000 C2 100 100
4 2A SLO-BLO 10V 10V .1 2W 2W R1 +15V
1.5A SLO-BLO R93 C52 C53 U5 10K
330 330 3 LM7815
35V 35V 1 3
6.81K VI G VO
R90 R101 5
J1 N
4.75K 4.75K D
220V C45 8 4 C51
9 CB2 * 110VAC .1 3.9nF C59 D19 C56 C57 C58 C12 C14
10 330 30V 330 330 330 .1 .1
D V R 2 TP2 D
35V 35V 35V 35V
8 K1B R C
R108
F2 7 E 3 D18
110V C46 VCC F CS
2 4
7 100 3K32
3
2.5A SLO-BLO 63V MUR410
6
CB4 * C50 R2 +12V
100pF U3 10K
K2B R100 LM350
2
T1 5
18V FB
R94
Q4 10
1/2W
3
VI A VO
2
F4 2 +24VR 6 IRF530
D1 C48 C47 C VOUT D
3
0V 1nF .1 O G 100 J
R91
4 5A SLO-BLO BRIDGE M N C6
4.75K P D R106 R7
U47 .1 C5
18V UD3844 22.1 1 243 .1
3 CB3 * E1
R92
1 5 R95 R96 R97 R98
TP3
D2 47.5K C60 +5V
K2C 1K * 0.33 0.33 1000pF J3
2 C16 36V 1/2W 1/2W 1200V Q8 +15
F3 10,000 SC146M VCC +5V 3
5
4 40V
1 C49 R3 +12V
5A SLO-BLO D20 * R102 3 10K 6
CB5 * 1N4148 4K75
R8
+5V
2K05 1
1 U48
F5 TL431 OV
2
2.5A SLO-BLO D3 3
K3B
2 4
OV TO J13
GENERATOR 2
BRIDGE LOCKOUT C61 R104
-24V
SWITCH 10 3K32
TP4 7
OV CPU PWB
J17 2 -12V
C11 8
1 S3
C13 R12
NORMAL LOCKOUT 1 .1 10K -15
R9 5
2 +24V 10K R10
1 3 Q1
-24V
TP7 9
C10 3 MPS8599 4K75
R13 MPS8599
1000
40V 2K74 C9
4 3300uF C3 C4
Q2
EMERGENCY 1 1 1 40V .1 .1
C K1A 1 C
POWER K3A K2A R6
OFF 10K
R14 G
DS1 D4 R15 N
6 6 6 4K75 2 3
LED 1N4007 R11 4K75 VI D VO
1K U2
LM7912
LOCAL CONTROLS
-12V
ON OFF TP5
D16
1N4007
S2 S1
1 2 1 2
C7 1 C8
.1 .1 R4
10K
G
2 N 3
VI D VO
Q3
MPS8099 U4
LM7915
TP6
-15
R16 CONSOLE
10K
CONSOLE J4 R5
ON POWER SWITCH, ON 10K
10
J6 24V_RTN POWER SWITCH, COMMON

JW1 RXD- RXD- RS422 (OR CTS RS232) 12
1
1 OFF POWER SWITCH, OFF
RXD+ RXD+ RS422 (OR RXD RS232) 11
2
2 -24V
24V_RTN POWER TO CONSOLE
TXD+ TXD+ RS422 (OR TXD RS232) 14
110VAC 3
J2 3 +24V POWER TO CONSOLE
110VAC TXD- TXD- RS422 (OR RTS RS232) 13 TP13
3 4
JUMPER 1-2 - 110/220V CONTROLLED BY CONSOLE ON/OFF POWER TO CONSOLE
220VAC 15
6 JUMPER 2-3 - 110/220V ON ALL THE TIME 5
SWITCH COMMON
220VAC 9 R81
B 1 6 10K +24V B
+5V +5V XRAY XRAY SWITCH
LOGIC GROUND XRAY 8
TO J1 ROOM 2 C40 7
PREP PREP SWITCH
+24VR CHASSIS GROUND PREP 7
R78
INTERFACE 4
4K75 .1 8
U40 R80 FLUORO_SWT FLUORO. FOOT SWITCH
V ROOM 6 CHASSIS GROUND FLUORO_SWT 6
1K
PWB 7
1
9 J16
TXD- TXD- RS422 (OR RTS RS232) RXD+ RXD
5 1
4
8 L_SYNC 10
2 TXD+ TXD+ RS422 (OR TXD RS232) TXD+ TXD
FLUORO_SWT 4 2
5 D15 11
GND ROOM 5 H11L1
1N4007 COMMUNICATIONS GROUND COM
24V RETURN 3 3
9 +24V 12
RXD- RXD- RS422 (OR CTS RS232) PREP PREP
24V_RTN 24V RETURN 2 4
J15 13
+5V RXD+ RXD+ RS422 (OR RXD RS232) XRAY X-RAY
1 PREP/EXPOSE COMMON 1 5 RAD CONSOLE
14 INTERFACE
GE ON ON
2 +24V XRAY XRAY SWITCH INPUT 6
1 15
+5V RN5 OFF P OFF
4.7K 3 T/B- PREP PREP SWITCH INPUT 7
C66 16 RXD-
R119 RXD-
+24V IN2 +24V +24V
IN2 4 TRIG- POWER SWITCH, COMMON 8
.1 1K 17 RXD+
U51 2 1 RXD+ 24V_RTN
74HC245 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 TRIG+ OFF POWER SWITCH, OFF M1
BD0 18 TXD-
2 18
BD1 A1 V Y1 TXD-
3 17
BD2 A2 C Y2 R122 R123 6 +24RTN ON POWER SWITCH, ON M2
4 16
BD3 A3 C Y3 1K 1K 19 TXD+
5 15
BD4 A4 Y4 TXD+
6 14
BD5 A5 Y5 7
7 13
BD6 A6 Y6 20 IN1
8 12
BD7 A7 Y7 IN1
9 11
A8 Y8 8 T/B+
IN1 G 21
19
IN1 OE1 N CABLE INTERLOCK
1
DIR D 9
22
1
0 JW28 M1
A 5 1 5 1 DRAWN A
U52 U53 23 HIGHEST REFERENCE B.M. 16FEB97 Communications & Power Industries
4N36 4N36 DESIGNATIONS
M2 POWER TO CONSOLE ORIG/DES ENG Canada Inc.
24 J.PENNOCK 27FEB97
4 2 4 2
+24V APPROVAL DATE
25 POWER TO CONSOLE
TITLE
J18 SEE SHEET 1 PROD.ENG.
R126 GE G.SANWALD 11MAR97
1K
1
DES/MFG AUTH.
SCHEMATIC
R124
P.NEYSMITH 13MAR97
2K05
2
PROD ENG GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
R125 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
3 MANUALS
2K05
R127 SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
CONTRACT No.
4 732177 GENERATOR D
1K
SEE SHEET 1 02845 732175 R
BD[0..7] NEXT ASSY USED ON
BD[0..7] COMPUTER GENERATED August 24, 2005
SCALE SHEET
BACK 8 7 RC07M 6 5 4 3 2 1
Loupe
Notes Tool
Menu
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Filament Board
REVISIONS
B CREATED PER ENG Emir Emir J.CUNNINGHAM 27MAR96
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
C INC PER ECO No. 15196 Emir Emir J.CUNNINGHAM 28JUN96
D INC PER ECO NO. 15359 Emir Emir G.SANWALD 15JAN97
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
E INC PER ECO No. 16374 Emir Emir J.CUNNINGHAM 20OCT97
3. ( *
) SEE TABLE 2 F INC PER ECO No. 17406 Emir Emir J.CUNNINGHAM 24SEP98
G INC PER ECO No. 18798 Emir Emir C.FRIAS 10MAY99
H INC PER ECO No. 19345 Emir Emir C.FRIAS 25FEB00
J INC PER ECO No. 19764 Emir Emir H.WANG 18SEP00
K INC.PER ECO No. 20315 G.F. G.F. J.PENNOCK 06APR01

J2
L INC.PER ECO No. 20471 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 20JUN01
20
D D
M INC.PER ECO No. 20696 G.F. G.F. J.PENNOCK 05NOV01
19 N INC.PER ECO No. 21192 G.F. G.F. VU DOAN 14MAY02
JW1 +35V
P INC. PER ECO No.21466 Emir Emir C.FRIAS 26SEP02
18 5.5A 1
RN3A R INC. PER ECO No.21610 G.F. G.F. S.CARTWRIGHT 27NOV02
1 16
17 SET IMAX 2
R44 R48
T INC. PER ECO No.21694 G.F. G.F. VU DOAN 16DEC02
6.5A 10K
100 100 U INC. PER ECO No.22152 G.F. G.F. VU DOAN 09JUL03
16 3 2W 2W
R42 V INC. PER ECO No.22288 G.F. G.F. C.FRIAS 22AUG03
C21
274K Q14 R43 R47
15 RN3E RN3D RN3C RN3B .0022 +12V W INC. PER ECO No.23332 G.F. S.B. C.FRIAS 16NOV04
MPS8599
5 12 4 13 3 14 2 15
+12V 82 2W 82 2W
14 10K 10K 10K 10K Q6 Q12
-12V IRF9540 Q8
C20 MJE180 IRF9540
+12V Q2
13 1 R32
TP1 +12V C5 274K MJE180
.01
12
8
U1A R33
3 1458 100
11 RN3G R29 2W
1
7 10 2 100
D3 D2 2W C25
1N4148 U3 1 C14 R62
10 1N4148 D6 TP3
10K 5 .0022 1000 22.1K
1N4148 UC3524AN
50V
4 C24
9 R36
9 V 12
U1B
* RN2A
1458
U4B
1458
COMP I
N
C1
10 TP5
1 16 6 RN5G -12V RN4H 1 .001
8 -IN
7 7 10 8 9 6 11
* 10K
RN2B 5 4.7K 7 2
+IN
E1
2 15 10K 5 RN5A
7 D5 D4 16 1 16 13
* RN1A
10K
1N4148 1N4148 6 * RN1E * RN2E
D11
1N4148 4.7K
VREF C2
16 1 C7 RN3F 12 5 12 5 3
6 10K OSC
10K .01 R20 14
* RN1B 10K 10K C10 10
E2
5
15 2 1 * RN1F * RN2F
D9
1N4148 3.32K 1
SD
1 11 6 11 6 0.33uF 6 4
10K
* RN2C
D10
5 RT
G
+CL
3 14 10K 10K RN5B 7 5
4
10K * RN1G * RN2G CT N -CL
* RN2D -12V 10 7 10 7 1N4148
4.7K D
C 4 13 2 C
3 10K 10K Q9
* RN1C
10K
* RN1H * RN2H 3 R30
3.01K
8 C22 MJE170
14 3 9 8 9 8 RN5C C15
2
10K 4.7nF
* RN1D 10K 10K TP4 4.7K
Q3
1 63V
13 4 1
1 MJE170
10K 4
9
4
RN3H R52
RN5D 10K 100
4.7K -12V Q13
8 2W IRF530
R51 Q7
1
+12V 3 100 IRF530 R49
2W
R10
R45
82 2W C26
475K Q15
MPS8099 .0022
+12V D7 +12V 82 2W
1N4148 C23 R50
.0022 100
U2B 8
Q1 U2A 8 RN5F D30 R60 R46 2W
1458 100
MPS8099 1458 RN4C RN4D 6 3 6 11
RN4A 3 14 3 4 13 7 1 2W
4.7K 1N4148 10K
1 16 1 10K 10K 5 U4A 2
2 1458
10K +12V C18
D1 C11 4 .1
1N4148 4 2 1.0 D8
RN4B 1N4148 CW -12V
-35V R61 C4
10K
-12V IF SCALE R21 22.1K 1000
50V
1 10K
5 R53 RMS CNVERTER
-12V
R59 R13 10K U7

1.62K 7 CA3046 L1
10K
RN4G R56
10K 9 5 8
C2 C3
8
1 10 4 6 10K
RN4F U8C R55 B2 B3
0 13
11 6 TL084CN 14 10 7 D29 D12 D27
E4 E3 1N4148
12 U8D D23
10K
TL084CN
1.2K
9
B4 C1
1
1N4148 1N4148 * 1N6295
RN4E R54
B 12 5 11 2 T1 E2 B
C4 B1
6
10K 10K 3 7
5 E1E2
5 R58 *
D24
14 U8B 68.1
RN5E C5 1N6295 J5
TL084CN
4.7K 12 E1
B5 E 1
1 5
2 R57 LARGE
D26 1 10K
11DQ06 +12V 2
3
D13 D28
1N4148 1N4148 3
-12V D21
K1 * SMALL
* 1N6295
4
E3 E4 *
D25
1N6295
J8 (LARGE)
*
E5 E6
J4 (SMALL)
SPARES *
+12V
+35V
C16
J1 F2
1 4 .1
4A, 250V 3 9
F1
1 RN5H
2 4.7K
2
4A, 250V U8A
+12V TL084CN
3 -35V 1 8
C17
1
4
.1
C1 C3 C12 C6 TP2
-12V
.1 .1 .1 .1
5
6
C2 C13 C8 C9
A .1 .1 .1 .1 DRAWN A
HIGHEST REFERENCE Emir 19MAR96 Communications & Power Industries
TABLE 1 F=FITTED NF= NOT FITTED TABLE 2

DESIGNATIONS
CHECKED
Emir 27MAR96
Canada Inc.
TEST POINT FUNCTION PART NUMBER E3-E4 E5-E6 RN1 RN2 K1 D21 D23 D24 D25 C26, D30, F2, J8, E6, K1, L1 APPROVAL DATE
(J8) (J4)
TITLE
-12V Q15, R62, RN5, T1, TP5, U8 ENGINEER
TP1 FIL.FAULT G.SANWALD 27MAR96
731407-00 (UNIVERSAL) NF NF F NF F F F F F
TP2 GROUND DES/MFG AUTH.
J.CUNNINGHAM 27MAR96 SCHEMATIC,
731407-01 (LARGE) F NF F NF NF NF F F NF
TP3 GATE DRIVE
TP4 FEEDBACK CURRENT (1V=1A)

731407-02 (SMALL) NF F NF F NF F NF NF F REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
FILAMENT SUPPLY
TP5 INVERTER OUTPUT
C19,D14-D20,D22,J3,J4,J6,J7, CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
Q4,Q5,Q10,Q11,R1-R9,R11,R12,
731407
NEXT ASSY
GENERATOR
USED ON
D
02845 731405 W
COMPUTER GENERATED R14-R19,R22-R28,R31,R34,R35, November 16, 2004
SCALE SHEET
NTS LEVEL 3 1 OF 1
R37,R38-R41,U5,U6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Loupe
Notes Tool Menu
AEC Interface Board
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
NOTES:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 2 INC PER ENG. J.C. Emir S.C J.C. 01SEP94
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS 3 INC PER ECO No. 14083 Emir Emir G.SANWALD 27SEP94
A INC PER ECO No. 14084 Emir Emir G.SANWALD 27SEP94
3. TAB "-01" INSTALL ONLY J1-J6, TP5.
B INC PER ECO No. 14133 Emir Emir G.SANWALD 20OCT94
C INC PER ECO No. 15473 Emir Emir M.PHILLIPS 10DEC96
D INC PER ECO No. 16111 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 20JUN97
E INC PER ECO No. 16121 Emir Emir D.YAKE 26JUN97
F INC PER ECO No.18348 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 28FEB00
J7 R7 R8 R9 R17 R18
D D
-1000V
1
2 R48 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M
3
4 100K
TP4
J1 R49 +12V -12V -24V
100K R1
1 D11 C4 C9 C8
T1 1K
2
5
3
4 1N3070 .01 D6 D5 .01 D4 D3 .01 D2 D1
5 TP5 C15 L1 600V 600V 600V
6 .01 E2 2
7 START (1) C3 C2 C1
8 L (1) 23 uH
9 N (1)
10 R (1) .01 .01 .01
6
11 SIG (1) 600V 600V 600V +300V
12
4
C18 C20 C22 C24 C25
+500V
C5
E3 1 .01 .01 .01 .01 .01
D12 200V D13 D14 200V D15 D16 200V D17 D18 200V D19 D20 200V D21
1 uF
C14 C17 C19 C21 C23
3
.01 .01 .01 .01 .01

200V 200V 200V 200V 200V
+50V
R44
100K
R45
100K
J2
1
2
3
4
C 5 C
6
7 START (2)
8 L (2)
9 N (2)
10 R (2)
11 SIG (2)
12
J6
1 1 1 1 1 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
0 8 6 4 2 0 8 6 4 2 +12V
TP1
R39 C16 C7
6.8nF 10 C6
R47 R46 R43 R42 R41 R36 R35 R34 R26 R22 1
100K R23 R30
R11 R13
100K 10K
1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 220 220
R40
J3 R27 C12 R33
90.9K -12V .01 10K D7 D9
1 100K
2 Q1 Q3
3 TP2
6
4
U1B 7
5
5
6 LF353N
7 START (3)
8 L (3) +12V U3
9 N (3) C27 R29 E2 E3
2 5
10 R (3) 0.1 +V CT
1 6 R25 2.74K
11 SIG (3) -V RT
3 7
12 C10 SYNC DISC
.01 22
R28 8 9
CSS COMP C13 Q2 Q4
49K9 R21 R20 10
+12V SD 2.2nF
1K 1K 16 R14
B C26 VREF R12 B
10 4 220
OSC 220
R31 11
OUTA
14
R32 OUTB D8 D10
475K SG3525
121K
U2A R10 R19 R24
14016 20K 20K 20K
2 1
TP3
R16
SPARE
1K
U2D 1 R15
14016 3 10K C11
R37 .01
9 8
100K R6 R4 R3 R5
10 10 10 10 8 U2B
3 LF353N 14016
R38
J4 1 11 10
U1A
-24V -12V +12V U2C 2
1 100K 6
14016
2 J5 3 4 4
3 +12V
4 2 1 1
5 4 3 2
6 6 5
7 START (4) 8 7
8 L (4) 10 9 5
9 N (4) 12 11
10 R (4) 14 13
11 SIG (4) 16 15
12 18 17
20 19
A DRAWN A
HIGHEST REFERENCE Emir 07SEP94 Communications & Power Industries
DESIGNATIONS Canada Inc.
CHECKED
Emir 27SEP94
C27, D21, J7, Q4, R49
APPROVAL DATE
TP4, T1, U3
SCHEMATIC
ENGINEER
J.CUNNINGHAM 27SEP94 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
DES/MFG AUTH.
S.CARTWRIGHT 27SEP94 AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL
NOT USED ----------------------- INTERFACE
R2 CONTRACT No. SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
728399 MANUALS D
02845 728401 F
NEXT ASSY USED ON
COMPUTER GENERATED February 28, 2000
SCALE SHEET
NTS LEVEL 3 1 OF 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Optional
Transformer for
480Vac systems Roll
22K1: Open in Standby
Closed if Safety Circuit is
OK
230Vac
Input to X-ray
Power Tube Fans
Click to see
schematic location 22TR1 has many other
of 22K1 coil Windings to supply
Power for many of the
movements
Not used
FANS
22TR2 has more windings
Power Input
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Roll Tilting Safety

SW 3FC1 Table
Elevate SW
3FC2
Optional Ceiling
Collision Photo
Open to enable
sensor
Photo sensor
Emergency Off not on GE II total Safety

Switch on SFD version (2 switches)
Start
Override
Console
SW Normally closed: open if CPU detects Emergency Off
problem (such as pot feedback).
SW
Closes after CPU passes self-test at
power on, but if 22K1 does not operate
Error will open after 3 seconds.
Code 99 LV1: Green LED
if there
is a
problem
with this 22K1 is energised if
circuit Safety Circuit is OK
Click to see Sch Location of

22K1 contacts Safety Circuit
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Uscite = Output
Ingressi = Input Inputs from

22TR2 Potentiometers
Outputs Speed
reference Backplane
Backplane
Fibre Optic to
Control Console
Backplane
Power Distribution
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
200Vdc
Roll
Dynamo F/B Tilt Motor
Peak I Limit
Tilt Dynamo
K1 will de-energise if
safety circuit problem
Pot F/B
Table Tilt
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
200Vdc
Roll Table Elevate

Motor
Table Elevate
Dynamo
K1 will de-energise
if problem with
safety Circuit
Table Elevate Pot
Table Elevate
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
200Vdc
Roll Tube Stand

Motor
Tube Stand
Dynamo
K2 will de-energise
if problem with
safety Circuit
Tube Stand Pot
Positioners with no Table-

top Longitudinal Drive Tube Stand
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Brake resistor 3R3

(newer systems)
Table-top Long Mtr
Tube Stand
Roll
Roll Motor
Tube Stand
Dynamo
Movement Enable Table-top Long
Dynamo
Brake relay
3K3 (newer
systems)
K2 will de-energise if
problem with safety
TS or Long Table-
top selection Circuit
Table-top Long Pot
Table-top Longitudinal & Tube pag.

Stand
11/25
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
SFD Motor
Roll
Brake Resistor
3R4 (newer
systems)
SFD Dynamo
Movement Enable
K2 is a safety
relay
Brake Relay
3K4 (newer
systems) SFD Pot
SFDpag. 12/25
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Lateral table-top Limit

Roll switches: 3FC11 & 3FC12
Lateral table-top
Motor 3MT10
Relay on backplane
(23S10) of 23 module
(Pos Cabinet) Palpator/Compressor
Motor 3MT6
Upper Limit (no tomo if

not in upper limit)
132A
OTS Park Switch (RXi has 3FC13 Tube 0

two switches, one on the degrees SW
Lateral bridge (actuator on
Longitudinal rail) and the
other on the OTS Carriage)
Palpator & Lateral Table-top

Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
LV 97
ON= Tube 1 selected
Tube
(Collimator)
selected lamp
Lamp Switch
Collimator
Interface Bd
Iris Motor
3MT9
3MT7-Lateral
Blades Motor
3MT8 -Long
Blades Motor
Collimator Lamp
3PT7- Lateral Pot
3PT8- Long Pot
3PT9- Iris Pot
Collimator
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Lateral Undertable
Shutters Motor-
3MT13
Roll
3FC16 Photo
3S3
Sensor Board
Lateral Undertable Shutters

Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Fixed Mask Motor-

3MT14
Roll 3FC17 Photo

3S3 Sensor Board
Fixed Mask (U-Shaped)

Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Grid Motor- 3MT15
Roll 3FC18 Photo

3S3 Sensor Board
Grid
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Cassette Tray In/

Out Motor- 3MT11
Roll
3FC14 Photo
3S3 Sensor Board
3PT10
3PT11

Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Cassette Tray Longitudinal

Motor- 3MT12
Roll 3FC15 Photo

Sensor Board
3S3
3FC21
Longitudinal Cassette Tray

Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
SID Motor- 3MT5
II Elevate Motor-
3MT16
3FC5
SID Limit SW
3FC19 II Elevate Upper

Limit SW
3FC20
II Elevate Lower
Limit SW
3S3
Roll
SID & II Elevate

Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
SFD Console Bd 3S1
SFD Console
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
AMP 1 Pins 1,4 are
connected to the
Emergency Off Switch
Prep/Exp and
Fluoro Foot-switch
go from AMP1 on
1S1 to AMP4 on
25S3
Console Bd
1S1
Fibre Optic to
CPU Bd in Pos
cabinet
Console
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
K1 energizes when Room Light

button is pressed on the
positioner console and Code 078
value is 002.
In room foot-switch
connects to AMP5
pins 2,3,4
AMP11 goes
to the TDI II
board in the
Console Prep/expose
generator
and Fluoro Sw
connect to AMP4
NEXT
LV 97
ON= Tube 1 selected
(on in SFD, Digital and Table-top
techniques using the tube 1)
Interface Board
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Interface Board
Loupe
MENU
Notes Tool
Foot Rest Motor-

3MT18
Motorised Foot-rest
Loupe
Notes Tool
System Cables Connection

Loupe
Notes Tool
Positioner Interconnections
Loupe
Notes Tool
Generator to Positioner Connections

Loupe
Notes Tool
Generator to Positioner Connections -2
NEXT PAGE
Loupe
Notes Tool
Nical 512 (Low Resolution) Interconnections
PREVIOUS PAGE
Loupe
Notes Tool
Nical 512 (Low Resolution) Signal Interface

Loupe
Notes Tool
Nical 1024 (High Resolution) Interconnections

Loupe
Notes Tool
Nical 1024 (High Resolution) Signal Interface

Loupe
Notes Tool
Infimed Digital Interconnections
Loupe
Notes Tool
TDI Bd to GIM
Loupe
Notes Tool
OTS Cables Interconnection
NEXT PAGE
Loupe
Notes Tool
OTS Cables Interconnection 2
Longitudinal Switch
on OTS Long Rail
To 25S3 Board
Lateral Switch on OTS
Lateral rail
Roll
OTS Park Switch consists of two

switch, one on the lateral bridge
PREVIOUS PAGE
(actuator on the longitudinal rail) and
the other on the OTS carriage
Loupe
Notes Tool
Wall Bucky Interconnections
Roll
NEXT PAGE
Loupe
Notes Tool
Wall Bucky Interconnections-2
Roll
PREVIOUS PAGE
Loupe
Notes Tool
FM 457-2 Board
Click to view board
layout
M80 input from zone rail

switch on Longitudinal rail
Active =24Vdc
M81 High (24Vdc) when X-ray tube

is pointing at the wall bucky (i.e.
rotated and angled in the correct
position).
Input M81 on FM457 at 24Vdc.
M85 input from 100cm SID

Active= 24Vdc
M86 input from 180cm SID

Active =24Vdc
NEXT PAGE
Loupe
Notes Tool
FM 457-2 Board
Click to view board
layout
M59: Input from Wall

Bucky Cassette Size
Pot Cursor
M63: Input from Wall

Bucky Cassette Size
Pot Cursor
PREVIOUS PAGE
Loupe
Notes Tool
GEtoMEDICAL SYSTEMS
Click Wall-bucky to OTS Connections (Automatic
PRECISION RXI® SYSTEM DRAWINGS Collimator)
DIRECTION 5142538 -100, REVISION 1
select Left/
Right Bucky
Connections
on FM457-2
Left
Right
Hide
New systems (~2006) and
all US & Canadian
systems include Rotation
& Tilt switches in the wall
bucky, these are used as
additional Automatic
Auto/Man is Collimation interlocks.
Zone rail switch
Switches on Click HERE for new

Longitudinal Rail
schematic
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Fig. 22: WallBucky and OTS with automatic Collimator – Detailed schematic interconnects
Page 41
Loupe
Notes Tool
01
Version: Wall-bucky to OTS Connections (Automatic Collimator)
Wall Bucky Tilting & Rotation Switches Added
GE Medical Systems
Roll
New systems (~2006) and

all US & Canadian
systems include Rotation
& Tilt switches in the wall
bucky, these are used as
Roll to see
additional Automatic
Location
Collimation interlocks.
Object
File
Click HERE for new
schematic
Object
Precision RXi System

PBL_OTS_WS_Upgrade_ENG_01.doc
Auto/Man is
Zone rail switch
Close
Switches on
Longitudinal Rail
Wall Bucky
Tilting &
Rotation
switches
added
November 2005
Date
Roll Over to
10/nov/2005
pag. 12 / 13
see FM457-2
Loupe
Notes Tool OTS Interconnections
Rollover
for Photo
FM457-
2
FM 528
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see board
Click to see
board
NEXT
Loupe
Notes Tool
OTS Interconnections
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see board
Click to see
board
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Notes Tool
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see board
Click to see
board
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see board
Click to see
board
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see board
Click to see
board
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Notes Tool
BACK
Loupe
Notes Tool Brakes Driver Board: PCB 528-GE
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see board
Roll Over to
see board
Click to see
board
Click to see
NEXT
board
Loupe
Notes Tool
Brakes Driver Board: PCB 528-GE
Roll Over to
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
see board
Click to see
board
BACK NEXT
Loupe
Notes Tool
Brakes Driver Board: PCB 528-GE
BACK
Loupe
Notes Tool OTS Control Board 562
Roll Over to
Roll Over to see FM457-2
see FM457-2
Roll Over to
Roll Over to see board
see board
Click to see
board
Click to see
board
NEXT
Loupe
Notes Tool
OTS Control Board 562
BACK

Rxi Support-Rev40 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Rxi Support-Rev40 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Notes

Precision RXi Introduction

THIS IS FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

I Accept I Do Not Accept

Document Created by Edward Singleton: All changes made by Edward Singleton

SVGA Video cable Isolation

Click HERE to view

Matrox CPU Motherboard

Inside of Platinum One PC (shown

SVGA Splitter In-room Monitor Ceiling

Iris Motor & CCD

Photo-Diode CCD Camera

Earth Magnetic Field

Photo Tour: Nical TV Chain

Select Version Low-Resolution

The Control box

NICAL CCD Camera

Photo Tour: Indico Generator

Power Input and Click on Yellow HV Tank &

Top Cover Room Interface

Photo Tour: Indico Generator- HV

Com to Shift (AUX) 30

Photo Tour: Indico Generator

Inverter Fault LEDs

Fluoro Inductor (used during

Fan (mounted to the cabinet

Serial Cable in COM4 goes

Generator Touch-screen J3: To Exposure

J2: Communications with

Click HERE to Click HERE for Click HERE for Generator On

OTS, Digital &

PDU Panel Inside of PDU Panel

LED Status LED Status Battery: 3V (replace if <2.8V)

TP1 Large TP3 Small

TP2 kV Ref TP4 AEC

TP7 mA Rad+ mA Rad 1V=100mA

TP9 AEC Ramp- TP12 AEC Ramp+

TP11 I Fluoro- TP14 I Fluoro+ I Fluoro 1V=2.5mA

TP21 GND (not shown but

The AEC Short Time

The AEC Short Time

Click Here for

TP10 Phototimer Stop

J4: Communications Fuse F6

+5V,±12V, ±15V,±24V Power Supply Test Points

Jumper Pins 2-3 for all other DAP

Use JW2 for DAP Chamber 2 Input from DAP

+24V from Room

Small Filament Board Large Filament Board

D69: KV: kV across the

D2: ON=DC BUS OK

DS1: ON=DC BUS OK

K2: Switches power to

Interface LEDs LEDs 1 (left) to 4 (right)

J2 Pulsed Fluoro & Cine Signals

Tube, Collimator and DAP Lamp is behind

CPU and ASSI

Stepper Motor Rack

Click on the Yellow

Power Input Rack

AMP 3 to coil AMP 4 to coil of

Relay is used to make sure Tube Stand

Click for Fuse